Home

System 25 R2V1 Reference Manual

1. 12 251 Iv lt 1X gt dnBungy s KOND lt SPAD lt gt lt qsuotsdgy b suor4dg suor4do Wid qsuotydo lqpou3 gt lt suorido csuotsido 94005 00261 gt 0096 008t 00 2 gt 0071 lt 00 gt lt MOT gt lt 4 IX lt 4994 lt 4 FXO 4 49u40 9 gt 3 uoipusrw lt peedsy lt 1X gt lI e toA 13A31 A31N3 I I 1 I I I 2 u9 3 lt PPO gt lt iIX gt 119 9490 I gt Ne me _ oe Nee s ae 1 eae 2 339 FEATURES AND SERVICES Viewing Options When lt View options gt is selected current and default values for the various data port options are displayed as shown below OPTIONS CURRENT DEFAULT Speed highest 9600 19200 Auto Parity Even Even Mismatch Yes No Local Echo Yes Yes Answer Text Yes Yes Connect Indicat Yes Yes Recall Sequence Br Br lt eXit gt Change options View options At this point the user can exit from the View Options menu Change options or View options again redisplays the Options table If the user elects to exit
2. 2
3. 555 530 703 Single Line Terminal User 555 530 702 Switched Loop Attendant Console User Guide 555 530 706 e Remote Access Wallet 555 530 717 Software Packages To expand System 25 s communications and networking capabilities AT amp T offers the following optional software packages eR2V1 Advanced Administration Software Package MS DOS PEC 1203 020 Release 2 eR2V1 Advanced Administration Software Package UNIX PEC 1203 021 Release 2 Call Management System Includes next four documents PEC 1207 030 Call Management System Agent Card Call Management System Installation amp Startup Guide Call Management System Planning Guide Call Management System System Manual e Communications Access Manager Software 1020 591 STAR LAN NETWORK ACCESS Software PEC 1020 S90 8 1 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION Integrated Solution Documents elntegrated Solution User Guide os 555 530 715 Integrated Solution Instructor s 8 555 530 717 Integrated Solution Student 555 530 718 eAT amp T Call Accounting System Reports Guide _ 775 41
4. Z7203M01 A 003 Z7302H01D 003 Z7303H01D 003 Z7309H01B 003 Z7305H01D 003 Z7305H02D 003 Z7305H03B 003 Z7305H04C 003 S102A 502A Z7313H01A 003 Z7314H01A 003 Z7316H01A 003 Z7317H01A 003 7101 01 003 349A Adapter 103963310 103982005 103842050 103843538 103981965 103981981 103814356 105336978 105336960 105336952 105400030 103871109 104010061 PARTS INFORMATION DESCRIPTION APPARATUS CODE COMCODE Ground Start Key 100287085 External Alert Message Waiting Z34A Indicator Adjunct CMS Voice Announcement 405745811 Unit Modular Bulk Power Supply includes Power Unit 104174768 Power Panel 104174750 32918 IROB Unit TII Model 341 403865785 8310 001 AC Power Surge TII Model 428 402988950 Suppressor Not Available 100009968 P O 62511 100017334 P O 62514 100017334 P O 62511 100287085 100963990 102600517 102802113 102937620 102999059 103104220 103116943 103234472 103556791 103556882 103556957 103557062 31017 No PEG P O 21691 P O 62515 P O 3141 BIS P O 62513 P O 21691 P O 62515 P O 62509 P O 62510 P O 62515 P O 21691 P O 62512 No PEC NoPEC 3100 TWR 63130 63112 63111 63116 Parts Listed by COMCODE Throughout the following table part of is abbreviated as P O DESCRIPTION Connecting Block Cables 2 15 ft DE Cable 15 ft DE Ground Start Key
5. 2 048 MHZ TIME SLOTS 0 1 2 3 4 5 255 0 Ia 286 TIME 51075 Figure 3 3 TDM Bus Time Slot Generation Not A Timing Diagram Two time slots are required for each 2 party conversation Each party transmits talks on one time slot and receives listens on another Only five parties are allowed in a conference During a conference connection each member of the conference transmits on an individual time slot while receiving on as many as four other time slots The actual switch capacity is 115 simultaneous 2 party conversations Table 3 A shows the allocation of the 256 time slots Five are used for system control 17 for tones 232 for call processing and two are not used FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Physical Characteristics The TDM bus is an 8 bit bus that snakes continuously between cabinets in a multicabinet system as shown in Figure 3 4 The total length is about 9 feet for a three cabinet system The bus is driven from any of the circuit packs in the cabinets Similarly a signal on the bus can be received by any circuit pack Within a cabinet the bus is printed on one side of the circuit pack carrier backplane while the other side is solid ground Ribbon cables are used to connect the TDM bus between cabinets in a multi cabinet system Electrical Characteristics The TDM bus is an unbalanced low characteristic impedance transmission line Paths printed over a ground plane on the carriers and the flat
6. Loop Start LS Ground Start GS Strongly Preferred over Loop Start in most installations Tie Trunks Type and Type Compatible E amp M Type V Simplex Direct Inward Dialing DID e Voice Terminals Single Line Touch Tone Single Line Rotary and 7300H Series Multiline Sets from the MERLIN amp Communications System e Data Facilities Digital Data End Points RS 232 Interfaces via Asynchronous Data Units Analog Data End Points Tip Ring Type Modem Interfaces STARLAN NETWORK Access Release 2 of STARLAN only 1 3 OVERVIEW e Networking Capability Remote Access Tie Trunks Tandem Trunking Endpoint in Electronic Tandem Network Tributary only not Satellite Endpoint of Enhanced Private Switched Communications Services EPSCS Endpoint of Tandem Tie Trunk Network TTTN Endpoint of Common Control Switching Arrangement Call Handling Capabilities System 25 can be arranged as a stand alone system or can be part of a private network The system provides 256 ports to support the following e115 simultaneous two party conversations e Traffic Handling Capacity of 4140 CCS Trunking Limited e Busy Hour Call Capacity of 2500 calls DTMF Register Limited e Up to 104 trunk ports including Central Office CO DID Tie Foreign Exchange FX Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS and 800 Service eAn Auxiliary Trunk interface for paging
7. 2724 30C 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 425 Figure 2 53 SAT Off Premises Direct Connections 2 315 FEATURES AND SERVICES SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF ZTN129 CPU MEM Ld se 22104 40082 lt ADAPT 1 ADAPT lt CONNECTED AS OPS OR CO FACILITY SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL FACILITY TYPICAL MODEM 212 TYPE LEGEND C MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 07G C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C3 CROSSOVER CABLE M7U 87 PEC 2724 306 OPS OFF PREMISES STATI ON 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 425 2344 ADU EQUIPPED WITH 3 FOOT RECEPTACLE ENDED EIA CORD 2486 ADAPTER MODULARIZES 2012D TRANSFORMER 40062 ADAPTER POWER ADAPTER PEC 21691 2012D TRANSFORMER 15 18V AC SOURCE MODULAR POWER CORD D6AP 87 Figure 2 54 SAT Off Premises Switched Connections 2 316 PEC 2169 004 System Maintenance System Maintenance Description The primary objective of System 25 maintenance is to detect report and clear troubles as quickly as possible and with minimum disruption to normal service This goal is supported by periodic automatic diagnostic tests and fault detection hardware System design allows most troubles to be resolved to the circuit pack level System 25 hardware and software are organized as independent units or maintenan
8. 2720 05 T1 7300H TYPE VOICE TERMI NAL Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER NOTE RANGE WITHIN 2000 FEET OF SYSTEM CABINET LOCAL POWER REQUIRED BEYOND 1000 FEET On Premises 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminal Connections HARDWARE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF EXPOSED CABLE OCTOPUS CABLE ZTN7S ATL ines OF SIP Ga PROTECTION PROTECTION TII 341 TII 341 NOTE 1 NOTE 1 LEGEND B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P D 10 AWG GROUND WI G APPROVED BUILDING GROUND T1 7300H VOICE TERMI NAL Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE C7 MODULAR CORD D6AP 87 P1 KS 22911 POWER SUPPLY PEC 62510 Z400F ADAPTER VOICE TERMINAL T1 NOTE 2 NOTES 1 IROB IN RANGE OUT OF BUILDING PROTECTION 2 TII 341 MODELS REQUIRED SYSTEM STATION ENDS FOR PRIMARY SECONDARY PROTECTORS CAUTION DO NOT CONNECT ROB POWER LEADS 2 RANGE WITHIN 2000 FEET OF SYSTEM CABI NET FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 4 30 Out of Building 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminal Connections 4 69 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE 735 LINE LEGEND PART OF SIP NOTE 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FUR
9. Figure 2 15 Dictation System Connections FCC Registered 2 133 FEATURES AND SERVICES tal Tape Unit DTU Idi The Digital Tape Unit Figure 2 1 6 is a RS 232 device used to record administration translations The DTU does not encode the translations data as it records nor does it D Data is recorded and require decoding circuitry when playing back restoring recorded data transmitted at 1200 bps It should be located on a desk or table top The recorder is approximately 5 inches wide 2 inches high and 10 inches long wire grounded outlet power from a 3 The DTU requires 115V commercial As shown in Figure 2 17 the DTU must be directly connected to port 3 on the Call Processor ZTN82 or ZTN128 CP Remote and switched connections are not supported Maximum cabling distances are provided in Section 5 Technical Specifications Oooooooooooooooooooooooo ooooooooooooooooooooooo Oooooooooooooooooooooooo Oooooooooooooooooooooooo Ooooooooooooooooooooooo lt aq ow lt gt lt rao CONNECTOR 3 WAY POWER RECORD PLAY REWIND F FWD STOP EJECT PAUSE n A v v TOP VIEW Figure 2 16 Digital Tape Unit 2 134 Digital Tape Unit DTU SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABLNET OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP ZTN129 7210 J 3S5AJAF DIGITAL CPU 5 ADAPT ADAPT TAPE UNIT LEGEND
10. Type 1 E amp M Standard Unprotected Type 1 E amp M Compatible Unprotected Type 1 E amp M Compatible Protected Type 5 Simplex eTN763 Auxiliary Trunk Provides four ports for on premises auxiliary equipment paging systems and dictation systems eZIN76 Ground Start Trunk Provides eight ports for Ground Start Central Office CO Foreign Exchange FX or Wide Area Telephone Service WATS trunks eZTN77 Loop Start Trunk Provides eight ports for loop start CO FX or WATS trunks Refer to Section 9 for Ground Start and Loop Start definitions Ground Start trunks are recommended for use where possible Trunk specifications are provided in Section 5 Specifications 4 10 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION System Resource Circuit Packs e TN748B Tone Detector Provides four touch tone receivers the system can have a maximum of two TN748Bs depending on the number of stations and the conditions in Table 4 C One TN748B CP must be used in addition to the ZTN85 Service Circuit if the system has from 75 up to 150 total stations or if required in Table 4 C Two TN748Bs must be used in addition to the ZTN85 Service Circuit if the system has more than 150 total stations or if required in Table 4 C Table 4 Tone Detector Requirements Number of Tone Detector TN748B CPs No Account Codes Used and Automated Automated Traffic no Voice Message Attendant Attendant Calls Hr System VMS and VMS Unsup
11. Advanced Admin Software MS DOS Documentation amp Tapes for System 25 Upgrade AC Power Surge Suppressor PARTS INFORMATION APPARATUS CODE D181523 D181524 50A ZTN129 Z7316H01A 003 Z7314H01A 003 Z7313H01A 003 D181807 Z7317H01A 003 555 530 013 TII Model 428 7 13 403242639 403836620 403864150 403865785 403954761 403957129 403961519 404079428 404079436 405010612 405010620 405177791 405193186 405376377 405462904 405745811 527840003 PARTS INFORMATION PEC DESCRIPTION P O 62509 P O 62510 P O 62512 P O 62520 Power Supply 2720 06X Splitter Cable CO Trunk 2720 05X Splitter Cable Tie Trunk 32918 IROB Unit P O 6250 021 P O 62501 Power Supply P O 6250 021 Air Filter P O 62501 P O 62501 TDM Bus Cable 62508 System Admin Terminal SAT 62507 Digital Tape Unit 2720 05P 25 pair 8 plug 15 ft Cable Octopus Cable 2750 T05 P O 62520 Voice Data Y Adapter No PEG 110 to Mod Adapter P O 62513 MOH Interface No PEC Connecting Block Female P O 62520 STARLAN ATL Adapter Interface KS 22911 L1 WP90929L1 WP90929L3 TII Model 341 WP90510 21985 1 J58901A1 L3 TI 703 TS 555A WP90780 L1 WP90851 L1 858A KS 23395 157BF KS 23475 L1 CMS Voice Announcement Unit 2610 001 AT amp T STARLAN NETWORK Network Extension Unit NEU 527840102 845412956 845416379 8
12. INSIDE WI RING CABLE NOTES 1 APPARATUS CODE D 181523 PEC 62511 INCLUDES 66E3 25 BLOCK CONNECTOR AND CABLE B25A 15 DE 2 APPARATUS CODE D 181524 PEG 62512 INCLUDES C6 P1 278A ADAPTER AND ZENER KIT FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 30 Paging Equipment Connection to TN763 Causing 278A Adapter 2 237 FEATURES AND SERVICES Park Description This feature allows a user to put a call into a special hold parked condition so that it can be picked up from any voice terminal in the system It is used in three typical applications eBasic Park A user parks a call and then picks it up at another voice terminal eMeet Me Conference A conference member parks the conference and pages another employee to join the conference e Transfer A user parks a call and then pages another employee to pick up the call A user parks a call by first putting it on hold and then dialing the Park code 5 The call can subsequently be retrieved from any voice terminal by dialing the Park retrieval code 8 and the PDC of the parking station In addition any user active in a conference involving fewer than five members may park the conference so that another user may join by dialing 8 and the parked on number A multiline voice terminal user invokes Park by pressing HOLD to place a call or conference on hold then pressing an idle System Access button and dialing 5 A single line voice terminal user invokes the feature by pressing the swit
13. Incoming calls receiving Directed NS treatment will not activate external alerting devices associated with TAAS NS and cannot be answered by dialing the NS access code Directed NS is activated under the following conditions eAn attendant has pressed NIGHT on either console e Directed NS has been administered for the trunk eStations have been administered to receive NS calls 2 226 Night Service Note that at least one station must be designated as a NS receiver for this feature to work properly If only an announcement is required administer the announcement device as station and make this station the NS receiver Refer to the Night Service Delay Announcement feature description for additional information on the delay announcement Trunk Answer from Any Station Allows any user to answer NS calls Incoming trunk calls activate an external alerting device such as a bell External Alerts feature A user can then dial the NS access code and answer the call Night Service is activated under the following conditions eAn attendant has pressed NIGHT on either console e TAAS NS has been administered for the trunk eA NS external alert has been installed and administered Note that TAAS NS calls will not activate the delay announcement associated with Directed NS Considerations Directed NS provides a means of ensuring that Night Service calls are answered by designating individual voice terminals to receive t
14. SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C8 SPECIAL CORD FURNISHED WITH ADJUNCT T1 7300H SERIES VOICE TERMINAL 34 BUTTON DELUXE AND ALL SETS WITH BUILT IN SPEAKERPHONE W 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE P1 KS 22911 POWER SUPPLY Z400F ADAPTER FURNISHED BY INSTALLER C7 MODULAR CORD D6AP 87 62510 Figure 2 24 Typical Headset Adapter to 7300 Series Voice Terminal Connections Requiring Auxiliary Power 2 186 Headset Adapter Adjunct SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE 735 LINE PART OF SIP MET SET T1 500A HEADSET ADAPTER LEGEND 81 TYPI CAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C8 SPECIAL CORD FURNISHED WITH ADJUNCT 1 7203M 12 BUTTON SET Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE 248B ADAPTER MODULARIZES 20120 SOURCE 400B2 ADAPTER POWER ADAPTER 20120 TRANSFORMER 15 18V AC SOURCE C7 MODULAR CORD D6AP 87 FURNISHED BY INSTALLER 21691 Figure 2 25 Typical Headset Adapter Connections For 12 Button MET Sets 2 187 FEATURES AND SERVICES Hold Description This feature allows users to temporarily disconnect from one call and either place or answer another call A single line voice terminal user can place only one call on hold and must remain off hook to retain the held call multiline voice terminal user can place as m
15. Types of trunks that can be assigned in System 25 are as follows e Central Office which provide a link with the local telephone company for incoming and outgoing calls LS GS e Foreign Exchange FX which connect to a CO other than the local CO for high volume calling to from a distant location Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS which connect to an Outward WATS office or a dial 800 Service Office Direct Inward Dialing DID which provide incoming service from a CO to directly access a station or facility STARLAN NETWORK interface trunk group Tie which provide a link with another private switching system To support efficient utilization of this rich set of network options System 25 provides the functions outlined in the Incoming and Outgoing Business Communications sections OVERVIEW Conclusions System 25 has been targeted at providing excellent small business communications capability at the right price The thousands of systems in service in the first 2 years of production have confirmed that these capabilities are an excellent match with small business customers communications needs FEATURES AND SERVICES Introduction Account Code Entry Forced Account Code Entry Optional Attendant Call Extending Attendant Camp On Attendant Cancel Attendant Console Direct Trunk Attendant Console Switched Loop Attendant Direct Extension Selection Attendant Forced Release SLAC Only Attendant Jo
16. e SAKI Sanity and Control Interface The SAKI is the control interface between the Common Control that sends information via the network control circuit down the TDM buses and the on board circuitry controlled by the on board microprocessor The SAKI receives control information down link messages on the first five time slots and as requested by the on board microprocessor transmits control information up link messages on these same time slots Continued on FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT HOST COMPUTER RS 232C SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINAL 2500 SERIES 7101 OR 71D2A DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT HOST COMPUTER RS 232C MULTILINE VOICE TERMINAL 7300H TYPE co FX WATS PAGING EQUIPMENT DID TRUNKS TIE TRUNKS LEGEND ADU ASYNCHRONOUS DATA U CAS CALL ACCOUNTING SYS CO CENTRAL OFFICE cp CIRCUIT PACK DID DIRECT INWARD DIALI DTU DIGITAL TAPE UNIT FX FOREIGN EXCHANGE MET MULTIBUTTON ELECTRO OPS OFF PREMISES STATIO SAT SYSTEM ADMI NI STRAT SMDR STATION MESSAGE DET WATS WIDE AREA TELECOMMU Figure 3 5 3 10 Z3A1 2 4 ADU Z3A5 ADU PART OF DIGITAL SWITCH TN726 DATA LINE CP TN742 ANALOG LINE CP OR ZTN78 TIP RING LINE CP TN726 DATA LINE CP 71879 ATL LINE TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEX BUS ZTN76 GROUND START TRUNK CP OR ZIN77 LOOP START TRUNK CP TN753 DID TRUNK CP TN760B TIE TR
17. eXit low 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 auto X X X X X With the cursor under any item except lt eXit gt pressing RETURN provides the following lt eXit gt lt low gt lt 300 gt lt 1200 gt lt 2400 gt lt 4800 gt lt 9600 gt lt 19200 gt lt auto gt X X X X X Entering x now allows the user to lt eXit gt the Speed menu and return to the Change Options menu The user can make additional changes as required When all of the changes have been made the user should lt eXit gt the Change Options menu The following menu is then displayed Undo Change options View options Enable options From the above menu elf the user selects Undo the user is returned to the Command Mode entry level menu deleting any option change requests elf the user selects Change options the Change Options menu is displayed and the user can make additional changes as required 2 341 FEATURES AND SERVICES elf the user selects lt View options gt the following menu is displayed OPTIONS CURRENT REQUESTED Speed highest 9600 4800 Auto Parity Even Even Mismatch Yes Yes Local Echo Yes Yes Answer Text Yes Yes Connect Indicat Yes Yes Recall Sequence Br Br Br Br The value in the CURRENT column indicates the current active status of the option The value in the REQUESTED column indicates the most recently entered value not yet enabled elf the user select
18. Attendant Position Busy POS BUSY Attendant Release RELEASE Attendant Return Coverage on Busy RTN BUSY Attendant Return Coverage on Don t Answer RTN DA Attendant Source Destination SLAC only SOURCE DEST Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic Attendant System Alarm Indication ALARM Message Center Like Operation SLAC only Night Service NIGHT S 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 This button is assigned the DTAC only 2 7 FEATURES AND SERVICES Account Code Entry Forced Description This feature forces selected station users to enter account codes before dialing certain calls out of System 25 Users at stations that have Forced Account Code Entry FACE are required to enter account codes either for all outgoing calls or for just dial 0 or 1 toll calls The code entries appear in the ACCOUNT field of the SMDR records To make a FACE restricted call the user must dial the Account Code Entry access code 0 followed by an account code before dialing the rest of the call The account code entry is terminated when the number of digits entered equals the number administered for system account codes or when is entered The user hears second dial tone after the code is entered and can then dial the necessary access codes and other numbers to reach the destination If the user makes an error while entering the account code the procedure can be corrected by dialing 0 followed by the correct
19. Dial the Personal Speed Dialing code 20 39 to indicate where this number should be stored Listen for confirmation tone and dial tone To program another number immediately repeat steps 3 through 5 Hang up rogram a Number by Using the Switch non SLAC terminals only Slide the switch on the left side of the voice terminal to position P Lift the handset and listen for dial tone Dial the number you want to program Either Press the FLEX DSS or REP DIAL button or Dial the Personal Speed Dialing code 20 39 to indicate where this number should be stored Listen for confirmation tone and dial tone To program another number immediately repeat steps 3 through 5 Hang up Slide the switch back to the midpoint between P and T Program Considerations The Program feature allows users to assign their own Personal Speed Dialing Flex DSS Repertory Dialing numbers This is particularly useful where working arrangements or personnel responsibilities change Users cannot place or answer calls while in the program mode Incoming calls will receive Busy Tone In the unlikely event that a number contains more digits than are free in the common Personal Speed Dialing Repertory Dialing memory approximately 34100 reorder tone will be returned after the indication of where this number is to be stored see Procedures above Interactions The following features interact with Program Bridging of System A
20. Exclusion can be applied to only one call at a time Once Exclusion is invoked on a call it will remain active until the user either presses the button a second time or disconnects the call Considerations Exclusion allows the sharing of a Personal Line or a bridged System Access SA appearance by several users while retaining privacy for each one Pressing the EXCLUSION button at any time during a call regardless of how the call was originated drops all other inside stations and tones An inside party can be included on a private call by pressing EXCLUSION first and then adding the inside party Interactions The following features interact with Exclusion Automatic Intercom Any attempt to activate Exclusion while active on an Automatic Intercom call will drop the other party Bridging of System Access Buttons f a principal or bridging station presses the EXCLUSION button during a call all other internal stations on the call will be dropped In addition Exclusion will prevent any other internal station from bridging onto the call Callback Queuing Pressing the EXCLUSION button does not drop a queued call The EXCLUSION button s status LED tracks the status LED of the associated call button For example on a callback attempt the EXCLUSION LED will also change from winking to flashing If the EXCLUSION button is tracking a conference on hold it will stay winking with the rest of the conference When the callback attempt is a
21. FEATURES AND SERVICES Out of Building Stations Description Single line voice terminals and multiline 7300H series terminals may be directly connected to the system even though they are not located in the same building For 7300H series terminals special In Range Out of Building IROB units are used to protect the switch and its users from lightning power crosses etc Out of Building Stations can access all system features Considerations Single line voice terminals may be located at distances up to 24000 feet from the system cabinets Carbon protection devices are required for lightning and power cross protection Multiline voice terminals must be located within 2000 feet of the system cabinets local power required beyond 1000 feet and must have protection devices MET sets may not be used for Out of Building service Hardware Requirements Out of Building multiline voice terminals require IROB units Single line voice terminals require carbon protection devices and must be connected to ports on the TN742 Analog Line CP Connectivity information is provided in Section 4 Hardware Description 2 232 Paging System Access Paging System Access Description This feature provides users with dial access or feature button access to paging equipment System 25 can provide an interface to paging systems that require a ground start trunk port a loop start trunk port or an industry standard tip ring station line po
22. STATION USER DIALS ARS ACCESS CODE 401 UMBER DIALED VOICE TERMINALS VOICE TERMINAL ON EMERGENCY RESTRICT ASSIGNED TOLL UMBERS LIST OUTWARD RESTRI CTI ON OPERATOR OR 911 AND CALLS YES CLASS 1 4 OTHER OTHER THREE CUSTOMER SHEET 2 DEFINED 7 DI GIT i UMBERS NUMBER DIALED NTERNATI ONAL STATIONS 601 603 13 OPERATOR CALL ROUTED VIA LOCAL CO FACILITY NUMBER DIALED ON TOLL CALL ALLOWED LIST 64 CODES MAY BE DIVIDED INTO 4 LISTS OF YES ANY LENGTH TOLL ALLOWED 1 3 CALLING USER RECEIVES SYSTEM REORDER TONE INTERNATI ONAL ROUTE CALL VIA LOCAL CO FACILITY STATION USER RECEIVES SYSTEM REORDER TONE ROUTE CALL VIA INTERNATI ONAL ROUTI NG PATTERN 402 Figure 2 8 Automatic Route Selection Flow Chart Sheet 1 of 2 2 64 Automatic Route Selection ARS 1 NUMBER DIALED WITHIN HOME NPA NUMBER DIALED ON FNPA EXCEPTION LIST OUTSIDE HOME NPA FNPA CALL ROUTED VIA ASSOCIATED YES ROUTING PATTERN 800 SYSTEM 30 CALL ROUTED AREA CODE ON CALL ROUTED VIA LOCAL NPA ROUTING VIA ASSOCIATED CO FACILITY TABLE 300 ROUTI NG PATTERN CODE HAS AN SPECIAL N11 ASSIGNED CALL ROUTED SERVICE CODE ROUTING VIA ASSOCIATED DIALED PATTERN ROUTING T Pini PATTERN NUMBER DIALED ON HOME NPA HOME AREA CODE CALL ROUTED EXCEPTI ON ON N
23. The call must be administered to ring at the voice terminal for which Pickup is attempted Otherwise the attempt will be blocked If the picked up call was to a multiline terminal the called terminal can still enter the call If the called terminal was a single line terminal it cannot enter the call once it is picked up Pickup cannot be invoked after the call has been answered 2 245 FEATURES AND SERVICES If no eligible calls are ringing attempting pickup results in reorder tone Interactions The following features interact with Pickup Bridging of System Access Buttons Pickup is a station oriented feature Thus calls ringing at a principal System Access SA button can be picked up by members of the principal s Pickup Group calls ringing at a Bridged Access BA button can be picked up by members of the bridging station s Pickup Group If a user dials the Group Pickup access code while active on a BA button the system interprets this as an attempt to pick up a call in the Pickup Group of the bridging station not of the principal station Calls ringing at either a principal SA button or an associated BA button can be picked up by using the Directed Pickup feature Callback Queuing A callback call cannot be picked up Coverage When a call is directed to a coverage station and the call is answered via Pickup all Cover buttons associated with the call go idle Personal Line After a call is picked up from a Personal
24. The modem pool is a single group of up to 12 conversion resources 3 Cabinet system with the characteristics of a 212 duplex asynchronous modem that operate at speeds of 300 and 1200 bps The Modem Pooling feature operates transparently to the user whenever possible In most cases when a digital endpoint is connected to an analog trunk or port the system adds a conversion resource without any explicit action by the user A voice terminal user who plans to use an analog modem to call a digital endpoint must first enter the Modem Request Code before dialing the digital endpoint This is because the system assumes that a voice call to a digital endpoint will be transferred to data via the Transfer To Data feature A DID call terminating on a digital endpoint will be assigned a modem resource if available Otherwise the call receives Reorder tone For each situation that requires a conversion resource the system 1 Determines if a resource is required by examining the types of endpoints that are to be connected together or by user indication 2 Once it is determined that a conversion resource is needed it is reserved The user receives Reorder Tone or the NO MODEMS TRY AGAIN message if a resource is not available The system queries the data port to determine whether its options are compatible with those supported by the modem pool If they are not e g 9600 baud and Permit Mismatch is not enabled the originat
25. 0 eMake This a Directed Night Service Trunk yes or no default yes eAssign Night Service Delay Announcement Announcement 1 or 2 or O for none default 0 e Dial Inward Capability Tone or Pulse default Pulse Tie trunks only Hardware Requirements Associated trunk port interfaces 2 336 Trunk To Trunk Transfer Trunk To Trunk Transfer Description This feature allows users to connect incoming trunk calls to other outside trunks and then hang up under certain conditions Incoming trunk calls may retransferred to another trunk or conferenced with another trunk In all cases and at all times either a System 25 station must remain in the conference or one of the calls must be an incoming call on a ground start loop start administered for trunk to trunk transfer DID or tie trunk The other call may be on any type of trunk and may be incoming or outgoing Considerations Trunk to trunk transfer is particularly useful when an outside caller requests a transfer to another outside number For example an employee can call in and have their call transferred elsewhere Note that as long as an inside station stays on the call even if a multiline station puts the call on hold and hangs up any two trunks may be conference If the station drops out of the call the trunk conference will be torn down unless the above conditions are met If a System 25 station enters a trunk to trunk transfer call via a line appearan
26. 500A 502A 502B 2 18314 Adjunct 2 183 MET 2 184 HFAI Z T8U Hold 2 78 10 5 INDEX Hold Music On 2 222 Hunting Station 2 291 Incoming Call Identification Automatic 2 157 Indications Line Status And l Use 2 207 Indicator Message Waitingl4 52 2 Individual Coverage 2 114 1 Information Display Call 2 149 Ispecion 2 190 Integrated 7 3 2 793 1 Interactions Call Origination 2 371 1 Intercept Treatment With Reorder Tone 2 196 Intercom Automatic Hands Free Answer On 2 180 2 197 2 207 Interdigit Timeouts l Use Indication Join Attendant K L Last Number Dialed Leave Word Calling Lightning Protection Requirements Lamp Signals Line Selection Status And l Use Indications Lines Personal 2 243 Local Display 2 209 Log Error 2 318 Loop Start Trunk ZTN77 3 24 4 10 10 6 LWG 2 201 M MADU Connections Maintenance Softwarel 3 38 J2D 00 System 2 317 Tests AutomaticL 2 218 l j Manager Communications Access CAM 2 101 Manual Signaling 2 212 Manuals Administration Implementation Installation And Maintena Introduction to System 25 1 Memory Allocation 3 39 Message Center Like Operation 2 214 Message Drop Service 2 349 Message Waiting Indicator Indicators Dial Access to 2 128 Station to Station 2 306 Messaging Sevices 2
27. Call Processing 3 41 TDM Bus 3 42 Port Circuit Packs 3 42 Step By Step Call Description 3 42 Figures Figure 3 1 System 25 Digital Switch 3 1 Figure 3 2 CPU MEM ZTN129 Circuitry Figure 3 3 TDM Bus Time Slot Generation Not A Timing Diagram 3 6 Figure 3 4 TDM Bus Three Cabinet System 3 8 Figure 3 5 Equipment Connections Via Circuit Pack Ports 3 10 Figure 3 6 Port Circuit Pack Common Circuitry 3 13 Figure 3 7 Analog Line TN742 Unique Circuitry 3 15 Figure 3 8 ATL Line ZTN79 Unique Circuitry 3 17 Figure 3 9 Auxiliary Trunk TN763 Unique Circuitry 3 19 Figure 3 10 Data Line TN726 Unique Circuitry 3 20 Figure 3 11 DID Trunk TN753 Unique Circuitry 3 22 Figure 3 12 Ground Start Trunk ZTN76 Unique Circuitry 3 23 Figure 3 13 Loop Start Trunk ZTN77 Unique Circuitry 3 24 Figure 3 14 MET Line TN735 Unique Circuitry 3 25 Figure 3 15 Tie Trunk TN760B Unique Circuitry 3 28 Figure 3 16 Tie Trunk TN760B Circuit Pack Option Switches 3 28 Figure 3 17 Tip Ring Line ZTN78 Unique Circuitry 3 30 Figure 3 18 Service Circuit ZTN85 3 32 Figure 3 19 Tone Detector TN748B 3 34 Figure 3 20 Pooled Modem TN758 3 36 Figure 3 21 System Software Partitioning 3 40 Tables Table 3 A TDM Bus Time Slots 3 7 Table 3 B Signaling Type Summary 3 29 Table 3 C TN760B Tie Trunk Preferred Signaling Formats 3 29 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION This section describes how the digital switch and the software
28. PACKS Cabinet 2 12 Cabinets 12 u Cabinet 1 always required Provides mounting for CPU MEM Service Circuit and Port CPs including Tone Detectors and Pooled Modems Cabinet 2 and 3 optional Provides mounting for Port CPs including Tone Detectors and Pooled Modems T The Number of Ports per CP is specified in the CP descriptions HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Circuit Packs This part describes required and optional System 25 Circuit Packs CPs and compatibility and features Required CPs are the CPU MEM and the Service Circuit Optional CPs are the Station Port CPs Trunk Port CPs Pooled Modems and Tone Detectors the latter two CPs plus the Service Circuit are also classified as System Resources Table 4 B lists the CPs of System 25 For more detailed functional descriptions of the CPs refer to Section 3 of this manual Table 4 B System Circuit Packs CIRCUIT NUMBER CIRCUIT PACK TITLE PACK OF TYPE PORTS TN770 Datatine 8 TN735 METLme 4 TN742 Analog Line P 8 7488 Tone Detectort R 4 TN753 P 8 758 Pooled Modem i R 2 768 Tie Trunk 4 TN763 Auxiliary Trunk P 4 2746 Ground Start Trunk P 8 ZIN77 Loop Start Trunk P 8 Tip Ring Line Lp ues me og 4 R ee Service Circuit t P Port C Control R System Reso
29. TIP RING CP 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05 C5 MODULAR CORD 0480 87 Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE W RING CABLE MOH KS 23395 MUSIC ON HOLD INTERFACE UNIT PEC 62517 FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 26 Music On Hold Equipment Connections FCC Registered 2 224 Music On Hold SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP W1 36A VOICE W1 COUPLER Wi 20120 TRANSFORMER MUSIC SOURCE LEGEND TN742 ANALOG LINE CP ZIN78 TIP RING CP Bl TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C6 SINGLE ENDED MODULAR CORD D4BY Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE W RI NG MOH KS 23395 MUSIC ON HOLD INTERFACE UNIT 2012D TRANSFORMER 15 18V AC SOURCE PEC 62513 36A VOICE COUPLER MUSIC SOURCE INTERFACE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 27 Music On Hold Equipment Connections Non Registered 2 225 FEATURES AND SERVICES Night Service Description Allows users to answer incoming calls on specified trunks when the attendant is not on duty There are two types of Night Service NS e Directed NS Redirects incoming calls on specified trunks to designated voice terminals Trunk Answer from Any Station TAAS NS Allows users to answer incoming calls on specified trunks by dialing the Night Service access code Both types of NS may be provided specified on a per trunk basis To obtain Night Service
30. null modem cable This group of Data Services Overview endpoints is important for users who provide their own modems connected to dedicated trunks or private lines for internal modem pooling Data Endpoint States The data endpoint may take on three states 1 off line 2 on line on hook and 3 on line off hook Off line is when data terminal is out of service turned off disconnected The on line on hook state occurs when the terminal is turned on is available to answer a call but is not on data call Finally the on line off hook state is when the data endpoint is actively on a data call Data Call Processing Modes Data calls differ both in signaling and call setup from voice calls For this reason a unique set of data call processing modes have been defined to support data call operation in a manner consistent with the characteristics of data terminals a Off Line Mode The data endpoint is considered to be in the Off Line Mode whenever the data endpoint s DTR signal is inactive e g turned off The endpoint is considered unavailable and calls to this endpoint will receive the RINGING message or Ringback indefinitely Idle Mode The Idle Mode indicates that the data endpoint is in its on line on hook state While idle call processing will allow the endpoint to Enter either Data Terminal Dialing mode to originate a data call or enter the Setup mode after a call i
31. 1 Process Calls Involves screening call records calculating the cost of valid calls and storing the call records Generate Reports Allows the user to print the stored call record information organized in one of several different ways Users can select a report or set Up their own special combination of reports from the following eSummary collection of reports that condense and summarize call record information by total number of calls duration and cost The reports can be organized by department call type cost center trunk extension cost duration time of day date and account code e Organization Detail Report A detailed report of each call record in the system sorted by department cost center and extension e Selection Report This report can contain at a user s option summary or detailed information based on any combination of the following items time of day date cost duration extension access code account code dialed number call type department or cost center e Account Code Detailed Report A detailed report on call records sorted by account code This report can be used for billing clients for calls made in their behalf e Preselected Reports Allows up to five predefine reports which can include any of the above mentioned reports These reports can run upon request or at a specified time and date System Management Allows the user to perform several functions These incl
32. 4 INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER RANGE WITHIN 2000 FEET OF SYSTEM CABINET LOCAL POWER REQUIRED gt 1000 FEET Figure 2 2 Direct Trunk Attendant Console Connections 2 23 FEATURES AND SERVICES Attendant Console Switched Loop Description In System 25 the Attendant Console is used to answer incoming trunk calls that are specified to ring at an attendant position to answer calls from inside users to extend calls to inside stations and outside numbers to assist system users in placing outgoing calls and to set up conferences The attendant can also manage and monitor some areas of system operation System 25 supports the Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC or the Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTAC which is covered in the preceding feature description of this manual Consoles of both types cannot be installed in the same system The SLAC Figure 2 3 can be one of the Merlin System multiline voice terminals listed below administered with special buttons features and capabilities to serve as an attendant console In addition to the attendant features most standard multiline terminal features are also available Refer to the section of this manual for a complete identification of all the external controls indicators and components of the SLAC voice terminals e 305H04C 34 programmable feature buttons built in speakerphone and display e7317H01A BIS 34D 34 programmable feature buttons each
33. After a call has queued for a busy station the caller can wait off hook for the connection to be completed The caller hears dequeuing tone three short beeps when the queued for station becomes available and then ringback as the station is being rung FEATURES AND SERVICES 2 82 While off hook on a queued call a single line user can transfer or conference the call Queuing The caller can hang up after a call to a busy station goes into queue The call retains an association with the on hook calling terminal and a callback will alert the on hook user when the queued for station is available After a single line terminal user goes cm hook the queued call cannot be accessed until a callback attempt occurs During the waiting period the single line user can place or receive other calls When a multiline user hangs up after a call is queued the green status LED of the queued System Access SA button winks as if the call is on hold If the user goes off hook and presses the button while the call is still queued the LED lights steadily and queuing tone is heard again While waiting for a queued call the user can place and receive other calls e Callback Callback applies only to stations that went on hook after queuing was activated When the queued for station becomes available to receive a queued call the system sends repeated priority ringing to the on hook calling station At a multiline set callback rings at t
34. C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 0176 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P 355A ADAPTER RS 232 PLUG TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 424 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 425 Figure 2 17 Digital Tape Unit On Premises Direct Connections Sharing Same AC Outlet 2 135 FEATURES AND SERVICES Direct Group Calling DGC Description Direct Group Calling DGC allows incoming calls to be directed to a specific group of terminals Up to 32 DGC groups each including up to 20 members may be set up terminal can be in only one DGC group Incoming calls on particular trunks can be directed to a DGC group These trunks can also be used for outgoing calls DGC groups can be administered as Coverage Groups receivers Refer to the feature description for details Calls to a DGC group hunt in a circular manner starting at the terminal following the last one to receive ringing whether answered or not and will ring at the next idle terminal in the group On multiline voice terminals the calls arrive on a SYSTEM ACCESS button LOOP button on a Switched Loop Attendant Console If all group members are busy off hook an outside call is queued and the caller receives ringback tone If the system includes a delay announcement it is played after a specified number of rings The caller is subsequently put on hold in queue and will receive Music On Hold if available If the system is not equipped with a delay
35. CABLE PART OF SIP SYSTEM 15 lt ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL LEGEND C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 076 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P 355A ADAPTER RS 232 PLUG TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 A24 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 A25 Figure 2 50 SAT On Premises Direct Connections Sharing Same AC Outlet System Administration SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET DCTOPUS PART ZTN129 CPU MEM SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL 2012D LEGEND TRANS ADAPT B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTION BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 076 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE Z3A1 ADU EQUIPPED WITH 3 FOOT PLUG ENDED EIA CORD PEC 2169 001 C3 CROSSOVER CABLE M7U 87 C4 ADU CROSSOVER CABLE 08 87 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK Z3A4 ADU EQUIPPED WITH 3 FOOT RECEPTACLE ENDED EIA CORD Cl MODULAR CORDS 2 D8W 87 62515 C7 MODULAR POWER CORD D6AP 87 248B ADAPTER MODULARIZES 20120 TRANSFORMER 400B2 ADAPTER POWER ADAPTER 2012D TRANSFORMER 15 18V AC SOURCE X FURNI SHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 51 SAT On Premises Direct Connections Greater Than 50 Feet From System Cabinet or Nonsharing Same AC Outlet 2 313 FEATURES AND SERVICES SYSTEM 25 CABINET ZTN129 CPU MEM PORT X LEGEND 81 Cl C2 Wl 23 1 AD
36. Clients need flexibility over the life of the system to easily add capacity move stations modify cost control options etc The architecture of System 25 was implemented with the objective to meet this need eAdvanced Administration optional is an easy to use menu driven personal computer software package for configuring the rich set of system options Versions of this software are available for both MS DOS and UNIX personal computers e Uniform Wiring Plan four pair allows a building to be prewired for the rich set of AT amp T Small Business PBX service offerings This modular wiring plan supports client reconfiguration of an office with variations in station type Analog MET MERLIN Communications System futures and data configurations LAN asynchronous synchronous It supports simultaneous voice and data from standard 4 pair modular jacks eSystem 25 75 85 Standard Architecture supports efficient growth with modular cabinets universal carrier slots nonblocking network and uniform wiring plan Every circuit slot in the system can be used for trunk cards or voice data station cards All these attributes allow the client to add future capability without breakage and re engineering of existing equipment Thus the client is able to minimize initial investment while not restricting future growth Over time the type of tools and facilities that a business utilizes changes It is important that a PBX provide support for the full set
37. Command Mode Command Mode This feature allows data terminal users to originate data and voice calls and change or view their data port options Refer also to the general description of the system s data features in Command Mode supports digital data endpoints connected via Asynchronous Data Units ADUs to ports on a Data Line CP TN726 Command Mode also supports with certain restrictions users of the STARLAN Interface Circuit Pack ZTN84 Command Mode is invoked from a data terminal in the idle on hook mode by Terminal Optioned For Autobaud Terminal Not Optioned For Autobaud Enter Break followed by Return Enter Break The terminal then displays the Command Mode menu Data call gt Voice call lt Options gt lt Hangup gt Menu items are chosen either by positioning the cursor under the desired item by typing space characters and entering a Return or by typing the upper case character in the menu field e g type D to choose data terminal dialing or to move to the options sub menu Once a user has entered Command Mode the terminal is considered off hook and busy to incoming calls until it returns to the idle mode lt Data call gt or lt place Data call gt Refer to feature description for information on how to dial from your terminal Once a data call has been set up either the Disconnect Recall Sequence see the Permissible Options must be sent or lt Hangup gt selected from t
38. Consoles of both types cannot be installed in the same system The DTAC can be one of the Merlin Communications System multiline voice terminals listed below administered with special features buttons and capabilities to serve as an attendant position e7305H02D 34 programmable feature buttons each with l use and status LEDs e 7305H03B 34 programmable feature buttons built in speakerphone 7316 34 programmable feature buttons each with l use and status LEDs built in speakerphone In addition to the attendant features most standard multiline terminal features are also available Refer to the Hardware Description section of this manual for a complete identification of the external controls indicators and components of the DTAC voice terminal DIRECT TRUNK ATTENDANT OPTIONAL SELECTOR CONSOLE CONSOLE Figure 2 1 Typical Direct Trunk Attendant Console Position The DTAC is always equipped with the following feature buttons that provide unique attendant console functions Each button has a green status LED that indicates when the feature is activated FEATURES AND SERVICES eStart START Initiates the call extending process by placing a caller on hold and providing internal dial tone to the attendant eCancel CANCEL Terminates the Start operation and reconnects the attendant to the calling party eRelease RELEASE Releases the attendant from an active call and completes the call extending
39. EXTENSION UNIT ed STARLAN NETWORK WORKSTATIONS SERVERS HOSTS POOLED MODEM CP c So DATA jJ TERMINAL DATA TERMINAL ANALOG OR LINE PC WITH CP MODEM DATA TERMINAL OR PC WITH MODEM Figure 2 38 STARLAN NETWORK and System 25 Configuration The System 25 View of a STARLAN NETWORK From System 25 the STARLAN CP looks and functions like a TN726 DLC with only four ports The STARLAN CP differs from the DLC in that when it is dialed the STARLAN CP auto answers the call and provides a second dialing prompt for completing the call to a STARLAN NETWORK address Depending on user s data terminal type the STARLAN CP automatically selects the operating mode and enables the user to access and exchange data over the network as described below Procedures for setting up connections calls between STARLAN NETWORK devices and devices connected to System 25 vary depending on both calling and called device Generally a two stage dialing procedure is used The scenarios described below cover most situations 2 205 FEATURES AND SERVICES Calls from System 25 to the STARLAN NETWORK A An MS DOS PC connected to System 25 uses the STARLAN NETWORK ACCESS software to run STAR LAN NETWORK applications The PC may be connected either to a System 25 DLC port or to an analog station or trunk port The latter arrangement uses System 25 s Modem Pooling feature A typical call i
40. F Source The V on the above command line provides access to lt Voice call gt from the Command Mode entry level menu The balance of the dialed number is composed of destination and source numbers as described in the Third Party Call Setup feature description User Changeable Options Refer to the User Changeable Options feature discussed later for a detailed description of the feature The menus selected in the following discussion are shown Figure 2 55 To view the current Options Table starting at the Command Mode entry level the user simply enters OV following the system prompt as follows Command OV To change the current Options Table starting at the entry level the user enters OC as follows Command OC Entering OC places the user at the Change Options level At this point the user may change options by entering the appropriate letter to indicate the required option S for Speed P for Parity M for Mismatch etc followed by the desired setting s Only one Option is allowed per line If more than one setting is selected for an Option that can only accept one setting call processing recognizes only the last entry 2 165 FEATURES AND SERVICES Examples Command S 1200 300 4800 Add 7200 and 4800 baud to the available speeds remove 300 baud Command PE Change Parity to Even Command MY Change Mismatch to Yes If the user enters an invalid Option or setting the system respond
41. MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 076 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C3 CROSSOVER CABLE M7U 87 PEC 2724 306 OPS OFF PREMISES STATION 355 ADAPTER 85 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 A25 Z3A4 ADU EQUIPPED WITH 3 FOOT RECEPTACLE ENDED EIA CORD PEC 2169 004 2488 ADAPTER MODULARIZES 20120 TRANSFORMER 40082 ADAPTER POWER ADAPTER PEC 21691 20120 TRANSFORMER 15 18V AC SOURCE C7 MODULAR POWER CORD D6AP 87 Figure 2 48 SMDR Output Equipment Off Premises Switched Connections 2 305 FEATURES AND SERVICES Station to Station Message Waiting Description This feature allows pairs of multiline voice terminal users to signal each other with Message Waiting MSG WAIT buttons and associated green status LEDs at each terminal When either user presses the MSG WAIT button the LEDs light at both stations This arrangement enables one user to inform the other user that a message is waiting it can also be adapted to other two way signaling purposes such as come to my off ice After the MSG WAIT LEDs have been turned on they can be turned off by operation of the button at either terminal The receiver of a station to station message should normally turn off the LEDs as soon as the message is understood so that the link is restored to an idle condition and is ready for use again No talking path or audible alerting is associated with this feature Considerations This feature is functional
42. Up to 16 terminals may share a personal line e Third Party Call Setup allows PCs to set up calls between a System 25 voice data terminal and any other facility A PC application program could use this capability to retrieve information from a data base Last Number Dialed Repertory Dialing and Speed Dialing are also applicable to dialing and managing internal calls Personal lines provide both incoming and outgoing service Internal Call Movement Typically about 40 percent of PBX calls are internal calls call transfers to another location conference of multiple locations temporarily suspended calls page to locate the called party etc Rapid placement of internal calls and easy call movement from the answering station to a new station are supported with numerous features in System 25 To provide easy internal call setup System 25 provides the following features e Direct Station Selection DSS allows one button access from a multiline voice terminal to another voice terminal a pooled facility paging zone or DGC group The DSS status LED reflects the idle busy status of the associated termination point This feature is used to track and contact frequently called associates e Automatic Intercom allows multiline voice terminal users to call each other by use of a dedicated line appearance A private dedicated path ensures that a path is always available This feature is frequently used in Boss Secretary arrangements e The Dial
43. and after the transfer is completed transferring station goes on hook the call will stay at the principal s SA button and its BA buttons only if one or more of these stations is bridged to the call Otherwise the call will be removed An on hold bridging station or principal is not considered to be bridged to the call Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port Bridging Station e Assign a BA button for each SA button on the principal station e Assign ringing option for each BA button no ring immediate ring or delayed ring default 2 immediate ring Voice Terminal Port Principal Station e Assign ringing for each SA button no ring immediate ring or delayed ring default immediate ring e Send ringing to bridged appearances on no answer yes or no default yes e Send ringing to bridged appearances on busy off hook yes or no default yes e Modify the assignment of the Send All Calls button Abbreviated ring reminder yes or no Send ringing to bridging stations or coverage stations or both default both System Search for stations that have bridged call appearances of a principal 2 73 FEATURES AND SERVICES Busy To Idle Reminder Description Busy to ldle Reminder alerts a multiline voice terminal user by a single ring as soon as a busy internal station DGC group or facility trunk group becomes available The feature can be activated only for stations DGC groups and trunk groups repres
44. e 4 Activate Program mode e 5 Insert dialed digits here in Virtual Facility numbers e 8 Start end to end signaling in programmed numbers e 60 Activate Callback Queuing at single line voice terminal e 61 Cancel Callback Queuing request at single line voice terminal e 70 Activate Forwarding e 90 Activate Dial Access to Message Waiting Indications e 91 Deactivate Dial Access to Message Waiting Indications e 92 Activate Leave Word Calling e End of dialing e Sends a in programmed numbers e Sends in programmed numbers e PDC Call Accountability The maximum number of dial codes available for a System 25 is 600 Each assigned code is stored individually in memory The dial codes assigned in the system must be completely unambiguous For example a dialing plan that contains the number 20 cannot contain the numbers 2 200 209 or 2000 2099 PDC to Voice Terminal Association During installation each voice terminal is assigned one PDC that serves as its extension number These are referred to as assigned PDCs and the associated terminals are called home stations Additional floating FPDCs may be assigned in a system At the customer s option floating PDCs may have the attendant position assigned as their home station i e calls to FPDCs will be directed to the attendant when they are not signed in anywhere A maximum of 200 assigned PDCs
45. number the display is flashed on Screen 1 only The new forwarding descriptor F appears in position 1 followed by the digits of the outside number Screen 1 F912325552365 Following Either Following or Forwarding but not both can be active at a given time for a particular PDC Activation of one feature while the other is in effect overrides the other feature Remote Access Remote Access calls to a System 25 station that has Forwarding activated will forward like any other incoming calls to the station Remote Access callers can activate Forwarding to outside numbers at System 25 stations Refer to Remote Access Forwarding earlier in this feature description Repertory Dialing The forwarding activation and deactivation sequences or portions of them can be stored on REP DIAL buttons Send All Calls Forwarding supersedes Send All Calls A call forwarded from a station with Send All Calls activated will not go to Coverage or to bridging stations unless the call is not answered at the forwarded to station and returns After returning the call routes according to the Send Calls feature Station Hunting Calls forwarded to a station in a hunt group will hunt and ring an idle station if the forwarded to station is busy lf all members of the group are busy and the forwarded to station has Call Waiting the caller hears special ringback until the forwarded to station becomes available to answer the call A call to a fo
46. or if none is specified via the local CO facility If a number is entered more than once in the exception list the pattern used will be the pattern associated with the more specific number The NPA Routing Table is simply a listing of North American Plan NPAs and Special Number NPAs each having an associated ARS Routing Pattern all North American NPAs are assigned routing pattern 1 by default A dialed NPA that is listed in the table is routed using the associated Pattern Calls to NPAs not listed are routed via the local CO facility The dialed numbers are checked against the FNPA Exception List Up to 32 entries may be assigned to the list Each entry must consist of a 3 digit NPA code 3 digit CO code and two additional digits for a total of 8 digits The last two digits may be which match any digit Each entry has an associated ARS Routing Pattern if a match is found the call is routed using this pattern If no match is found the call is then checked against the NPA Routing Table A dialed NPA that is listed in the table is routed using the associated Pattern Numbers that don t match are routed via the local CO facility ARS Routing Pattern Table provides a block diagram of an ARS Routing Pattern Up to eight of these patterns may be administered in the system Each pattern consists of two subpatterns that may be chosen based on the time of day Each subpattern A and B can contain up to three allowed routes If all rout
47. owner The coverage of that terminal determines the coverage of the Personal Line Considerations Personal Lines provide facilities to users who desire direct access to the exchange network In addition Personal Line appearances are provided on the Direct Trunk Attendant Console for general use trunks Appearances of these lines may also be provided at selected multiline voice terminals to ensure coverage when the attendant is not available DID trunks cannot be terminated on Personal Line buttons Personal Lines provide direct access for callers bypassing the attendant In some cases they may substitute for DID service Interactions The following features interact with Personal Line Attendant Console Direct Trunk On the Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTAC trunks are terminated as Personal Lines The DTAC can accommodate a maximum of 26 Personal Lines 24 is the practical limit Attendant Console Switched Loop Personal Lines cannot be terminated on a Switched Loop Attendant Console Coverage The coverage of the principal station owner determines coverage for the line Direct Group Calling The same trunk may be used as a Personal Line and also be directed to a DGC group If an incoming call is not answered by the DGC group after predetermined number of rings ringing and LED flashing will be transferred to all button appearances of the line unless a DGC delay announcement is provided Hold A Personal Line can
48. t 555 530 200 Issue 1 June 1988 AT amp T SYSTEM 25 R2V1 REFERENCE MANUAL 4 bes YS iP c Kir ee re 2 lt s 1 y oS 1988 AT amp T Rights Reserved Printed in USA TO ORDER COPIES OF THIS DOCUMENT REFER TO DOCUMENT NUMBER 555 530 200 Contact Your AT amp T sales representative or Call 800 432 6600 Monday through Friday between 7 30 am and 6 00 pm EST or In Canada call 800 255 1242 Write AT amp T Customer Information Center 2855 North Franklin Road P O Box 19901 Indianapolis Indiana 42619 Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However this information is subject to change This document will be reissued periodically to incorporate changes R2V1 Reference Manual Prepared by System 25 Document Development Group and the AT amp T Documentation Management Organization FCC NOTIFICATION AND REPAIR INFORMATION AT amp T SYSTEM 25 This telephone equipment is registered with the Federal Communications Commission FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its Rules In compliance with the Rules be advised of the following MEANS OF CONNECTION Connection of this telephone equipment to the nationwide telecommunications network shall be through a standard network interface USOC RJ21X jack Connection to private line network channels requires USOC RJ2GX jack for lines or USOC RJ
49. the attendant and the other parties in an extended call eForced Release FORCED RELEASE Drops all active parties from a call eLast Number Dialed LAST DIALED Redials the last number dialed 2 25 FEATURES AND SERVICES Position Busy POS BUSY Temporarily removes the attendant position from service and status LEDs on basic SLAC e Attendant Message Waiting ATTENDANT MESSAGE WAITING Used by the attendant to remotely control Message LEDs on voice terminals Status LED only on basic SLAC e Alarm ALARM The associated status LED flashes when a system trouble has been detected the LED can be changed from flashing to steadily lit by pressing the button l use and status LEDs on basic SLAC e Inspect INSPECT Puts the display into a mode for inspecting the status or stored information of certain buttons Status LED only on basic SLAC e Scroll SCROLL Causes display to present additional call information when available e Local LOCAL Allows display to be used for clock and calendar functions The buttons not assigned to normal voice terminal functions or to attendant functions are defaulted to the Flex DSS feature One of these programmable buttons can be assigned to Night Service if the feature is required and any of the others to multiline voice terminal features Programmable Feature Buttons The features in the following list can be assigned to the programmable feature buttons On t
50. the digits generated by the REP DIAL button are ignored But if the active call is on an outside trunk then pressing REP DIAL will cause the digits stored on the button to be sent out over the trunk thru dialing or end to end signaling When an active call is put on hold manually by operation of the HOLD button the system does not automatically select a new loop for placing a call In this case the attendant can select a new loop by pressing an idle LOOP button then dial a number Pressing a DSS Flex DSS Auto Intercom Last Number Dialed REP DIAL or Selector Console button will select a new loop and dial a number in a single operation FEATURES AND SERVICES Call Waiting Calls cannot wait at the SLAC Callback Queuing Calls that are originated without use of the START button can be queued for busy facilities They are treated like calls from standard multiline stations A queued call remains on the LOOP button where it was originated and does not return via the common queue Headset Adapter Connection of a headset adapter to the SLAC allows the optional use of a headset instead of the handset in handling calls Administration Requirements Attendant Console Voice Terminal Port eAssign voice terminal type eAssign Prime Line Preference to one of the LOOP buttons default top LOOP button eAssign flexible buttons Trunk Port eAssign priorities to calls directed to the console queue eAssign the attendant s to ha
51. the system must be equipped with an Attendant Console and the console administered with a NIGHT button In a system with two Attendant Consoles both consoles may be assigned a NIGHT button Either attendant can press NIGHT to activate Night Service The LEDs of both NIGHT buttons will light to indicate that the system is in the Night Service mode Pressing NIGHT a second time by either attendant deactivates Night Service and turns Off both LEDs Directed NS Allows an incoming trunk call to be directed to up to four designated voice terminals Different trunks may be directed to different voice terminals When the attendant presses NIGHT incoming calls on trunks administered to receive Directed NS treatment will automatically be routed to the designated voice terminals all designated NS stations ring simultaneously Calls not answered within a specified number of rings will receive a Night Service delay announcement if available While at the announcement they may be bridged onto by going off hook at a station with a line appearance The announcement is dropped at this point lf all Directed NS stations for a given trunk are busy all System Access buttons busy on multiline sets calls go to the announcement immediately Directed NS calls do not hunt or receive coverage but they can be picked up via the Pickup feature Personal Line calls that are directed to NS will also ring at the Personal Line appearances and receive normal coverage
52. then the call will ring immediately on the BA button Station Message Detail Recording SMDR When an outside call is answered or originated at a BA button the SMDR record for this call will report the bridging stations PDC number under the STN column and the principal stations PDC number under the PDC column If the Call Accountability feature is used when originating a call at a BA button the PDC column will contain the accountable entered PDC number in place of the principal s PDC 2 72 Bridging of System Access Buttons If two bridged stations attempt to originate a call at the same time and if the call is completed the PDC number of the station that dialed the first digit is placed in the SMDR records under the STN column Transfer A call can be transferred from a bridged call appearance using the usual transfer operations When call is held for transfer by pressing the TRANSFER button an idle System Access button or an idle System Access Originate Only button if available is automatically selected by the system for placing the new call If neither of these appearance types is idle the user can manually select a BA button or any other call button on which to place the new call The transfer operation and status indications of the principal s SA button and its corresponding BA buttons are similar to Personal Line operation with the following exceptions Calls can be from to an inside station or from to an outside location
53. voice terminal that is off hook has idle coverage receiver and has idle hunt to station While either of these busy conditions exists at the home terminal the call will not return to the home terminal Instead it will continue to ring at the away terminal until answered or timed out If either of the above two busy conditions ends at the home terminal while the call is waiting at the away terminal the call will be directed back to the home terminal If the call is sent back to the home terminal it can be answered or it can receive the terminal s hunting or coverage treatment The coverage treatment given to calls that are returning from an away terminal differs in two respects from the treatment provided to calls initially directed to the home terminal First the home terminal and its coverage station receive ringing simultaneously rather than having the coverage ringing delayed Second coverage terminals will ring for calls returning to the home stations even if the coverage ring options of the home terminal are no ring Both of these coverage modifications expedite the answering of calls that are returning to the home station from an away station Once the call is directed back to the home terminal it is removed from the away terminal This is true even if the away terminal was busy but subsequently became idle after the call was sent back to the home terminal 2 A Special Case A call to a PDC placed from the same sta
54. 10 08 85 2 298 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 14 14 15 17 19 20 34 144 50 12 14 12 24 13 27 13 14 13 23 13 28 13 33 13 45 14 14 14 24 14 34 14 43 15 14 15 16 15 19 CALLED NUMBER 1 232 566 1321 IN 1 322 564 1376 1 222 564 2171 IN IN 242 563 1324 555 4541 252 514 3176 IN 222 566 2544 333 513 1376 1 244 564 3121 1 222 516 1176 555 2541 222 563 4321 343 516 2574 555 3141 343 564 1321 222 566 1321 IN Figure 2 41 DUR 00 15 41 00 09 05 00 29 50 00 10 45 00 05 32 00 29 45 00 19 00 00 05 35 00 19 45 00 25 42 00 10 35 00 15 05 00 09 40 00 15 45 00 19 35 00 19 40 00 09 05 00 20 42 00 10 05 00 09 45 00 19 32 00 20 45 00 19 45 00 19 45 3414 3421 O o 3214 2342 STN 1794 1324 1744 2001 1744 3455 1677 2312 3455 1492 1244 3566 2001 1566 3421 1492 3655 4321 1244 4633 2351 1794 1794 1794 ACCOUNT 123489764321341 766544 76322 323489764321341 123489764321341 123489764321341 763444 123489764321341 Typical SMDR Call Detail Report PDC 4271 3254 3422 3422 4271 4271 3465 4271 ASCII CHARACTER POSITION Column Number Figure 2 42 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR DESCRIPTION Call Type Space Date Month Date Day Date Year Space Time Hour Time Minute Space
55. 111 FEATURES AND SERVICES Callback Queuing Callback calls to the originator do not send ring signals to its coverage stations If call is queued for a station then of the coverage stations becomes available the call remains queued for the originally dialed station Direct Station Selection DSS A DSS button can be assigned to a DGC Coverage Group The button lights whenever all DGC members are busy Flex DSS A Flex DSS button can be assigned to a DGC Coverage Group Forwarding When a station has both DGC Coverage and Forwarding in effect calls are routed first to the forwarded to station If not answered there within an administered number of rings calls ring at the forwarding station and DGC coverage group and stop ringing at the forwarded to station Once the call is directed to a DGC group member the call appearance is removed from the forwarding station When forwarding to an outside number coverage may only occur in one case the forwarding had been activated using a trunk group s facility access code not ARS the forwarding cannot be completed because the trunk group is busy and the forwarding station is not busy In this case the call will ring at the forwarding station and its DGC coverage group Once the call is directed to a DGC group member the call appearance is removed from the forwarding station Leave Word Calling LWC A multiline voice terminal user can activate LWC for the called party even if t
56. 19 200 bps DISTANCE SEE TABLE RS 232C DEVICE ASYNCHRONOUS ZTN129 CALL OR DISTANCE SEE TABLE RS 232C DEVICE ASYNCHRONOUS LINE CP Figure 5 3 Asynchronous Data Unit Allowable Cable Distances in Building Only 5 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Call Progress Tones The following call progress tones are generated by the system 480 Hz 620 Hz 500 on 500 off repeated Call Waiting Notify 440 Hz 200 on not repeated Confirmation 350 Hz 440 Hz 100 on 100 off 100 on 100 off 100 on followed by silence Dequeuing 350 Hz 440 Hz 100 on 100 off 100 on 100 off 100 on followed by silence Queuing 440 Hz Five 50 ms tones 50 ms apart not repeated Recall Dial 350 Hz 440 Hz 100 on 100 off 100 on 100 off 100 on 100 off followed by continuous tone 480 Hz 620 Hz 250 on 250 off repeated Ringback Normal 440 Hz 480 Hz 1200 on 4000 off repeated Ringback Special Call 440 Hz 480 Hz 440 1000 440 Hz 480 Waiting Hz Hz 200 on 440 Hz 2800 off repeated 5 10 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Indicator Lamp Signals The following lamp signals are provided at multiline voice terminal line appearances Flashing 500 on 500 off 500 on 500 repeated Broken 50 on 50 off repeated Transfer Conference Fluttering gated on off every 500 ms in progress 350 on 50 off repeated TECHNICA
57. 2000 applications software must be run on an AT amp T Personal Computer equipped with MS DOS V2 11 or later or a UNIX PC Master Controller SMDR port parameters are as follows eNo parity bit is set to zero e1 start bit 1 stop bit and 7 data bits 2 78 Call Accounting System CAS eBaud rate defaults to 1200 can be set to 300 eDTR data terminal ready required from printer eRTS ready to send and CTS clear to send not required eNo flow control Refer to Figures 2 11 and for typical CAS connection information SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABI NET OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP CPU MEM P ADAPT ACCOUNTING SYSTEM LEGEND C MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 07G C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05P 355A ADAPTER RS 232 PLUG TO MODULAR PEC 2750 A24 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR J ACK 2750 A25 Figure 2 11 Call Accounting System On Premises Direct Connections Sharing Same AC Outlet 2 79 FEATURES AND SERVICES SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABI NET OCTOPUS PART OF CABLE SIP ZTN129 MEM C4 2341 2 mi OR Z3A4 ADU NOTE CALL ACCOUNTING SYSTEM TRANS ADAPT LEGEND 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTION BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 076 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P 1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE 73 1 ADU EQUIPPED WITH 3 FOOT PLUG ENDED EIA CORD PEC 2169 001 2344 ADU EQUIPP
58. 3 Cabinet System 4 3 Figure 4 6 7101 Voice Terminal 4 20 Figure 4 12 7305H03B Voice Terminal BIS 4 33 Figure 4 13 7305H04C Voice Terminal BIS With Display 4 35 Figure 4 14 7309 01 Voice Terminal HFAI 4 37 Figure 4 15 7313H01A Voice Terminal BIS 10 4 39 Figure 4 16 7314H01A Voice Terminal BIS 22 4 41 Figure 4 17 7316H01A Voice Terminal BIS 34 4 43 Figure 4 18 7317H01A Voice Terminal BIS 34D 4 45 Figure 4 19 10 Button MET Set 2991C05 4 47 Figure 4 20 10 Button MET With Built In Speakerphone 2993C04 4 49 Figure 4 21 12 Button MET Set 7203M 4 51 Figure 4 22 Asynchronous Data Unit ADU 4 55 Figure 4 23 Trunk Access Equipment TAE Connections 4 60 Figure 4 24 617A Panel 4 62 Figure 4 25 Typical SIP Connections 4 63 Figure 4 26 On Premises Single Line Voice Terminal Connections 4 65 Figure 4 27 Out of Building Single Line Voice Terminal Connections Figure 4 28 Off Premises Station Single Line Voice Terminal Connections 4 67 Figure 4 29 On Premises 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminal Connections 4 68 Figure 4 30 Out of Building 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminal Connections 4 69 iV Figure 4 31 MET Set Connections 4 70 Figure 4 32 Stand Alone Remotely Powered Voice Terminal Connections 4 71 Figure 4 33 Typical ADU Connections Supporting Data Terminal and Single LineVoiceTerminal Figure 4 34 Typical ADU Connections Supporting Data Terminal and 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminal Fi
59. 60016 This unit plugs into the 66 block in place of the shorting bars and includes the sneak current fuse One unit is required per protected pair A ground bar is provided with the lightning protection units or can be ordered separately Comcode 901007120 Porta Systems is another supplier of surge protection devices Regardless of the type installed all lightning protectors located in the cross connect area must be grounded to System 25 s SPG via a No 6 AWG copper wire Transmission facilities voice pairs that extend out of building and are not included in the network interface may be installed by the TelCo or through other means for example by the building owner and or the property owner These facilities aerial or buried must be protected with voltage limiting devices and sneak current fuses The only exception to this rule is buried cable less than 140 feet long that is enclosed in a continuous metallic conduit from one building entrance to the other The conduit must be connected to an approved building ground at each end If single line sets are extended out of building primary protection devices for voice pairs should be used If MERLIN Communications System voice terminals are extended out of building the facilities must be protected with the TI Model 341 PEC 32918 Comcode 403865785 at each end Terminals J1 3 and J1 6 of the Model 341 should not be connected Maximum distance between a MERLIN System voice terminal and the S
60. 7 4 The and the number of bridging parties overwrite whatever was in positions 15 and 16 of the current display 2 70 Bridging of System Access Buttons Direct Group Calling DGC DGC calls arriving on SA buttons at a principal station can receive bridging treatment at a bridging station Direct Station Selection DSS Calls from DSS or Flex DSS buttons on the principal station are not accessible from bridged appearances Exclusion lf a principal or bridging station presses the EXCLUSION button during a call all other internal stations on the call will be dropped In addition Exclusion will prevent any other internal station from bridging onto the call Following Sign in and sign out procedures can be performed at the destination station on either an SA button or a BA button However since Following calls always arrive on SA buttons the destination station must have at least one SA button Following calls arriving at a principal SA button are accessible at bridged call appearances of that button Forwarding This feature is station oriented It can be activated and deactivated for a forwarding principal station only at an SA button on that station If forwarding is activated at a BA button on a bridging station it affects calls to that station only Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI If a station has HFAI activated internal calls arriving at this station on an SA button will auto answer However cal
61. Access Tandem Trunking Tie Trunks Trunk Groups Virtual Facilities 5 0 0 5 0 0 5 5 2 5 FEATURES AND SERVICES Data Features Data Features Table 2 D support the switched data services of the system Data services provide switched connections between analog and digital data endpoints Table 2 D Data Features FEATURE NAME MULTILINE TERMINAL FEATURE BUTTON LABEL TYPE Command Mode Communications Access Manager Data Call Setup Data Terminal Dialing Expert Mode Modem Pooling AT amp T STARLAN NETWORK Access Third Party Call Setup Transfer to Data DATA User Changeable Options 5 5 5 0 0 5 5 5 FEATURES AND SERVICES Attendant Features Attendant Features Table 2 E are available to the attendant using the Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTAC or the Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC and the optional Direct Extension Selector Console In addition most muitiline voice terminal station features are available to the attendant Table 2 E Attendant Features FEATURE NAME CONSOLE BUTTON FEATURE EL TYPE Attendant Call MEE START Attendant Camp On Attendant Cancel CANCEL Attendant Console Direct Trunk Attendant Console Switched Loop Attendant Direct Extension Selection Attendant Forced Release SLAC only FORCED RELEASE Attendant Join SLAC only JOIN Attendant Message Waiting DTAC ATT MSG Attendant Message Waiting SLAC ATTENDANT MESSAGE WAITING
62. Attendant Consoles cannot serve as principal stations Switched Loop Attendant Consoles cannot serve as either principal or bridging stations 2 69 FEATURES AND SERVICES Automatic Intercom Calls on Automatic Intercom buttons on the principal station are not accessible from bridged call appearances Automatic Route Selection ARS When a station user originates a call on a BA button and dials the ARS access code the call is completed according to the restrictions assigned to that station The restrictions of the principal and the other bridging stations have no effect Callback Queuing Calls originated on Bridged Access BA buttons can be queued On callback attempts only the originator will be rung all other appearances will only flash Any appearance in the bridging arrangement can be used to drop a queued call if no other station is off hook If both principal and bridging users are off hook on a call to a busy facility only the first one off hook can queue the call Calling Restrictions f a station goes off hook on a BA button and dials a number the call is completed according to the bridging station s restrictions and characteristics not the principal station s Two bridging stations or a bridging station and its principal station can attempt to originate a call on their corresponding SA and BA buttons at the same time This call is completed according to the calling restrictions of the station that went off hook first
63. CO trunk call that has been abandoned hears CO dial tone or receives CO intercept treatment until the CO disconnects 2 330 Transfer Music On Hold An administration item allows Music On Hold to be enabled or disabled for Special Hold Park Single line voice terminals cannot transfer parked calls Pickup A transferred call may be answered via the Pickup feature Remote Access Remote Access callers cannot use the Transfer feature Trunk To Trunk Transfer A trunk call may be transferred to another trunk Refer to the Trunk To Trunk Transfer feature description for additional information 2 331 FEATURES AND SERVICES Transfer To Data Description This feature allows multiline voice terminal users to originate or answer a call from their voice terminals and then establish a data connection by transferring the call to a data terminal Note that single line voice terminals can not be used to establish a data connection by transferring a call to a data endpoint Refer also to the overview of the system s data features provided in the description Data terminal calls can be set up from a multiline voice terminal with a DATA button The DATA button is associated by Data Dial Code DDC with a digital data endpoint A separate DATA button must be provided for each data terminal that the voice terminal can transfer calls to The DATA button status LED provides status indications for the data endpoint e Dark Data
64. Calls 1 Account Code Entry 1 and Last Number Dialed For Use as a Direct Trunk Attendant Console Six predefine Start Cancel Release Return On Don t Answer Return On Busy and Alarm Other 28 programmable default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 1 Account Code Entry l Attendant Message Waiting 1 Night Service 1 trunk appearances 15 as Personal Lines Group Call Coverage 1 Direct Facility Accesst 3 and Last HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Number Dialed 1 the first Attendant Console the first 15 trunks in the system are assigned button appearances on the console If there are fewer than 15 trunks the remaining buttons are not assigned On the second Console these trunks do not receive default assignments t On the first Attendant Console the first of the Direct Facility Pooled Access buttons defaults to loop start trunks the second to ground start trunks and the third to tie trunks For any trunk type not assigned in the system the associated button does not receive a default assignment On the second Console these buttons do not receive default assignments Adjunct e502A B Headset Adapters Note The 502B unit provides HFAI service on the headset I USE STATUS LEDs HANDSET PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS 34 TEST PROGRAM SWITCH ON SIDE TOUCH DIAL PAD RINGER VOLUME CONTROL ON SIDE MESSAGE MICROPHONE SPEAKERP
65. Circuit This circuit determines if a ground has been applied to the E lead Ground detector inputs come from the port circuits as an analog current to the 48 volt dc supply Its output is a port control point to the port I O circuit ePort IO Circuit This circuit consists of bus expanders for communication between the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the microprocessor ePort Circuits The four port circuits are identical except for port 3 where part of the E lead maintenance circuit is located Each port circuit consists of a codec with associated input and output line transformers analog operational amplifiers a power filter loop around transistors port control comparators a relay driver an electronic power feed device an E lead test maintenance circuit and surge protection circuits The codec converts the incoming 4 wire analog signal from the tie trunk to a PCM data signal The codec converts the incoming PCM data signal from the NPE to an analog signal Outgoing and incoming line transformers provide dc isolation to the tip and ring leads Analog operational amplifiers provide amplification and buffering for the codec and network and loop around gain compensation Filtered power is provided to the codec and amplifiers The loop arou
66. Code Entr Out of Building Stations Paging System 2 233 Cid ParkL2 238 S Personal Dial Code PDC Personal Lines 2 243 1 11 11 Pickupl2 245 J J j Pooled Facility Dial Access 2 247 Pooled Facility Direct Access 2 249 1 Power Failure Transfer PET Program Recall2 261 Remote Access 2 62 1 1 o Remote Administration Interface 2 266 Remote nitialization amp Maintenance Service 2 267 Repertory Dialing Send All Calls 2 270 Speaker 2 273 Speakerphone Adjunct Speed Dialing STARLAN NETWORK Access 2 283 Station Huntingl2 291 1 1 1 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR I2 293 Station to Station Message Waiting e Indication INDEX Features Continued Switched Loop Attenda System Administration System Maintenance Tandem Trunking 2 319 User Changeable Options Virtual Facilities 2 344 Features Table Flex DSSL2 147 Floor Plans And Layouts C T 8 m S 1 Following 2 171 Forced Account Code Entry FACE Release Attendant 2 39 Forwarding 274 FPDC Calls 2772___ J G Glossary U T Ground Start Button Trunk ZTN 6 Grounding Requirements 685 Grou p Calling Direct 2 136 Coverage 2 108 2 334 Group Select Buttons Groups Trunk Growth amp Rearrangement H Hands Free Answer On Intercom HEA1 Ringing Hardware Description Parameters Headset Adapter
67. Conference A station user can make conference calls on BA buttons using the normal conference feature operations When a call is held for conference by pressing the CONFERENCE button an idle System Access SA button or an idle System Access Originate Only button if available is automatically selected by the system for placing the new call If neither of these button types is idle the user can manually select a BA button or any other call appearance button on which to place the new call While a bridging station or principal is in the process of setting up a conference call the green status LED of the held call s BA button or SA button has a broken flutter indication Other bridging or principal stations that are actively bridged to the call have steadily lighted status LEDs stations that are not active on the call have winking green status LEDs indicating that the appearance is on hold Coverage Individual and Group An incoming call is given individual and or group coverage according to the coverage specified for the principal Calls appearing on BA buttons at the bridging stations are not extended to the coverage specified for those stations Display Call descriptor appears in position 15 of Screen 1 for a call containing more than two active parties position 16 contains the actual number of bridgers The number of parties is displayed at each terminal in a bridged call and is updated as the status changes Screen 1 324
68. DESCRIPTION 10 8utton MET Set 2991 C D05 The 10 Button MET set Figure 4 19 may be desk or wall mounted This set is available only on a reuse basis and is not orderable via the Delivery Operation Support System DOSS Contigurator The set comes equipped with the following e Handset Touch Tone Dial Pad DTMF Use and Status LEDs Tone Ringer Volume Control e Six Fixed Feature Buttons Recall Transfer Conference Hold Drop Message Five Programmable Feature Buttons each equipped with l Use and Status LEDs default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 and Last Number Dialed 1 Adjuncts e4A Speakerphone eMET Headset Adapter Note The Busy Lamp Field BLF version of this set unless modified will not work on System 25 4 46 HANDSET HARDWARE DESCRIPTION TOUCH TONE DIAL PAD SYSTEM ACCESS PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTONS MESSAGE WAITING DROP CONFERENCE TRANSFER HOLD RECALL INDICATOR BUTTON LAMPS Figure 4 19 10 Button MET Set 2991 05 4 47 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 10 Button MET Set With Built In Speakerphone 2993C04 The 10 Button MET set with BIS 4 20 can be desk or wall mounted This set is available only on a reuse basis and is not orderable via the Delivery Operation Support System DOSS Configurator The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch dial pad DTMF l Use and Status LEDs Built In Speakerphone Tone
69. Detail Recording or Call Accounting System in Section 2 Auxiliary Equipment Auxiliary equipment supports System 25 features and services The following equipment is supported Dictation Equipment refer to Dictation System Access in Section 2 External Alerting Equipment refer to in Section 2 Music Source Music On Hold refer to Music On Hold in Section 2 Paging Equipment refer to Paging System Access in Section 2 e Recorded Delay Announcement Equipment refer to Direct Group Calling Dela and Night Service Delay Announcements in Section 2 Optional Power Equipment Note 1 Auxiliary equipment connected to the ZTN78 Tip Ring Line CP must meet the following requirements AC impedance 600 ohms DC current less than 30 ma at 24 V dc Ringer Equivalent Number REN less than 1 20 Distance must not exceed 2000 feet Note 2 Off premises auxiliary equipment must be connected to the TN742 Analog Line CP If the auxiliary equipment requires a contact closure the TN763 Auxiliary Trunk CP must be used on premises service only 4 57 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Optional Power Equipment In addition to the power supplies already mentioned the following equipment can be used with System 25 Uninterruptible Power Supply The AT amp T 1KVA Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Model 010U111 PEC 2403 004 is recommended At maximum load the UPS will bridge a 5 minute power ou
70. Detector 47 27 Return Coverage On Don t Answer Attendant Ringing Abbreviated Rotary Telephone Route Selection 2 57 S 5101 Speakerphone 2 274 5102 Speakerphone 2 274 Sadey 14 SATL2 308 Connections L2 310 10 8 SAT Continued Off Premises Direct Connections 2 315 Off Premises Switched Connections 2 316 j On Premises Direct Connections 2 312 1 On Premises Switched Connections 2 314 Selection Dire Service Circuit ZTN85 Service Night 2 226 Touch Tone And Dial 2 328 1 1 1 O Setup Data Call 2 117 Signaling End To End 2 161 Manual 2 212 Signals Indicator Lamp 5 11 j Single Line Voice Terminal Connections 4 65 Single Line Voice Terminals 4 18 j Cable Distance Limitations 5 7 Connection Information 2 160 Single ring Reminder Partitioning Partitioning System Real Time Constraints Step By Step Call De crip ion Switched Ponce to T _ Source and Destination w a Speaker 2 273 Speakerphone 4 2 2 4 4 18 4 52 j Adai Connection 2 277 H 2 279 S101A S102AT Special Characters Used in Personal Speed Dialing Numbers 2 256 Used in Repertory Dialing Numbers 2 256 _ 1 Used in System Speed Dialing Numbers 2 280 Used in Virtual Facility Numbers 2 345 Special Ringback Specificatio
71. Dial Wink Start eNumber of digits to be received from CO on this trunk default 3 Hardware Requirements Each DID trunk requires a port on a TN753 DID Trunk CP 2 143 FEATURES AND SERVICES Directory Description This feature allows the user of a voice terminal where the Display feature is administered to search the system s integrated directory data base for the extension numbers associated with specific names Information resulting from the use of Directory is displayed on the voice terminal s screen The user enters Directory Mode from Normal Mode by pressing the DIRECTORY button The system presents the following display to prompt the user to enter a name using the dial pad buttons and then dial to mark the end of the search entry Screen 1 DIR ENTER NAME The dial pad buttons are labeled with all the necessary entry characters except as follows eQ is entered by pressing button 7 PRS eZ is entered by pressing button 9 WXY eSpace comma or dot is entered by pressing the button The directory prompt DIR ENTER NAME remains displayed on the screen until the user finishes entering the characters of the name and presses It is often unnecessary to enter a full name but whatever is entered must be terminated by The system then searches the directory data base for a match between the entered characters and the stored names If none is found the prompt is removed and NO MATCH FOUND is displayed Otherwise
72. EQUIPMENT TAE CONNECTOR BLOCK FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 4 23 Trunk Access Equipment TAE Connections HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Station Interconnect Panel SIP The Station Interconnect Panel SIP provides for the connection of the terminals voice and data peripheral equipment and some auxiliary equipment of the system to station port CPs This equipment includes voice terminals attendant consoles data terminals System Administration Terminal Digital Tape Unit and Call Accounting System The SIP is made up of 617A Panels and associated adapters 617A Panel The 617A Panel Figure 4 24 is metal plate with keyslot holes on each side for mounting on a backboard Each 617A Panel can hold eight Z210A1 or 858A Adapters each of which can accommodate six connections to the port circuits in the cabinets As many as five 617A Panels can be required for a maximum size system The adapters snap into prepunched holes on the 617A Panels Reattached spacer buttons keep adapters from touching the metal panels The cable rings located at the top of the 617A Panel route the building wiring cables to the adapters Purse lock clips hold the building wiring cables in place The white posts at the bottom of the 617A Panel guide the wiring from the 50A Fanning Strip to each column of adapters Preprinted boxes and numbers on the panel identify modular jacks for recordkeeping purposes Letters are marked on the boxes at the top of
73. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION t3 HOLD TRANSFER CONFERENCE c3 DROP MESSAGE I USE STATUS LEDS HANDSET c PROGRAMMABLE c PROGRAMMABLE PROGRAMMABLE SYSTEM ACCESS SYSTEM ACCESS TOUCH TONE DIAL PAD TONE RINGER VOLUME Figure 4 21 12 Button MET Set 7203M Multiline Voice Terminal Connection information Detailed connection information is provided under the heading later in this Section Maximum cabling distances from the system cabinets to multilane voice terminals is provided in Section 5 Technical Specifications Multiline Voice Terminal Feature Operations Refer to Multiline Terminal User Guide 555 530 703 for information about feature operation 4 51 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Voice Terminal Adjuncts The following adjuncts and associated power supplies are supported on multiline sets Headset Adapter for 10 Button MET sets refer to l Headset in Section 2 500A 502A 502B Headset Adapter for 12 Button MET sets and MERLIN System voice terminals refer to Adapter in Section 2 The 5026 must be used if Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI operation on the headset is desired for example typical Call Management System application e4A Speakerphone System for 25005 single line sets and 10 Button MET sets refer to l 5peakerphone Adjunct in Section 2 5101 5102 Speakerphone for 12 Bu
74. It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the on board microprocessor ePort Circuits The eight port circuits are identical Each port circuit consists of a codec balance network trunk interface unit and loop termination circuit The codec is a 4 wire circuit that converts the NPEs output to an analog signal Likewise it converts the analog signal from the Central Office CO to a PCM signal to the NPE The trunk interface unit contains a hybrid a 2 wire interface circuit and control circuitry The hybrid circuit converts the 4 wire analog signal from the codec to a 2 wire analog signal that is connected to the analog line by the 2 wire interface circuit The control circuitry controls loop current internal signal gain terminating resistance battery feed shutdown and battery reversal The circuit pack accepts dial pulse signaling The loop termination circuit provides a fixed impedance to the DID trunk 3 21 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PORT CIRCUIT TRUNK INTERFACE UNIT NPE 0 1 CIRCUIT ON BOARD 1 0 TO MICROPROCESSOR CIRCUIT CENTRAL OFFICE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT Figure 3 11 DID Trunk TN753 Unique Circuitry Ground Start Trunk ZTN76 The Ground Start Trunk CP Figure 3 12 interfaces eight central office trunks and the TDM bus The Ground Start Trunk has the following unique circuitry eGround Detector Circuit The ground detector
75. LAST DIALED buttons e Determine the busy status of pooled trunk groups e Determine feature button type To activate this feature the display set user must first leave Normal Mode and enter the Inspection Mode by pressing the INSPECT button The system presents the following prompt on the display screen Screen 1 INSPECT Then to inspect specific information the user presses the appropriate call appearance loop or feature button Note If the user presses INSPECT immediately after dialing a call the call may be disconnected a pause of several seconds is recommended Display Formats When the user presses the button to be inspected the INSPECT prompt is replaced by information about the button eAssigned Feature Button The name of the feature is displayed for example ACCT ENTRY SIGNAL DIRECTORY e Unassigned Feature Button NOT ASSIGNED is displayed eldle Call Appearance Button The type of call appearance is displayed for example SYS ACCESS PERS LINE 2 190 Inspection eActive Call Appearance Button The normal call information pertaining to the call is displayed If the display user is excluded EXCLUDED is displayed eFLEX DSS Button The stored number and the associated name are displayed If the button is not programmed FLEX DSS is displayed eREP DIAL Button The digits stored on the button are displayed If the button is not programmed REP DIAL is displayed eFACILITY Button The di
76. LEDs and ringer P for programming feature buttons e Built In Speakerphone With Volume Control Ringer Volume Control e Nine Fixed Feature Buttons with status LED Conference Speakerphone Drop Message Transfer HFAI Hold Microphone Recall e 34 Programmable Feature Buttons each equipped with 1 and status LEDS For General Use All programmable default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 27 Send All Calls 1 Account Code Entry 1 and Last Number Dialed 1 For Use as a Direct Trunk Attendant Console Six predefined Start Cancel Release Return On Don t Answer Return On Busy and Alarm Other 28 programmable default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 1 Account Code Entry 1 Attendant Message Waiting 1 Night Service 1 trunk appearances 15 as Personal Lines Group Call Coverage 1 Direct Facility Accesst 3 and Last Number Dialed 1 4 42 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION On the first Attendant Console the first 15 trunks in the system are assigned button appearances on the console If there are fewer than 15 trunks the remaining buttons are not assigned On the second Console these trunks do not receive default assignments T On the first Attendant Console the first of the Direct Facility Pooled Access buttons defaults to loop start trunks the second to ground start trunks and the third to tie tru
77. LOOP button SLAC only or on the Return On Don t Answer RTN DA button DTAC only Calls camped on at a busy voice terminal that are not answered within a specified time return to the Attendant Console on an idle LOOP button SLAC only or on the Return On Busy RTN BUSY button DTAC only If a SLAC is not available to incoming calls busy on another call in Position Busy mode etc a returning call remains in the console queue until the console can handle it If the Return buttons on a DTAC are busy an extended call remains at the called terminal until that button becomes idle Considerations Attendant Call Extending allows the attendant to utilize the additional attendant related features such as Attendant Splitting One Way Release Cancel Return On Don t Answer Return On Busy Forced Release SLAC Join SLAC and Source Destination SLAC For information on related Attendant Features Table 2 E refer to the individual feature descriptions Interactions The following feature interacts with Attendant Call Extending Forwarding Calls extended by an attendant to a forwarding station will be given normal Forwarding treatment Administration Requirements System eNumber of seconds before a Camped On call returns to the Attendant Console 1 120 or 0 for no Attendant Camp On default 30 eNumber of rings before unanswered call returns to the Attendant Console 1 31 default 5 FEATURES AND SERVICES At
78. O 62515 P O 62512 62506 62510 Tone Detector CP MERLIN Sys BIS VT MERLIN Sys Display VT MERLIN Sys HFAI VT Panel Part of SIP Emergency Trans Unit Adapter Acoustic Coupler MADU Interface Cord Adapter ADU Crossover Cord Power Panel Power Unit EIA Crossover Cord MADU Interface Cord Mod RS232 Adapt Male Mod RS232Adapt Zener Kit Asynchronous Data Unit MERLIN Sys VT Local Power Z7305H03B 003 Z7305H04C 003 27309 01 003 617 10 349 48 400 2 D8AM 87 346A 1 346A M7U 87 M48G 355A 355AF D181321 D181521 D181522 105105522 105105530 105196604 105211031 105336952 105336960 105336978 105341218 105341382 105355374 105400030 105402283 105471304 105517106 105517941 105518039 105528814 402988950 62511 62512 No PEG P O 62521 3167 34B 3166 22B 3165 10B 1020 S90 1020 S91 62520 3167 DSB 1205 010 62524 1207 030 1203 021 Rel 2 1203 020 Rel 2 P O 62521 8310 001 Auxiliary Trunk Interface Paging Dictation Fanning Strip CPU MEM CP 34 But MERLIN Sys BIS VT Black 22 But MERLIN Sys BIS VT Black 10 But MERLIN Sys BIS VT Black ACCESS Software CAM Software STARLAN ATL Interface 34 But MERLIN Sys BIS VT With Display Black VMS Software MERLIN Sys Headset Adapter CMS Software Advanced Admin Software UNIX
79. Options Once a user has selected an option to be changed a menu of valid settings for this option is displayed lt Yes gt lt No gt etc An is displayed beneath the current setting of the options or beneath an option that may have been changed but not yet enabled For all options except lt Speed gt see below settings may be selected either by moving the cursor using the space bar beneath the item desired and then pressing RETURN or by typing the single letter code associated with that setting The user is then returned to the Change Options menu to make additional changes if required Changing Data Port Speed The procedure for changing Speed settings is different from the procedure for changing the settings of other options Within the Speed menu the user may find that several values are marked with Xs To change a speed move the cursor beneath each value to be changed and type to add the value or to delete it Once the new settings have been marked press RETURN to translate the plus and minus signs to their proper X values and then type x to lt eXit gt from the Speed menu and return to the Change Options menu For example The user enters the Speed menu and finds the following settings active eXit low 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 auto X X X X X To remove 9600 baud and activate autobaud enter under 9600 and under auto as shown below
80. PROGRAM Switch to its P position except on SLACs or by dialing access code 4 at any display set General Rules for Normal Mode display tracks character by character whatever a user enters from the dial pad buttons Entries that exceed the capacity of Screen 1 automatically overflow to Screen 2 when this occurs a continuation symbol appears in position 1 of Screen 2 f dialed characters form a valid Personal Dial Code PDC Data Dial Code DDC or Direct Group Calling DGC access code the Display ID from the System s integrated directory is shown f dialed characters form a valid feature access code requiring additional input such as for Account Code Entry a feature prompt is displayed the additional input is tracked character by character f dialed characters form a valid Personal Speed Dialing code the number stored under the code is displayed if no number is stored NO INFORMATION is displayed eThe user can alternate between Screen 1 and Screen 2 by pressing the SCROLL button Pressing SCROLL has no effect if Screen 2 is empty 2 150 Display eAny information stored by the terminal user Repertory Dialing numbers Personal Speed Dialing numbers etc will be displayed when the feature is used Any information stored by the System Administrator Automatic Route Selection ARS routing information System Speed Dialing numbers etc is not displayed to the terminal user e Di
81. Plan for System 25 is based on the concept that whenever possible calls should be placed to individuals rather than to pieces of equipment To implement this concept individuals are assigned PDCs and are allowed to sign in those PDCs at other terminals The system automatically routes the call to the home terminal or signed into terminal This significantly increases the probability of reaching the called party In addition the Dial Plan is built on a flexible numbering scheme that allows the number of dialed digits to match assigned PDCs 2 3 4 digit dial plans and to be administered to match telephone company assigned Direct Inward Dialing numbers OVERVIEW Efficient internal call termination is supported with the following features e Distinctive Ringing provides various patterns of ringing to allow users to distinguish outside calls inside calls callbacks on queued calls and calls set up at an associated data terminal eHands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI allows Speakerphone and HFAI terminals to auto answer inside or attendant extended calls With HFAI active the set generates a tone burst over its speaker to alert the calling and called party of the call completion Both parties may then converse no action by the called party is required Frequently the first termination point for a call is not its final destination To support internal call movement System 25 provides the following features e Bridging of System Access and
82. Premises Distribution System wiring Data connections can be made between two digital data modules asynchronous data units between two analog modems or between an analog modem and a digital data module System 25 also provides access to STARLAN NETWORKs Release 2 of STARLAN only The system has data modules that provide an RS 232 interface for full duplex asynchronous transmission of data up to 19 200 bps and an integrated 212A compatible modem pool resource System 255 Integrated Solution offers customers a unique package of integrated call management switch management and office automation applications The Integrated Solution is a set of application programs that run on a Master Controller UNIX amp PC The applications include Advanced Administration Software AAS which permits customers to administer System 25 s features themselves Call Accounting System CAS and an integrated Voice Message System VMS that provides call coverage leave word calling automated attendant and voice mail services In addition a number of generic office automation applications word processing data base management and spreadsheet are also available for the Integrated Solution these applications may be run simultaneously with the VMS and CAS applications System 25 supports the following e Trunk and Network Facilities Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF and Dial Pulse Signaling on incoming and outgoing trunks dial pulse only on DID trunks
83. SLAC The Position Busy feature is automatically assigned to a button position see when the console is administered In a one console configuration however the feature is enabled only if a multiline voice terminal in the system is administered as a receiver of calls from the common queue while the console is unavailable If this is not done the button should be reassigned to another of the permissible features In a two console configuration an attendant in Position Busy mode will be covered by the other attendant Only one console can be in Position Busy mode at a time 2 28 Attendant Console Switched Loop Call Types The following types of attendant seeking calls are sent to the common queue and then directed to an idle LOOP button at a console Incoming trunk calls that are administered to ring in the queue Dial Operator calls placed from inside stations by dialing 0 Following calls signed in at the console Calls to Floating PDCs FPDCs that are not signed in at a specific station Direct Inward Dialing DID calls to numbers that are not assigned to specific stations e Attendant DID calls Calls to the attendants PDC e Coverage calls for which the common queue is a covering receiver e Returning calls An incoming trunk connected directly to a DGC group can also be assigned to the Attendant Queue Calls ringing simultaneously at the DGC group and at the console will be connected to the facility that ans
84. SLAC has five fixed line appearance or LOOP buttons where all incoming calls are answered Each button has a red l use LED and a green status LED These buttons represent voice links loops between the console and the switch The loops also provide the paths for outgoing calls In addition to the LOOP buttons and standard multiline terminal buttons HOLD TRANSFER etc the console is equipped with the following feature buttons that provide unique attendant functions On the deluxe SLAC all of these buttons have both l use and status LEDs on the basic SLAC only the buttons specifically noted have LEDs eStart START Initiates the call extending process by placing a caller on hold on the Source button and providing internal dial tone to the attendant eCancel CANCEL Terminates the Start operation and reconnects the attendant to the calling party on the Source button eRelease RELEASE Releases the attendant from an active call and completes the call extending process eSource SOURCE Reconnects the attendant to the calling party after call has been initiated to the called party but before the two parties have been connected together i use and status LEDs on basic SLAC e Destination DEST Connects the attendant to the called party again after the attendant has operated the Source button to speak to the calling party l use and status LEDs on basic SLAC eJoin JOIN Joins together in a 3 way connection
85. Service Circuit e Status LEDs Port CPs Red on several seconds during power up and test Off with test pass After test pass On if fault in CP is subsequently detected Green On indicates resource available port is translated Yellow On indicates a call in progress Off when not in use All LEDs Off CP is not translated CPU MEM CP Green status LED only for several seconds during power up and test then lamp flashes to indicate an OK state Steady Off or On indicates a problem 4 12 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION System Resource CPs Service Circuit CP Similar to port CPs except yellow LED flashes to show system clock is active and is steadily On when a tone receiver is in use Off indicates a problem Modem Pool and Tone Detector CPs Same as Port CPs 4 13 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Terminal Equipment Terminal equipment is connected to System 25 station voice or data ports It is made up of the following groups eVoice Terminals Single Line Multiline MERLIN amp Communications System sets and MET sets eVoice Terminal Adjuncts eAttendant Consoles eAsynchronous Data Units for interface with data terminals This subsection provides information on all components in each group or contains references to the Section where information can be found Voice Terminals System 25 supports a wide range of voice terminals
86. Station Hunting Description This feature provides linear circular or combinational hunting sequences for calls to busy single line voice terminals and data terminals Calls to a busy terminal may hunt to only one other terminal however up to five terminals may hunt to the same terminal Although hunting is not available to or from multiline terminals single line terminals may have their calls covered by multiline terminals Station Hunting takes precedence over Coverage Calls to a single line voice terminal that is assigned both Station Hunting and Coverage will first hunt If no hunted to station is available the call goes to coverage The following are examples of the three types of hunting allowed eLinear Hunting Example Terminals x y and z are arranged for linear hunting as follows 1 Terminal x hunts to Terminal y 2 Terminal y hunts to Terminal z and 3 Terminal z does not hunt An incoming call to a busy terminal in the chain will hunt in one direction only Hunting will be toward the terminal that does not hunt e Circular Hunting Example Terminals x y and z are arranged for circular hunting as follows 1 Terminal x hunts to Terminal y 2 Terminal y hunts to Terminal z and 3 Terminal z hunts to Terminal x An incoming call to a busy terminal in the chain hunts in one direction until it finds an idle terminal and then rings at that terminal Any coverage options assigned to that terminal will then
87. Stations OPS DID calls can be directed to OPS Paging System Access A DID call may access a paging zone This allows the user to dial in and utilize the Paging feature Dial restricting the paging code will block this interaction Personal Dial Codes DID calls will be redirected to PDCs signed in at other terminals in the system DID calls to an unassigned PDC or a FPDC that is not signed in will be either redirected to the attendant or receive Reorder Tone Pooled Facility Access Access to pooled facilities via DID is permitted This includes access to WATS FX tie trunks private lines dictation equipment and paging systems This access is provided by selecting facility access codes so that they will match DID numbers 2 142 Direct Inward Dialing DID Remote Access A valid DID number can be assigned for Remote Access calls into the system Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Only one SMDR record is produced if an outgoing call is originated by a DID trunk The STN field will contain the DID trunk s 4 digit number the FAC field will contain the facility access code of the trunk group used to complete the call and the CALLED NUMBER field will contain the called number Administration Requirements System e Send calls for unassigned DID numbers to the Attendant Console yes or no default yes eSet number of DID digits matched against dial codes 2 4 none default 3 Trunk Port eDID trunk type Immediate
88. System Administration is the process of managing the translations by making changes to modify system operation to meet customer requirements The System 25 Implernentation Manual describes how a system can be configured to meet specific customer needs Information about a desired configuration is recorded on a set of forms that are used when entering the initial system translations i e initializing the system These forms are filed in the Administration Records Binder and provide the basis for on going record keeping Modification of initial assignments can be made to meet changing customer needs The system provides an EIA RS 232 interface to a System Administration Terminal SAT the primary means of entering and modifying translations System 25 administration consists of e Centralized Administration Configuration of the system and assignment of feature related parameters including assignment of feature buttons on voice terminals Centralized Administration is performed via the SAT e Advanced Administration The Advanced Administration Software AAS package is a major improvement in system management It provides the System Administrator a user friendly powerful tool for accurately and quickly making changes in voice data terminal assignments coverage access codes and other system functions such as ARS Two sets of software are available for Advanced Administration One set operates on a PC6300 with 640K RAM and provides a
89. TWR Basic TT Wall Tel 3100 2TD Basic TT Desk Tel 4A Speakerphone Compatible 3178 SYS Basic TT Desk Tel with Message amp Recall Basic TT Desk Tel with Headset Jack 3100 ORD Basic Rotary Desk Tel 3100 ORW Basic Rotary Wall Tel 3100 2RD Basic Rotary Desk Tel 4A Speakerphone Compatible 3140 010 10 Button MET Set 3141 BIS 10 Button MET Set with Built in Speakerphone BIS Part of 3141 BIS 3141 BIS Transformer Kit of Parts 2500MMGB 2500MMGT 2554BM 25005 2500DMGC 2514 BMW 500MM 500BMPA 500SM 2991C05 2993C04 2012D D181245 103234472 103966255 103870267 103823555 103870416 103871018 103942146 102600517 DESCRIPTION 3143 12M 12 Buttom MET Set 3160 111 5 Buttom MERLIN Sys VT MAC30 Att 3161 172 10 Button MERLIN Sys VT Att 3161 161 MERLIN Sys HFAI VT 3162 412 34 But MERLIN Sys VT 3162 417 34 But Dlx MERLIN Sys VT MAC30 Att 3162 BIS MERLIN Sys BIS VT 3162 DIS MERLIN Sys VT with Display 3163 HFU MERLIN Sys Hands Free Unit Speakerphone 3164 HFA MERLIN Sys Headset Adapter 3165 10B 10 But MERLIN Sys BIS VT Black 3166 22B 22 But MERLIN Sys BIS VT Black 3167 34B 34 But MERLIN Sys BIS VT Black 3167 DSB 34 But MERLIN Sys BIS VT With Display Black 3170 OOM Single Line VT with Message Lamp amp Recall Button Acoustic Coupler PARTS INFORMATION APPARATUS CODE
90. The user may return to the held party by pressing the button associated with the held call The status LED lights steadily music is removed from the line and a talking connection is again established When a single line voice terminal user places hold by pressing the switchhook momentarily the calling party is connected to music or a recording The station may return to the held call by pressing the switchhook a second time The music is removed from the line and the held party is reconnected to the user Music On Hold is not invoked when a conference call is placed on hold or when the attendant Start facility is used to place a call on hold In addition Music On Hold is not provided for data calls or inside calls Considerations Music On Hold lets the waiting party know that he or she is still connected Users of equipment that rebroadcasts copyrighted music or other material may be required to obtain a copyright license from a third party such as ASCAP or BMI Interactions The following features interact with Music On Hold Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic Music On Hold is not provided when the attendant presses START Conference When a station user sets up a conference the other parties are put on special hold until being connected together If Music On Hold has been administered for the special hold condition the conferees hear music during the hold interval Direct Group Calling An incoming call t
91. Timeouts Tie Trunks For tie trunks only the talk signaling path is cut through when answer supervision is received from the distant end Thus there is no need to dial or wait additional seconds for timeout 2 197 FEATURES AND SERVICES Last Number Dialed Description Last Number Dialed automatically saves the last number dialed from a multiline voice terminal and allows the user to place the call again without manually redialing the number The feature is administered to a button on the terminal Both inside and outside calls can be made in this way The original call can be placed by manual dialing by operation of a programmed button or by Speed Dialing To use the feature the caller first gets dial tone and then presses the Last Number Dialed button LAST DIALED The and status LEDs of the button selected for originating the call for example System Access Loop or Personal Line light steadily if the Last Number Dialed button has an LED it lights momentarily The call proceeds in the normal way The number associated with the Last Number Dialed button remains saved even if the called party answers Only the dialing of a new number changes the state of the Last Number Dialed button the old number is then erased and the new one stored Considerations Last Number Dialed is a convenience feature that is especially valuable for redialing multi digit numbers that were first dialed manually from a terminal s pushbu
92. Tone Normal The tone heard by the calling party indicating that the called station is ringing repeated until the call is answered Ringback Tone Special see Call Waiting Ringback Tone For additional information refer to in Section 5 2 94 Call Waiting Call Waiting Description This feature allows a user at a busy voice terminal to be audibly alerted when another party is calling A voice terminal is considered busy if all its System Access SA buttons are in use multiline sets if it is off hook single line sets and if all coverage points are busy With Call Waiting the user hears a distinctive call waiting tone from the handset one time the caller hears special ringback tone repeated Calls from both inside stations and outside locations on non DID trunks receive call waiting treatment at stations administered for this feature The called party who hears call waiting tone has these options e Ignore the new call and continue with the current call e Terminate the current call hang up and answer the new call when it rings e Put the current call on hold and answer the new call A user at a busy single line terminal flashes the switchhook to hold the current call Dialing 9 then connects the user to the new call At a multiline voice terminal with all SA buttons busy the user can answer a waiting call on an idle SA Originate Only or Bridged Access BA button After putting the current call on hold with the HO
93. a SLAC the attendant merely lifts the handset to be connected to the ringing loop When the RTN BUSY button is busy at a DTAC the calling party will remain on hold if a loop is not available at a SLAC the returning call remains in the console queue The system will continue to attempt to ring the called station until the RTN BUSY button is idle or a loop is open When Attendant Camp On is not provided Camp On return time set to zero seconds calls released by the attendant to busy tone are returned to the console immediately Considerations Attendant Return Coverage On Busy allows the attendant to service calls not answered within specified time intervals This provides the calling party better service and results in fewer lost calls Interactions The following features interact with Attendant Return Coverage On Busy Attendant Camp On External calls that are released when Busy Tone is heard will be camped on Attendant Console Direct Trunk As long as an Attendant Console remains active the call will return to the attendant who extended it Attendant Console Switched Loop A returning call is directed from the common queue to a LOOP button In a two console system returning calls can be administered to go to the first attendant the second attendant either attendant or to the specific attendant who originated the call 2 48 Attendant Return Coverage On Busy Attendant Direct Extension Selection f a call to a Floati
94. account code The user receives reorder tone when an account code is required on a call but not entered Considerations FACE ensures that specified outgoing calls include information project client department etc to be used for accounting and billing purposes The voice terminal user cannot use the Account Code Entry feature button for forced entry This button is used with the Optional Account Code Entry feature only An account code entry cannot be forced for the following types of calls ePersonal Line calls e Direct Facility Access calls eRemote Access eCalls to 911 and the three ARS administered emergency numbers when using ARS FACE requirements apply to calls using these facilities and features e Repertory Dialing e Personal System Speed Dialing e ARS nonemergency and pooled facility access codes e Trunk calls using Conference or Transfer 2 8 Account Code Entry Forced The system does not check the validity of account codes It checks only for the proper number of digits or the code terminator Calls that do not require FACE can still be assigned an account code as in previous releases of System 25 Refer to the Account Code Entry Optional feature description in this manual for the procedures Interactions The following features interact with Forced Account Code Entry Bridging of System Access Buttons Calls made from Bridged Access BA buttons on a bridging station follow the FACE restr
95. agent stations to signal the following operational states eLogged Out CMS station not available to receive CMS calls this is the state an agent enters by pressing the LOGGED OUT button when going off duty e Available Ready to receive CMS calls entered by pressing the AVAILABLE button e After Call Work ACW Entered by pressing the ACW button so that the agent can complete work on the latest call and not be interrupted by new CMS calls CMS has two modes Night Service distinct from System 25 Night Service and Day Service When Night Service is active CMS routes calls to a VAU and disconnects them after the message is finished When the system is in Day Service a typical call receives the following treatment eCMS looks for an available agent in the main split assigned to the line group elf agents are available the call goes to the agent who has been idle the longest elf no agent is available CMS connects the call to a VAU for a delay message If an agent becomes available while the message is playing the call goes immediately to the agent elf the forced delay option is on during Day Service each call is connected to a VAU and played the entire message before being connected to an agent even if an agent is available FEATURES AND SERVICES e f no agent has become available by the end of the delay message CMS puts the call into the main split s queue of waiting calls If available on the System 25 Music o
96. agents The supervisor s terminal requires a Personal Line button for each CMS line to be monitored e Assist Allows an agent to send a visual LED signal to the CMS supervisor to request assistance The existing System 25 Station to Station Message Waiting feature is used for this purpose An MSG WAIT button status LED is required at both terminals in each agent to supervisor link 2 92 Call Management System CMS Considerations CMS is useful for businesses where particular groups or departments receive special types of calls in high volumes Members of such groups can be assigned to splits Call completion time is minimized with calls going directly to a split attendant assistance is not required CMS has the following maximum capacities 28 lines e4 line groups e28 lines in one group e28 agent positions e28 agents in one split The CMS supervisor can reassign agents to splits and splits to line groups without interrupting service Interactions Refer to the documentation supplied with the CMS for this information Administration Requirements Refer to the documentation supplied with the CMS for this information Hardware Requirements Refer to the documentation supplied with the CMS for this information 2 93 FEATURES AND SERVICES Call Progress Tones Call Progress tones provide audible feedback on the status of calls during call setup These tones are heard through the handset or the headset or the
97. and 300 FPDCs may be allocated in a system 2 130 Dial Plan Data Dial Codes DDCs At the time of installation each digital data endpoint will be assigned a Data Dial Code DDC that serves as its extension number A maximum of 104 DDCs may be allocated in a system Direct Inward Dial DID Number Assignments Each DID number is associated with a unique PDC floating or assigned a DGC access code a Remote Access point a DDC a pooled facility access code The code associated with a DID number is the last 2 3 or 4 digits of the DID number For example the code associated with the DID number NXX 2157 will be 57 157 or 2157 All dial codes in the system that are associated with DID numbers should have the same number of digits However there is no requirement that all PDCs DDCs DGC access codes or facility access codes be associated with DID numbers Voice Terminal Directed Features Directed Night Service DGC calls Personal Line Calls Manual Signaling Station Message Waiting Automatic Intercom and Outward Toll Restriction are associated with specific terminals stations not with PDCs This means that these features do not move with a PDC when it is signed in at another voice terminal 2 131 FEATURES AND SERVICES Dictation System Access Description This feature permits voice terminal users to access and control customer owned dictation equipment System 25 can provide an interface to dictation syste
98. and associated peripheral equipment Also included are specifications for temperature humidity air purity lighting electrical noise RFI suppression power grounding and lightning protection Floor Plans And Layouts Floor plan arrangements will vary depending on the available equipment area and anticipated system growth A typical floor plan is shown in The floor must be tiled or suitably sealed level and free from vibration Allow for a minimum unobstructed clearance of 7 feet above the floor throughout the equipment area Do not locate the equipment in areas eWhere it might be subjected to excessive vibrations or disturbed by moving equipment such as hand trucks and transporters eWhere noise levels may exceed 90 dB e Susceptible to flooding Maintain clear access to the equipment area for both installation and maintenance purposes The wall behind the system cabinet must be clear of all objects pictures shelves or windows that might interfere with system installation The entire area behind the cabinet and to the side as shown on must be reserved for the cross connect field and cable access Also room for system growth should be considered ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS BACKBOARD M 36 TERMINATION FIELD NOTE 4 SYSTEM TABLE 24 CABINETS FOOTPRINT Iu FRONT i NOTE 3 NOTES 1 115V 60 Hz 15 AMP OUTLETS HUBBELL 5262 OR EQU
99. are made bypassing the system and connecting terminals directly to the CO trunks System features and restrictions are not available during this time The system supports up to four Emergency Transfer Units ETUs Each ETU can provide up to five voice terminals with direct connection to CO trunks When the system connects to dial pulse trunks only rotary sets may be used to support Power Failure Transfer PFT When the system interfaces the CO via touch tone trunks touch tone single line voice terminals are used as PFT stations When power is restored the following will be restored to their previous state 1 Night Service mode on or off 2 User programmed Flex DSS numbers 3 PDCs signed in at a home station or an away station remain signed in there if Forwarding has been activated for a station it remains in effect 4 If a voice terminal has been removed not removed from a DGC group the terminal will remain in that state 5 User programmed Repertory Dialing numbers 6 All system station features programmed through system administration Considerations Power Failure Transfer provides emergency incoming and outgoing telecommunications service to a number of predesignated single line voice terminals This is particularly important for organizations providing public services such as fire police medical etc Hardware Requirements The 10B Emergency Transfer Unit ETU in supports up to five Power Failure
100. at an available SA button on the Night Service station regardless of the administered ring option Bridged appearances of this SA button will flash but not ring regardless of the administered ring option 2 71 FEATURES AND SERVICES Park If a station is active on a bridged call appearance and activates Park the call is parked on the Personal Dial Code PDC number of the principal station not of the bridging station If the parked call is not answered it will return on the principal s SA button Personal Speed Dialing Personal Speed Dialing is a station oriented feature If a station dials a Personal Speed Dialing code 20 39 while off hook on a BA button the system will handle this call exactly as if the code was dialed from this station s SA button Pickup Pickup is a station oriented feature Thus calls ringing at a principal SA button can be picked up by members of the principal s Pickup Group calls ringing at a BA button can be picked up by members of the bridging station s Pickup Group If a user dials the Group Pickup access code while active on a BA button the system interprets this as an attempt to pick up a call in the Pickup Group of the bridging station not of the principal station Calls ringing at either a principal SA button or an associated BA button can be picked up by using the Directed Pickup feature Pooled Facility Dial Access A station originating a call on a BA button and using a facility access
101. at the called station until the button is idle If a SLAC is not available to receive the returning call it stays in the common queue until it can be serviced To answer a returned call at a DTAC the attendant presses RTN DA if not selected by Ringing Line Preference The call can be reextended via the START button or Selector Console In either case the RTN DA button is idled as soon as the attendant releases To answer a returned call at a SLAC the attendant merely lifts the handset to be connected to the ringing loop Considerations Attendant Return Coverage On Don t Answer allows the attendant to service calls not answered within a specified number of rings This provides the calling party better service and results in fewer lost calls Interactions The following features interact with Attendant Return Coverage on Don t Answer Attendant Console Direct Trunk As long as an Attendant Console remains active the call will return to the attendant who extended it Attendant Console Switched Loop A returning call is directed from the common queue to a LOOP button In a two console system returning calls can be administered to go to the first attendant the second attendant either attendant or to the specific attendant who originated the call Attendant Direct Extension Selection f a call to a Floating PDC FPDC is returned to the attendant the FPDC s status LED on the Selector Console will flash during ringing and g
102. be used with CO cables or with exposed outside wiring such as aerial cables The Z3A series of ADUs offer the following features e Provide an interface to the digital switch from RS 232 devices e Increases the distance RS 232 signals can travel over standard twisted pair wiring Refer to Section 5 Technical Specification for distance limitations e Data and control signals can be transmitted 2 000 feet in asynchronous full duplex mode at speeds up to 19 200 bps The transmission speed automatically matches that of the attached RS 232 device e The dc isolation via opto couplers ensures high noise immunity resulting in very low error rates e variety of Z3As with different connectors allows easy connection to RS 232 terminals printers and host computers see Table 4 G e Most Z3As can be powered from the RS 232 interface The ADU requires 7 volts on pin 20 DTR to operate properly If the RS 232 equipment cannot meet this requirement a low voltage power transformer and adapter s must be connected Z3A5 ADUs always require supplemental power 4 54 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION analog single line voice terminal 2500 or 7100 series or a 7300H series multiline voice terminal Z3A5 ADU required can be connected to the ADU allowing the voice terminal and DTE to share a common wall jack and 4 pair cable run back to the SIP Note Neither off premises nor out of building service can be provided with ADUs For addi
103. be invoked If the hunt finds all terminals busy it will stop at the called terminal Any coverage options assigned to the called terminal will then be invoked eCombinational Hunting Example Terminals w x and y all hunt to Terminal z An incoming call to a busy w x or y Terminal will ring at Terminal z and any coverage options assigned Terminal z will be invoked If Terminal z is busy the call remains at the called terminal Any coverage options assigned the called terminal will then be invoked 2 291 FEATURES AND SERVICES Considerations Station Hunting provides several flexible alternatives to ensure that calls do not go unanswered Note that only calls to busy terminals will hunt once a call begins ringing at a terminal it will remain there unless picked up or covered Interactions The following features interact with Station Hunting Attendant Camp On When the attendant extends call to a busy terminal a hunt group the call hunts for an idle terminal If none is found the call Camps On to the called terminal Callback Queuing f all stations of a hunt group are busy the call queues only for the dialed station in the group Call Waiting f all members of a hunt group are busy and the originally dialed station has Call Waiting the caller hears special ringback until the station becomes available to answer the call Coverage Station Hunting initially overrides all coverage options When a call to a voic
104. below are voice terminal oriented associated with stations rather than PDCs and do not follow a user who signs in at another terminal e Automatic intercom Calls e Callback calls when a queued for facility becomes available e Calls ringing on Bridged Access BA buttons e Coverage calls e Directed Night Service calls e DGC Group Calls e Manual Signaling e Message Waiting indications e Outward Toll Restriction e Personal Line Calls e Returning calls 2 171 FEATURES AND SERVICES Calls Placed to A PDC Calls to a PDC that is not signed in at an away terminal are directed to the home terminal and receive that terminal s normal hunting or coverage treatment PDC is signed in at an away terminal calls placed to the PDC fall into of the following categories eThe general case calls placed from terminals other than the away terminal special case call placed from the away terminal 1 The General Case The call will first be directed to the away voice terminal Ringing will occur at the away terminal if it is an on hook single line voice terminal or if it is a multiline voice terminal with an idle System Access button A call unanswered at the away terminal will be directed back to the home terminal unless one of the following busy conditions exists at the home terminal 1 it is a multiline terminal with all System Access buttons busy and with no idle coverage receiver or 2 it is a single line
105. bus shows the equipment types that can be connected to the digital switch by the call processing and port circuit packs Analog Line TN742 Loop Start Trunk ZTN77 ATL Line ZTN79 MET Line TN735 Auxiliary Trunk TN763 STARLAN Interface ZTN84 Data Line TN726 Tie Trunk TN760B DID Trunk TN753 Tip Ring Line ZTN78 Ground Start Trunk ZTN76 Circuitry Common to AII Port CPs Eight port circuits are provided on most port circuit packs The Multibutton Electronic Telephone MET Line Tie Trunk and Auxiliary Trunk Circuit Packs each contain four port circuits The port circuits provide an interface between terminals trunks and the TDM bus The number of port circuit packs required varies according to customer requirements and equipment configuration Each of the System 25 port circuit packs contain a number of common elements see as well as the unique port circuits The common elements are as follows e Bus Buffers The bus buffers are the digital interface between the backplane TDM bus wires system bus and the on board circuitry data bus They also receive and distribute clock and frame signals e On Board Microprocessor With External RAM The on board processor does all low level functions such as scanning for changes and relay operations In general it carries out commands received from the Common Control and reports status changes to it The external RAM stores control channel information and port related information
106. busy this ensures that no redialing is necessary on the queued call If automatic queuing is not administered the caller hears reorder tone but can queue the call by the appropriate manual method Reorder tone is also returned if the busy trunks are not administered for dial access queuing or if all the queue slots are in use In these cases queuing cannot take place Callback Reservations When busy facilities are called both queue slots and queued for stations are reserved before they are actually seized by the calling stations Reservation of queue slots applies only to manual queuing in which the caller has a choice of activating callback queuing or not after hearing busy tone ensures that callers can elect to queue in the same order that they get busy tone not in the order that they press RECALL or dial 60 If a caller reserves or seizes the last available queue slot new callers will not be able to queue Reservation of stations means that the system marks stations busy to new calls until all their callbacks have been attempted Even if an SA button or a single line set which is equivalent to an SA button is idle it cannot receive a call while callback attempts remain However the station user can place calls 2 83 FEATURES AND SERVICES Considerations Callback Queuing saves time for users because they can avoid repeated redialing of busy numbers It allows trunks to be used more efficiently and can reduce the
107. call Central Office CO The location housing telephone switching equipment that provides local telephone service and access to toll facilities for long distance calling Central Office Exchanges The first three digits of a 7 digit public network telephone number These codes are numbered from 200 through 999 and are sometimes referred to as NNXs GLOSSARY Central Office Trunk A telecommunications channel that provides access from the system to the public network through the local central office Channel A communications path for transmitting voice and data Class of Service COS Parameters used to define voice terminal data Remote Access and trunk port capabilities and restrictions Common Control Switching Arrangement CCSA A private telecommunications network using dedicated trunks and a shared switching center for interconnecting company locations Confirmation Tone Three short bursts of tone followed by silence indicates that the feature activated deactivated or canceled has been accepted Console See Attendant Console Coverage Call A call that is redirected from the called party s personal dial code to an alternate answering position when certain criteria are met Coverage Path The order in which calls are redirected to alternate answering positions Coverage Point The attendant positions as a group Direct Group Call DGC group Coverage Receiver Group or a voice terminal extension design
108. call If the calling party hangs up first this is not necessary elf only the HFAI LED or neither LED is on The HFAI feature is disabled The call answering procedure is the same as for a standard MERLIN System set If during an HFAI call the user decides to pick up the handset the HFAI Mic or HFAI LED will turn off On an HFAI set the user is not permitted to revert to hands free operation Pressing the HFAI button while using the handset will simply disable the HFAI feature for subsequent calls A BIS set user may transfer a call from the handset to the speakerphone by pressing the SPEAKERPHONE button and hanging up Voice Terminals with Speakerphone or Headset Adjuncts These sets do not have an HFAI button To turn on the HFAI feature the user simply presses the AUTO ANS button the green status LED lights After HFAI is activated operation is exactly the same as for the BIS set except that the SPEAKERPHONE and MICROPHONE buttons and LEDs are on the HFU Note that the 502B Headset Adapter is required for HFAI operation with a headset as is usually desired in ACD operation The 502A Headset Adapter does not support HFAI operation 2 181 FEATURES AND SERVICES Voice Terminals without Speakerphone or Headset Adapters The HFAI feature is activated by pressing the AUTO ANS button A beep signal announces an incoming call and the SPEAKER LED lights A one way talking link is established from the caller to the termina
109. caller Considerations Park can be used whenever a user engaged on a call needs to go elsewhere and wishes to complete the call from another terminal Park also allows users to answer a call from any voice terminal when paged In order to use the Park feature a station must have at least one System Access button Interactions The following features interact with Park Attendant Direct Extension Selection Station to Station calls cannot be parked via the Park buttons on the Attendant Selector Console Attendant Position Busy f a call is parked on an attendant console and the attendant console enters Position Busy mode the parked call will return to the inactive console if not answered within the administered interval default 2 minutes If a call is parked on the Selector Console by a Switched Loop attendant and the SLAC is placed in the Position Busy mode the parked call will return to the other active attendant console if not answered within the administered interval Bridging of System Access Buttons call parked by a principal station having bridged call appearances at a bridging station must be retrieved by dialing 8 and the PDC of the principal station The principal station and the bridging station can enter the call without affecting its parked state If the call returns it can be answered at the principal station or on a bridged appearance If a bridging station is active on a bridged call appearance and activat
110. circuit determines if ground has been applied to the tip lead for incoming seizure It also senses tip ground on outgoing seizure indicating dial tone is present One ground sensor is used for each port circuit Input for the ground sensor comes from the port circuit as an analog current to the 48 volt dc supply The output of the ground sensor is a port control point to the port I O circuit 3 22 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PORT CIRCUIT 0 T PORT CIRCUIT NPE 0 NPE 1 TUN N PORT TO ON BOARD 1 0 CENTRAL MICROPROCESSOR CIRCUIT OFFICE GROUND DETECTOR PORT CIRCUIT 7 Figure 3 12 Ground Start Trunk ZTN76 Unique Circuitry ePort IO Circuit This circuit consists of bus expanders for communication between the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the on board microprocessor ePort Circuits The eight port circuits are identical Each port circuit consists of a coder decoder codec hybrid circuit line transformer relay driver and surge protection circuit The codec is a 4 wire circuit that converts the NPEs digital output to an analog signal Likewise it converts the analog signal from a central office trunk to a Pulse Code Modulated PCM data signal to the NPE The hybrid circ
111. connect field as shown in Section 6 ETU Power Failure Transfer connections are shown in Part a on the figure shows a single line voice terminal that has been connected as a Power Failure Transfer station In normal operation the Call Processor CP supplies 48V dc to the ETU The voice terminal is connected through the ETU to the station port CP and can support all calling activities The trunk connection through the ETU to the trunk port supports normal trunk Calls Part b on shows the ETU connections when a Power Failure Transfer has occurred The transfer is initiated by the removal of the 48V dc to the ETU All connections through the system are dropped and direct connections between PFT stations and CO trunks are established A contact closure toward the CO makes all DID trunks busy When the system is again able to process calls normal service is automatically restored A multiple ETU arrangement is shown in Figure 2 33 discussed earlier separate 48V dc control signals from the Call Processor are provided via legs 7 and 8 on Octopus cable C2 The 25 pair cable from the Analog Line CP provides connectivity for eight voice terminals at the Line input to the ETU Since the ETU supports only five PFT stations three of the voice terminals are wired straight through the ETU and are not switched during service interruptions A similar condition exists for the 25 pair cable D from the CO Trunk CP to the Trunk input of the ETU T
112. deep The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch Dial Pad not DTMF Use and Status LEDs Test Program Switch two positions T for testing operation of LEDs and ringer P for programming feature buttons Built in Speaker e Speaker Ringer Volume Control Six Fixed Feature Buttons Conference Hold Drop Speaker Transfer Recall Five Programmable Feature Buttons each equipped with l Use and Status LEDs default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 and Last Number Dialed l Adjuncts None Note This set does not have a Message button or Message LED 4 24 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION HANDSET PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS 5 WITH I USE AND STATUS LEDs TEST PROGRAM SWITCH ON SIDE CONFERENCE c3 TRANSFER SPEAKER RING VOLUME CONTROL DROP C1 HOLD ON SIDE XC qe RECALL SPEAKER Figure 4 8 7302H01D Voice Terminal 5 Button 4 25 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 7303H01D Voice Terminal 10 Button PEC 3161 172 The 7303H01D voice terminal can be desk or wall mounted and is about 7 inches wide 5 1 4 inches high and 8 1 2 inches deep The set comes equipped with the following e Handset e Touch Dial Pad not DTMF el Use and Status LEDs e Test Program Switch two positions T for testing operation of LEDs and ringer P for programming feature buttons e Built in Speaker eSpeaker Ringer Volume Control eSeven Fixed Feature Buttons wi
113. directory information is presented as shown in the following example Screen 1 D645 Wiggins G The D in position 1 indicates that the Directory Mode is active If the name is not the correct one the NEXT button allows the user to request that the next matched name be displayed This operation can be repeated As an alternative the user can narrow the search by entering additional letters followed by The additional letters are added to the end of the previously entered search string If a mistake is made the user can press DIRECTORY twice to exit and reenter the mode and try to enter the desired name again If the user reaches the end of a matched list NO MATCH FOUND is displayed The user can return to the first matched name by pressing NEXT again When the displayed name is the correct one the user can call the number by pressing the CALL button If the terminal is on hook the speakerphone will turn on automatically 2 144 Directory The user of a non attendant display set can exit from Directory Mode directly to Program Mode by moving the program switch on the left side of the terminal to position P However to reenter Directory the user must first go from Program to Normal and then press DIRECTORY The user can return from Directory Mode to either Normal Mode or Local Mode by any of the following actions ePress DIRECTORY again e Allow timeout to occur after 15 seconds with no operation of other buttons such as NEX
114. each column by the installer The letter A J and the corresponding preprinted row number 1 24 identify the port jacks For example Al identifies the modular jack located in column A row 1 Adapters Adapters that mount on the panel connect the following e Building wire runs terminated in modular jacks 25 pair connectors or unterminated eCables from the system cabinets terminated in modular jacks or 25 pair connectors The following adapters can be mounted on the 617A panel eZ210A Six 4 pair modular jacks to six 4 pair modular jacks One required per six voice terminals Connects to building wiring terminated in modular plugs e 858A Six 4 pair modular jacks to six 110 type cut down blocks One required per Six voice terminals Connects to unterminated building wiring The SIP equipment is furnished by the installer 4 61 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 12 5 PANELLJ CABLE ADAPTER CLIP 19 ADAPTER SET ID PANEL ID CABLE RING HOLDER Figure 4 24 617A Panel 4 62 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Figure 4 25 shows voice terminal connections to the system cabinets via the SIP Typically voice terminals are plugged into modular wall jacks that provide a cut down block for building wiring At the SIP 858A Adapters provide a cut down point for 4 pair wire runs An octopus cable PEC 2720 05P from a station CP provides 25 pair connectorized cabling to eight 4 pair modular jacks Each jack is terminated
115. embedded in the dialing sequence to indicate to call processing that additional tones must be sent prior to insertion of a conversion resource pooled modem into the connection The mark character is used to indicate that all the following digits are for end to end signaling This character is used to mark the boundary between the digits dialed to reach the distant endpoint and the digits used by the distant endpoint after it answers Repertory Dialing Repertory Dialing can be programmed on the 7300H series voice terminals End to End Signaling works properly with this feature Speed Dialing 8 must be stored to start End to End Signaling Virtual Facilities 8 must be stored to start End to End Signaling 2 161 FEATURES AND SERVICES Exclusion Description This feature allows multiline voice terminal users to keep other users with appearances of the same Personal Line from listening in on or interrupting their calls It can also be used in a Principal Station Bridging Station arrangement by either party to exclude other inside stations from a private call Exclusion allows users to exclude the attendant and other stations from an existing or held call or to drop other System 25 users from a call The EXCLUSION button status and l use LEDs are lighted steadily when the feature is invoked When an excluded call is placed on hold the EXCLUSION button s Use LED goes dark and the status LED winks with the LED of the held line
116. followed by the excess digits appear on Screen 2 Screen 1 91212555604512 Screen 2 345678 The displays generated for calls placed from System Access Personal Line and Pooled Facility buttons do not identify the type button used The trunk name is not displayed e Reception of Outside Calls When a display set user receives an outside trunk call the administered Display ID for the trunk appears For Direct Inward Dialing DID and dial in tie trunks only the extension number of the called station also appears Example of DID or dial in tie trunk call Screen 1 208 OUTSIDE Example of other trunk call Screen 1 BRANCH e Reception of Coverage or Redirected Calls When a display set user receives a call that was originally destined for another station the redirection descriptor gt appears in position 1 followed by the covered or originally called party number and name Screen 2 contains the calling party 2 153 FEATURES AND SERVICES number and name the call type designator appears in position 16 here b indicates that the covered party was busy Screen 1 gt 344 Carter L Screen 2 798 Bradshaw b e Reception of Returning orThird Party Calls Screen 1 identifies either where the call is returning from or the destination of the third party call Screen 2 presents identification of either the calling party on the returning call or the data terminal that set up the third party call Example of re
117. for speed parity permit mismatch and number of bits The parameter setup allows speeds of 2400 4800 9600 and Autobaud Find allows the user to search directory entries by name or group ID Restore displays the first 10 entries of the directory after a Find Print prints the entire contents of the directory on device LPT1 Setup provides the user with the setup screen Allows the user to view or change the following options communications port printer port speed parity character size return key code autotimer flow control extension numbers remote access enable remote access password and remote greeting 2 102 Conference Conference Description This feature allows up to five parties including the conference originator to participate in a conference call Any voice terminal user including operators at Direct Trunk Attendant Consoles and Switched Loop Attendant Consoles can set up conferences Refer to the description of for additional information on conferencing Multiline Voice Terminals Multiline voice terminal users can add another external or internal party to an existing call by pressing the CONFERENCE button This places the first party on Special Hold indicated by a broken flutter on the line appearance button and the system selects an idle SYSTEM ACCESS or LOOP Switched Loop Console button and provides system dial tone The user may dial the desired number or select anothe
118. g Dial Tone as soon as addressing is completed Busy Tone is provided if and only if the call cannot be completed to the intended voice terminal and cannot be provided coverage DID calls appear at System Access buttons on multiline voice terminals they do not have other button appearances These calls can be transferred to a covering station answered via Pickup directed to a DGC Group or given Station Hunting Following or Forwarding treatment A DID call is not automatically covered on the Attendant Console DID trunks may utilize DID Immediate Start or Wink Start protocols but must be dial pulse touch tone DID trunks are not supported Refer to Section 9 for a brief description of each of these trunk types Considerations Direct Inward Dialing frees the attendant from handling certain incoming calls 2 141 FEATURES AND SERVICES Interactions The following features interact with Direct inward Dialing Attendant Camp On DID calls are not provided Attendant Camp On treatment They will not appear on the Direct Trunk Attendant Console Return On Busy or Return On Don t Answer buttons or on the Switched Loop Attendant Console Loop buttons unless they are first answered at the attendant position and are subsequently extended by the attendant Attendant Direct Extension Selection Selector Console LEDs respond to DID calls just as they do for other outside calls When a user answers a DID call the associated LED on the Sel
119. illegal park is attempted but the queued call is not disconnected If parked conference members drop out leaving only a queued call it will be disconnected to prevent the illegal condition of a single queued call being parked Pickup A callback call cannot be picked up Recall Centrex The RECALL button can still be used to send switchhook flash to Centrex trunks If a conference exists with a queuable tone and a Centrex trunk the first push of RECALL queues a call A second push of RECALL is needed to send switchhook flash Selector Console Callbacks to the attendant do not flash on the Selector Console Send All Calls Callback attempts to the originator are not affected by Send All Calls Transfer Queued calls can be transferred Single line sets can transfer queued calls only before going on hook The transferring station must wait for the transferred to facility to answer before completing the transfer the transferred to facility then receives queuing tone Queued calls cannot be transferred to a tone ringing busy etc Administration Requirements System eAssign the maximum queue size for inside calls 0 to 64 default 64 e Assign the maximum queue size for outside calls 0 to 64 default 64 2 86 Callback Queuing Note It is highly recommended that queue size be set to either 0 or 64 not to some number in between eAssign the minimum time between callback attempts for inside calls 0 to 120 seconds defa
120. including industry standard touch tone single line sets and MERLIN System multiline sets In addition to providing basic telephone service placing and answering calls voice terminals can also be used to activate many system features The voice terminals supported by System 25 are listed in Table 4 0 and described in individual subsections HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Table 4 D Summary of Voice Terminals NT m RN TYPE MODEL DESCRIPTION INTERFACE 420 Memory Set with Built in Speakerphone 500MM Rotary Desk Set Single Line 5005 Rotary Desk Set Compatible Tip Ring with 4A Speakerphone Analog 554BMPA Rotary Wall Set 1 2500 Basic Touch Tone Desk Set 2500MMGT Basic Desk Set with Recall Button 2500DMGC Basic Desk Set with Message Waiting 2500SM Basic Desk Set Compatible with 4A Speakerphone 2514BMW Basic Desk Set with Headset Jack 2526BMWG Weatherproof Wall Set 2554BM Basic Wall Set 7101 Desk Wall Set MD 7302H01D 5 Button MERLIN Sys 7303H01D 10 Button Multiline 7305H01D 34 Button MD 7300H Series 7305H02D 34 Button Deluxe Hybrid 7305H03B BIS Set Built in Speakerphone 7305 04 BIS Set with Display 7309H01B HFAI Set Hands Free Answer on Intercom 7313H01A BIS 10 10 Button 7314H01A BIS 22 22 Button 7316H01A BIS 34 34 Button 7317H01A BIS 34D 34 Button with Display MET 2991 05 10 Desk Multiline 2991D05 10 Button Wall Hybrid 2993004 10 Button with BIS 7302M 12 Button Des
121. individual feature descriptions Interactions The following features interact with Switched Loop Attendant Console Attendant Console Direct Trunk The SLAC cannot operate in the same system with a Direct Trunk Attendant Console Bridging of System Access Buttons The SLAC cannot serve as a principal or a bridging station Callback Queuing The attendant can queue calls that are extended using the normal START RELEASE button operation However calls originated using only the START button no other call put on hold cannot be queued Call Originations Placing a new call from an active console causes interactions with the currently active call At a console that has the default Automatic Release feature the active call is dropped when the attendant presses a new LOOP button The new loop becomes the active one dial tone is provided and the attendant can dial a number If the optional Automatic Hold feature is administered the interrupted call is put on hold instead of being lost If a new call is originated with the START button or at the Selector Console the active call is split The current loop becomes the active loop for the new call The display shows the split call information This is the normal operating procedure for extending calls When a REP DIAL button is pressed while the console is active on a call the active party is not dropped or split and the display does not change If the active call is with an inside station
122. invoked at all coverage stations including the inactive attendant However if the Cover button is located in one of the two rightmost button columns coverage calls will not ring at these buttons e SLAC only All calls covered by the common queue will be directed to the active console Direct Group Calling If the inactive attendant is a member of a DGC Group calls directed to the group will be routed to the inactive attendant The attendant must dial 4 activate DGC Group Make Busy to busy out from the group Dialing 6 deactivates the Make Busy function Direct Inward Dialing All DID calls to unassigned DID numbers will be transferred to the active attendant 2 44 Attendant Position Busy Forwarding f PDC FPDC is signed at an inactive attendant console then calls to this PDC FPDC will go to the active attendant SLAC or to the inactive attendant DTAC only All calls to FPDCs not signed in will be transferred to the active attendant Night Service An inactive attendant that is a Directed Night Service receiver will receive Night Service calls Park A call parked on the inactive attendant console will return to the inactive console if the call times out calls parked via the Selector Console will return to the active console Personal Lines calls to trunks having an appearance in either of the two leftmost button columns of a DTAC will ring normally at the inactive console All calls to trunks ha
123. is appended to the SMDR call record and sent to the SMDR output channel Account Codes can contain up to 15 digits The system does not check the validity of account codes It only checks for the proper number of digits or the code terminator If the user is active on a call invoking the feature will drop the call FEATURES AND SERVICES Erroneous account codes that are not corrected before the last digit is entered are recorded and cannot be changed Partial account codes entered by going on hook before completing the entry are recorded and cannot be changed If before all digits have been entered 1 the user goes on hook 2 a button other than ACCT ENTRY is pressed or 3 30 seconds have elapsed since the feature was invoked the SMDR call record will show the digits dialed up to that point Optional Account Code Entry cannot be invoked for a call on hold Interactions The following features interact with Optional Account Code Entry Bridging of System Access Buttons Account codes can be entered for incoming or outgoing calls on Bridged Access buttons using normal feature operations Callback Queuing An account code entered before queuing is saved for SMDR Conference If more than one user attempts to enter an account code on a Conference Call the first to enter a code will prevail Display When a user activates the Account Code Entry feature by dialing 0 or pressing ACCT ENTRY the system displays the prompt A
124. is connected to Reorder or Dial Tone Pressing CANCEL will terminate the destination call and reconnect the attendant to the calling party Administering the Automatic Hold option instead of Automatic Release reduces the occurrence of accidentally dropped calls 2 46 Attendant Release Interactions The following feature interacts with Attendant Release Attendant Camp On External calls that are released when Busy Tone is heard will be camped on Administration Requirements System with SLAC Enable Automatic Hold feature yes for Automatic Hold or no for Automatic Release default no FEATURES AND SERVICES Attendant Return Coverage On Busy Description This feature allows a camped on call at a busy station or DGC Group to be returned to the attendant for service after a specified time period A camped on call not answered within 1 to 120 seconds administrable after the attendant releases the call will return to the console in one of the following ways the Return On Busy RTN BUSY button at a Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTAC LOOP button at a Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC To answer a returned call at a DTAC the attendant presses RTN BUSY if not selected by Ringing Line Preference A returned call can be reextended via the START button or a Selector Console button In either case the Return On Busy button is idled as soon as the attendant releases To answer a returned call at
125. is disconnected CONNECTED Call is connected Notifies user that the call connection is SPEED NNNN established and what the baud rate is Provided that Connection indication Data Port Action 77 is enabled FAR END data end points has failed COMPLETED and that dialing is completed requires one Placing or Specifies the session number 1 of the terminating a call data call to the calling party Bell sounds when message is displayed 2 126 Data Terminal Dialing Answering Endpoint When the dialed endpoint is alerted the user receives INCOMING CALL The called terminal will auto answer if it is turned on If the handshake succeeds a data connection is established and the CONNECTED message is displayed if so optioned If the handshake fails the user receives INCOMPATIBLE FAR END DISCONNECTED and the data endpoint returns to idle mode Considerations Data Terminal Dialing allows users to place data calls from their terminals using the Data Terminal Dialing feature and allows users to review the options administered for their data ports Interactions The following features interact with Data Terminal Dialing End To End Signaling See preceding text Modem Pooling Data calls between analog and digital endpoints require that a conversion resource TN758 be available If one is not the NO MODEM followed by TRY AGAIN message will be displayed Speed Dialing System Speed Diali
126. make busy signal from the CPE is present The inputs of the ground detector come from the port circuits as an analog current to the 48 volt dc supply Its output is a port control point to the port I O circuit e Port I O Circuit This circuit consists of bus expanders for communication between the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the on board microprocessor ePort Circuits The four port circuits are identical Each port circuit consists of a codec hybrid circuit line transformer relay driver battery polarity sensor and surge protection circuit The codec is a 4 wire circuit that converts the analog signal from the CPE to a PCM data signal It converts an incoming PCM data signal from the NPE to an analog signal The hybrid circuit converts the 4 wire analog signal from the codec to a 2 wire analog signal that is connected to the CPE by a line transformer The relay driver buffers and inverts the relay drive signals from the port 1 0 circuit so that a logic high input operates the appropriate relay The relays control circuitry that provide the proper interfaces for CPE The surge protection circuit provides lightning surge protection for the circuit pack The circuit pack supports both touch tone and dial pulse signaling Longitudinal
127. memory includes 1 M bytes of Read Only Memory ROM containing the power up tests the switch operating system and the system operation software In addition there are 192k bytes of protected RAM containing writable data storage for call processing The RAM is backed up by an on board trickle charge battery that maintains memory contents for up to two months Of the 192k RAM 32k is dedicated to translation data The remainder is dedicated to call status data and the operating system message queues eEIA Channels Four asynchronous RS 232 EIA ports 1 4 are included to permit communication with an administration terminal a Station Message Detail Recording SMDR device and digital tape unit The fourth port is reserved for future use Each port can support 300 1200 4800 or 9600 baud rates e Network Controller The network controller transmits control channel messages between the Call Processor and the port circuits over the TDM bus The controller also monitors System clocks The controller includes an 8 bit microprocessor that acts as a throttle passing messages between the Call Processor and the port board microprocessors FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TO EMERGENCY EIA CHANNELS TRANSFER UNIT RS 232C ETU SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL SERIAL 48 DC CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 ETU CONTROL BUS ERROR MICROPROCESSOR EIA EIA CIRCUITRY 68010 CONTROL CONTROL LED PROCESSOR RESET CI
128. number of trunks required for a system The feature is similar to the Busy to ldle Reminder feature but applies to different types of calls The two features can both be used to reduce redialing effort A single line voice terminal can queue only one call at a time Calls originated by using Personal Line Direct Facility Access and Direct Station Selection buttons cannot be queued On calls to busy facilities Callback Queuing occurs only after Coverage Following Forwarding and Hunting have been attempted Interactions The following features interact with Callback Queuing Account Code Entry An account code entered before queuing is saved for SMDR Attendant Camp On Trunk calls camped onto a station by an attendant are given priority over queued calls Multiple camp on calls are allowed per station Attendant Direct Extension Selection Callbacks to the attendant do not flash at the associated Selector Console Attendant Positions The attendant can queue calls that are extended using the normal START RELEASE button operation However calls originated using only the START button no other call put on hold cannot be queued Attendant Message Waiting An attendant active on a queued inside call can toggle the MESSAGE LED of the queued for station by pressing the ATTENDANT MESSAGE WAITING button Automatic Route Selection ARS Implementation of Callback Queuing affects ARS in three respects eOn hook ARS queuing is allo
129. of 500 Hz to 2500 Hz Loop Resistance e IN742 Loop resistance of up to 1300 ohms including the station eZTN78 Loop resistance of up to 100 ohms not including the station 2000 feet with No 24 AWG Connection Bandwidth 64 Kbits Steady State Noise Level The steady state noise level presented to any busy path does not exceed 23 dBrnc during the busy hour Impulse Noise The impulse noise is 0 count hits in 5 minutes at 55 dBrnc during the busy hour 5 20 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Analog Transmission Characteristics Contd Single Frequency Return Loss Talking State Station to station exceeds 12 dB Station to 4 wire trunk connection exceeds 14 dB Station to 2 wire trunk connection exceeds 12 dB Peak Noise Level Analog to analog 20 dBrnc Analog to digital 19 dBrnc Digital to analog 13 dBrnc 5 21 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Floor Plans And Layouts Table Top Space Wall Space Requirements Temperature and Humidity Air Purity Lighting Electrical Noise Radio Frequency Interference RFI AC Power Requirements Grounding Lightning Protection Figures Figure 6 1 Typical System 25 Equipment Area Floor Plan Figure 6 2 Typical System 25 Equipment Area Elevation Plan Figure 6 3 AC Power Distribution Multiple Cabinet System ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS This section provides information on floor and wall space requirements for System 25 cabinets
130. of common circuitry and two conversion resources The conversion resource port allows communications between two dissimilar endpoints For example the Pooled Modem CP enables a digital data endpoint linked to an ADU connected to a port on the Data Line CP TN726 to communicate with either a local analog data endpoint such as a personal computer with a modem or a remote host via a CO trunk connection Each port has two connections to the TDM bus one to the digital data endpoint via an ADU data module and the other to an analog endpoint 3 35 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 3 36 CONVERSION RESOURCE 0 TDM l BUS LEADS BUS BUFFERS NETWORK BUS CIRCUIT PACK ADDRESS LEADS ADDRESS AND DATA BUS ON BOARD MICRO PROCESSOR SERIAL CONTROL CHANNEL CONVERSION RESOURCE 1 GREEN YELLOW LEDS Figure 3 20 Pooled Modem TN758 eCommon Circuitry The Pooled Modem contains the same common circuitry as port CPs eConversion Resources The two conversion resources port circuits are identical and each contain the following Microprocessor Transmit and Receive l channel Controller TRIC Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter USART Data USART Clock DUCK Digital Signal Processor DSP The microprocessor controls an on board data module and modem This microprocessor communicates with the port circuit microprocessor over a serial control c
131. on the applications of these procedures refer to the feature description Analog data endpoints with modems are also assigned PDCs Digital data endpoints have Data Dial Codes DDCs Floating Personal Dial Codes FPDCs are assigned to users who do not have their own voice terminals These users can sign in their FPDCs at any station in the system and receive their calls there The system can be administered to force calls to FPDCs that are not signed in anywhere to ring at the Attendant Console s FPDCs can also be reserved and assigned to visitors who expect to receive calls Considerations The Personal Dial Code PDC feature provides flexibility for users and visitors Visitors once assigned an FPDC can inform callers and the attendant Calls can then be directed to the voice terminal where the FPDC is signed in Calls to FPDCs that are not signed in anywhere may be directed to the attendant for further handling Up to 200 PDCs and 300 FPDCs can be assigned in a system Interactions The following features interact with Personal Dial Code Coverage Calls to an FPDC signed in at a voice terminal receive the coverage of that terminal Unanswered calls to a PDC at an away terminal return to the home terminal and receive the home terminal s coverage treatment they do not receive the away terminal s coverage Direct Inward Dialing In systems with DID service PDCs FPDCs DGC access codes DDCs and facility access codes
132. on the non SLAC sets eAssign DIRECTORY CALL and NEXT buttons to all display sets including SLACs eFor each nonattendant display station 1 Is this a display station yes or no default no change to yes 2 Enable Automatic Incoming Call Identification yes or no default no If this feature is desired and Step 1 was set to yes no action is necessary if not desired set to no eSet up the system s integrated directory giving a Display ID for PDCs DDCs DGC groups DID trunk group other trunks and attendant PDC 0 Hardware Requirements To have display capability a station must be equipped with a Model 7305 04 Multiline Voice Terminal or a Model 7317H01A Multiline Voice Terminal BIS 34D 2 159 FEATURES AND SERVICES Distinctive Ringing Description This feature allows users to distinguish between different types of incoming calls The system provides the following types of ringing e repeated two burst tone indicates an outside call or a call extended by the attendant The two burst tone pattern is 0 4 seconds on 0 2 seconds off 0 6 seconds and 4 0 seconds off e A repeated one burst pattern indicates a call from an internal user The tone is one second on and three seconds off for multiline voice terminals and 1 2 seconds on and 4 seconds off for single line voice terminals e abbreviated alerting signal also called single ring reminder indicates to the off hook
133. parties that is separate them back into SOURCE and DEST For information on related Attendant Features Table 2 E refer to the individual feature descriptions 2 40 Attendant Message Waiting Attendant Message Waiting Description This feature allows the attendant to remotely control the status of Message LEDs on user stations The attendant can activate the Message LED of the station while either 1 ringing 2 receiving Busy Tone or 3 talking to a station The status of the Message LED of the called party is reflected by the green status LED of the Attendant Message Waiting button in any of these cases To activate light a users Message LED in any of these cases the attendant presses the Attendant Message Waiting button If the signaled voice terminal is not equipped with a Message LED the attendant s LED will remain dark Note The Attendant Message Waiting button on the Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTAC is labeled ATT MSG On the Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC the name is completely spelled out If the attendant presses the button a second or third time before hanging up the user s Message LED will turn Off and back On etc The red l Use LED associated with the Attendant Message Waiting button on the DTAC is inoperative The attendant can turn a user s Message LED on or off without disturbing the user by going off hook on a System Access or Loop button pressing the Attendant Message Waitin
134. restrictions applied to calls made on bridged appearances are those of the bridging station not those of the principal station System 25 has the following bridging capacities and limitations number of principal stations is limited only by the number of multiline sets on the system number of SA buttons a principal station have is limited only by the number of available buttons on the terminal eEach SA button on a principal station can have a bridged call appearance on up to 16 multiline voice terminals number of principals for which station has bridged call appearances is limited only by the number of available programmable buttons e The maximum number of parties active on a bridged call is five no more than two of these may be outside parties Incoming calls ring the principal station and its bridging stations according to ring options specified by the System Administrator The principal station can be administered to send or not send ringing to the bridging station both stations can be administered to receive immediate ring delayed ring or no ring for incoming calls Table 2 F summarizes the effect of different settings for these ring options Table 2 F Bridged Ringing Options Bridging Station Principal Station Immediate Ring Delayed Ring Administered Administered Administered Administered to send delayed ring ring on no answer Administered to send ring on busy When
135. ribbon cables between carriers maintain this impedance level over the full length of the bus One end of the bus is terminated to ground with a bus termination circuit card and the other end is terminated by a network on the ZTN129 CPU MEM CP Each circuit pack connects to the bus through a custom bus driver device The bus driver is a switchable constant current source so that even in the high output state there is no bus loading to cause reflections The current output of the drivers is adjusted so that logic high is 1 5 volts compared to a low of 0 volts Table 3 A TDM Bus Time Slots Time SlotNo Function TimeSlotNo Function 1209 Hz 5 Tones 17 1336 Hz RIMS Listen 1447 Hz RIMS Talk 1637 Hz Dial Tone Data Null Busy Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone Voice Null 22 253 Flexible Music on Hold 232 697 Hz 770 Hz 254 255 Not used 2 852 Hz These tones are used to generate touch tone signals FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION TOM CABINET 3 ON OFF Wh AC POWER 8 B Q 6 AWG D ENDE 72 tee BUILDING EXTENDER 444444444 GROUND CABLE eL mi WIRE wawan w CABINET 2 ee ae SIN b ss 6 AWG GROUND WIRE TO SINGLE POINT GROUND Figure 3 4 TDM Bus Three Cabinet System 3 8 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Port Circuits The port circuit packs listed below provide the link between trunks and external equipment and the TDM
136. speaker if Speakerphone or HFAI is activated Busy Tone slow pulsed tone indicating that all facilities for answering the call are in use Call Waiting Camp On Tone single or double burst of tone sent to a busy terminal to notify the user that a call is waiting A single tone indicates an inside call double tone indicates an outside trunk call Call Waiting Ringback Tone Special Ringback Tone Standard ring back with a short lower pitched tone added at the end indicates to the calling party that the called party is busy but has been given Call Waiting tone Call Waiting ringback is repeated until the call is answered Confirmation Tone Three short tones indicating that the system has accepted the instruction entered Dequeuing Tone Three short tones indicating that the called facility is now available and that the call is being completed Dial Tone A steady tone indicating that dialing or feature activation can begin Dialing Feedback Indicates that a digit has been dialed Queuing Tone Five short tones Indicates that no facility is currently available to place the call but that the call has been put into a callback queue and will be completed as soon as a facility becomes available Reorder Tone A fast pulsed tone indicating that all trunks are busy that a dialing error has occurred that the terminal is restricted from making this call or that an account code is required but has not been entered Ringback
137. station has Ringing Line Preference enabled and has a ringing bridged call appearance an on hook user is connected to the bridged appearance if the set goes off hook 2 205 FEATURES AND SERVICES Power Failure Cold Start On power up most multiline voice terminals will have no l use LED lit and will not draw dial tone until a button is pressed After this line selection should work as described above Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port ePrime Line Preference Assign Prime Line Preference default top SYSTEM ACCESS button or top LOOP button Switched Loop Attendant Console only eRinging Line Preference Assign Ringing Line Preference yes or no default yes 2 206 Line Status and l Use Indications Line Status and l Use Indications Description Provides users with a visual indication of the status of feature buttons and lines appearing at a their multiline terminals A green status LED and a red l Use LED are provided for each programmable button on most multiline voice terminals Table 2 K summarizes LED states and associated descriptions for line appearances Table 2 K LED Indications 1 Line Status Red LED Green LED On On If off hook facility is in use at this terminal If on hook busy to idle reminder is set Facility is busy or Feature has been activated Facility placed on hold Flashing Facility ringing call will be answered if user goes off hook Flashing Facility ringin
138. terminal users can signal another predesignated multiline voice terminal by pressing an associated Manual Signaling SIGNAL button A single tone burst is provided at the signaled terminal The signaling voice terminal also receives the tone and can use this feature while in any call state No LED indication is associated with the Manual Signaling feature When the Manual Signaling feature is used while the called station is ringing on another call no audible signal is received by either the signaling or the called voice terminal The duration of the single burst of signaling will always be the same regardless of how long SIGNAL is pressed The signal is repeated each time the button is pressed Considerations Manual Signaling allows a user to signal another voice terminal without calling the terminal The meaning of the signal may be prearranged between the sending and the receiving parties Only multiline terminals may be signaled Interactions The following features interact with Manual Signaling Display A display set receiving manual signaling from another station has SIG in positions 1 3 The name of the signaling party if available or the extension number of the station from which the signal was sent appears in positions 6 14 Screen 1 SIG Borden L The message is displayed for 5 seconds or until the user selects another button or receives a call The signaling party has no display for this feature External Alerts Manua
139. the DIAL line to indicate to call processing that the remaining digits are to be sent to the far end prior to insertion of the conversion resource into the connection The mark character marks the boundary between the digits dialed to reach a distant endpoint and the digits used by that distant endpoint after it has answered Pause characters may and usually should follow a mark character An example using a mark character and several pause characters is shown below Dashes are included for readability Examples of dialing are as follows DIAL 3478 9 1 201 946 8123 5678 9 946 8123 5678 137 110 Call Disposition Call progress messages corresponding to call progress tones provided to voice terminals are listed in Table 2 1 The message supplied indicating reorder busy ringback depends on the disposition of the call 1 When ringback is received the displayed message is RINGING internal calls only For outside calls the corresponding call progress message is DIALING 2 f the endpoint answers the displayed message is ANSWERED internal calls only Then if the handshake succeeds a data connection is established For outside calls when the system has finished dialing the message COMPLETED is displayed 3 If the handshake fails because a connection cannot be established between endpoints e g a port optioned at 9600 baud attempts to talk to a conversi
140. the call on hold Bridging of System Access Buttons A principal or bridging station user who is active on a bridged call can hold the call by pressing the HOLD button If there is still a bridging or principal station active on the call the green status LEDs of all associated System Access SA and Bridged Access BA buttons remain lighted steadily If no other principal or bridging station is active on the call the green status LEDs of all associated SA and BA buttons wink Any of the principal or bridging stations can enter the held call unless Exclusion has been activated or the maximum number of parties are already connected to the conversation Exclusion A call can be placed on hold after Exclusion is invoked The status LED of the line appearance button and the Exclusion button will wink 2 188 Hold Music On Hold held party on an outside line will receive Music On Hold if provided Personal Lines A Personal Line cannot be placed on hold if any other stations are also off hook on that line Remote Access Remote Access callers cannot use the Hold feature 2 189 FEATURES AND SERVICES Inspection Description This feature enables the user at any voice terminal administered for the Display feature to perform the following functions e View incoming call identification messages even while busy on another call e View information about held or bridged calls e Examine information stored on REP DIAL FLEX DSS and
141. the terminal returns to the Command Mode entry level menu Note Typing the capital letter found within a menu will select that item and move the user up or down the menu tree For example the user simply enters X or X lower case to lt eXit gt the Options menu shown above and return to the entry level menu Changing Options General When on the Options Menu the user selects Change options either by moving the cursor with the space bar beneath Change options and pressing RETURN or by typing the single letter code c associated with that item If the user selects Change options from the Options menu the first half of the Change Options menu is displayed as shown below and on Figure 2 55 exit Speed lt Parity gt lt permit Mismatch gt local Echo Others If the user selects Others the second half of the Change Options menu is displayed exit Answer text Conn ind Recall seq Others If the user selects Others from the second half of the menu the first half of the Change Options menu is redisplayed In this way users can toggle back and forth between the first and second halves of this menu Since these two lines are actually two halves of a single menu users may select a particular menu item while active on either half of the menu For example users who are active on the first half of the menu may select Answer text by typing a 2 340 User Changeable
142. this is the normal call extending procedure elf the Automatic Hold feature is enabled press another LOOP button to place a new call the first call goes on hold elf the console does not have Automatic Hold that is it has the default Automatic Release use the Hold button to put the active call on hold then select a new loop to place a new call Dual Console Operation A System 25 can be equipped with up to two SLACs which operate simultaneously when both are in service Both consoles can receive the same types of calls or each can be administered to receive only certain types When one console is out of service see Position Busy below most calls are directed to the other Either or both consoles can function as a message center Inside users can reach either attendant by dialing 0 or a particular one by dialing the attendants PDC DID callers can use the Attendant s private DID number or the common queue Position Busy Operation of the Position Busy button by the attendant makes the console unavailable to most incoming calls from the common queue and directs the calls to another answering station The only types of calls that are not diverted by Position Busy are Attendant DID DGC and PDC calls The placing of outgoing calls is not affected When the Position Busy condition is active the green status lamp of the button lights steadily Position Busy is similar to the Send All Calls feature which is not administrable on the
143. to 28 digits in length Programming the number is accomplished from the user s voice terminal Programming procedures and other information can be found in the Program feature description Should the user attempt to enter more than 28 digits Reorder Tone will be given The user can press REP DIAL under any of the following conditions 1 When off hook receiving Dial Tone 2 When off hook on a call on which more dialed digits are expected 3 When off hook on a call and connected to an outgoing trunk End to End Signaling might apply in this case 4 After pressing ACCT ENTRY or dialing the Account Code Entry access code When REP DIAL is pressed the button s status LED lights briefly and then goes dark Considerations Repertory Dialing simplifies dialing long or frequently called numbers and allows one button access to many features Interactions The following features interact with Repertory Dialing Account Code Entry An Account Code may be stored on a REP DIAL button The REP DIAL button should be pressed at the point where the account code would normally be dialed Bridging of System Access Buttons f a station user selects a bridged appearance for an outgoing call and then presses a REP DIAL button the digits programmed into the button are outpulsed as they would be if the user had selected of the station s own System Access buttons Calling Restrictions user can not use Repertory Dialing to access a
144. to interface to System 25 A port on a ZTN78 Tip Ring Line or TN742 Analog Line CP is the preferred interface if the dictation equipment can be optioned for a station port A port on a TN763 Auxiliary Trunk CP and its associated equipment must be used if the dictation system requires a separate contact closure for proper operation 2 132 Dictation System Access Voice Terminal Port eAssign DSS access buttons as desired Hardware Requirements Customer provided dictation equipment suitable for connection to a telephone system Port on a ZTN78 TN742 TN763 as required If the equipment requires a contact closure the TN763 and supporting equipment must be used Detailed connection information is provided in Figure 2 15 Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters are provided under the heading in Section 4 of this manual SYSTEM 25 CABI NET PART OF OCTOPUS PART OF DI CTATI ON EQUI PMENT NOTE LEGEND TN742 ANALOG LINE CP ZIN78 TIP RING LINE CP TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C5 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE u FURNISHED BY INSTALLER NOTE IF CUSTOMER DICTATION EQUIPMENT REQUIRES A CONTACT CLOSURE A TN763 AUXILIARY TRUNK CP MUST BE USED REFER TO THE PAGING SYSTEM ACCESS FEATURE DESCRIPTION FOR TYPICAL CONNECTION INFORMATI ON
145. to the user s normal station Considerations External Alerting enhances user ability to recognize incoming calls Noisy environments large areas and outside locations are candidates for external alerting devices Interactions The following features interact with External Alerts Manual Signaling Manual Signaling will not activate an external alerting device Night Service When the system is in Trunk Answer f rem Any Station TAAS Night Service mode an incoming attendant seeking call will activate the Night Service alerting device Power Failure Transfer When the system is in the power failure transfer mode the external alerting devices are disabled Administration Requirements Special Feature Port e An external alert operating as the endpoint device on a station line requires a port assignment on a ZTN78 Tip Ring Line or TN742 Analog Line CP Specify special feature port type 253 An external alerting device controlled from a Supplemental Alert Adapter operates on the same line as the associated terminal and requires no additional port assignment e Specify the PDC of the associated station or O if alert is used with TAAS Night Service 2 168 External Alerts Hardware Requirements Order line activated alerting devices 0 bells as required An alerting device operating on a line separate from a terminal requires a port interface on a ZTN78 or TN742 Refer to Figure 2 19 for connection information O
146. to two voice terminals An erroneous or inconsistent data entry is disallowed and an error message is provided e Causes the translation data to be downloaded command to an optional Digital Tape Unit DTU Maintenance Software The maintenance software provides automatic periodic testing of maintenance objects within the system as well as consistency tests among the call status tables within the system In addition demand testing is initiated when the system detects a condition requiring a need for testing Software tables are provided for storing error records The records can be accessed by maintenance personnel via the SAT A Permanent System Alarm a serious error causes an alarm indicator on the attendant console to light and an error record to be stored in the error table 3 38 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Memory Allocation The system software like the hardware is identified by release and version number Each version identifies a particular memory configuration for the release number Main memory is located in the Common Control circuitry that is the CPU MEM Circuit Pack Real Time Constraints Real time constraints are a function of the speed of the common control circuitry and the traffic load The switch is designed so that many time consuming and repetitious functions are performed by processors in the port and service circuit packs thus relieving the common control circuits Traffic load defined as the sum of st
147. to use the ARS feature which should result in reduced toll charges Interactions The following features interact with Calling Restrictions Automatic Route Selection The use of the ARS feature will not allow users to avoid restrictions Outward Restriction and Toll Restriction when administered can prevent calls originating at associated voice terminals from routing via ARS Facility access restrictions however are circumvented Bridging of System Access Buttons f a station goes off hook on a Bridged Access BA button and dials a number the call is completed according to the bridging station s restrictions and characteristics not those of the principal station s Two bridging stations or a bridging station and its principal station can attempt to originate a call on their corresponding System Access SA and BA buttons at the same time This call is completed according to the calling restrictions of the station that went off hook first Callback Queuing Restrictions in effect at the time a call is originated also apply to the retry attempt Forwarding When Forwarding to an outside station is initiated the system will ensure that the forwarding does not violate any calling restrictions applied to the forwarding station 2 89 FEATURES AND SERVICES Pooled Facility Direct Access Toll restricted stations receive standard toll restriction treatment all Direct Facility Access FACILITY button calls Personal Line
148. tone and the called party receives standard ringing The status LED associated with the button is steadily lit at the calling voice terminal and flashing at the called voice terminal To answer an Automatic Intercom call the called party presses AUTO ICOM not necessary with Ringing Line Preference and goes off hook The AUTO ICOM status LED lights steadily whenever the other party is off hook This provides each party with a station busy indication for the other To activate the busy to idle reminder the user can press AUTO ICOM remaining on hook A short burst of tone is provided when the other party goes on hook The user can then go off hook and the call will be placed the user does not press the AUTO ICOM button again Pressing AUTO ICOM to invoke the busy to idle reminder overrides Prime Line Preference Once activated the feature can only be canceled by preelection of another button or answering an incoming call See the Busy to ldle Reminder feature description for more information At a Switched Loop Attendant Console operation of an AUTO ICOM button seizes an idle loop button for the outgoing call An incoming Automatic Intercom call arrives on a loop button and does not flash at the AUTO ICOM button of the console Considerations The intercom feature should not be confused with ordinary station to station calling inside the system using dialed PDCs With Automatic Intercom users who frequently call each other can do so
149. way and two way trunks the first number listed under Calling Traffic is the number of two way trunks required the second number is the number of one way trunks required 2 For systems with just two way trunks add the two numbers listed under Calling Traffic to determine the number of trunks required 5 18 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Analog Transmission Characteristics Frequency Response Station To Station or Station To CO Trunk relative to loss at 1 kHz FREQUENCY LOSS 60 Hz 200 Hz 300 3000 Hz 3200 Hz 3400 Hz Insertion Loss CONNECTION TYPE LOSS Standard Station to Standard Station 6 dB Standard Station to Extended Off Premises Station 3 dB Extended Off Prem Station to Extended Off Prem Station 0 dB Station to Trunk 0 Trunk to Trunk 0 dB Overload Level 3 dBmO Crosstalk 70 dB Intermodulation Distortion FOUR TONE METHOD 2nd Order gt 45 dB Tone Products 3rd Order gt 53 dB Tone Products TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Analog Transmission Characteristics Contd Quantization Distortion SIGNAL LEVEL DISTORTION LEVEL 2 to 30 dBm0 35 dB 40 dBm0 29 dB 45 dBm0 25 dB Sampling Rate 8 kHz Terminating Impedance 600 ohms Trunk Balance Impedance 600 ohms or Complex Z selectable Echo Return Loss The echo return loss of the switching equipment is infinite The echo return loss of the station equipment can be engineered for greater than 18 dB over the range
150. 0A adapter is designed for use with the 12 Button 7203M MET voice terminal The 502A and 502B adapters which are identical in appearance are designed for use with MERLIN System 7300H Series terminals with the exception of the 5 Button and HFAI sets Most standard commercial headsets can be used with the adapters The 502B adapter must be ordered if the user requires HFAI operation on the headset i e typical ACD CMS operation Each adapter has an ON QUIET button an OFF button a green indicator lamp a jack for a single headset and a modular keyed 8 wire jack Each adapter is equipped with an 18 inch connecting cord Optional cords are available in lengths of 4 and 14 feet 2 183 FEATURES AND SERVICES The 500A Headset Adapter is powered locally by a 2012D Transformer which plugs into a 115V ac receptacle Power from the transformer is applied to the voice terminal mounting cord via a 400 2 adapter at the wall jack and conducted to the 500A on its connecting cord Refer to Voice Terminal Adjunct Power Supplies in Section 4 for additional information The 502A and 502b Headset Adapters do not require supplemental power except when used with a 34 Button Deluxe 22 Button BIS 34 Button BIS or BIS with Display voice terminal or when located more than 200 feet from the switch Detailed headset adapter connection information is provided in the following figures eFigure 2 23 Typical Headset Adapter to 730
151. 0H Series Voice Terminal Connections Not Requiring Auxiliary Power Figure 2 24 Headset Adapter to 7300H Series Voice Terminals Connections Requiring Auxiliary Power e Figure 2 25 Headset Adapter Connections for 12 Button MET Sets MET Headset Adapter Use of a headset with a 10 Button MET voice terminal requires JS0180 3A Headset Adapter 18 inch cord 01 a JSO180 4A Headset Adapter 8 foot cord Figure 2 22 500A 502A 502B Headset Adapter 2 184 Headset Adapter Adjunct SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE um PART OF SIP ZTN79 HYBRID LINE CP VOICE TERMINAL 502 HEADSET ADAPTER LEGEND 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05P C8 SPECIAL CORD FURNISHED WITH ADJUNCT T1 7300H SERIES VOICE TERMINAL EXCEPT 34 BUTTON DELUXE AND ALL SETS WITH BUILT IN SPEAKERPHONE W1 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE i FURNI SHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 23 Typical Headset Adapter to 7300H Series Voice Terminal Connections Not Requiring Auxiliary Power 2 185 FEATURES AND SERVICES SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP ZTN79 HYBRID LINE CP VOICE TERMINAL V PUR SUPPLY P1 502A B HEADSET ADAPTER LEGEND El TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED
152. 1 SAA 2403 004 2610 001 2614 100 2720 05P 2720 05X 2720 06X 2724 29G 2724 30G 2724 38X 2724 780 2724 98G 2725 07G 2725 075 2750 A17 2750 A24 2750 A25 2750 T05 DESCRIPTION Multiple ADU MADU Supplemental Alert Adapter Uninterruptible Power supply UPS STARLAN NETWORK Network Extension Unit NEU STARLAN NETWORK Network Access Unit NAU 25 pair 8 plug 15 ft Cable Octopus Cable Splitter Cable Tie Trunk Splitter Cable CO Trunk MADU Interface Cord EIA Crossover Cord ADU Crossover Cord 25 pair MADU Cable MADU Interface Cord Mod Cord 7 ft Mod Cord 25 ft MET Adapter Cord Mod RS232 Adapt Male Mod RS232 Adapt Female Voice Data Y Adapter APPARATUS CODE COMCODE WP90780 L1 WP90929 L3 WP90929 L1 M48C M7U 87 D8AM 87 M48G D8W 87 D8W 87 ZD8AJ 355A 355AF 90851 L1 PARTS INFORMATION 527840003 527840102 405010612 403864150 403836620 104109285 104246616 104154430 104319025 103786786 103786828 103881421 105012637 105012645 405010620 7 5 PARTS INFORMATION DESCRIPTION 2781 004 System Wiring Hourly Rate 2782 004 System Wiring Flat Rate 2783 004 New System Wiring Run Firm Quote 2788 004 System Wiring Aftermarket Flat Rate 2789 004 System Wiring Aftermarket Hourly Rate 3100 1TD Basic TT Desk Tel 3100 TRC Basic TT Desk Tel with Recall Button 3100
153. 141 Trunk 753 3 21442 1 Digital Switch Tape Uni 2 134 j Tape Unit Connections 2 134 Direct Access Pooled Facility 2 249 Extension Selection Attenda Extension Selector Console Group Calling DGC Inward Dialing DID Station Selection DSS Trunk Attendant Console 2 19 Special Descripto Standard Calll2 153 jj Distinctive Ringing 2 160 Documentation Reference 8 1 1 Don t Answer Attendant Return Coverage on 2 50 Position Bus DTE Devices 2 119 DTU 2 134 Dua Attendant Selector Consol Console Operation DTAC Console Operation SLAC DXS 2 34 S 10 4 E Electrical Noise RFI 6 5 1 Emergency Transfer Unit Connections 2 254 2 255 End To End Signaling 2 T25 2 161 4 1 Environmental Requremens 6 1 1 1 1 Equipment Connections Via Circuit Pack Ports EXRS 32D ve p 10 C Exclusion Expert Mode 2 764 Extended Stations 2 167 Extending Attendant Calll2 14 External Alert Connections 2 169 o o SSS O Alerts 2 168 F FAc 28 O Facilities VirtuallL2 344 4 1 Facility Access RestrictionL2 89 j Account Code Entry Forced Account Code Entry Optional Attendant Call Extending Attendant Attendant Attendant Attendant Attendant Attendant Attendant Attendant Attendant Attendant Return Coverage On Busy Attendant Retur
154. 186 MADU 4 74 MET Set 4 70 Multiline Multiline Voice Terminals Music On Hold Paging Equipment 24 12217 Peripheral Equipment L4 Remote P V UU PTT MEER Single Line Voice Terminal Single Line Voice Terminal aingie Line Voice Terminal on q SMDR On Premises K SMDR On Premises Switched 2305 INDEX Connections Continued Speakerphone 2 277 12 279 STAR LAN NETWORK to System 25 Supplemental Alert Adapter 2 170 Switched Loop Attendant Console 12 33 CC Trunk Access 4 59 Via Circuit Pack Switched Loop Attendant 2 24 0 0 Coverage DGC Message Waiting Standard Group CPU MEM CP ZTN129 D Data Call Expert Mode Call Preindication 2 164 2 333 Call Setup Endpoint States 2 124 Data Port Endpoints Option Profiles 2 100 DCE Devices 2 120 Delay Announcement Q Direct Group Calling 2 739 21 Equipment Connections 2 140 2 230 Night Service Destination Attendant Source and 2 52 DGC 2 136 1 Dial Access Pooled Facility 2 247 Access to Message Wa Terminal Dialing Delayed Access Dequeuing Tone Description System Dial Pads Touch 2 328 10 3 INDEX Dial Pads Continued Touch Tone 2 328 Dial Pulse Services 2 328 Dial Tone 2294 Dialing Data Terminal Dictation System Access 2 132 Connections FCC Registered L2 133 DIDL2
155. 2 CPs and can support a small telecommunications system for example 50 to 60 stations and 10 to 15 trunks Cabinet 1 contains the CPU MEM CP and the Service Circuit which must be mounted in CP slots 1 and 2 respectively Slots 3 through 12 ten total provide mounting for the various port CPs that can be used Any port CP can be mounted in any of these ten slots The Tone Detector and Pooled Modem CPs referred to as System Resource CPs can also be mounted in the port CP slots Circuit packs are described in this Section under the heading Circuit Packs Cabinets 2 and 3 Port Circuits Cabinet 2 and Cabinet 3 can be added to provide mounting space for additional port CPs 12 maximum each required for larger systems The Tone Detector and Pooled Modem CPs can also be mounted in these cabinets These cabinets are simply stacked on top of Cabinet 1 Table 4 A summarizes port CP capacity of 1 2 or 3 cabinet systems 4 4 POWER SUPPLY NOTES REFER TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 5 FOR CIRCUIT PACK UNIT LOAD INFORMATI ON DIVIDE THE TOTAL NUMBER OF VOICE TERMINAL AND TRUNK CIRCUIT PACKS BETWEEN THE 1 2 3 1 CABINETS USED MOUNT VOICE T COMMON CONTROL CI RCU eCPU MEM ZTN129 CPU MEM HARDWARE DESCRIPTION s CIRCUIT PACK SLOTS PORT CIRCUITS SERVICE CIRCUIT a CABINET 1 MOUNTING FOR CONTROL amp PORT CIRCUIT PACKS POWER SUPPLY 47 CIRC
156. 2186 sU OO Attendant Message Waiting 2 216 1 Oe Coverage Message Waiting 2 216 2 Dial Access to Message Waiting Indicators 2 277 Station to Station Message Waiting 2 217 MET Line TN735 MET Set Connections 4 70 Mode ExpertL2 164 oS O Modem Pooling 2 219 Muitiline Voice Terminal Connections Cable Distance Limitations 5 8 o Music On Hold 2 222 Equipment Connections 2 223 2 225 N NAUCOM Driver 2 101 Network Features Tabe 25 1 Night Service Z Z28 7 Delay Announcements 2 229 Normal Ringback Tone 2 94 NPE Network Processing Element Office Automation Off Premises Stations OPS One Button Transfer Data 2 332 1 Operation Switched Loop 2 227 Option Switches Tie Trunk TN760B 3 228 Optional Account Code Entry 2 77 1 Power Equipment Options User Changeable 2 338 Out of Building Stations 2 232 Wiring Requirements 6 9 G Outward Restriction Overview System P Paging Equipment Conne System Access 2 233 Parameters Hardware and Software Park 2 238 Parts Information 7 1 o j PDC 2 Calls Placed 012 227 Connections Personal Dial Gode PDC 2 241 Lines 2 243 4 0 Personal Speed Dialing 2 281 Special Characters PFT 2 251 Pickup 2 245 Pooled Facility Dial Acc
157. 21X jack for off premises station lines These can be ordered from your telephone company NOTIFICATION TO THE TELEPHONE COMPANY If the system is to be connected to off premises stations OPSs you must notify the telephone company of the OPS class of service OL13C and the service order code 9 0F Upon the request of the telephone company inform them of the following The Public Switched Network lines and the Private lines to which you will connect the telephone equipment The telephone equipment s registration number and ringer equivalence number REN from the label on the equipment For private line connections provide the facility interface code TL31M for tie lines You must also specify the service order code 9 0F quantities and USOC numbers of the jacks required For each jack provide the sequence in which lines are to be connected the type lines and the facility interface code and the ringer equivalence number by position when applicable This telephone equipment should not be used on coin telephone lines Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS If you experience trouble with this telephone equipment contact the AT amp T National Service Assistance Center on 1 800 628 2888 The telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or until you are sure that this equipmen
158. 24 000 FEET FOR OUT OF BUILDI TI P RING LOOP RESISTANCE FROM SYSTEM CABI NETS INCLUDI NG VOICE TERMINAL MUST NOT EXCEED 1300 OHMS FIVE SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINALS CAN BE BRIDGED WHEN USING THE TN 742 HOWEVER ONLY TWO MAY BE OFF HOOK AT ONE TIME Figure 5 1 Single Line Voice Terminal Allowable Cable Distances 5 7 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Multiline Voice Terminals SUPPORTING 24 GAUGE WIRE CIRCUIT 0 5106 mm PACK METERS ZTN79 7300H Series in building or 610 out of building no off premises TN735 1 000 305 in building MET Sets only Note Requires local power PEC 62510 beyond 1 000 feet or whenever IROBS are used N BUILDING 2000 FEET ZTN79 1300H SERIES ATL LINE CP VOI CE TERMI NALS nnm sasa 2000 FEET p OUT OF BUI LDI NG om 17079 7300H SERIES I ROB ROB ATL LINE CP LEGEND I ROB IN RANGE OUT OF BUILDING 2 IROB PROTECTION DEVICES REQUIRED SEE NOTE ABOVE IN BUILDING 2991005 2991005 TN735 2993C04 AND 1000 FEET MET LINE CP 1320M VOICE TERMINALS MODEL 2993C04 MET EQUIPPED WITH BIS REQUIRES 2012D POWER UNIT 15 18V Figure 5 2 Multiline Voice Terminal Allowable Cable Distances TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Data Terminals RS 232 Connected To Asynchronous Data Units DATA RATE 24 GAUGE WIRE 0 5106 mm FEET METERS 300 bps 1 200 bps 2 000 bps 4 800 bps 9600 bps
159. 3 Descriptions of Basic Manuals An Introduction to System 25 Provides a summary of System 25 features services and equipment an attractive full color format with many pictures The emphasis is on how System 25 helps solve information management productivity and cost control problems Administration Manual Provides the information necessary to initialize a system and to perform on going system administration Explains the operation of the System Administration Terminal the Digital Tape Unit and the commands that allow the System Administrator to make changes and additions Implementation Manual Describes how to plan the operating configuration of the system Explains how to determine customer needs and how to convert these needs into a system configuration plan This plan is recorded on accompanying forms that are used in conjunction with the Administration Manual to initialize the system The Implementation Manual and associated forms are packaged together in the Administration Records Binder Installation And Maintenance Manual Provides step by step procedures for installing System 25 and associated equipment and procedures for isolating and clearing customer affecting faults Includes procedures for testing equipment and trunks and for making additions and changes to the system New Capabilities Manual Describes the System 25 Release 2 Version 1 R2V1 features that were not included in Release 1 Version 2 R1V2 In
160. 3965232 103965240 103965257 103965265 103965315 103965323 103966255 103969424 103972907 103975349 103975645 3170 00 62512 2750 17 3141 BIS P O 62510 3143 12M 2169 001 2169 004 P O 62515 62502 62503 62504 62505 62518 P O 6250 021 3178 SYS 62509 No PEG P O 62506 63140 DESCRIPTION Single Line VT with Message Lamp amp Recall Button Adapter MET Adapter Cord 10 Button MET Set BIS Adapter 12 Button MET Set Tip Ring ADU Tip Ring ADU GS Trunk CP LS Trunk CP TR Line CP ATL Line CP STARLAN Interface CP Service Circuit CP Basic TT Desk Tel with Message Lamp amp Recall Button Direct Extension Selector Console Mod to Mod Adapter ATL ADU Tie Trunk CP PARTS INFORMATION 7101A01A 003 278A ZD8AJ 2993C04 Z400F Z7203M01A 003 23 1 Z3A4 ZTN76 ZTN77 ZTN78 ZTN79 ZTN84 ZTN85 2500DMGG 23A1 003 2210A1 Z3A5 TN760B 7 11 PARTS INFORMATION 7 12 103976163 103981965 103981981 103982005 103982658 103984118 104010061 104109285 104152558 104154430 104174750 104174768 104246616 104319025 105012637 105012645 105031181 105105506 105105514 3162 BIS 3162 DIS 3161 161 No PEG 62514 31710 2724 29G P O 62515 2724 38X P O 62515 31761 31760 2724 30C P O 62515 2724 98G 2750 A24 2750 A25 P
161. 4 is not fully compatible with the daisy chain arrangement of the STARLAN NETWORK since much of the daisy chain circuitry was left off of the card For testing purposes the card can be used in a limited daisy chain arrangement where the ZTN84 is connected to a personal computer PC that possesses an Network Access Unit NAU The ZTN84 and the PC should be the only two devices forming the LAN The daisy chain circuitry was omitted in order to reduce cost and save board space It is also the architectural design of the system that the PBX be connected to the LAN by a NEU The NEU can either be local in the telephone room with the switch or in a remote office 3 26 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Tie Trunk TN760B The Tie Trunk Circuit Pack Figure 3 1 5 interfaces four 6 wire tie trunks and the TDM bus Two tip and ring pairs form a 4 wire analog transmission line An E and M pair are used for signaling The T and R pair transmit analog signals from the circuit pack The T1 and R1 pair receive analog signals from the tie trunk The E and M pair are dc signaling leads used for call setup handshaking The E lead receives signals from the tie trunk and the M lead provides signals from the circuit pack The TN760Bs four port circuits support Type 1 Type Compatible or Type V signaling Incoming and outgoing trunks can be either automatic immediate start wink start or delay dial The Tie Trunk has the following unique circuitry e Ground Detector
162. 45416635 845875155 Not Available PARTS INFORMATION 2614 100 AT amp T STARLAN NETWORK Network Access Unit NAU No PEC CPU MEM Interconnect Cable P O 6250 021 Fans 2 WP90677 11 P O 62501 P O 6250 021 Address Plug P O 62501 P O 6250 021 SLAC Graphics P O 62521 Overlays 2 7 15 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION Basic Manuals Software Packages Integrated Solution Documents Descriptions of Basic Manuals REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION System 25 is supported by a complete set of basic and supplementary documentation and optional software This section provides a brief summary of the available material for Release 2 Version 1 R2V1 Basic Manuals Introduction to System 25 _ 555 530 021 2 1 Administration 555 530 500 eR2V1 Implementation 555 530 650 elnstallation and Maintenance Manual _ 555 530 103 eR2V1 New Capabilities 555 530 205 eR2V1 Reference 555 530 200 eR2V1 Terminal Operations 555 530 710 e User Guides Data Features User GUIDE 555 520 704 Direct Trunk Attendant Console User Guide 555 530 701 Multiline Terminal User
163. 5 Upgrade PARTS INFORMATION APPARATUS CODE COMCODE D181575 includes KS 23395 2012D 36A 10B ETU B25A D8W 87 D181807 includes WP90851 L1 KS 23475 KS 22911 L1 ZTN129 555 530 013 SLAC Graphics Overlays 2 405143186 102600517 103558916 103984118 100017334 103786786 102802113 105012645 104152558 102937620 104154430 103786786 104246616 103964185 102600517 103965315 105355374 405010620 405462904 403242639 105211031 105528814 845875155 7 3 PARTS INFORMATION 7 4 DESCRIPTION 62524 MERLIN Sys Headset Adapter 63111 Analog Line CP 63112 MET Line CP 63116 DID Trunk CP 63118 Aux Trunk CP 63119 Pooled Modem CP 63123 Tone Detector CP 63130 Data Line CP 63140 Tie Trunk CP ADU Aux Power Adapter Adapter Mod Cord Transformer 1020 S90 ACCESS Software 1020 S91 CAM Software 1203 020 Advanced Admin Rel 2 Software MS DOS 1203 021 Advanced Admin Rel 2 Software UN IX 1207 030 CMS Software 1205 010 VMS Software 2169 001 Tip Ring ADU 2169 002 Tip Ring ADU 2169 004 Tip Ring ADU APPARATUS CODE COMCODE 502B 105471304 TN742 103556957 TN735 103556882 TN753 103557062 TN763 103557161 TN758 103557112 TN748 103976163 726 103556791 760 103975645 102802113 103848859 102937620 102600517 105341218 105341382 105518039 105517941 105517106 105402283 23 1 103963963 Z3A2 5 Z3A4 103964185 2169 005 230
164. 7316H01A 2 0 BIS 34D 7317H01A 5102 Speakerphone ZTN79 2 0 Pooled Modem TN758 oo DXS Selector Console Locally Powered Zero Unit Loads but maximum of two TN758s cabinet allowed Note Equipment not listed above i e 763 ZTN76 ZTN77 does not affect unit loading Any voice terminal adjunct combination requiring more than 2 Unit Loads must be locally powered When a voice terminal is locally powered it places no unit load on the cabinet Specificaly a 34 Button Deluxe voice terminal equipped for speakerphone operation requires auxiliary power In addition any 22 or 34 Button Deluxe BIS or BIS with Display voice terminal equipped for headset operation requires auxiliary power 5 6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Cable Distance Limitations This subsection provides allowable cabling distances for the following devices eSingle Line Voice Terminals Figure 5 1 e Multiline Voice Terminals eData Terminals RS 232 Connected to Asynchronous Data Units ADUs Single Line Voice Terminals SUPPORTING 24 GAUGE WIRE CIRCUIT 0 5106 mm PACK FEET METERS ZTN78 2 000 2000 TN742 2500 Series 17 500 7 320 TN742 Model 7101A 15 000 4 500 BUILDING SI NGLE LI NE 2000 FEET ZIN78 VOICE TIP RING LINE TERMI NAL cP EXTENDED STATI ON OR OUT OF BUILDING OR OFF PREMI SES SINGLE LI NE VOICE TERMI NAL TN742 ANALOG LINE CP 2000 FEET UP TO
165. AT amp T Premises Distribution System PDS specifications Various cords cables adapters and connecting blocks are used to facilitate the connection of equipment and associated cable and wire Major points of connectivity include the following system cross connect field located on wall adjacent to the system cabinets The field provides mounting space for the Trunk Access Equipment TAE Station Interconnect Panels SIPS and Emergency Transfer Units ETUs Refer to Section 5 Environmental Requirements for a typical System 25 layout including cross connect field and associated equipment layout e25 pair connectors located on the rear of each system cabinet e Modular jacks located at each work station provide modular connections for terminals and associated adjuncts and auxiliary equipment These jacks are connected by building wiring to the SIP Several wiring options are described below Wiring Options There are three basic PECs under which building station wiring is ordered 2781 004 covers wiring done on an hourly rate 2782 004 covers flat rate wiring ePEC 2783 004 covers firm price quote Consult the 2780 section of the Sales Manual for restrictions and requirements before ordering Trunk Access Equipment TAE The TAE provides for the connection of communications facilities such as Tie OPS Ground Start Loop Start and DID trunks to the trunk ports of the system Up to three trunk C
166. Automatically connects a multiline voice terminal to an incoming call ringing at the terminal Ringing Line Preference overrides Prime Line Preference and Preelection when a call is ringing at an on hook voice terminal Line access buttons that can be selected by Ringing Line Preference include System Access Bridged Access Automatic Intercom Coverage and Personal Lines If two or more lines on a multiline terminal or a Direct Trunk Attendant Console are ringing simultaneously the user is connected to the first line to start ringing If the user wishes to use a different line the line must be preselected prior to going off hook If ringing ceases while the user is on hook line preference reverts to whichever option is applicable Prime Line Preference or no preference 2 204 Line Selection If a line rings at a multiline terminal when the terminal is busy on another call Ringing Line Preference will not activate even if the user goes on hook during the ringing cycle However Ringing Line Preference is not canceled at the Attendant Console while the attendant is off hook If a line is ringing while the attendant is off hook the ringing line will be selected as soon as the attendant goes on hook Preselection Allows multiline voice terminal users to override the above line preference features Users may simply press a desired line access button before going off hook The user will be connected to the facility selected unless the fa
167. CCT As the user enters the account code the digits are displayed to the right of the prompt If the number of digits exceeds 9 the system automatically scrolls to Screen 2 the continuation character and the remaining digits appear on Screen 2 The prompt and digits remain displayed until one of the following occurs user enters either or the administered number of code digits e user restarts the Account Code Entry feature by dialing 0 or pressing ACCT ENTRY again to correct an erroneous entry e The system time out for Account Code Entry is reached e The user selects another button that overwrites the display Remote Access Remote access callers cannot enter account codes Repertory Dialing An account code can be stored on a REP DIAL button Speed Dialing An account code can be stored in a System or Personal Speed Dialing code Transfer A user can transfer a call to another user then before hanging up enter an account code Subsequent account code entries for the same call will be ignored even though confirmation tone has been returned 2 12 Account Code Entry Optional Administration Requirements System eAssign number of Account Code digits 0 15 default 15 Voice Terminal Port e Multiline terminals Assign Account Code Entry button eSingle line terminals no administration required Hardware Requirements Requires RS 232 compatible 80 column ASCII serial printer or oth
168. CE TERMINALS 7300H TYPE DIRECT TRUNK ATTENDANT CONSOLE OR SWITCHED ZTN79 LOOP ATTENDANT ATL LINE CP TIME CONSOLE DIVISION S MULTIPLEX ATTENDANT DIRECT EXTENSION SELECTOR CONSOLE MODEL 23A1 MET SETS DICTATION EQUIPMENT TN763 i u AUXILIARY PAGING EQUIPMENT TRUNK CP PagePac BUS 735 LINE ZTN84 STARLAN INTERFACE CP NETWORK EXTENSION UNIT Figure 3 5 Equipment Connections Via Circuit Pack Ports Sheet 3 of 3 3 12 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The SAKI also does the following functions Identifies the circuit pack to the Common Control location and vintage Controls status indicator Light Emitting Diodes LEDs red failure green translated and yellow circuit busy initiates power on startup procedures Checks the on board microprocessor for sanity and causes reinitialization in case of problems Takes NPEs out of service under control of the on board microprocessor Resets the protocol handler on the ATL Line Circuit Pack the whole circuit pack out of service on command from the Common Control or when it determines that on board interference is present in the control time slots TDM BUS I LEADS BUS BUFFERS PORT SPECIFIC CIRCUITRY NETWORK BUS CIRCUIT PACK ADDRESS LEADS ADD
169. Cable 15 ft DE Transformer Adapter Mod Cord Mod Spd Tip Cord 14ft Connecting Block Connecting Block TT Wall Tel Data Line CP MET Line CP Analog Line CP DID Trunk CP PARTS INFORMATION 66E3 25 B25A B25A 55A1 A25D 2012D 248B D6AP 87 D4BY 103A 104A 2554BM TN726 TN735 TN742 TN753 7 9 PARTS INFORMATION 103557112 103557161 103558916 103756334 103786786 103786802 103786828 103810586 103814356 103823555 103842050 103843538 103848859 103870267 103870416 103871018 7 10 63119 63118 P O 62513 No PEG 2925 07G P O 62514 P O 62515 2725 075 P O 62506 P O 62509 2725 075 Pooled Modem CP Aux Trunk CP Voice Coupler Connecting Block Female Mod Cord 7ft Mod Cord 14ft Mod Cord 25ft P O 6250 021 TDM Bus Term 3163 HFU 3100 ORW 3162 412 3162 417 P O 21691 P O 62509 3100 ORD 3100 2RD 3140 010 MERLIN Sys Hands Free Unit Speakerphone Rotary Wall Tel 34 Button MERLIN Sys VT 34 Button Deluxe MERLIN Sys VT Adapter Rotary Desk Tel Rotary Desk Tel 4A Speakerphone Compatible 10 Button MET Set APPARATUS CODE TN758 TN763 36A 110 D8W 87 D8W 87 J58901A1 12 4 5102 500BMPA Z7305H01B 003 Z7305H02B 003 400B 500MM 500SM 2991C05 103871109 103871844 103881421 103942146 103942857 103963310 103963963 103964185 10
170. Dialed Number Error Character Space Duration Hour Duration Minute Duration Second Space Facility Space Station Space Account Code Space Personal Dial Code VALID CHARACTERS 3 or D 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 Space IN or Space 0 9 0 9 0 9 Space 0 9 0 9 Space 0 9 Space 0 9 Space Carriage Return Line Feed SMDR Call Record Format 2 299 FEATURES AND SERVICES 2 300 Figure 2 43 ASCII CHARACTER POSITION 00 01 03 04 07 08 12 13 16 17 23 24 29 30 31 36 37 38 39 41 42 48 49 51 52 54 55 57 58 62 63 69 70 76 77 79 80 81 DESCRIPTION top of form Space DATE Space TIME Space CALLED Space NUMBER Space DUR Space FAC Space STN Space ACCOUNT Space PDC Carriage Return Line Feed SMDR Call Record Header Format Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP Z210A J ADAPT c2 SMDR OUTPUT DEVICE ZTN129 CPU MEM 355A AF ADAPT LEGEND Cl MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 016 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P 355A ADAPTER RS 232 PLUG TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 A24 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK PEC 2750 A25 Figure 2 44 Output Equipment On Premises Direct Connections Sharing Same AC Outlet 2 301 FEATURES AND SERVICES SYSTEM 25 CABINET ZTN129 CPU MEM S
171. Dialing code 2 75 FEATURES AND SERVICES Call Accounting System CAS Description Call Accounting is the collecting processing and use of information about all trunk calls placed from and received by System 25 It is intended to help customers control telephone use and manage associated costs Detailed call data is available at Interface Port 2 of the Digital Switch s CPU MEM Circuit Pack This data can be fed to a Call Accounting System CAS for preparing a variety of cost estimate reports and for providing management and directory type services For additional information on the call data available at Interface Port 2 refer to the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR feature description Three station features of System 25 are also related to Call Accounting and are covered in separate feature descriptions Account Code Entry both Forced and Optional allows individual voice terminal users to associate specific account codes with their calls when necessary Call Accountability provides users with the means to properly identify calls they make from stations other than their own The information gathered from these two features is part of the data output from the processor to the CAS Two types of CASs can be used with System 25 eCAS Model 200 300 500 or 2000 Software Package associated with an AT amp T Personal Computer PC 6300 eCAS Model 200 300 500 or 2000 Software Package associated with a Master Controller UN
172. ED WITH 3 FOOT RECEPTACLE ENDED EIA CORD PEC 2169 004 C3 EIA CROSSOVER CABLE 70 87 C4 ADU CROSSOVER CABLE D8AM 87 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR J ACK 73A4 ADU EQUIPPED 3 FOOT RECEPTACLE ENDED EIA CORD C1 MODULAR CORDS 2 D8W 87 PEC 62515 C7 MODULAR POWER CORD D6AP 87 2488 ADAPTER MODULARIZES 20120 TRANSFORMER 400B2 ADAPTER POWER ADAPTER 2012D TRANSFORMER 15 18V AC SOURCE NOTE CAS MODEL 200 REQUIRES Z3A4 ADU FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 12 Call Accounting System On Premises Direct Connections Greater Than 50 Feet From System Cabinet or Nonsharing Same AC Outlet 2 80 Callback Queuing Callback Queuing Description This feature provides System 25 users with a simple way to complete calls to busy facilities stations or trunk groups without having to manually repeat the calling procedures Callback Queuing puts inside calls to busy stations and trunk pools into a queue The maximum number of queue slots is 64 administrable in any combination of inside and outside calls After a call is queued for the busy facility the caller can stay off hook or go on hook When the queued for facility becomes free to receive another call the system directs the longest waiting call to the facility and signals its originator that the call is being completed Each station can activate Callback Queuing manually or can be administered for automatic activation of inside calls o
173. ERVICES Bridging of System Access Buttons A call can be transferred from a bridged call appearance using the usual transfer operations When a call is held for transfer by pressing the TRANSFER button idle System Access button or an idle System Access Originate Only button if available is automatically selected by the system for placing the new call If neither of these appearance types is idle the user can manually select a BA button or any other call button on which to place the new call The transfer operation and status indications of the principals SA button and its corresponding BA buttons are similar to Personal Line operation with the following exceptions Calls can be f rem to an inside station or from to an outside location and after the transfer is completed transferring station goes on hook the call will stay at the principal s SA button and its BA buttons only if one or more of these stations is bridged to the call Otherwise the call will be removed An on hold bridging station or principal is not considered to be bridged to the call Callback Queuing Queued calls can be transferred Single line sets can transfer queued calls only before going on hook The transferring station must wait for the transferred to facility to answer before completing the transfer the transferred to facility then receives queuing tone Queued calls cannot be transferred to a tone ringing busy etc Calling Restrictions A non restricte
174. ES AND SERVICES console in Position Busy mode can receive attendant PDC DID and DGC calls and outgoing calls can still be placed Local functions can be activated Considerations Position Busy allows one of two attendant positions to be made inactive when not required This is useful in situations where calling traffic requires only one console operator Interactions The following features interact with Attendant Position Busy Attendant Call Extending Unanswered calls extended by an inactive console will return to the active console on the Return On Don t Answer RTN DA button DTAC only or on Loop button SLAC only Attendant Camp On Calls Camped On by an inactive console will return to the active console when Camp On timeout occurs Attendant Message Waiting An inactive attendant is permitted to control voice terminal Message LEDs Automatic Intercom The inactive attendant is permitted to place Automatic Intercom calls DTAC only Automatic Intercom calls to the inactive attendant will not ring at the console or be transferred to the active attendant when the AUTO ICOM button is located in one of the two rightmost button columns Coverage eDTAC the active attendant is a coverage receiver for the inactive attendant coverage is invoked and calls will appear at the active attendant s Cover button If the inactive attendant is a coverage receiver for the active attendant coverage when activated is
175. FEATURES AND SERVICES After dialing the Remote Access trunk and the barrier code the caller receives second dial tone The caller then enters access code 70 and the PDC of the forwarding station confirmation tone followed by silence is returned if a valid PDC was dialed Finally the remote caller dials the outside forward to number and hears confirmation tone To cancel Remote Access Forwarding the remote caller repeats the activation procedure but substitutes 0 for the outside forward to number Considerations Forwarding helps System 25 users avoid missing important calls while they are absent from their home terminals It complements coverage features by allowing users to answer their own calls remotely rather than have other users take their messages Calls can be forwarded from all types of voice terminals except rotary dial sets A forwarded to multiline voice terminal must have at least one System Access SA button If user attempts to forward calls to a station without an SA button reorder tone is returned and the attempt is blocked In general the only calls that forward from a terminal are internal calls transferred or attendant extended outside calls Remote Access trunk calls and DID calls At multiline terminals such calls ring at SA buttons The following call types or features are station oriented rather than PDC oriented and do not forward e Automatic Intercom calls e Callback calls when a queu
176. G CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 28 Delay Announcement Equipment Connections FCC Registered 2 230 Off Premises Stations OPS Off Premises Stations OPS Description An Off Premises Station OPS is a single line voice terminal that is located in another building and connected to System 25 via arrangements with the local CO The station has the same features as an on premises single line station except that it is counted as an outside party in a conference call Also the Message feature will not operate with these sets Considerations This service is sometimes furnished to executives at their residences It allows them remote access to System 25 features and services Interactions The following features interact with Off Premises Stations Conference For conference purposes an OPS counts as one of the two allowable outside lines Distinctive Ringing Distinctive Ringing is not provided OPS stations will always receive standard that is single ringing for calls Administration Requirements Single Line Voice Terminal Port eAssign port on Analog Line TN742 CP This an Extended Station yes or no default np This is how the system knows the station is an OPS Hardware Requirements Requires a port interface on a TN742 Analog Line CP The OPS must be a FCC registered single line voice terminal Connectivity information is provided in Section 4 Hardware Description 2 231
177. G CABLE 2012D TRANSFORMER TER OURCE D D6AP 87 INSTALLER PEC 21691 Speakerphone Adjunct MET SET T1 5101 SPEAKER PHONE PEC 31711 Speakerphone Connections For 12 Button MET Sets 2 279 FEATURES AND SERVICES Speed Dialing Description There are two types of Speed Dialing 1 System Speed Dialing and 2 Personal Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing Allows the System Administrator to store up to 90 numbers maximum of 28 characters in length that are accessible by dialing 3 digit codes from any voice or data terminal Examples of typical System Speed Dialing numbers include frequently dialed DDD numbers together with leading facility access codes for WATS FX etc and account codes The following special characters may be used in System Speed Dialing numbers CHAR FUNCTION Produces a 1 5 second pause Since System 25 does not have a Dial Tone detector judicious use of the pause character will help to ensure that intermediate Dial Tones are obtained before more digits are sent Transmits an actual Transmits an actual Represents a Virtual Facility code where xx 90 99 This may appear only at the beginning of the stored number Marks the beginning of End to End Signaling System begins transmitting touch tone signals to the far end switch A user cannot use a Speed Dialing number for which he she is toll restricted outward restricted or facili
178. HONE CONFERENCE TRANSFER 7 DROP Cc HOLD Figure 4 12 7305H03B Voice Terminal BIS 4 33 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 7305H04C Voice Terminal BIS With Display PEC 3162 DIS The 7305H04C voice terminal is available for general use and as a Switched Looped Attendant Console SLAC Display capability can be administered for SLACs or general use positions In general use this terminal can be desk or wall mounted as a console it is normally desk mounted The terminal is about 9 1 4 inches wide 9 1 4 inches deep and not including the handset 1 1 2 inches thick when desk mounted it is about 5 1 4 inches high in the back The set comes equipped with the following e Handset e Touch Dial Pad not DTMF el Use and Status LEDs e Test Program Switch two positions T for testing operation of LEDs and ringer P for programming feature buttons e Built In Display Module Screen for call information and time displays Clock Timer controls Contrast control for screen display e Built In Speakerphone with Volume Control e Built In HFAI Microphone e Ringer Volume Control eNine Fixed Feature Buttons with status LED Conference Hold Message Drop Speakerphone Microphone Transfer Recall HFAI e34 Programmable Feature Buttons only 12 have associated LEDs For General Use All programmable default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 27 Send All Calls 1 A
179. Hardware Requirements Requires port interfaces on a TN760B Tie Trunk CP 2 327 FEATURES AND SERVICES Touch Tone and Dial Pulse Services Description All touch tone single line voice terminals and MET sets are equipped with dial pads that generate Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF signals when a dial button is pressed Model 500 Series single line terminals have rotary dials that generate dial pulses corresponding to the numbers selected The 7300H series MERLIN voice terminals are equipped with touch dial pads that generate digitally coded signals when a dial button is pressed Each trunk may be independently arranged for either touch tone or dial pulse service Touch Tone Dial Pads On outgoing calls on trunks requiring touch tone signals cut through dialing is provided Where the trunk requires dial pulse signals conversion of the touch tone signals to dial pulses is provided until an end of dialing signal is detected Cut through is then provided and all subsequent digits are sent as touch tone signals See the FEnd to End Signaling feature description for more information Rotary Dials Voice terminals with rotary dials are required for Power Failure Transfer stations when the system connects to the CO by way of dial pulse trunks They are not recommended for other applications Touch Dial Pads For outgoing calls on trunks requiring touch tone signals all dialed digits are converted to touch tone signals If the trunk requ
180. ITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05 C8 SPECIAL CORD FURNISHED WITH ADJUNCT TL 7300H SERIES VOICE TERMINALS EXCEPT 34 BUTTON DELUXE Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 35 Speakerphone Connections For 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminals Except 34 Button Sets 2 277 FEATURES AND SERVICES SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE Mee pc SE PART OF SIP 1 FURNISHED WITH SET OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P SHED WITH ADJUNCT NAL 34 BUTTON DELUXE LEGEND Bl TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK Cl MODULAR CORD D8W 8 C2 C8 SPECIAL CORD FURN 7305H02B VOICE TERM W1 4 INSIDE WIRING CABLE C MODULAR CORD D6AP 87 PI KS 22911 POWER SUPPLY PEC 62510 Z400F ADAPTER FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 36 2 278 VOICE TERMINAL 5102 SPEAKERPHONE PEC 3163 HFU Speakerphone Connections For 34 Button Voice Terminals SYSTEM 25 CABINET LEGEND Bl Qus Q C8 Wl 2488 ADAPTER 40082 ADAPTER 20120 TRANSFORMER MODULAR COR FURNISHED BY Figure 2 37 PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP TYPI CAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK MODULAR CORD OCTOPUS CABL SPECIAL CORD 7203M SET 4 PAIR INSIDE MODULARI ZES POWER 15 18V AC S D8W 87 FURNI SHED WI TH SET E WP90780 PEC 2720 05P FURNISHED WITH UNCT 12 BUTTON MET SET WIRIN
181. IVALENT MUST BE LOCATED WITHIN SIX FEET 1 8m OF SYSTEM CABINETS 2 MULTIPLE CABINET SYSTEMS REQUIRE TWO QUAD OUTLETS SINGLE CABINET SYSTEMS REQUIRE ONE QUAD OUTLET 3 ALLOW AT LEAST 24 INCHES OF SPACE IN FRONT OF CABINETS TABLE MUST BE ABLE TO SUPPORT 250 POUNDS 4 BACKBOARD IS 3 4 INCHES THICK BY 48 INCHES WIDE BY 72 INCHES LONG Figure 6 1 Typical System 25 Equipment Area Floor Plan ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 617 617 2 4 EXPAND gt 7 W 9 22 BACKBOARD TERMINATION FIELD 30 QUAD AC OUTLETS Figure 6 2 Typical System 25 Equipment Area Elevation Plan 6 3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Table Top Space The following system equipment requires customer provided table top space in the equipment area e System Cabinets Each cabinet is 13 inches high 17 inches wide and 21 inches deep A 3 cabinet system requires a vertical space of approximately 40 inches and a 17 inch by 21 inch table top space Each cabinet weighs approximately 75 pounds Place the cabinets on a desk or table top that is about 18 inches high and capable of supporting at least 250 pounds The cabinets must not be placed on the floor e System Administration Terminal SAT Model 703 The SAT should also be located near the system cabinets and plugged into the same AC outlet It is 12 inches wide 10 inches long and 3 inches high e Digital Tape Unit The Tape Unit Model DC5 Digi
182. IX PC CAS Models 200 300 500 and 2000 The System 25 SMDR interface provides direct output to the CAS software running on either an AT amp T Personal Computer equipped with MS DOS V2 11 or later or a UNIX PC Master Controller CAS calculates the cost of calls and provides basic and sophisticated call reports After a telephone call is completed System 25 sends a call record to the AT amp T Personal Computer via the SMDR interface channel The PC must be equipped with and running CAS software Call records are collected by the PC and held in a buffer until they are processed When a call record is processed a cost is calculated and assigned to it That cost along with other call record information is then stored on a hard disk for subsequent retrieval Two modes of operation are available for PC operation e Dedicated Mode The PC is dedicated to one and only one task processing call records 2 76 Call Accounting System CAS e Multi Function Mode Allows the user to print reports edit files and run other PC based programs while the CAS continues to collect and buffer call records in the background The user must enter the Dedicated Mode to process calls and generate reports The CAS performs three main functions 1 call record processing 2 report generation and 3 CAS system management In addition a limited directory lookup and message center is provided The following is a brief description of each function
183. L SPECIFICATIONS Port Specifications The following tables provide interface specifications for System 25 line and trunk port circuits DATA TERMINAL PORTS Note EIA RS 232 Device Via Data Line ADU TN726 RS 232 device must furnish signals on ADU pins 2 TD and 20 DTR and ground on either pin 1 or 7 The ADU furnishes signals on pins 3 RD and 8 CD The CD signal is also tied to pins 5 CTS and 6 DSR Some data terminals may require auxiliary power when used with Z3A1 Z3A2 Z3A4 ADU the Z3A5 always requires local power ADUs require 7 volts on pin 20 DTR to operate properly The following table lists data terminals that have been tested and are known to operate properly without auxiliary power Note Refer to Cable Distance Limitations for supported data rates 5 12 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Port Specifications Contd DATA TERMINALS Do Not Require Local Power DATA REQUIRES Z3A1 REQUIRES TERMINAL or Z3A2 ADU Z3A4 ADU Hewlett Packard 2621A 2623A 2640 2645 2645A Teletype BLIT 1 68000 based 5620 MAC 80 based 5420 Requires Originate Disconnect Switch 5 13 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Port Specifications Contd VOICE TERMINAL PORTS STATION TYPE CIRCUIT PACK SPECIFICATIONS Tip and Ring Tip Ring Line Single Line ZTN78 e1 Pair Interface Tip and Ring Sets Analog e Analog signals modulated over DC loop eLoop Voltage 24 V dc e Signaling Dua
184. LD button the user presses the SA Originate Only or BA button and dials 9 to be connected Call waiting tone consists of one beep high frequency tone for an inside call or two beeps for an outside call Special ringback consists of normal ringback with a short separate tone added at the end of each cycle Special ringback continues until the called party answers Considerations Call Waiting improves the chances of incoming calls to busy terminals being answered The caller must remain off hook for a waiting call to be answered The Call Waiting feature also applies to calls extended to busy inside stations by attendants Camp On A busy extended to party receives call waiting tone and the caller receives special ringback The call returns to the console after a predefine interval if it is not answered 2 95 FEATURES AND SERVICES Interactions The following features interact with Call Waiting Attendant Camp On Trunk calls camped onto a station by an attendant are given priority over other waiting calls Attendant Positions Calls cannot wait at Direct Trunk Attendant Consoles and Switched Loop Attendant Consoles Callback Queuing lf a station with automatic queuing calls a busy station with Call Waiting the calling station hears queuing tone not special ringback furthermore the called party does not hear Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone is heard only when special ringback is returned to the caller A station without
185. Line PERS LINE button the called terminal can still enter the call Remote Access Remote Access callers cannot use the Pickup feature Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port eAssign Pickup Group Number 1 16 none default none 2 246 Pooled Facility Dial Access Pooled Facility Dial Access Description This feature allows both multiline and single line voice terminal users to access a common pool of trunks by dialing a facility access code Up to 16 facility access codes can be assigned one per trunk group The codes can be one to four digits in length A group of similar trunks assigned the same access code is referred to as a trunk group Additional information is provided in the Trunk Groups feature description After going off hook on a System Access or Loop button receiving system dial tone and dialing a facility access code the user will be connected to an idle trunk However the connection will not be made if the terminal is restricted from dialing this trunk group or if dial access is restricted in general to trunks in the group The LEDs associated with the System Access button will be lighted and the user may complete the call Single line users do not receive LED indications of the status of the pool An attempt to originate a call on a busy facility will result in Reorder Tone fast busy Considerations Pooled Facility Dial Access provides users of single line terminals or m
186. Line Surge Suppressor 4 58 Asynchronous Data Units ADUs Requirements 6 6 Cable Distance Limitations 5 9 lt A Connection Information Answering Machine Access SS Connections 4 65 4 72 4 73 j Dictation System 2 132 Interface Signals 2 119 I Paging System 2 233 Local Power Connections 4 75 Remotel2 262 O C 10 1 INDEX ATL Line ZTN79 3 16 44 Attendant Extending Call Waiting Camp On CancelL2 78 ooo Console DXS Console Features Table EZ a O s For ed R Position Return Coverage On Busy Return Coverage On Don inati System Alarm Indication Automated Attendant Service 2 349 Automatic 4 Incoming Call Identification 2 157 Intercom 2 55 Route Selection ARS Auxiliary Equipment Equipment Connections Trunk TN7e3 3 18 4 70 Cid Bridged Access Buttons 2 67 Bridging Of System Access Buttons 2 07 Ringing Options 2 68 1 Station Typical Arrangement Busy Attendant Return Coverage 248 C Business Communications Needs Busy Tone Cabinet 1 Control and Port Circuits 4 4 Cabinets 2 and 3 Port Circui Address Plug 46 System IS8901A1 10 2 Cable Distance Limitations Continued Single Line Voice Terminals 5 7 2 Description Accountabilit Account
187. M7U 87 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK 2344 ADU EQUIPPED 3 FOOT RECEPTACLE ENDED EIA CORD C1 MODULAR CORDS 2 D8W 87 PEC 62515 C7 MODULAR POWER CORD D6AP 87 248B ADAPTER MODULARIZES 20120 TRANSFORMER 40082 ADAPTER POWER ADAPTER 2012D TRANSFORMER 15 18V AC SOURCE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER NOTE OUTPUT DEVICE OR MULTILINE VOI TERMINAL WITH DATA BUTTON DIALS PORT X DDC TO ESTABLISH DATA CONNECTI ON TO ZTN 82 Figure 2 46 SMDR Output Equipment On Premises Switched Connections 2 303 FEATURES AND SERVICES CO OR PRIVATE SYSTEM 25 PART OF LINE CIRCUIT CABINET OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF CONNECT VIA TAE w SIP Z210A J TYPICAL ADAPT MODEM C1 c2 ZTN129 CPU MEM v TYPICAL MODEM LEGEND C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 076 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05P C3 EIA CROSSOVER CORD M7U 87 PEC 2724 30C 355AF ADAPTER RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK 2750 425 Figure 2 47 SMDR Output Equipment Off Premises Direct Connections 2 304 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET OCTOPUS PART pr CABLE Rum 21 129 CPU MEM aS ESO Es 2210 40082 ADAPT ADAPT lt o Lee eI CONNECTED AS OPS OR CO FACILITY SMDR OUTPUT DEVICE FACILITY TYPICAL MODEM 212 TYPE LEGEND Cl
188. MDR OUTPUT DEVICE C3 C4 1 C7 LEGEND Z3A1 ADU 355AF ADAPTER Z3A4 ADU 2486 ADAPTER 400B2 ADAPTER 2012D TRANSFORMER Bl Cl C2 Wl PART OF OCTOPUS PART OF CABLE _ SIP TYPICAL 103A CONNECTION MODULAR CORD D8W 87 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE EQUIPPED WITH 3 FOOT PLUG E CORD PEC 2169 001 ELA CROSSOVER CABLE M7U 87 ADU CROSSOVER CABLE D8AM 87 20120 248B J TRANS ADAPT BLOCK 2725 076 2720 05 DED EIA 85 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR J ACK EQUIPPED WITH 3 FOOT RECEPTACLE ENDED EIA CORD MODULAR CORDS 2 D8W 87 MODULAR POWER CORD D6AP 87 MODULARI ZES 2012D TRANSFOR POWER ADAPTER 15 18V AC SOURCE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 45 PEC 62515 MER SMDR Output Equipment On Premises Direct Connections Greater Than 50 Feet From System Cabinet or Nonsharing Same AC Outlet 2 302 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET OCTOPUS CABLE PART SIP ZTN129 CPU MEM p t h 2210 1 40082 lt ADAPT ADAPT lt Fo ay ee SMDR OUTPUT DEVICE NOTE LEGEND Bl TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 07G C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE W RING CABLE Z3A1 ADU EQUIPPED WITH 3 FOOT PLUG ENDED EIA CORD PEC 2169 001 C3 CROSSOVER CABLE
189. N742 The electronic battery feed provides talking battery to the MET set produces a controlled dc battery feed current for short and long loops and detects when a MET set user lifts a receiver The digital port circuit provides a full duplex channel over two 2 wire pairs All outgoing lamp LT LR and incoming button depression BT BR information is carried on these channels Ringing and 3 25 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION switchhook information is also sent over these channels The electronic power feed device provides phantomed 48 volt dc power for the MET terminals over the data channels The electronic power feed device is a smart circuit breaker When it senses an overcurrent condition it indicates the condition on an output lead and goes into thermal shutdown if not turned off by the on board microprocessor When the overcurrent condition disappears the circuit breaker be turned on by the on board microprocessor STARLAN Interface ZTN84 The STARLAN Interface ZTN84 Circuit Pack functions as either a gateway or a bridge between System 25 and the AT amp T STARLAN NETWORK Release 2 of STARLAN only The ZTN84 CP contains much of the circuitry common to the other CPs in the system that is a Sanity and Control Interface SAKI a Network Processing Element NPE and a 8031 microprocessor The CP also contains the circuitry required to perform the protocol conversion on the data as it travels from one system to the other T
190. NE QUTPUT B DETECTORS REGISTERS SYSTEM CLOCK Figure 3 18 Service Circuit ZTN85 3 32 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION eOn Board Microprocessor With External RAM This circuit functions the same as the microprocessor in the common circuitry for the intelligent port circuits In addition it tells the dual port RAM in the time slot table circuit the appropriate time slots in which to place a tone The external RAM also has work space for complex tones i e those tones that vary with time eClock Circuit The clock circuit consists of a 20 48 MHz oscillator various dividers and shift registers The clock circuit runs independently from the rest of the Service Circuit circuitry The clock circuits start running when the circuit pack is first powered up and is not controlled by the on board microprocessor The output of the 20 48 MHz oscillator is fed to the clock divider The divider divides by 10 2560 and 128 These circuits produce the 2 048 MHz 8 kHz and 160 kHz clock signals respectively The clock generator feeds these signals to the clock driver receiver bus buffer and the tone clock The tone clock uses these signals to synchronize the counters in the tone generator and time slot table circuits with the TDM bus e Tone Generator The tone generator consists of a digital signal processor DSP a counter and a dual port tone RAM The DSP operates at 10 MHz and produces 24 different tones The dual port tone RAM stores t
191. NISHED WITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C9 ADAPTER CORD ZD8AJ 87 PEC 2750 A17 ET SETS 2991C05 2993C04 AND 2991005 10 BUTTON MET SETS USE C9 AND Cl ET SETS 7203M 12 BUTTON MET SET USES CI ONLY W 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE 2488 ADAPTER MODULARIZES 2012D TRANSFORMER 40082 ADAPTER POWER ADAPTER 21691 2012D TRANSFORMER 15 18V AC SOURCE C7 MODULAR CORD D6AP 87 NOTE ONLY MET SET WITH BUILT IN SPEAKERPHONE 2993C04 REQUIRES TRANSFORMER AND ADAPTERS OTHERWISE PLUG CI INTO B1 DIRECTLY FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 4 31 MET Set Connections 4 70 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET ZTN79 LEGEND 81 C1 Wl NOTE Figure 4 32 HYBRID LINE CP Cl 2 P2 OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF F4 SIP TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK MODULAR CORD D8W 87 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 MODULAR CORD D6AP 87 MODULAR BULK POWER SUPPLY CONSISTING OF POWER UNIT 346A PEC 31760 POWER PANEL 346A1 PEC 31761 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER PEC 62510 CAN ALSO BE USED TO SUPPLY LOCAL POWER Stand Alone Remotely Powered Voice Terminal Connections 4 71 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE Y ADAPT WP90851 L1 PART OF SIP RS 232 TERMINAL cs LEGEND 2TN78 TIP RING LINE CP TN742 ANALOG LINE CP
192. NSION UNIT PEC 2610 001 LTN84 STARLAN CP PEC 62518 ZIN78 TIP RING LINE CP 62504 TN742 ANALOG LINE CP PEC 63511 Al WP90851 L1 Y ADAPTER PEC 2150 05 NOTE 1 A2 858A ADAPTER 81 103A CONNECTING BLOCK Cl MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH NAU C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P NOTE 1 C5 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 FURNISHED WITH PHONE Wl FOUR PAIR BUILDING Wi RI NG NOTE 1 C2 AND Al ARE NOT REQUIRED IF NO PHONE 1 PLUGGED INTO THE NAU FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 39 STARLAN NETWORK Connection to System 25 With 2500 Single Line Telephone 2 289 FEATURES AND SERVICES PART OF SIP C3 agnaogad NEU C1 STARLAN WORKSTATION NAU NETWORK ACCESS UNIT PEC 2614 100 NEU NETWORK EXTENSION UNIT PEC 2610 001 ZTN79 ATL LINE CP PEC 62505 ZTN84 STARLAN CP 62518 Al Y ADAPTER WP90851 L1 PEC 2750 T05 NOTE 1 A2 858A ADAPTER A3 ATL ADAPTER NOTE 1 Bl CONNECTING BLOCK 103A Cl MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH NAU AND PHONE C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C3 6 INCH MODULAR CORD PART OF A3 C4 7 FOOT MODULAR CORD PART OF A3 T1 48 VOLT DC POWER SUPPLY 522911 NOTE 1 Wl FOUR PAIR BUILDING W RI NG NOTE 1 62520 INCLUDES Al A3 AND 1 FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 40 STARLAN NETWORK Connection to System 25 With ATL Type Telephone 2 290 Station Hunting
193. NTRAL OFFICE ETU 2 GROUND ETU 4 GROUND ETU 3 Cj GROUND CALL PROCESSOR TO SINGLE POINT GROUND FROM VOICE TERMINALS 4 PAIR BUILDING WIRE SINGLE ENDED 25 PAIR CABLE 250 8 3 TO 1 SPLITTER CABLE OR 6016 C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 D 25 PAIR CONNECTORI ZED CABLE 8254 NOTES 1 TRUNK AND STATION CONNECTIONS TO ETU 2 4 ARE SIMILAR TO ETU 1 1 THREE OF EIGHT STATION LINES FROM ANALOG STATION CP AND THREE OF EIGHT TRUNKS FROM CO TRUNK CP WHEN USED ARE FED THROUGH ETU THEY ARE NOT SWITCHED IN THE EVENT OF A POWER FAILURE 3 MAXIMUM ETU S 4 MAXIMUM PFT STATIONS PER ETU 5 Figure 2 33 Multiple ETU Arrangements 2 255 FEATURES AND SERVICES Program Description This feature enables system users to store numbers for access by feature buttons or code dialing Multiline voice terminal users can program numbers on REP DIAL and FLEX DSS buttons Both multiline and single line terminal users can store Personal Speed Dialing numbers FLEX DSS buttons provide access to inside extension numbers only REP DIAL buttons and Personal Speed Dialing are used for account codes and outside numbers maximum of 28 digits and 25 digits respectively Special Characters The following special characters may be used in Repertory Dialing and Personal Speed Dialing numbers CHAR USED IN REPERTORY DIALING NUMBERS P
194. Once a route has been selected the entries in a Digit Translations Table associated with the selected route s trunk group or Virtual Facility is checked Based on an associated NPA and the NPA dialed the system can remove up to 10 digits and then add a pattern of up to 5 digits as specified to route the call The following tones are associated with ARS e Confirmation Indicates that a queued call is being serviced trunk available to route Call e Busy Indicates that the called number is busy e Reorder Indicates that all trunks are busy or that ARS calling is denied Considerations With ARS users do not have to worry about accessing a particular pooled facility to make a long distance call The user simply dials the ARS access code and the desired number The System then routes the call via the facility best suited for that call The following provides a summary of the ARS call routing controls provided by the feature e Emergency Numbers List 911 and up to three customer defined 7 digit numbers eService Codes N11 Numbers An ARS Routing Pattern can be assigned to each N11 N 2 8 Service Code If no routing pattern is assigned the system assumes that the N11 number is a local CO code and will wait for four additional digits to be dialed before processing it as a local call e Toll Call Allowed Lists 1 4 lists 64 entries maximum between all lists Entries may be 3 digit CO codes or 6 digit NPA plus CO codes Adminis
195. PA ROUTING VIA ASSOCIATED LISTS TABLE 300 ROUTING PATTERN 500 CALL ROUTED VIA ASSOCIATED ROUTING PATTERN CALL ROUTED VIA LOCAL CO FACILITY Figure 2 8 Automatic Route Selection Flow Chart Sheet 2 of 2 2 65 FEATURES AND SERVICES ROUTING SUBPATTERNS RSP A AND B ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 POOLED POOLED C0 FACI LI TY FACI LI TY OVERFLOW ACCESS ACCESS FLAG ROUTI NG CODE CODE PATTERNS 1 8 12 130 140 FRL 0 3 FRL 0 3 ALL ROUTES 100 1 1 131 141 BUSY ROUTE 1 ROUTE 2 ROUTE 3 POOLED POOLED POOLED CO FACILITY FACILITY FACILITY OVERFLOW ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS FLAG OVERFLOW CODE CODE CODE FLAG SET AND CO TRUNK 210 220 230 240 AVAILABLE FRL 0 3 FRL 0 3 FRL 0 3 FRL 0 3 211 221 221 241 ROUTE SELECTED ROUTE CALL VIA DDD DIGIT TRANSLATIONS TABLE ASSOCIATED WITH POOLED FACILITY NETWORK OR VIRTUAL FACILITY DELETE DIGITS 0 10 ADD DIGITS MAX 5 1005 Figure 2 9 Automatic Route Selection Routing Pattern 2 66 Bridging of System Access Buttons Bridging of System Access Buttons Description This feature allows a multiline station user to handle calls on Bridged Access BA buttons associated with System Access SA buttons of another multiline station Figure 2 10 The following terms are used throughout this feature description e Principal station a multiline voice t
196. PROT n O PORT 4 32 1 PROT SMPLX SMPLX SMPLX SMPLX PORT 4 H PORT 3 PORT 2 a PORT 1 E amp M E amp M ESM E amp M Figure 3 16 Tie Trunk TN760B Circuit Pack Option Switches FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Table 3 B Signaling Type Summary Signaling Transmit Receive On Hook On Hook Off Hook open bat open bat An open circuit is preferred over voltage Table 3 760 Tie Trunk Preferred Signaling Formats Preferred Signaling Format Protected Simplex Protected stances or or Signal or Unprotected T Note 1 E amp M ype Unprotected 525 575 Simplex Type V Either Type V Either 525 Inter e 525 575 Simplex Type V Either Simplex Type V Either Building Co S25 Inter EUST D ieee amp Type 525 Located Dim uni Unprotected E amp M stard Unprotected Compatible Inter E amp M Type ildi Dim Building Compatible Protected Standara Protected E amp M Installation Situation System 25 From Circum E amp M Other Unprotected Unprotected Compatible E amp M Type Type Other P ome Compatible Protected PE l Note S Don t Care Network E amp M Type Unprotected Don t Don t Interface Standard P Care Care Not
197. PTION Memory Administration and Feature Code Modules which includes Station Call Processing are software tasks associated with memory Each task controls the storage and movement of data and messages between elements in the system e Administration Provides for administration of station and system features This software also supports maintenance procedures related to error checking and diagnosing trouble eFeature Code Modules Includes the software that receives and sends data to from the Operating System as well as control of all voice and data features supported by the system Station Call Processing includes the processing of messages and data associated with voice terminal on hook off hook indications associated port identifications button and LED operations etc The SMDR software generates SMDR records associated with a particular call The records are then sent to the System RAM for storage and then to the SMDR output channel Call Processing The following circuits support software tasks eSystem RAM provides for the storage of the following Variables for the various software tasks System translations Error Records Feature Code Data Stack e Error Logger Prioritizes and stores system errors lights the Alarm LED on the Attendant Console when a serious error is detected The errors are stored in three error records in System RAM Permanent System Alarms Transient System Errors M
198. Personal Lines allows calls to be passed in a manner that key system users are familiar with e Transfer allows a user to transfer any call to another voice terminal This feature supports transfer of calls from the answering position to another location for completion of a transaction Examples are secretary to boss office to lab broker to specialist etc e Conference allows up to five parties maximum two outside including the originator to participate in a call This feature supports add on of additional parties to a call for joint consultation crisis management schedule coordination etc e Hold allows a user to suspend a call The Hold feature allows users to temporarily disconnect from one conversation and either place or answer another call Music or information bulletins may be provided to the held party Called parties frequently use the hold period to access computer data bases search categories and or consult with others via a second phone call e Following and Forwarding provide users with ways to answer their incoming calls while temporarily away from their home terminals e Park allows a user to place a call or conference on hold and then pick up the call from any voice terminal The user can page another party to pick up the parked call or may move to another location and then re access the call Data Communications Small Business customers have started to integrate PCs into their day to day business operations Busi
199. Private Network A network used exclusively for handling the telecommunications needs of a particular customer Private Network Office Code RNX The first three digits of a 7 digit private network number These codes are numbered 220 through 999 excluding any codes that have a 0 or 1 as the second digit Protocol A set of conventions or rules governing the format and timing of message exchanges to control data movement and correction of errors Public Network The network that can be openly accessed by all customers for local or long distance calling Queue An ordered sequence of calls waiting to be processed Queuing The process of holding calls in order of their arrival to await connection to an attendant to an answering group to a station or to a trunk Calls are automatically connected in first in first out sequence RIMS Remote Initialization and Maintenance Service GLOSSARY Random Access Memory RAM A storage arrangement whereby information can be retrieved at a speed independent of the location of the stored information Read Only Memory ROM A storage arrangement primarily for information retrieval applications Recall Dial Tone Three short bursts of tone followed by steady dial tone indicates the system has completed some action such as holding a call and is ready to accept dialing Redirection Criteria The information administered for each voice terminal that determines when an incoming ca
200. Ps except Tie Trunk CPs can be connected to a 3 way splitter cable PEC 2720 06X that concentrates the CP interfaces into one 25 pair cable Up to two Tie Trunk CPs can be connected to a 2 way splitter cable PEC 2720 05X that concentrates the CP interfaces into one 25 pair cable Each splitter cable connects to an interface block at the TAE Cables are either cut down or plugged into the TAE blocks The other end of the cables plug into the telephone company provided network interfaces RJ21X or RJ2GX Trunks and tie lines are cut down by the telephone company at the network interface 700A or 157B Blocks are usually used for the TAE connections furnished by the installer HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 4 60 700 NETWORK I INTERFACE BLOCKS 110 TYPE OR DIGITAL SWITCH FACILITIES I i LOOP AND GRD START TRUNKS OPS DID TRUNKS CO TRUNK E FACILITIES sil PORT p o x I i NETWORK INTERFACE 1 I l CO TRUNK FACILITIES PORT CP S CENTRAL OFFICE ANALOG LINE CP TN742 TIE TRUNK FACILITIES PORT CP S RJ2G6X TIE LINE SINGLE ENDED 25 PAIR CONNECTOR CABLE 250 B 3 TO 1 SPLITTER CONNECTORIZED CABLE PEC 2720 06X C 2 TO 1 SPLITTER CONNECTORI ZED CABLE PEC 2720 05X OPS OFF PREMISES STATION SIP STATION INTERCONNECT PANEL D OCTOPUS CABLE PEC 2720 05P E INSIDE WIRE F TRUNK ACCESS
201. RCUITRY MEMORY MANAGEMENT NETWORK CONTROLLER READ RANDOM ONLY ACCESS TDM SAKI MEMORY CLOCK MEMORY Bus LEADS _ DSP MODEM 5V DC BATTERY POWER FAIL DETECT BUFFERS TO TDM TERMINATOR BUS RESISTORS Figure 3 2 CPU MEM ZTN129 Circuitry 3 3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION All uplink messages from the port circuits are checked for consistency and passed to the Common Control The controller is the distribution control point for all downlink control messages It continuously scans over the TDM bus the port circuit microprocessors for sanity and activity External RAM associated with this microprocessor stores control channel information and port related information The controller consists of bus buffers and a Sanity and Control Interface SAKI It also contains a Digital Signal Processor DSP modem The bus buffers provide the interface between the TDM bus and the on board data buses to the SAKI and DSP modem The SAKI receives and transmits control messages on the first five time slots on the TDM bus The DSP modem is a 1200 baud answer only modem for Remote Initialization and Maintenance Service RIMS access The microprocessor communicates with the SAKI the DSP modem and external RAM over the address and data bus Clock A clock provides both time of day information in seconds minutes and hours and the date to the 68010 The
202. REMENTS Grounding Connection of an approved ground to the system cabinets is essential An approved ground may consist of any of the following eGrounded Building Steel The metal frame of the building eWater Pipe A continuous metal water pipe not less than 1 2 inch diameter that is connected to an underground metal water pipe that is in direct contact with earth for 10 feet or more eConcrete Encased Ground An electrode encased by at least 2 inches of concrete and located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation or footing in direct contact with the earth The foundation must consist of at least 20 feet of one or more steel reinforcing bars or rods of not less than 1 2 inch diameter or at least 20 feet of bare solid copper wire no smaller than No 4 gauge e Ground Ring A ring that encircles a building or structure in direct contact with earth at a depth of at least 2 1 2 feet The ring must consist of at least 20 feet of bare copper conductor no smaller than No 2 gauge Lightning Protection The System 25 lightning protections plan requires five distinct but interdependent items at each installation e Primary protection in the form of voltage limiters typically carbon blocks or gas tubes These devices bypass surges to approved building ground and limit potential differences between T R pairs and building ground to less than 1500 volts single point ground SPG system that connects green wire ground
203. RESS AND DATA BUS ON BOARD MICRO PROCESSOR GREEN YELLOW LEDS Figure 3 6 Port Circuit Pack Common Circuitry 3 13 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION eNPE Network Processing Element Each port circuit pack contains one or two NPEs The Analog Line ATL Line Tip Ring Data Line Ground Start Loop Start and DID Trunk Circuit Packs contain two NPEs The MET Line Auxiliary Trunk and Tie Trunk Circuit Packs contain one NPE The NPEs do switching network functions for the port circuits Under control of the on board microprocessor an NPE can connect a port circuit to any one of the TDM bus time slots More specifically it allows a port circuit to talk on one time slot and listen to the same time slot NPE sidetone and on up to four other time slots at the same time In 2 wire circuits that provide their own sidetone the NPE sidetone is not used e Circuit Pack Address Leads Seven leads BAO BA6 are tied to corresponding logic levels to uniquely identify each CP slot in the system including multiple cabinet systems The logic values on leads BA4 and 5 are used to identify the cabinet Cabinet 1 2 or 3 and are tied via the cabinet address plugs to either 5 V dc or ground as appropriate Lead BA6 is tied to ground Analog Line TN742 The Analog Line CP interfaces eight analog voice terminal lines and the TDM bus The TN742 can be used instead of the ZTN78 Tip Ring CP The TN742 supports up to five bridged si
204. Ringer Volume Control Speakerphone Volume Control On Quiet and Off Speakerphone Control Buttons Speakerphone Indicator Lamp Six Fixed Feature Buttons Recall Transfer Conference Hold Drop Message Five Programmable Feature Buttons each equipped with l Use and Status LEDs default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 and Last Number Dialed 1 Adjuncts None 4 48 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION TOUCH TONE DIAL PAD SYSTEM ACCESS PROGRAMMABLE FEATURE BUTTONS c EY ON LAMP CONTROL _ MESSAGE WAITING _ DROP _ CONFERENCE C TRANSFER C HOLD RECALL INDICATOR BUTTON LAMPS Figure 4 20 10 Button MET With Built In Speakerphone 2993C04 4 49 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 12 Button MET Set 7203M The 12 Button MET set Figure 4 21 is a freestanding voice terminal This set is available only on a reuse basis and is not orderable via the Delivery Operation Support System DOSS Configurator The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch Tone Dial Pad DTMF e Use and Status LEDs Tone Ringer Volume Control Message Waiting LED e Seven Fixed Feature Buttons Recall Transfer Conference Hold Drop Message Disconnect e Five Programmable Feature Buttons each equipped with l Use and Status LEDs default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 and Last Number Dialed 1 Adjuncts e500A Headset Adapter eS101A Speakerphone
205. S Servers on the STARLAN NETWORK and to function as client workstations The interface from the System 25 to the STARLAN NETWORK is the STARLAN CP operating in bridge mode Bridge mode provides a transparent connection between the PC and the STARLAN NETWORK Personal computer users may access the STARLAN NETWORK just as though they were connected to the STARLAN NETWORK with a Network Access Unit NAU although at lower speed The NAU is a CP mounted in STARLAN NETWORK workstations that permits access to other workstations and or servers in the network Data transmission through the STARLAN CP is limited to a maximum of 9 600 bps This is much less than the 1 million bps transmission rate between workstations servers on a STAR LAN NETWORK Applications that require frequent and lengthy transfers of data over the Local Area Network LAN will appear slow Applications should be designed configured to run the executable program locally on the PC and to access data from the file server on the LAN ACCESS is recommended primarily for shared file and printer access Applications should be copied to the user s local disk before they are run This program also permits STARLAN NETWORK access for remote PCs if the System 25 is equipped with a Pooled Modem CP 758 or external modem pool Remote PCs can dial the STARLAN CP through a modem using either the Direct Group Calling DGC feature or Direct Inward Dialing DID trunks to obtain a connection
206. SINGLE TN726 DATA LINE CP LINE SET lt Bl TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK NOTES Cl MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 07G C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05 5 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 FURNISHED WITH SET Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE WP90851 L1 MODULAR Y ADAPTER PEC 2750 705 Z3A1 ADU E W3 FT PLUG ENDED EIA CORD PEC 2169 001 NOTES 1 IF RANGE IS GREATER THAN 2000 FT FROM SYSTEM CABINET TERMINAL DATA RATE SPEED WILL BE LIMITED SEE DI STANCE LIMITATIONS LIN SECTION 5 1 TF RANGE TS LESS THAN 2000 FEET FROM SYSTEM CABINET USE ZTN 78 F RANGE 15 MORE THAN 2000 FEET BUT LESS THAN 1300 OHMt LOOP RESISTANCE FROM CABINET USE TN 742 FURNISHED BY INSTALLER INCLUDES TELEPHONE TERMI NAL Figure 4 33 Typical ADU Connections Supporting Data Terminal and Single Line Voice Terminal 4 72 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP Y ADAPT WPS085 1 1 1 TN726 DATA LINE CP C1 TERMINAL LEGEND WP90851 L1 MODULAR Y ADAPTER 2750 T05 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 076 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP80780 PEC 2720 05P P1 KS22911 POWER SUPPLY INCLUDED IN PEC 62506 W1 4 PAIR INSIDE W RING CABLE 23A5 ADU E W 3 FT PLUG ENDED EIA CORD 62506 INCLUDES 23A5 ADU ONE D8W CORD C1 AND P1 7300H SERIES VOICE TERMINAL Figure 4 34 Typical ADU Connections Supporting Dat
207. See Table 2 1 PLEASE WAIT message Calling Restrictions f a terminal is toll or access restricted the modem resource is released when the user receives intercept treatment Direct Group Calling Modem pooling supports calls to data endpoints that are part of a DGC group While an incoming data call is in the DGC group queue the caller hears Ringback Tone The conversion resource is inserted if the call is completed to a digital endpoint Station Hunting Modem Pooling supports calls to data endpoints that are part of a station hunting group Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR records do not reflect modem resource usage Interpremises data calls using a conversion resource are reported as data calls on the SMDR call record 2 220 Modem Pooling Administration Requirements System Pooled Modems Request Code 1 9999 default 820 Allows users to indicate a need for conversion resource on a data call originated at an analog data endpoint e Receiver Responds To Remote Loop yes or no default yes When active Data Set Ready is asserted when the modem is in an analog loop test mode e Disconnect On Loss Of Carrier yes or no default yes When active a loss of the received carrier will cause the modem to terminate the call eCF CB Common yes or no default yes When active Clear to Send turns off if Carrier Detect turns off When a call is being established Clear to Send and Ca
208. Selection co gt c W TH LEDS e El 2 El E 8 Ez E El e El el El 8 Ez E E EE EB EIE s EI B El 8 e e 8 E E t e e s 8 s e E e 8 s s E E Ez E E E EERE E E El Ez E 8 m eo e GROUP SELECT BUTTONS AND ASSOCIATED LEDS NOTE STATUS LEDs are located to the left of each DXS button 00 99 under transparent front cover Model 23A1 Attendant Direct Extension Selector Console Figure 2 6 2 35 FEATURES AND SERVICES A call parked via the Selector Console can be picked up at any voice terminal by dialing the Park retrieval code 8 and the number on which the call is parked The rightmost button on the bottom row is a Test button When it is pressed DXS LEDs will light sequentially a second press allows individual LEDs to be tested and a third press ends the test Considerations When there are two Attendant Selector Consoles in the system the Group Select button assignments are identical Whenever an administrative change is made to one console the other console is automatically changed Buttons on the Selector Console point to either station PDCs FPDCs FPDCs Park codes DGC access codes or pooled facilities Calls extended by the Selector Console are directed as described in the Personal Dial Codes feature description When station calls the att
209. Send All Calls is enabled at the principal station immediate ringing occurs in these situations As with standard System 25 operation off hook stations receive abbreviated alerting instead of repeated ringing In addition ring options have no effect on visual alerting via status LEDs on SA or BA buttons When an inside or outside call comes into an SA button of an idle principal station it and each bridging station receive ringing according to options set by the System Administrator and visual alerting with a flashing status LED If one of the users picks up the call the green 2 68 Bridging of System Access Buttons status LEDs of the SA button and the bridged appearances light steadily If neither principal nor bridging user answers the call goes to the principals coverage if provided in the usual way When the covering station answers the status LEDs at the principal and bridging stations light When a call comes into an idle SA button of a principal who is busy on another SA button the bridging station s will receive flashing and ringing if administered on the bridged appearance of the called button A bridging station can answer the call A call to a principal with all SA buttons busy will receive busy tone unless coverage is available or Call Waiting is administered Bridging stations do not have access to the call Considerations The bridging feature meets the needs of executive secretary type arrangements whe
210. System 25 system ground and telephone company TelCo ground together and to approved building ground eCoupled bonding conductor CBC connected between the TelCo ground at the building entrance and System 25 s SPG CBC is tie wrapped to all trunks to provide lightning protection it can be a 16 gauge ground wire or continuous cable sheath The CBC should also be run from the TelCo provided network interface to the ground block of cabinet 1 see in the Functional Description section If the TelCo has not extended the CBC from the facility entrance to the network interface the installer should run the CBC along the same route as the incoming facilities where feasible e Secondary protection provided within TN742 and all trunk CPs such ports can withstand 800 volt metallic differential and 1500 volt longitudinal common mode surges ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS eSurge protection on the AC power to System 25 and associated equipment SAT SMDR DTU etc provided by the TII 428 Unit The protection outlined above is adequate for more than 99 percent of all lightning strikes For the few remaining cases external secondary protection located at the trunk access area of the cross connect field can be employed Several commercially available units can be used If 66 type block terminations are used a very convenient device is the LP3 230 220 Fused Lightning Protector manufactured by ITW LINX 195 Algonquin Road Des Plaines Illinois
211. System 25 to a local or remote PC This is referred to as Bridge Mode and provides a through connection between PCs running ACCESS and a STARLAN NETWORK The proper mode Bridge or Gateway is auto selected by the system The STARLAN NETWORK View of System 25 From the STARLAN NETWORK the STARLAN CP functions like a STARLAN NETWORK workstation equipped with a Network Access Unit NAU The NAU enables STAR LAN NETWORK workstations and servers to access and exchange data over the network Plug number 1 of the STAR LAN CP octopus cable should be connected to an IN jack on the Network Extension Unit NEU see Figures 2 39 and 2 40 Calls from STARLAN NETWORK to System 25 A STARLAN NETWORK workstation accesses a host computer connected to System 25 either a local host or a remote host that can be reached using the Modem Pooling feature 1 The STARLAN NETWORK workstation loads CLIENT and NAUCOM and then CAM software discussed in the Communications Access Manager Program feature description and selects a directory entry for the host 2 CAM communicates with the STARLAN CP to place the call 2 204 STARLAN NETWORK Access 3 After a connection message is received CAM automatically switches to terminal emulation data mode 4 The user may now log into and converse with the remote host 5 To disconnect the user selects the CAM disconnect command HOST COMPUTER STARLAN CP PERSONAL COMPUTER SYSTEM 25 NETWORK
212. System Cabinet or Not Sharing Same AC Oullet Figure 2 46 SMDR Output Equipment On Premises Switched Connections 2 303 Figure 2 47 SMDR Output Equipment Off Premises Direct Connections 2 304 Figure 2 48 SMDR Output Equipment Off Premises Switched Connections 2 305 Figure 2 49 Model 703 System Administration Terminal 2 311 Figure 2 50 SAT On Premises Direct Connections Sharing Same AC Outlet 2 312 Figure 2 51 SAT On Premises Direct Connections Greater Than 50 Feet From System Cabinet or Not Sharing Same AC Outlet 2 313 Figure 2 52 SAT On Premises Switched Connections 2 314 Figure 2 53 SAT Off Premises Direct Connections 2 315 Figure 2 54 SAT Off Premises Switched Connections 2 316 Vii Figure 2 55 Command Mode Menu Tree 2 339 Tables Table 2 System Features 2 3 Table 2 B Station Features Table 2 G Partial List of Permissible Data Port TN726 Options 2 99 Table 2 H Typical Option Profiles for Data Port Endpoints 2 100 Table 2 Call Progress Messages for Data Terminal Dialing 2 126 Table 2 J Special Descriptors 2 152 Table 2 K LED Indications 2 207 Table 2 L User Changeable Options 2 338 viii FEATURES AND SERVICES FEATURES AND SERVICES Introduction This section describes the System Features Station Features Network Features Data Features and Attendant Features of AT amp T System 25 It also covers certain services that support and implement the features included in this category are the di
213. T e Change switchhook state if the user goes on hook the terminal returns to Normal or Local Mode if the user goes off hook the terminal returns to Normal Mode e Select call appearance button the terminal returns to Normal Mode Considerations The Directory feature is most effective if the system administrator enters names in the data base a last name comma first initial format Characters other than letters and numbers and commas are discouraged However the system does not enforce these rules A maximum of eleven characters can be entered for a name in the data base but only nine can be displayed Activating the Directory Mode has the following impact on terminal operation e Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI is disabled elf the user is on hook but has a call on hold there is no effect on the call elf the user is off hook and in the midst of dialing the system disconnects the call elf the user is off hook and has completed dialing there is no effect on the call e Automatic Incoming Call Identification see the feature description is suppressed eCalls can be originated only by using the CALL button elncoming calls ring and flash but answering a call will change the terminal from Directory Mode to Normal Mode 2 145 FEATURES AND SERVICES Administration Requirements Administration of the Display feature enables Directory Hardware Requirements The Directory feature can be used only at displa
214. T 3 PORT CIRCUIT 4 PORT CIRCUIT 5 PORT CIRCUIT 6 PORT CIRCUIT 7 Figure 3 10 Data Line TN726 Unique Circuitry 3 20 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ePort Circuits Each of the eight identical port circuits allows the connection of interface equipment having an RS 232 compatible serial interface to the switch The circuit provides asynchronous full duplex data transport at standard speeds from 300 to 19 200 bps and a low data rate lt 300 bps Each port includes an Asynchronous Data Unit ADU to extend the serial communications link length and provide safe isolation The ADU terminates to another ADU at the Customer Provided Equipment CPE The distance between the digital switch and CPE is inversely proportional to the speed at which the link is run Throughout the circuit various gates are used to provide a means of isolating devices for automated circuit pack testing Typically these devices are crystal oscillators or memory components attached to the microprocessor bus DID Trunk 753 The DID Trunk CP Figure 3 11 interfaces eight central office trunks arranged for Direct Inward Dialing DID and the TDM bus The DID Trunk has the following unique circuitry e Port IO Circuit This circuit consists of bus expanders for communication between the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits
215. TION STATION STATION Figure 2 21 Stages of Call Forwarding Forwarding is similar to the Following feature Both features enable users to answer their calls at another terminal The basic differences between these features are as follows eUsers activate Forwarding at their own stations the forwarded to station can be inside or outside System 25 e Users activate Following at the away station which must be inside System 25 The procedures for activating the two features are different also Refer to the description for complete coverage of that feature Forwarding Calls to Stations Inside System 25 The user activates Forwarding to an inside station by dialing feature access code 70 and then the forwarded to extension number If the activation is successful the user receives confirmation tone if the attempt fails the user hears reorder tone The user who forwarded calls to an inside station can deactivate Forwarding in either of these ways eBy signing in at the users own the forwarding station after returning there this procedure consists of dialing and then the user s PDC twice eBy signing out at the forwarded to station before returning to the forwarding station this procedure consists of dialing followed by the user s own PDC and then 0 Calls forwarded to an inside station cannot forward again from the forwarded to station A call unanswered at a forwarded to inside station returns to the
216. There are two types of PDCs assigned and floating An assigned PDC is associated with each voice terminal Floating PDCs FPDCs may be signed in at any voice terminal Calls to FPDCs will ring at the signed in terminal and may optionally ring at the attendant position when not signed in anywhere Data extensions on System 25 are assigned Data Dial Codes DDCs Dial Code Assignments System 25 dial codes are as follows Assignable System 25 dial codes may have 1 2 3 or 4 digits These include voice terminal PDCs data terminal DDCs Direct Group Calling DGC Groups Paging Access Attendant Selector Console Park Night Service Modem Request Automatic Route Selection Access Facility Access trunk group and Dictation System Access codes System 25 fixed dial codes are e0 Attendant access 1 2 3 Reserved 4 Activate Make Busy for DGC group member 5 Park 6 Deactivate Make Busy for DGC group member 7 0 Group Pickup Answer 7 PDC Directed Pickup Answer 8 PDC Park Retrieval 9 Camped On Call Waiting Call Retrieval 0 Account Code Entry PDCPDC Sign in PDC Following and Forwarding PDCO Sign out PDC Following 0 5 out all PDCs Following 2 129 FEATURES AND SERVICES e PAUSE character in programmed numbers e 100 189 System Speed Dialing Codes e 190 199 Virtual Facility Codes e 20 39 Personal Speed Dialing Codes
217. Transfer PFT sets and a DID make busy function Up to four ETUs can be supported for a maximum of 20 PFT sets The sets can be connected to selected Loop Start or Ground Start trunks If Ground Start trunks are used a 55A1 Ground Start Button must be provided at each PFT set 2 251 FEATURES AND SERVICES Only FCC registered single line voice terminals may be used for PFT stations Rotary sets must be used for dial pulse PFT trunks touch tone sets must be used for touch tone PFT trunks In the event of a Power Failure Transfer switch has lost power or a major fault has occurred a contact closure is provided to the Central Office CO over a dedicated pair of wires The CO then makes busy all DID trunks When power is restored the closure is removed and the CO restores DID service External alarm contacts are provided on the front of the ETU for use as required Note It is recommended that customers with DID service make provisions with their CO to provide this arrangement The ETUs are mounted on the cross connect backboard Connections are via 25 pair receptacle ended CO and SIP and plug ended switch line and trunk connectors Modular jacks are provided for the 48V control signal from the CPU Call Processor Unit and for additional ETUs Screw terminals are provided for the connection of external alarms When calculating Unit Loading see Section 5 all ETU loading counts against Cabinet 1 The 10B ETU is mounted on the cross
218. U C3 355AF ADAPTER Z3A4 ADU 1 FURNISHED BY NOTE c2 _ sr Lat dot ADAPT ADU C7 248B ADAPTER 400B2 ADAPTER 2012D TRANSFORMER SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION TERMI NAL PART OF OCTOPUS PART OF CABLE 72104 c1 35 cag 7344 ADAPT ADAPT ADU PART OF 20120 248B TRANS ADAPT PART OF SIP TYPI CAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK MODULAR CORD D8W 87 2725 076 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05P 4 PALR INSIDE WIRING CABLE EQUIPPED W TH 3 FOOT PLUG ENDED EIA CORD PEC 2169 001 EIA CROSSOVER CABLE M7U 87 RS 232 RECEPTACLE TO MODULAR JACK EQUIPPED WITH 3 FOOT RECEPTACLE ENDED EI A CORD MODULAR CORDS 2 D8W 87 MODULAR POWER CORD D6AP 87 MODULARIZES 2012D TRANSFORMER POWER ADAPTER 15 18V AC SOURCE PEC NSTALLER OR MULTI LI NE VOICE TERMINAL WITH DATA BUTTON DIALS PORT X DDC TO ESTABLISH DATA CO Figure 2 52 2 314 NECTION TO ZTN 82 SAT On Premises Switched Connections SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL NOTE 62515 System Administration SYSTEM 25 PART OF EE EIN CABINET OCTOPUS CABLES PART OF CONNECT VIA TAE SIP ZTN129 22104 J TYPICAL CENTEA CPU MEM ADAPT MODEM OFFICE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL TYPICAL MODEM LEGEND C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 PEC 2725 07G C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C3 CROSSOVER CORD M7U 87
219. UIT PACK SLOTS PORT CIRCUITS b CABINET 2 OR 3 MOUNTING FOR PORT CIRCUIT PACKS ERMI NAL CIRCUIT PACKS FROM THE RIGHT TRUNK CIRCUIT PACKS FROM THE LEFT T PACK SYSTEM RESOURCE CIRCUIT PACKS eSERVICE CIRCUIT ZTN85 e POOLED MODEM TN758 eTONE DETECTOR TN748B MAXI MUM 2 PER CABI NET PORT CIRCUIT PACKS 1 ellP RING LINE ZTN78 e DATA LINE TN726 eATL LINE ZTNT79 e GROUND START TRUNK ZTN76 eMET LINE TN735 e LOOP START TRUNK ZTN77 eANALOG LINE TN742 e DID TRUNK TN753 eAUXI LI ARY TRUNK TN763 e TIE TRUNK TN760B eSTARLAN INTERFACE ZTN84 CIRCUIT PACK M UNI VERSAL PORT SERVI CE CI RCUI UST BE T MUST MOUNTED IN SLOT 1 OF CABINET 1 CIRCUIT PACKS CAN BE MOUNTED IN ANY AVAILABLE PORT SLOT BE MOUNTED IN SLOT 2 OF CABINET 1 POOLED MODEM AND TONE DETECTOR MAY BE MOUNTED IN ANY PORT CIRCUIT SLOT Figure 4 3 System Circuit Pack Configurations HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Cabinet Address Plug An address plug is provided on the middle of the backplane of each cabinet accessible after removing the top rear cover and is used to designate the cabinet number to the software When address plug is plugged into the designated area at CP slot 5 the cabinet is identified as Cabinet 1 at slot 6 as Cabinet 2 and at slot 7 as Cabinet 3 Table 4 A Total Port Circuit Packs Per System NUMBER PORT TOTAL PORT CABINET CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CABINETS NUMBER
220. UIT TERMINALS POWER SUPPLY Figure 3 7 Analog Line TN742 Unique Circuitry ePort Circuits The eight port circuits are identical Each port circuit consists of a coder decoder codec hybrid circuit electronic battery feed circuit ring relay and overvoltage surge protection circuit The codec is a 4 wire circuit that converts the analog signal from a voice terminal to a PCM data signal It converts an incoming PCM data signal from the NPEs to an analog signal The hybrid circuit converts the 4 wire analog signal from the codec to a 2 wire analog signal that is connected to the analog line Filtered power is provided for the codec and hybrid circuits 3 15 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The electronic battery feed circuit provides talking battery to the voice terminal It also produces a controlled dc battery feed for short and long loops detects when a receiver is lifted and provides the message waiting signal by periodically turning off the feed voltage The ring relay provides the interface between the ringing application circuit and the port circuit It causes ringing turn on and turn off The overvoltage surge protection circuit provides lightning surge and power line cross protection for the circuit pack ATL Line ZTN79 The ATL Line CP interfaces eight hybrid voice terminal 7300H series lines and the TDM bus It terminates three pairs of wires from each terminal analog voice pair digital control pair and power pair Th
221. UNK CP IT TEM IC TELEPHONE ON TERMINAL RECORDING CATIONS SERVI CE Equipment Connections Via Circuit Pack Ports Sheet 1 of 3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PART OF DIGITAL SWITCH SAT DTU SMDR CAS ON PREMISES ZTN129 DIRECT CONNECTION CPU MEM CP 1 SAT REQUIRED FOR CONNECTIONS 50 FEET 2 SMDR CAS OR NOT SHARING SAME AC OUTLET 3 DTU 4 RESERVED TN726 DATA LINE CP TN726 DATA LINE CP SAT SMDR 23A1 4 ADU CAS ON PREMISES SWITCHED CONNECTION ZTN129 CPU MEM CP TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEX BUS SAT SMDR CAS OFF PREMISES DIRECT CONNECTION MODEM MODEM 212 TYPE 212 TYPE SAT SMDR CAS OFF PREMISES SWITCHED CONNECTION T MODEM 212 TYPE TOFF PREMISES STATION OR CO TRUNK ZTN128 CPU MEM CP TN742 ANALOG LINE CP ZTN76 GROUND START TRUNK CP OR ZTN77 LOOP START TRUNK CP TN726 DATE LINE CP ZTN128 CPU MEM CP Figure 3 5 Equipment Connections Via Circuit Pack Ports Sheet 2 of 3 3 11 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SINGLE LINE VDICE TERMINALS 420 500 2500 SERIES 7101 7102A ZTN78 RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS TIP RING DICTATION EINE PART OF DIGITAL SWITCH OR EQUIPMENT m es e TN742 EXTERNAL ALERTING ANALOG DEVICES LINE CP MUSIC ON HOLD MULTILINE VOI
222. Use and Status LEDs e Test Program Switch two positions T for testing operation of LEDs and ringer P for programming feature buttons Built in HFAI Microphone Built In Speaker e Speaker Ringer Volume Control Eight Fixed Feature Buttons with status LED Conference Speaker Drop Recall Transfer Message Hold Microphone Ten Programmable Feature Buttons each equipped with l Use and Status LEDs default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 3 Send All Calls I Account Code Entry 1 and Last Number Dialed I Adjuncts None 4 36 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS 10 WITH I USE AND STATUS LEDs HANDSET TEST PROGRAM SWITCH ON SIDE TOUCH DIAL PAD SPEAKER RING VOLUME CONTROL ON SIDE CONFERENCE TRANSFER DROP g HOLD D MESSAGE HFAI MICROPHONE RECALL SPEAKER D Figure 4 14 7309 01 Voice Terminal HFAI 4 37 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 7313H01A Voice Terminal BIS 10 3165 10B This 7313H01A 10 button terminal Figure 4 15 can be desk or wall mounted It is about 6 1 4 inches wide 8 3 4 inches deep and not including the handset 1 1 2 inches thick when desk mounted it is about 5 1 4 inches high in the back The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch Dial Pad not DTMF Use and Status LEDS Test Program Switch two positions T for testing operatio
223. VOICE MESSAGE SYSTEM WITH SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL OR MS DOS PC WITH ADVANCED ADMINISTRATION AUTOMATED ATTENDANT SERVICE CALL COVERAGE SERVICE VOICE MAIL SERVICE ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE MESSAGE DROP SERVICE DIGITAL TAPE UNIT OR MS DOS PC WITH ADVANCED ADMINISTRATION SWITCHING ANALOG TRUNK FACILITIES NETWORK STATION e DID e FX e TIE ANALOG DATA ASYNCHRONOUS RS232 DATA UNIT e WATS PAGING ANALOG e AUXILIARY DICTATION EQUIP HOST COMPUTERS TERMINALS PRINTERS MODEMS DIGITAL DEVICES STARLAN NETWORK WORKSTATIONS ANALOG SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINAL HYBRID MULTILINE VOICE TERMINAL STARLAN NETWORK PRINT AND FILE SERVERS STARLAN NETWORK GATEWAY DIRECT TRUNK ATTENDANT CONSOLE OR SWITCHED LOOP ATTENDANT CONSOLE STARLAN NETWORK HOSTS e MUSIC SOURCE e EXTERNAL ALERT e RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT e DICTATION EQUIPMENT RIMS ANALOG ACCESS TRUNK Figure 1 1 System 25 Block Diagram MS DOS PC HYBRID WITH CALL ANALOG MANAGEMENT SYSTEM OVERVIEW Voice communications features combine traditional telephone features such as Transfer and Hold with advanced features such as Individual and Group Coverage Hands Free Answer On Intercom and Speed Dialing see Section 2 FESaturee and qusa Data communications features provide switched data connections supporting transmission of voice and data over
224. Voice Terminals Voice terminals served by a single line tip and ring circuit 2500 series and 7101A voice terminals or industry standard Dual Tone Multifrequency equivalent Appearance See Call Appearance Asynchronous Data Transmission A scheme for transmitting data where each character is preceded by a start bit and followed by a stop bit thus permitting data elements to occur at irregular intervals This type transmission is advantageous when transmission is not regular characters typed at a keyboard Asynchronous Data Unit ADU A data communications equipment DCE type device that allows direct connection between RS 232C equipment and the digital switch via ports on the Data Line Circuit 726 9 1 GLOSSARY Attendant The operator of the attendant console Attendant Console eDirect Trunk or Switched Loop Attendant Console An electronic call handling position with pushbutton control Used by attendants to answer and place calls and to manage and monitor some system operations e Direct Extension Selector Console Provides the attendant with a visual indication of the active or idle status of extension numbers assigned in the system Also allows the attendant to extend calls to system users by operation of appropriate Hundreds Group Select buttons and associated Direct Extension Selection DXS buttons Auxiliary Equipment e Dictation Equipment eDelay Announcement Devices e External Alerting Devi
225. a Terminal and 7300H Series Multilane Voice Terminal 4 73 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM 25 CABINET M MF MF MF FM TN726 AH i LH cio M C10 W2 F M C11 C12 COMPUTER OR TERMINALS LEGEND TN726 DATA LINE CP MADU MULTIPLE ASYNCHRONOUS DATA UNIT PEC 2169 005 SINGLE UNIT ASSEMBLY 8 ADU PORTS W2 BUILDING WRING 25 PAIR CABLE C10 25 PAIR CENTERFEED TO ENDFEED CABLE PEC 2724 788 ALWAYS REQUI RED 11 M48C OCTOPUS CABLE PEC 2724 296 7 FOOT CORD WITH EIGHT 6 INCH ARMS FOR DTE HOST INTERFACE C12 M48G OCTOPUS CABLE 2724 986 7 FOOT CORD WITH EIGHT 6 1 ARMS FOR DCE HOST INTERFACE Figure 4 35 Typical MADU Connections 4 74 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION TO RS 232C DEVICE POWER 222 OUTLET 2012D POWER TRANSFORMER OPTIONAL SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE JACK L 248B ADAPTER I 400B2 ADAPTER D6AP 87 CORD 4 PAIR D8W CORD 2725 07G NI S lt 7 gt lt gt LY WALL JACK lt Z D8AM 87 CROSSOVER CORD REQUIRED IF THIS ADU IS CONNECTED TO ANOTHER ADU OR ANY OTHER DCE DEVICE RATHER THAN DATA LINE CP NOTE PEC 21691 INCLUDES 2012D TRANSFORMER 248B AND 400B2 ADAPTERS AND D6AP CORD Figure 4 36 23 1 2 4 ADU Local Power Connections 4 75 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Hardware and Software Parameters Unit Loads Cable Distance Limitations Call Progress Tones Indicator Lamp Signals Port Specifications Recommended Cen
226. active console are not affected by the Position Busy feature The attendant can press a Direct Station Selection DSS Automatic Intercom AUTO ICOM or a Direct Facility Access FACILITY button and then receive busy to idle reminder when the facility becomes idle Note that if a personal trunk appears on only one DTAC incoming calls on those trunks will not receive service when the console is inactive For this reason it is strongly recommended that each DTAC attendant be assigned a Coverage Individual COVER IND button for the other console so that these calls can be covered Also be sure to make the Attendant Console the principal station owner on all trunks that are to receive coverage by the other attendant Systems with Switched Loop Attendant Console s SLAC In order for the Position Busy feature to be operational the system must have either two attendant positions or one position plus a multiline voice terminal administered as a backup If the system has two consoles pressing the Position Busy button on one will make it inactive and cause most calls in the common console queue to be directed to the active console Each attendant covers for the other Only one console can be in Position Busy condition at a time If the system has one console with an administered backup voice terminal pressing the POS BUSY button will make the SLAC inactive and most calls from the common queue will be directed to the backup terminal FEATUR
227. addition it covers feature enhancements and new hardware 8 2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION Reference Manual The principal technical reference for users of System 25 It provides reference material for sales support system configuration and operation and for the system technician It contains a comprehensive description of the system emphasizing features components and overall capabilities and capacities Terminal Operations Manual Designed to help the System Administrator better understand System 25 voice terminal and data terminal operation This manual contains the operating procedures provided in the various User Guides and provides additional explanatory material as well User Guides 700 Series Contain step by step operating procedures for System 25 attendants and users of voice and data terminals GLOSSARY GLOSSARY This section provides explanations for acronyms and definitions of terms used in this manual ADU Asynchronous Data Unit ARS Automatic Route Selection ASCII American Standard Code for Information Exchange Administer To access and change the parameters associated with the services or features of the system Analog Data Endpoint Data endpoints with customer provided built in or stand alone modems They do not require the use of data modules asynchronous data units and are addressed similar to any voice terminal by PDC These end points connect to tip ring type circuit pack ports Analog
228. age Center the Attendant at the combined position also functions as the Message Center operator for the entire system A call extended by either Attendant to a station that does not answer or is busy returns to the Message Center e Two combined Attendant Position Message Centers the Attendants at each combined position also function as Message Center operators The special call types answered by Message Centers can be divided between the two consoles or both consoles can answer all types A call extended by either Attendant to a station that does not answer or in busy returns to the Message Center specified in translation Three return options are provided to the 1st attendant to the 2nd attendant or to either attendant Interactions All System 25 console features are accessible at a Message Center Operating procedures are exactly the same as those at a standard Attendant Position The BIS and HFAI features can be used to answer Message Center calls An auxiliary Direct Extension Selector Console can be used with a Message Center Outgoing calling from the Basic Console or the Selector Console is not affected by Message Center administration Administration Requirements A new item in administration allows selection of an alternative set of call type defaults making one of the attendant positions a message center These defaults may be modified for individual call types if desired to tailor the message center like operation f
229. alls except to the emergency numbers Toll Restriction Allows calls by restricted terminals to be made based on as many as the first six digits of the number called after the facility access code Toll restricted users can make outgoing calls only to those numbers that are on the Toll Call Allowed TCA Lists to which it has access TCA entries must be in the form NXX or NPA NXX exactly three or six characters The system administrator can establish up to 4 individual lists A list can contain from 1 to 64 entries provided that the total of all four lists does not exceed 64 One character can be specified as a wild card character in place of the last 1 2 or 3 digits e g NX N or of the NXX code but not in the NPA code When this character is used any character in the dialed number appearing in that position is acceptable Those stations assigned Toll Restriction Class 1 have access to all four TCA Lists Class 2 stations just lists 2 through 4 Class 3 stations just lists 3 and 4 Class 4 stations just list 4 The entry of an area code followed by a TCA List allows access to all office codes in that area To allow calls within a customer s local area individual office codes are entered this allows the customer to restrict toll calls within the local calling area NPA NXX entries allow specific office codes to be called within an area Note NPA only entries are not permitted use NPA Note
230. ally dialed digits 2 104 Conference Exclusion Exclusion be invoked before establishing a conference If it is invoked after the conference is established all internal conferees will be dropped except for the party that invoked Exclusion Extended Stations An Extended Station counts as one of the two allowable outside lines on a conference call Forwarding f one of the called parties for a conference is a forwarding station its forwarded to station will be the conference facility If a conference call is transferred to a forwarding station it will be given normal Forwarding treatment Music On Hokf Music On Hold may be enabled or disabled for Special Hold through a System Administration item However if the outside line is already part of a conference music is not heard Off Premises Stations OPS For conference purposes an OPS counts as one of the two allowable outside lines Paging System Access A paging zone may not be conference Park Park may be used to place a conference on hold Parked conference calls do not return to the parking station they remain parked If a 5 person conference is parked the conferee who parked the conference will be dropped when someone picks up the parked conference Remote Access Remote Access callers cannot use the Conference feature Trunk To Trunk Transfer Trunk to trunk transfers may be set up using the Conference feature The conference must include an in
231. an AUTO ICOM button are not saved by the Last Number Dialed feature Line Selection Prime Line Preference When the Automatic Intercom line is assigned Prime Line status the AUTO ICOM button must be pressed to activate the busy to idle reminder even though the l use LED is already lighted steadily Pickup When an Automatic Intercom call is answered via the Pickup feature the AUTO ICOM status LED on the called voice terminal lights steadily The called party can press AUTO ICOM to enter the call at any time Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port eAssign AUTO ICOM buttons to voice terminals in pairs Voice terminals can have several AUTO ICOM buttons assigned for direct access to multiple stations 2 56 Automatic Route Selection ARS Automatic Route Selection ARS Description This feature provides for the routing of calls over the telecommunications network based on preferred routes normally the least expensive route available at the time the call is placed An ARS pattern can be composed of two subpatterns time of day determines which subpattern is selected each consisting of up to three routes associated Facility Restriction Level FRL codes described below and CO overflow flags A route is identified by specifying a Facility Access Code for the pooled facility trunk group a route may also be identified by specifying a Virtual Facility code A trunk group or virtual facility can be used in more than o
232. and dictation systems e Up to 240 ports that support a combination of the following Up to 200 ports for voice terminals and auxiliary feature port equipment Up to 104 data ports providing RS 232 connections to data terminals personal or multiport computers Refer to Hardware and Software Parameters as provided in Technical Specifications Section 5 for detailed specifications Safety System 25 meets all requirements found in Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Telephone Equipment 1459 1 4 OVERVIEW Business Communications Needs The remainder of this section describes how System 25 s features may be used to satisfy a customer s communications needs This material may be thought of as the reverse of the Features and Services in Section 2 The business communications capabilities of the majority of small businesses with more than 30 phones are provided by a PBX System 25 is a PBX designed to meet the business communications needs of customers in the 30 to 150 station range The communications needs of most business customers may be broken down into five basic categories Customer experience has shown that a PBX needs to provide e Prompt handling of incoming calls to maximize revenue opportunities and client satisfaction e Ease of access to and cost control of outgoing calls over public network and private facilities e Easy movement of calls between on premises phones and between on premises an
233. and ringer P for programming feature buttons Built In Speakerphone With Volume Control e Ringer Volume Control e Nine Fixed Feature Buttons with status LED Conference Speakerphone Drop Message Transfer HFAI Hold Mic Recall e 22 Programmable Feature Buttons each equipped with l Use and status LEDS default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 15 Send All Calls I Account Code Entry and Last Number Dialed 1 Adjunct e502A B Headset Adapters Note 502B unit provides HFAI service on the headset 4 40 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS 22 WITH I USE AND STATUS LEDS HANDSET TEST PROGRAM SWITCH ON SIDE TOUCH DIAL PAD CONFERENCE 7 TRANSFER 7 4 DROP 7 HOLD O VOLUME CONTROL ON SIDE SPEAKERPHONE VOLUME CONTROL Figure 4 16 7314H01A Voice Terminal BIS 22 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 7316H01A Voice Terminal BIS 34 3167 34B The 7316H01A 34 button voice terminal is available for general use or as a Direct Trunk Attendant Console It can be desk or wall mounted and is about 9 1 4 inches wide 9 1 4 inches deep and not including the handset 1 1 2 inches thick when desk mounted it is about 5 1 4 inches high in the back The set comes equipped with the following Handset e Touch Dial Pad not DTMF e Use and Status LEDS e Test Program Switch two positions T for testing operation of
234. announcement the call will begin to ring at all line appearances after the specified interval An inside caller dials a DGC access code to reach a DGC group If all members of the group are busy the call will go into a queue if Callback Queuing is activated either automatically or manually otherwise the call will not queue and the caller will receive Busy Tone Once the call begins to ring at a group member s station it will not receive announcement service or ring at a line appearance For this reason it is important that DGC members log out as described below when they will be away from their desks The attendant can camp on multiple outside trunk calls when all members of the group are busy Group members do not receive camp on indication The camped on calls will be queued and are eligible for the DGC delay announcement If no delay announcement is available the calls will return to the attendant console after a specified number of rings DGC group members may withdraw from the group log out by going off hook and dialing 4 To reenter the group log in the member goes off hook and dials 6 An off hook multiline terminal or attendant console even if busy on only one SYSTEM ACCESS or LOOP button appears busy to DGC calls However terminals other than the SLAC may receive other non DGC calls while active on a DGC call Direct Group Calling groups may be used for data applications to access host ports and the STARLAN Inte
235. ant Console Voice Terminal Port eNight Service is defaulted to a button on the first Direct Trunk Attendant Console only On a second Direct Trunk Console or on a Switched Loop Attendant Console assign Night Service to a flexible button eAssign Night Service Access Code Hardware Requirements TAAS NS requires an associated external alert such as a bell Each alert requires a port on ZTN78 Tip Ring Line or a TN742 Analog Line CP Refer to the External Alerts feature description for detailed information and a connection diagram 2 228 Night Service Delay Announcements Night Service Delay Announcements Description This feature provides a recorded announcement for incoming trunk calls when the system has Directed Night Service NS activated and a call is not answered Directed NS calls not answered within a specified number of rings 1 15 may be directed to a recorded announcement Two different recorded announcements be assigned Note that NS calls to a terminal that are not answered do not receive Station Hunting or Coverage treatment unless the trunk also appears on a station s Personal Line button After the announcement is played the call is disconnected Considerations Night Service Delay Announcements provide the calling party with a message that acknowledges the call and can provide additional information as well Once an NS call goes to the delay announcement the call will be disconnected fr
236. ant Console Connections 2 33 FEATURES AND SERVICES Attendant Direct Extension Selection Description This feature permits the attendant to extend calls to stations by pressing one or two buttons instead of pressing START and dialing the extension number Each attendant console in a system can have an associated Direct Extension Selector Console A Selector Console can be used with either a Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTAC or with a Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC The Selector Console is also used by the attendant for simply calling inside stations in addition to extending calls The Selector Console has an array of 100 Direct Extension Selection DXS buttons plus seven Group Select buttons and a Test button The DXS buttons are labeled 00 through 99 Default assignments for the Group Select buttons are 200 299 300 399 etc up to 800 899 but they can be assigned any hundreds group in the dialing plan To select an actual extension number the user presses a Group Select button for the hundreds group and a DXS button for the last two digits Pressing a DXS button when off hook on an incoming call is equivalent to pressing START and dialing a station Such action will busy out the Start facility until the call is released The Selector Console can be used to monitor the on hook off hook status of stations in the system If the attendant while on hook presses a Group Select button the Group Select LED and the LEDs of
237. any calls on hold as it has lines and can hang up without losing held calls Single line users can place hold by flashing the switchhook the user receives Confirmation Tone The user can then dial another party or return to the held call by flashing the switchhook twice The first switchhook flash sets up a conference call the second flash drops the third party if System 25 Dial Tone Busy Tone or Reorder Tone but not Ringback Tone was obtained when the third party was dialed a single switchhook flash will drop the tone and return the user to the held party Multiline voice terminal users can press HOLD and subsequently replace the handset or call another party without losing the held call The status LED associated with the held call winks on all terminals with an appearance of the call except in the case of a conference call In this case the wink indication is given only to the party who invoked hold To return to the held call the multiline user goes off hook then presses the call appearance button associated with the held call Considerations The Hold feature allows voice terminal users to handle several calls simultaneously For single line sets placing a call on hold is the first step in transferring or conferencing the call Interactions The following features interact with Hold Attendant Console The Attendant does not receive hold indications for lines trunks appearing on the Console unless he she placed
238. any busy stations in that group will light steadily The DXS button LED and the Group Select button LED associated with a particular station will flash when one of the following events occurs e The station calls the attendant eA call extended by the attendant to the station returns on a RTN BUSY or RTN DA button DTAC only or on a LOOP button SLAC only e The station is covered and a call to it is redirected to a COVER button DTAC only or to a LOOP button SLAC only The LEDs stop flashing when the call is answered When the attendant answers a returning call the LEDs will return to the state that reflects the current on hook off hook status of the station In all of the above cases the Group Select lamp associated with the current hundreds page remains lighted steadily An outside call can be parked via the Selector Console by pressing one of the eight DXS buttons that can be designated as Park extension numbers On the DTAC the status LED of the parked call winks to indicate that the call is on hold and the status LED on the Selector Console lights steadily On the SLAC the call is removed from the attendant console with the Selector Console LED lit steadily A call parked via the Selector Console and not picked up within an administered period 0 240 seconds default 120 will return to the console The status LED of the parked on button will flash while the call is ringing the attendant Attendant Direct Extension
239. ated as an alternate answering position in a coverage path Covering User The person at an alternate answering position who answers a redirected call the coverage receiver DCE Data Communications Equipment 9 4 GLOSSARY DDC Data Dial Code DDD Direct Distance Dialing DID Direct Inward Dialing DGC Direct Group Calling DTAC Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTE Data Terminal Equipment DTU Digital Tape Unit DTMF Dual Tone Multifrequency DXS Direct Extension Selector Data Channel A communications path between two points used to transmit digital signals Data Communications Equipment DCE Refers to a specific RS 232C interface connector configuration DCE devices designed to interface directly pin for pin to Data Terminal Equipment DTE The transmit and receive pins are reversed from that of a DTE interface A modem is an example of a DCE device Data End Point Two general groups those having a DTE type interface which encompasses almost all of the data terminal devices and the group of DCE interface devices which are primarily modems However it must be noted that within each category control interfaces may also vary Refer to Analog Data Endpoint and Digital Data Endpoints for additional information Data Module A data interface device i e Asynchronous Data Unit providing a standard interface between customer provided data equipment and a data port on the switc
240. atic and dynamic loads is a function of the number of features that are executed the frequency with which they are executed the system configuration and the instantaneous peak call processing load The configuration contribution to load is known as dynamic load The static load consists of maintenance and audit routines Software Partitioning As shown in Figure 3 21 System 25 software is comprised of various modules each supporting a particular process Typical modules referred to as tasks include the following e Administration Station Call Processing e Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Call Record Processing e Trunk Call Processing e Dial Plan Manager e Event Timer e Save Restore Administration function e Maintenance and Audit Functions Specific software tasks are associated with the memory and call processing portions of the CPU MEM the TDM Bus and the Port Circuits 3 39 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION FEATURE CODE MODULES MEMORY STATION SMDR ADMINISTRATION CALL TASK PROCESSING Te TASK CALL PROCESSING MESSAGE SEND RECEIVE OPERATING SYSTEM ARCH ANGEL RS 232C DRIVER DRIVER INTERFACE INTERFACE NETWOR CONTROL SOFTWARE CONTROL CHANNEL MESSAGES CIRCUIT BOARD PACKS ray SOFTWARE STIMULI SYSTEM 1 0 VOICE TERMINALS SAT CO FACILITIES DTU SMDR RS 232C DEVICES Figure 3 21 System Software Partitioning 3 40 FUNCTIONAL DESCRI
241. ations Contd TRUNK PORTS TRUNK TYPE CIRCUIT PACK SPECIFICATIONS Auxiliary Trunk TN763 e Capacity 4 Circuits e3 pair Interface Voice T R Signaling S S1 Status SZ SZ1 Direct Inward TN753 Dialing DID eCapacity 8 Circuits Trunk e2 Wire 600 Ohm Fixed Impedance Transmission e Signaling Wink Start Delay Dial or Immediate Dial Accepts Dial Pulse Signals only e Incoming Service only Tie Trunk TN760B e Capacity 4 Circuits e Supports Type E amp M Compatible E amp M or Type V Simplex Signaling e4 Wire Transmission e3 Pair Interface Transmit Receive Signaling E amp M Port Specifications Contd TRUNK PORTS TRUNK TYPE CIRCUIT PACK SPECIFICATIONS ZTN76 Ground Start Trunk Loop Start Trunk ZTN77 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS e Capacity 8 Circuits e2 Wire 600 Ohms or RC Balance Transmission e Network Signaling Ground Start e Two way or Incoming only Service e Capacity 8 Circuits e2 Wire 600 Ohms or RC Balance Transmission e Network Signaling Loop Start e Two way or Incoming only Service 5 17 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Recommended Central Office Trunk Facilities The following table provides recommendations for CO trunks based on the number of voice terminals in the system and the calling traffic TERMINALS TRAFFIC TRAFFIC TRAFFIC 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 5 4 5 5 6 5 6 5 7 6 7 6 8 7 8 7 9 8 Notes 1 For systems with both one
242. automatic queuing gets special ringback but can manually queue the call If the queued for station dials the Call Waiting pickup code 9 the first off hook queued or waiting call will be dequeued Conference A call receiving special ringback can be part of a conference unless a queued call is already part of the conference A waiting call counts as two conferees until it is completed Data Stations Data ports cannot be assigned Call Waiting Direct Inward Dialing DID Trunks Incoming DID trunk calls do not wait at busy stations they receive busy tone Display lf a display station has Automatic Incoming Call Identification active call waiting tone is accompanied by an incoming call message flashed on the screen The user cannot inspect the message again because all buttons are busy with other calls When the user answers a waiting call the display updates to standard incoming call format Send All Calls A busy station with Send All Calls activated will receive call waiting tones the caller will hear special ringback If the busy station then goes on hook single ring reminder will not be given for that waiting call Station Hunting all members of a hunt group are busy and the originally dialed station has Call Waiting the caller hears special ringback until the station becomes available to answer the call Administration Requirements Call Waiting is assigned on a per station basis yes or no default no 2 96
243. back attempt is made the display will not flash the callback call s information However this information is accessible via the Inspection feature Drop Button f the user is off hook on the queued call button pressing the DROP button and then the queued call button cancels the call 2 85 FEATURES AND SERVICES Exclusion Pressing the EXCLUSION button does not drop a queued call The EXCLUSION button s status LED tracks the status LED of the associated button For example on a callback attempt the EXCLUSION LED will also change from winking to flashing If the EXCLUSION button is tracking a conference on hold it will stay winking with the rest of the conference When the callback attempt is answered the EXCLUSION LED lights steadily to track all the conference buttons Following Forwarding Calls that forward or follow are queued on the busy away station not the home station Callback attempts to the originator do not follow or forward Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI Callback calls to the originator do not receive HFAI treatment Hunting f all stations of a hunt group are busy the call queues only for the dialed station in the group Leave Word Calling A user who is queued for access to a busy station can invoke Leave Word Calling LWC The callback request is canceled when LWC is activated Park Queued calls cannot be parked unless they are part of a conference Reorder tone is returned whenever an
244. be dialed to call outside the local geographical area Ground Start Trunk On outgoing calls System 25 transmits a request for services to the distant switching system by grounding the trunk ring lead When the distant system is ready to receive the digits of the called number that system grounds the trunk tip lead When the System 25 detects this ground the digits are sent Tip and ring are common nomenclature to differentiate between ground start trunk leads On incoming calls detection of ground on the tip lead is sufficient to cause the call to route to a predetermined destination normally the system attendant group No digits are received GLOSSARY HFAI Hands Free Answer on Intercom Home Numbering Plan Area Code HNPA The local area code also known as the home area code The local area code does not have to be dialed to call numbers within the local geographical area Immediate Start Tie Trunk After establishing a connection with the distant switching system for an outgoing call the system waits a nominal 65 milliseconds before sending the digits of the called number This allows time for the distant system to prepare to receive the digits Similarly on an incoming call the system has less than 65 milliseconds to prepare to receive the digits Inside Call A connection between two parties within the system Intercept Tone An alternating high and low tone indicates a dialing error or denial of the service req
245. bers Voice Terminal Port eAllow Deny Personal Speed Dialing on a per station basis 2 282 STARLAN NETWORK Access STARLAN NETWORK Access Description AT amp T STARLAN NETWORK STARLAN NETWORK Access feature provides connectivity between System 25 and colocated STARLAN NETWORK This connectivity is provided by a combination of hardware and software elements The STARLAN NETWORK must use Release 2 software System 25 is not compatible with Release 3 STARLAN NETWORK software STARLAN circuit pack ZTN84 is the principal hardware element connecting System 25 and the STARLAN NETWORK One or more of these circuit packs may be mounted in the System 25 cabinet s The STAR LAN circuit pack CP communicates with System 25 call processing over System 25 s Time Division Multiplex TDM bus To System 25 this circuit pack functions like a 4 port Data Line circuit pack DLC To the STARLAN NETWORK the STARLAN CP appears as a STARLAN NETWORK workstation Communication between STARLAN NETWORK equipment workstations servers hosts and data terminals PC6300s and host computers connected to System 25 is provided by firmware on the STARLAN CP and communications program s on the PCs and hosts Two communications programs are available to users eSystem 25 STARLAN NETWORK ACCESS ACCESS ACCESS allows MS DOS personal computers PCs connected via the PC s serial port to System 25 to communicate with DO
246. ble clock calendar and 60 minute timer displays and an audible alarm Some terminals are equipped with a LOCAL button for entering and exiting Local Mode Local Display operation depends on the functional assignment and administration of the voice terminal eGeneral Use Station or Not Logged In Direct Group Calling DGC Group Member Station LOCAL button optional When the terminal is idle Local Mode is automatically on and the clock calendar screen is displayed Any call handling activity such as a ringing call or going off hook overrides Local Mode and displays the appropriate Normal Mode data During Normal Mode activity the user can manually return to Local Mode for example to find out what time it is or to time a call by pressing Time Timer to return from this condition to Normal Mode the user presses the active call appearance button When the call activity ends and the user goes on hook again the terminal reverts to Local Mode If the terminal has a LOCAL button it can be used to turn off Local Mode during idle periods in this condition the screen remains completely blank To return to Local Mode the LOCAL button must be pressed again eLogged In DGC Group Member Station LOCAL button optional At a DGC terminal that is logged into the group Local Mode is normally off During idle periods the group queue count is displayed but the user can press LOCAL if equipped or Time Timer to override the queue count and act
247. bridged appearance user with delayed ringing does not receive incoming call information until ringing starts Any station having a bridged appearance can examine the active call information for the appearance by using the Inspect feature unless Exclusion has been invoked If a user at a principal station or a bridging station places a call on a bridged button outgoing call information is displayed only at the calling station Other stations sharing the appearance can use the Inspect feature to display the call information A user having a bridged appearance can bridge onto a call being originated at a bridged station In general the bridging station receives the same call display as the bridged station but only after dialing has been completed Conference information is generated and displayed at bridged and bridging stations When a user attempts to either bridge onto or Inspect a call where Exclusion has been invoked by another active party on this call the screen display shows EXCLUDED Callback Queuing lf a user with Automatic Incoming Call ID is off hook when a callback attempt is made the display will not flash the callback call s information However this information is accessible via the Inspection feature Call Waiting If a display station has Automatic Incoming Call Identification active call waiting tone is accompanied by an incoming call message flashed on the screen The user cannot Inspect the message again because all b
248. bridging or principal stations that are actively bridged to the call have steadily lighted green status LEDs stations that are not active on the call have winking status LEDs indicating that the appearance is on hold Callback Queuing A queued call can be part of a conference unless a Call Waiting call is already part of the conference A queued call counts as two conferees until it is completed Call Waiting A call receiving special ringback can be part of a conference unless a queued call is already part of the conference A waiting call counts as two conferees until it is completed Display Call descriptor appears in position 15 of Screen 1 for a call containing more than two active parties position 16 contains the actual number of conferees The number of conferees is displayed at each terminal in a conference call and is updated as the status changes Screen 1 324 7 4 The and the number of conferees overwrite whatever was in positions 15 and 16 of the current display When a queued call is added to a conference the associated displays are modified in only one respect the Q symbol appears as the first character of the queued call display When the queued facility becomes available and the call is made Q is removed When a nondisplay station originates a trunk call then conferences the call with an inside display station and drops off the display shows the trunk name only not the origin
249. busy away station not the home station Callback attempts to the originator do not forward Conference f one of the called parties for a conference is a forwarding station its forwarded to station will be the conference facility If conference call is transferred to a forwarding station it will be given normal Forwarding treatment Coverage When a station has both Coverage and Forwarding in effect calls are routed first to the forwarded to station If not answered there within an administered number of rings calls ring at the forwarding and coverage stations and stop ringing at the forwarded to station When forwarding to an outside number coverage may only occur in one case the forwarding had been activated using a trunk group s facility access code not ARS the forwarding cannot be completed because the trunk group is busy and the forwarding station is not busy In this case the call will ring at the forwarding station and its coverage stations Direct Station Selection DSS DSS or FLEX DSS cannot be used when forwarding calls that is dialing 470 and pressing a DSS or FLEX DSS button for the forwarded to station is not a valid procedure 2 177 FEATURES AND SERVICES Display Reception of a forwarded call follows the standard format for a redirected call with the call type descriptor f in position 16 of Screen 2 A forwarding display station receives abbreviated alert when a call is forwarded to an outside
250. by pressing one button instead of dialing a PDC In addition the station busy indication and busy to idle reminder provide additional utility to users This feature is similar to Direct Station Selection DSS except that the buttons must always be assigned in pairs i e between two sets Hence an AUTO ICOM button cannot point to a single line set Also Automatic Intercom calls arrive at the AUTO ICOM button thereby providing calling party ID DSS calls arrive on System Access buttons 2 55 FEATURES AND SERVICES Interactions The following features interact with Automatic Intercom Attendant Position Busy The inactive attendant is permitted to place Automatic Intercom calls Automatic Intercom calls to an inactive DTAC where the AUTO ICOM button is located in one of the two rightmost button columns will not ring at the console nor can they be covered by the active attendant However Automatic Intercom calls to an inactive SLAC will ring there Bridging of System Access Buttons Calls on Automatic Intercom buttons on the principal station are not accessible from bridged call appearances on the bridging station Coverage Automatic Intercom calls are considered private and do not receive coverage Direct Group Calling Automatic Intercom calls cannot be directed to DGC groups Exclusion Any attempt to engage Exclusion while active on an Automatic Intercom call will drop the other party Last Number Dialed Numbers called using
251. call timed out to the attendant the attendant s code is shown e ACCOUNT field the Barrier Code number if the call timed out to the attendant this field is blank Remote Access to Outside Number eCALLED NUMBER field the outside number dialed by the remote caller eFAC field the number of the outgoing trunk or trunk pool eSIN field the number of the incoming trunk eACCOUNT field the Barrier Code number Transfer This feature cannot be used by Remote Access callers Administration Requirements System eEnable barrier codes yes or no default yes e Assign DID remote access number PDC or 0 default 0 2 264 e Assign Remote Access system default COR for Remote Access ARS Facility Restriction Level 0 to 3 default 3 Toll Restriction Class 1 to 4 or O for none default 0 Outward Restricted yes or no default no CO pool dial restricted yes or no default no Other pools dial restricted yes or no default no eFor each barrier code defined e Assign 0 e Assign 98765 Trunk Port Barrier code number 1 to 16 Barrier code digits five characters or enter 0 to remove valid characters 0 to 9 and Assign barrier code s COR ARS Facility Restriction Level 0 to 3 default 3 Toll Restriction Class 1 to 4 or O for none default 0 Outward Restricted yes or no default no CO pool dial restricted yes or no defa
252. can be automatic wink start immediate start or delay dial Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF signaling touch tone or dial pulse signaling can be used between the System 25 and the far end switch System 25 can send or receive either type of signaling required by the distant switch DID trunks can only receive dial pulse signals The type to be used is specified when the associated trunk is administered An incoming call can be connected to another trunk a voice terminal a data endpoint an attendant console or an announcement When the call is answered an off hook indication is sent to the serving office This signal may be used to initiate the recording of call details normally used for billing Trunks in a two way trunk group should be translated at the SAT in the same order that the serving office hunts when searching for an idle trunk System 25 will then hunt in reverse order This reduces the probability that both switches will attempt to seize the same trunk at the same time Considerations Trunks of the same type and Class Of Service may be assigned a Pooled Facility Access Code This provides users with dial or direct button access to the trunk pool Trunks may be dial access restricted to reserve them for ARS and direct access only Refer to Recommended Central Office Trunk Facilities Section 5 for an estimate of CO trunk requirements based on traffic considerations See the Pooled Facility Direct Access a
253. ccess Buttons A bridging station user can program only the Personal Speed Dialing codes REP DIAL buttons and FLEX DSS buttons associated with the bridging station not with the principal station Display When the user of a display equipped voice terminal enters Program Mode a prompt is displayed on the terminal screen Screen 1 PROGRAM Once the user begins to dial digits the prompt is removed The dialed digits are displayed beginning on Screen 1 and continuing on Screen 2 if necessary Screen 1 2653 Character position 16 on Screen 1 is reserved for queue data which the system continues to update for SLACs and DGC terminals The Program display remains on screen until the user selects the button or code to be programmed After confirmation tone is returned the PROGRAM prompt is again displayed The user can then go through additional programming sequences if desired After programming is completed the user can go on hook or exit from the Program Mode to Normal Mode by switchhook change if the mode was entered by dialing 4 or by returning the PROGRAM switch to its neutral position non SLAC terminals Remote Access Remote Access callers cannot use the Program feature 2 259 FEATURES AND SERVICES Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port eAssign FLEX DSS and REP DIAL buttons e Allow Personal Speed Dialing per station basis 2 260 Recall Recall Description Users of single line voice
254. ccount Code Entry 1 and Last Number Dialed I For Use as a Switched Loop Attendant Console Five predefine as loop buttons 4 34 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Twelve others predefined as Inspect Attendant Message Waiting Alarm Local Scroll Forced Release Start Source Release Destination Cancel and Join Other seventeen programmable default assignments are Flex DSS 15 Position Busy 1 and Last Number Dialed 1 Note Programmable buttons without LEDs should be used only for features that do not require l Use and Status indications Adjunct e502A B Headset Adapters Note The 502B unit provides HFAI service on the headset CLOCK CONTROLS PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS 34 CONTRAST CONTROL DISPLAY SCREEN I USE STATUS LEDs HANDSET TEST PROGRAM SWITCH ON SIDE TOUCH DIAL PAD RINGER VOLUME CONTROL ON SIDE SPEAKERPHONE VOLUME CONTROL SPEAKERPHONE CONFERENCE TRANSFER MICROPHONE DROP HOLD Figure 4 13 7305 04 Voice Terminal BIS With Display 4 35 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 7309H01B Voice Terminal HFAI PEC 3161 161 7309H01B voice terminal Figure 4 14 be desk or wall mounted It is about 6 1 4 inches wide 8 3 4 inches deep and not including the handset 1 1 2 inches thick when desk mounted it is about 5 1 4 inches high in the back The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch dial pad not DTMF
255. ce objects Each maintenance object is normally a separately replaceable unit These units include circuit packs power units fans voice and data terminals cross connect hardware auxiliary and peripheral equipment There are two general categories of system errors system detected errors and user reported problems The system can automatically detect and log errors without human intervention For system detected errors an Alarm LED on the Attendant Console is lighted if the error qualifies as a Permanent System Alarm a serious error Most alarms can be verified by checking the LEDs located on the front edge of the system circuit packs At least one Red LED will be on User reported problems are usually detected at individual voice and data terminals and are often related to alarmed conditions Alarms may be retired automatically and can also be cleared manually After a trouble has been cleared the system retests the previously faulty area If the fault is no longer present the error message and alarm if applicable is cleared It is not necessary for maintenance personnel to retire alarms after a problem has been fixed However they may clear error messages and alarms by entering the proper commands at the System Administration Terminal System Errors And Alarms If a maintenance object fails periodic tests the system automatically generates an error record that is placed in one of three software tables error logs The failure ma
256. ce button for one of the conference trunks the call will still be broken down when one of the outside parties hangs up A Direct Group Calling call that comes in on a ground start trunk and is answered at a single line set is not eligible for trunk to trunk transfer Interactions The following feature interacts with Trunk To Transfer Transfer Conference Trunk To Trunk transfers may be set up using the Conference feature The conference must include an incoming trunk call on either a ground start DID or tie trunk if it is to continue after all inside stations have dropped off Administration Requirements System e Allow trunk to trunk transfer on loop start trunks yes or no default no This capability should be assigned only where Central Offices give a reliable disconnect signal of at least 600 milliseconds at the end of the Loop Start call 2 337 FEATURES AND SERVICES User Changeable Options Description User Changeable Options allows a data terminal user who is in the Command Mode to view and change the settings of certain data port options This feature is available to users of Data Line CP ports users of STARLAN Interface CP ports cannot change their port options Table 2 L contains brief descriptions of the user changeable options Table 2 L User Changeable Options 1H low 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 autobaud Permit Mismatch Allows two data endpoints to communicate at different rates L
257. ce terminal If there is no idle Cover button on the covering voice terminal the system will periodically check for an idle Cover button and ring at the first available coverage receiver Calls directed to a busy single line voice terminal will start ringing immediately at the covering 2 108 Coverage Group terminal If there is no idle Cover button on any covering terminal either individual or group the call will not receive coverage and the calling party will receive Busy Tone Calls sent to coverage will continue to ring at single line sender terminals but will cease ringing at multiline sender terminals In the latter case the calls will remain on the incoming call appearance button and that button s status LED continues to reflect the status of the call In particular covered calls to multiline sets remain available and can be entered by the called sender station If a covered station activates the Send All Calls feature calls will be directed to coverage immediately with or without a single ring reminder as administered A station can provide or receive Individual Coverage see MUL NL and also be a member of a Coverage Group sender or receiver Unanswered calls to a station provided both Individual and Group Coverage will first ring at the Individual Coverage station and then after a second delay cycle and still unanswered will ring at the Group Coverage station Calls from a covering station to a covered
258. ces etc over a shared pool of DID trunks e Call Management System provides Automatic Call Distribution ACD service and associated call traffic and agent performance reports e Direct Group Calling DGC allows incoming calls to be directed to a specific group of stations Calls to a DGC group hunt for an idle station a circular manner starting at the station following the last one called If all group members are busy calls are queued and can be sent to a delay announcement A DGC group can terminate calls to sales services computer announcement etc over either ordinary CO trunks or DID trunks e Personal Lines provide dedicated outside lines for multiline voice terminal users and are accessed via a dedicated button for both incoming and outgoing service Up to 16 terminals may share a Personal Line with up to 4 parties simultaneously off hook A personal line provides direct access to brokers emergency service etc over a dedicated loop start or ground start trunk e Call Waiting lets users know that they have another incoming call and helps avoid missing important calls e Remote Access allows employees to use the services and facilities of System 25 from home or when they are on the road Barrier codes prevent unauthorized access Frequently the called party is not available to handle an incoming call System 25 provides a number of methods for redirecting incoming calls to alternate resources 1 6 e Cove
259. ces external alerts e Music On Hold Equipment ePaging Equipment Auxiliary Trunk A trunk circuit used to connect auxiliary equipment to the switch for example music or dictation equipment BLF Busy Lamp Field BPS Bits Per Second Bit Binary Digit One unit of information in binary notation having two possible states or values zero or one Bridge Bridging The sharing of the same extension or line by two or more voice terminals 9 2 GLOSSARY Buffer A circuit or component that isolates one electrical circuit from another Typically a buffer holds data from one circuit or process until another circuit or process is ready to accept the data Bus A multi conductor electrical path used to transfer information over a common connection from any of several sources to any of several destinations Bus Time Division Multiplex See CAM Communications Access Manager CAS Call Accounting System CMS Call Management System CCS Hundred Call Seconds A traffic measuring unit that expresses the load of one or more traffic handling devices A device used for 1 hour without interruption generates 36 CCS which equals 1 erlang see Call Appearance Voice Terminal A button for example System Access Bridged Access Loop DSS Flex DSS or Auto Intercom used to place outgoing calls receive incoming calls or hold calls Two LEDs next to the button show the status of the call appearance or status of the
260. cessing modes 4 connecting configurations and 5 controlling features Data Endpoints Data endpoints are composed of data terminal equipment an ADU or modem and a connection to the switch via an analog or data port A digital data endpoint is addressed by its Data Dial Code DDC Analog data endpoints are addressed like other voice terminals by their PDCs For the remainder of this description data endpoints will refer to digital data endpoints unless stated otherwise Several different categories of data endpoints are supported The categories have been divided into two general groups those having a DTE type interface which encompasses almost all of the data terminal devices and a group of DCE interface devices primarily modems The groups have then been divided into categories based upon their functional attributes However it must be noted that within each category control interfaces may vary 2 118 Data Services Overview The following describes the categories and attributes of each 1 Devices This group of data endpoints have one thing in common their interface configuration although RS 232 control signal utilization varies significantly from terminal to terminal Some data equipment do not use any RS 232 control signals these require only BA Transmitted Data Ready Tx BB Received Data Ready Rx and AB Signal Ground to function while others require more RS 232 control signals to operate An ADU F
261. ched connection eAn off premises switched connection Maximum cabling distances from the system cabinets are provided in Section 5 Installation details are provided in the System 25 Installation and Maintenance Manual The SAT may also be provided by the customer It must be a RS 232 compatible terminal that has a 25 pin connector providing signal on DTR pin 20 In addition it should have the following characteristics Display The minimum display size is 16 lines by 80 columns The port provides both carriage return and line feed characters to position the cursor at the start of the next line Destructive scrolling is also expected new lines added at the bottom of the screen and top most lines disappear Full duplex operation is required Alphabetic ASCII characters in both upper case and lower case will be sent to the SAT along with ASCII numerals and some basic ASCII symbols The device used must be capable of displaying ASCII alphabetic characters when either upper case or lower case characters are received However upper to lower case mapping or vice versa for display is acceptable since no meaning is associated with case Keyboard The administration port requires ASCII alphanumeric characters as well as some symbol characters If the keyboard generates only upper case or only lower case alphabetic characters the administration port will respond appropriately since upper and lower case input is considered identical The SAT shou
262. chhook to place the call conference on hold then dialing 5 If the call is successfully parked the user receives confirmation tone and then recall dial tone If the call cannot be parked reorder tone is received In the latter case to return to the held call the user presses the held call button multiline sets or flashes the switchhook single line sets The parking station may return to a parked call or conference without affecting the park state The multiline voice terminal user may return by pressing the held call button The single line user may return by flashing the switchhook When the single line user goes on hook the parked call is removed from the terminal and cannot be reentered To retrieve a parked call a user must obtain system dial tone dial 8 and then dial the PDC of the station that parked the call If the call is not retrieved within an administered interval default 2 minutes the call will return to the user that parked the call At multiline voice terminals returning calls always ring at System Access SA buttons regardless of the type of button on which the parked call arrived originally If no idle SA button is available calls attempting to return will remain parked until one becomes idle Note Multiline voice terminals without SA buttons cannot park calls they receive reorder tone when they try to do so However in a principal station bridging station arrangement a bridging station without SA butt
263. ciated Attendant Console is in the inactive mode Attendant Return Coverage On Busy On Don t Answer f a call to a FPDC is returned to the attendant on a RTN BUSY or RTN DA button or on a LOOP button the status LED of the FPDC on the Selector Console will flash during ringing and go dark when answered 2 36 Attendant Direct Extension Selection Callback Queuing Callbacks to the attendant do not flash at the associated Selector Console Coverage If the attendant receives a coverage call for a FPDC the associated status LED on the Selector Console will flash and then go dark when the call is answered by the attendant Direct Group Calling When all stations in a DGC group are busy the DXS status LED on the Selector Console lights Pooled Facilities f a 1 or 2 digit is used the associated status LED on the Selector Console will light steadily whenever all trunks in this group are busy This does not occur with 3 or 4 digit FACs Administration Requirements Special Feature Ports eAssign a port on a ZTN79 ATL Station Circuit Pack for each Selector Console eAssign Group Select button hundreds groups System eAssign Selector Console Park codes ePark return time 0 240 seconds default 120 Hardware Requirements Requires an Attendant Selector Console and a port interface on a ZTN79 ATL Station CP The Selector Console requires a KS 22911 List 1 Power Supply associated 115V ac power outlet and a 400 B t
264. cility is busy and the party using it has invoked Exclusion or is part of a conference call that is at maximum capacity When off hook a user can select a facility by pressing the associated button This will terminate the call the user was on A user may activate the busy to idle reminder on a busy AUTO ICOM DSS FLEX DSS or FACILITY button by pressing the button while on hook A burst of ringing is provided when the facility becomes idle Refer to the description of the Busy to ldle feature for additional information Considerations Prime Line Preference on the topmost SYSTEM ACCESS or Loop button and Ringing Line Preference are assigned by default to all multiline voice terminals While these assignments may be changed it is strongly recommended that Ringing Line Preference be retained It is recommended that Prime Line Preference not be assigned to a Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTAC Preselection allows users to override line preference features already administered for the terminal and to activate the busy to idle reminder feature Interactions The following features interact with Line Selection Attendant Console Direct Trunk f a line rings at DTAC while the attendant is on another call Ringing Line Preference will be invoked when the attendant hangs up Bridging of System Access Buttons A Bridged Access button can be specified as the preferred line for outgoing calls when the station goes off hook If a
265. ck port controller continually monitors associated port circuits for switchhook status change and button presses 2 When a user goes off hook the port controller detects the change 3 The port controller sends an off hook up link message along with port identification to the Call Processor Network Controller CPNC via the TDM bus 4 The CPNC accepts the message and forwards it to the Operating System OS via the Arch Angel Driver Interface 3 42 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The OS checks a message directory to determine which task i e software module is to receive the message function of the OS referred to as the transformer determines it has a message for the Station Call Processing task and queues the message in RAM The Station Call Processing task retrieves its message and interprets it as a call Origination The task determines whether there is an idle call appearance button System Access button on the called voice terminal If so two available time slots are reserved for the connection The task sends downlink messages to the port circuit via the OS The messages instruct the port circuit to listen for dial tone on a specified time slot and to light the call appearance status LED on the terminal When the user dials the first digit the port circuit determines the digit dialed It then listens to appropriate time slots on the TDM bus for the two tones used to generate an equivalent DTMF signal It then removes d
266. clock automatically adjusts for leap years An on board battery backs up the clock so that accurate time is maintained even when the system power is off e Interrupt Circuitry Interrupts are prioritized into seven levels of which the highest level 7 is nonmaskable The interrupts are Interrupt Level AC Fail Work cycle Off board EIA ports 3 and 4 EIA ports 1 and 2 Off board Off board CO O eReset Circuitry The processor is automatically reset when power is turned on when the 5 volt power supply drops below 4 5 volts after it returns to 5 volts or when the network controller determines that the processor is not functioning correctly The processor can also reset the network controller when it determines that the network controller is not functioning correctly eBus Error Circuitry Bus errors suspend the processor from executing code Bus errors are generated when memory management detects illegal reads or writes to RAM when the processor attempts to access circuit packs or chips not physically present or when the network controller determines that the processor is not functioning correctly FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION eEmergency Transfer Unit ETU Control Removes 48 V dc power from the ETUs of the system when the system loses power or a major system malfunction occurs eBus Terminators These resistors are required for proper operation of the TDM bus The CPU MEM CP provides the proper te
267. code is granted access to that pool according to the Calling Restrictions assigned to the bridging station not the principal station Prime Line Preference A BA button can be specified as the preferred line for outgoing calls when the station goes off hook Program A bridging station user can program only the Personal Speed Dialing codes REP DIAL buttons and FLEX DSS buttons associated with the bridging station not with the principal station Repertory Dialing f a station user selects a bridged appearance for an outgoing call and then depresses a REP DIAL button the digits programmed into the button are outpulsed as they would be if the user had selected one of the station s own SA buttons Ringing Line Preference f a station has ringing line preference enabled and has a ringing bridged call appearance an on hook user is connected to the bridged appearance if the set goes off hook This is the same as current System 25 operation Send All Calls The principal station can be administered so that pressing the SEND ALL CALLS button will send ringing for incoming calls to its coverage stations only to its bridging stations only or to both If ringing is sent to a BA button via Send All Calls and if the BA button is administered to not receive ringing the call will flash but not ring at the BA button If ringing is sent to a BA button via Send All Calls and if the BA button is administered to receive ringing immediate or delayed
268. coming trunk call on either a ground start loop start if trunk to trunk transfer is allowed by System Administration DID or tie trunk if it is to continue after all inside stations have dropped off 2 105 FEATURES AND SERVICES Conference Drop Description This feature allows a voice terminal user except for the attendant at a Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC to selectively drop a previously added party from a conference call At a SLAC the attendant can drop conferees only before they have been added to conference Multiline Voice Terminals except SLAC On a multiline voice terminal pressing the DROP button and then pressing the button appearance of a conference party drops that party from the conference If a station called for a conference does not answer the conferencing user should drop the call by pressing and releasing the switchhook before returning to the conference Otherwise the ringing line will be added to the conference Switched Loop Attendant Consoles Once a conference has been set up and all the parties can talk to each other the SLAC attendant cannot selectively drop a conferee Individual members of the conference wishing to drop out must hang up However while still setting up a conference the attendant can drop calls before they have been conference in as follows eA call to an inside party rings unanswered or returns busy tone hang up eA call to an outside party rings unanswered or ret
269. computers Groups of host ports with matching characteristics may be members of hunt groups referred to as host port groups d Analog Data Endpoint Data endpoints with modems are referred to as analog data endpoints Modems connected via tip ring lines use PDCs as extension numbers rather than Data Dial Codes DDCs Station to station data calls to or from this endpoint from or to digital endpoints require a modem conversion resource to convert the endpoint s analog data to digital format Calls from a digital endpoint to an analog data endpoint i e calls to a PDC will automatically have a conversion resource inserted in the calling path If the called analog endpoint should then invoke Transfer To Data the conversion resource will be released Data calls originating from an analog data endpoint must first enter a Modem Request Code before addressing a digital data endpoint This is required because the system assumes that a call originating from a voice terminal will invoke Transfer To Data If the originating station is not going to transfer to data it must indicate this so that a conversion resource will be included in the connection DCE Devices This group of data endpoints consists primarily of modems The modems are connected to a data port from their RS 232 side The modem must be configured as a DTE interface to connect to a System 25 data port It is possible to simulate a DTE interface from a modem with a cross over
270. computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment e Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference which case the user at his or her own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference DANGER The AT amp T System 25 cabinets are not user serviceable Some voltages inside the cabinets are hazardous This equipment is to be serviced only by qualified technicians CONTENTS CONTENTS Section 1 Overview Section 2 Features and Services Section 3 Functional Description Section 4 Hardware Description Section 5 Technical Specifications Section 6 Environmental Requirements Section 7 Parts Information Section 8 Reference Documentation Section 9 Glossary Section 10 Index OVERVIEW Introduction 1 1 System 25 Description Call Handling Capabilities Conclusions 1 15 i iliti 1 4 1 4 i i icati 1 5 i i icati 1 7 1 9 Figure 1 1 Figures System 25 Block Diagram OVERVIEW OVERVIEW Introduction This reference manual provides general technical information on AT amp T System 25 System 25 It includes a description of the system its hardware and software features and services environmental requirements and technical specifications This manual is intended to serve as an ove
271. connected from the console and from each other After Forced Release has taken place the attendant can receive a new call from the console queue or place call Considerations Forced Release differs from Release in an important respect Simple Release separates the attendant from an extended call or a conference call but leaves the other parties connected together Forced Release completely disconnects all parties When the attendant is connected to only one other party Forced Release has the same result as Release that is the call is ended If the attendant has already Released Forced Release has no additional effect For information on related Attendant Features Table 2 E refer to the individual feature descriptions 2 39 FEATURES AND SERVICES Attendant Join SLAC Only Description This feature allows the attendant while extending an incoming call to connect together the calling party the called party and the console in a 3 way call All parties can talk to each other The attendant activates the feature by pressing the JOIN button while still connected to one of the other parties Considerations The Join feature cancels a split condition The attendant can use the Join feature to stay on an extended call and give assistance to the other parties A joined call can be expanded into a conference call by adding more parties Once the JOIN button has been pressed there is no way to unjoin the calling and called
272. counting require a serial port on the UNIX PC If both will be used an expansion board will be necessary to provide more serial ports In general it is easier to reconfigure administration to use the second serial port than trying to reconfigure Call Accounting System The Automated Attendant feature of VMS may interact with the Call Coverage feature of VMS if Call Coverage is invoked when Automated Attendant attempts to transfer an incoming call If this happens two Voice Power boards begin talking to each other and the incoming caller is left needlessly confused Avoid this situation by administering the number of rings for your Automated Attendant to return to a caller to be fewer than the number of rings it takes to activate Call Coverage Alternatively if the station in question will always be available to answer a call administer the Automated Attendant to perform blind transfers To obtain a better understanding of the VMS features and their interactions read the VMS documentation and the Integrated Solution user guide Administration Requirements System e Requires one port assignment on a ZTN78 Tip Ring Line CP per VOICE POWER expansion board e VOICE POWER boards which will be used for Automated Attendant should be administered as a single DGC group eAppropriate feature port type codes exist for the different VMS functions and should be administered see the R2VI Administration Manual for the correct data values 2 194 I
273. cuit that converts the NPEs output to an analog signal Likewise it converts the analog signal from a central office trunk to a PCM data signal to the NPE The hybrid circuit converts the codec 4 wire analog signal to a 2 wire analog signal that is connected to the central office trunk by the line transformer The relay driver buffers and inverts the relay drive signals from the port I O circuit so that a logic high input 3 24 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION operates the appropriate relay relays control circuitry provides the proper signaling for loop start trunks The trunks support touch tone dialing and dial pulse signaling The surge protection circuit provides overvoltage lightning surge protection for the circuit pack MET Line TN735 The MET Line Circuit Pack interfaces four Multibutton Electronic Telephone MET lines and the TDM bus The MET Line unique circuitry consists of four port circuits as shown in Figure 3 14 PORT CIRCUIT TO MET TERMINALS MICRO ON BOARD PROCESSOR PORT CIRCUIT 3 Figure 3 14 Line TN735 Unique Circuitry ePort Circuits The four port circuits are identical Each port circuit consists of an analog port a digital port and an electronic power feed device The analog port circuit consists of a codec a hybrid circuit an electronic battery feed and a power filter The codec hybrid circuit and power filter perform the same function as in the Analog Line Circuit Pack T
274. d off premises phones e Sharing of data between PCs and or host computers and data terminals and e Growth and rearrangement of facilities The following pages outline System 25 s outstanding ability to provide these services Incoming Business Communications Successful call termination is the key to capturing all incoming communications associated with revenue issues client inquiries decision data etc Call termination involves identifying the called party and routing the call to a primary or secondary answering position System 25 provides powerful tools for both call screening and call termination e Attendant Consoles allow one or two attendants to answer screen and steer incoming calls using either Direct Trunk or Switched Loop operation With attendant operation incoming calls can be screened and extended to the appropriate party for resolution or forwarded to alternate locations and messages can be taken for absent clients Calls may arrive over any of the network facilities described in later sections of these notes e System 255 Integrated Solution can provide Automated Attendant service either reducing the volume of calls your attendant needs to handle or providing off hour attendant service OVERVIEW e Direct Inward Dialing allows incoming callers to reach specific individuals or facilities without attendant assistance This allows specific numbers to be advertised for direct customer access to brokers emergency servi
275. d the caller hears Reorder Tone when all trunks in a pool are busy but can queue the call using the appropriate manual method Reorder Tone is also returned if the busy trunks are not administered for queuing or if all the queue slots are in use In these cases queuing can not take place Park An unsuccessful attempt to park a call due to misdialing or attempting to park more than one call at a voice terminal results in Reorder Tone 2 196 Interdigit Timeouts Interdigit Timeouts Description This feature allows an originating register to be made available for others if dialing is not completed within a set time period Interdigit timeouts is 24 seconds until the first five digits have been dialed 10 seconds until the next five digits have been dialed and five seconds thereafter After timeout voice terminal dial pad button presses are interpreted as end to end signaling requests and touch tones are placed on the outside line Considerations Interdigit timeouts also apply to data calls When a user dials out over a trunk set up for dial pulse rather that Touch Tone service the interdigit timeout interval is involved The caller cannot speak to the called party until the timeout expires even though the caller may be able to hear the called party If the user presses the button after dialing the last digit this timeout ends and the caller may speak immediately Interactions The following feature interacts with Interdigit
276. d in bold type These headings are printed across the top of each page Page advance is determined by counting lines based on a fixed page length Each record is followed by a carriage return and a line feed The system can provide for the storage of up to 100 SMDR records If more than 100 records are received while the printer is disconnected a message Calls Lost Due To Call Record Overflow is provided when a printer is re attached 2 293 FEATURES AND SERVICES The SMDR call detail Figure 2 41 contains the following information for each call record 2 294 TYPE Column 1 All voice calls are labeled C data calls are labeled D is not printed as a column heading Blank Column 2 DATE Columns 3 10 The date the call is originated Blank Column 11 TIME Columns 12 16 The time the trunk is seized is listed using a 24 hour clock For example 2 01 PM is listed as 14 01 Seconds are truncated Blank Column 17 CALLED NUMBER Columns 18 35 For outgoing calls up to 15 digits may be recorded excluding the ARS or facility access code but including the 0 or 1 prefix to identify local and toll calls and 950 10 and 10 interconnect access codes Space is allotted for three dashes one between the fourth and fifth digits from the right one between the seventh and eight digits from the right and the other between the tenth and eleventh digits from the right Numbers longer than 15 digits wi
277. d user typically the attendant can transfer a CO trunk to an outward restricted or toll restricted station giving the station outward service The toll restriction class of the transferring station will apply for calls over a transferred trunk Coverage Coverage treatment of the transferred to station is provided to transferred calls When a covering station transfers a covered call to another station the call will no longer appear at the covering or the covered station Note that if you attempt to transfer a call to a station that you provide coverage for and that station does not answer coverage might not be invoked This is one of the reasons why announced transfer is recommended Display At a station receiving a transferred call the transfer descriptor is displayed position 1 before the transfer is completed The transferring party s number and name are also shown Screen 1 T785 Jones B After the transfer is completed T is removed and the display reverts to a standard incoming call format Information about the transferred party is displayed Forwarding Calls transferred by TRANSFER button operation to a forwarding station will be given normal Forwarding treatment Hold An outside call placed on hold during call transfer receives music on hold if available and administered user attempting to return to a held internal call that has been abandoned will hear nothing A user attempting to return to a held
278. d when originating a call at a BA button the PDC column will contain the accountable entered PDC number in place of the principal s PDC If two bridged stations attempt to originate a call at the same time and if the call is completed the PDC number of the station that dialed the first digit is placed in the SMDR records under the STN column Direct Group Calling DGC For an incoming call to a DGC group that is connected to an announcement and never answered 0 will be reported in the STN field of the call record If the call is answered by a station after receiving the announcement that station will be listed in the STN field Forwarding When a call is successfully forwarded to an outside number the call record will contain the forwarding station and forwarded to station numbers When a Remote Access caller activates Forwarding at a System 25 station the SMDR call record shows the incoming trunk number in the FAC field the PDC of the forwarding station in the STN field and the barrier code number in the ACCOUNT field Modem Pooling SMDR records do not reflect modem pool resource usage 2 296 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Remote Access Remote Access calls are fully covered in the SMDR call records Tandem Trunking f an outgoing call is originated by a tandem tie trunk the tandem trunk s FAC is recorded in the STN field If no FAC exists for this trunk then the 4 digit trunk number 9xxx w
279. d will be raised when a connection is established Usually set to No for host computer endpoints Disconnect Recall Sequence One Long Break or Two Short Breaks the sequence 74 used to disconnect a data call A terminal whose baud rate is low cannot use the Command Mode feature Call origination at this terminal must be via Transfer To Data T Numbers indicate the action numbers used to administer data port options 2 99 FEATURES AND SERVICES Table 2 H Typical Option Profiles for Data Port Endpoints Data Term Host Modem Modem Options or PC Computer users computer Speed highest 19200 19200 Auto 9600 9600 _ Modem Speeds Speeds Speeds Speeds Parity Enable Command Mode Permit Mismatch Local Echo Answer Text Connected Indication Disconnect Recall Sequence or 9600 Auto if not not used primarily for Host Host communications 2 100 Communications Access Manager CAM Communications Access Manager CAM The Communications Access Manager CAM program facilitates communication between workstations on the AT amp T STARLAN NETWORK STAR LAN NETWORK and workstations on System 25 Since has a built in interface to System 255 Command Mode it is an ideal communications application for PCs connected to System 25 Detailed procedures for using CAM can be found in the CAM User Guide The material here provides a brief overview of CAM capabilities CAM i
280. dapter Connections For 12 Button MET Sets 2 187 Figure 2 26 Music On Hold Equipment Connections FCC Registered 2 224 Figure 2 27 Music On Hold Equipment Connections Non Registered 2 225 vi Figure 2 28 Delay Announcement Equipment Connections FCC Registered 2 230 Figure 2 29 Paging Equipment Connections Using CO Trunk Ports FCC Registered 2 236 Figure 2 30 Paging Equipment Connection to TN763 CP Using 278A Adapter 2 237 Figure 2 31 10 Emergency Transfer Unit ETU 2 253 Figure 2 32 Emergency Transfer Unit Connections 2 254 Figure 2 33 Multiple Arrangements 2 255 Figure 2 34 Speakerphone Adjuncts 2 276 Figure 2 35 Speakerphone Connections For 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminals Except 34 Button Sets 2 277 Figure 2 36 Speakerphone Connections For 34 Button Voice Terminals 2 278 Figure 2 37 Speakerphone Connections For 12 Button MET Sets 2 279 Figure 2 38 STARLAN NETWORK and System 25 Configuration 2 285 Figure 2 39 STARLAN NETWORK Connection to System 25 With 2500 Single Line Telephone 2 289 Figure 2 40 STARLAN NETWORK Connection to System 25 With ATL Type Telephone 2 290 Figure 2 41 Typical SMDR Call Detail Report 2 298 Figure 2 42 SMDR Call Record Format 2 299 Figure 2 43 SMDR Call Record Header Format 2 300 Figure 2 44 SMDR Output Equipment On Premises Direct Connections Sharing Same AC Outlet 2 301 Figure 2 45 SMDR Output Equipment On Premises Direct Connections Greater Than 50 Feet From
281. der tone when an account code is required on a call but is not entered Last Number Dialed The access code 0 and the account code are not stored by this feature EATURES AND SERVICES Remote Access Remote access callers cannot enter account codes Third Party Call Setup the source station is FACE restricted the third party data terminal must prefix the outside destination number with 40 and an account code Transfer Calls can be transferred in both directions between a FACE restricted station and a non FACE station Administration Requirements Account code entry is administered on a per station basis Optional Forced for all Outgoing Calls or Forced for Dial 0 or 1 Toll Calls Only default Optional FACE cannot be administered for data ports 2 10 Account Code Entry Optional Account Code Entry Optional Description Optional Account Code Entry allows voice terminal users to associate an account code with incoming and outgoing calls The account code is appended to the SMDR call record and can be used later for accounting or billing purposes For an incoming call the user must enter the account code at the end of the call For an outgoing call the user has a choice of entering the code at the beginning of the call before the destination is dialed or at the end of the call An account code entry is terminated when the number of digits entered equals the number administered for system account codes when
282. dure is recommended when the data call is a trunk call The data port reservation is acknowledged by a winking status LED at the DATA button Subsequently invoking Transfer To Data transfers the call to the associated data terminal Preindication is canceled elf the user goes on hook before transferring the call to data elf the user preindicates on a second DATA button elf after dialing is complete a second DATA button is pressed Preindication is canceled for the first data terminal and the data call is transferred to the second data terminal When Preindication is canceled the associated pooled modem conversion resource reservation is canceled Interactions The following feature interacts with Transfer To Data Modem Pooling f a conversion resource is required on an external call invoking Data Call Preindication will cause a pooled modem conversion resource to be reserved If none is available e g the system has no Pooled Modem CP Reorder Tone is provided This will occur whether a conversion resource is actually required or not Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port e Assign DATA button 2 333 FEATURES AND SERVICES Trunk Groups Description This feature allows each trunk in the system to be assigned to one of up to 16 trunk groups Trunks link two switching systems such as System 25 and the local CO or System 25 and another PBX Although not required trunks can be grouped together in trunk gro
283. e 2 1 FEATURES AND SERVICES Symbols Used in Illustrations Many feature descriptions in this section contain illustrations of equipment and connections In the connection figures modular jacks are shown as triangles 25 pair cable connectors are indicated by shaded blocks Unterminated wiring that requires cutdown or other termination does not have symbol designations The 103A Connecting Block is a typical modular wall jack that provides cutdown connections for building station wiring Feature Tables Tables through list all the features of System 25 Each feature is specified as Standard or Optional Standard features are built into the system They are always provided but may require administration to make them operational Standard features are identified in the feature tables by the letter S Optional features require both administration and additional equipment Music On Hold is an example Optional features are identified by the letter O Bracketed words in the tables are the standard labels of the associated feature buttons These labels are also used in the feature descriptions FEATURES AND SERVICES System Features System features Table 2 A are those that affect the entire operation of the system Table 2 A System Features FEATURE NAME FEATURE TYPE Call Accounting System CAS Call Management System CMS Dial Plan Dictatlon System Access Digital Tape Unit Direct Group Calling Direct Group Calli
284. e If the source terminal is a data terminal whose speed is set to the highest optioned speed of the data port the message REMOTE SETUP is displayed at the source terminal and the CONFIRMED DISCONNECTED message is displayed at the third party data terminal The destination terminal will then be called automatically from the source terminal If the source terminal and destination terminal are compatible a data connection is established Since the System 25 does not provide call progress tone detection for an off premises call can t detect second dial tone for example pause characters should be inserted at appropriate places in the dialed digit string In addition Third Party Call Setup calls are subject to the administered restrictions assigned to the source voice or data port For 2 322 Third Party Call Setup example if the source terminal is restricted to on premises calls only a call to an off premises destination terminal will be blocked Setting Up Third Party Call To set up a call from the third party data terminal the user selects lt Voice call gt from the entry level Command Mode menu see Figure 2 51 The user then enters the characters as required to call the destination terminal Calls may be completed as follows Note If a character is entered incorrectly the ASCII character backspace BS or CTRL H keys or underscore _ may be used to cancel a previously entered character Calling a Destination Termina
285. e terminal that has Coverage exhausts the terminal hunting possibilities coverage is invoked Following Forwarding Calls signed in at or forwarded to a station in a hunt group will hunt and ring an idle station if the home station is busy If all members of the group are busy and the away or forwarded to station has Call Waiting the caller hears special ringback until the away station becomes available to answer the call A call to a forwarding station in a hunt group will first ring at the away or forwarded to station After an administered number of rings the call returns to the hunt group if all members are busy the call continues to ring at the away station until a hunt group member becomes available Administration Requirements Voice or Data Terminal Port eAssign PDC DDC of terminal to hunt to next 2 292 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Description This feature provides detailed call information records all incoming and outgoing trunk calls and sends this information to an optional output device Data on inside calls is not collected The call records can be used to compute costs allocate charges and analyze calling patterns The output device can be any serial RS 232 compatible DTE device capable of receiving the data must supply DTR on pin 20 and either printing the call records or storing and analyzing them 80 character ASCII records are sent to the out
286. e ATL Line has the following unique circuitry 3 16 eProtocol Handler The 8 bit on board microprocessor translates the control information in Control Channel Message Set CCMS message format to the control information message format used by the 7300H series voice terminals The protocol handler sends the messages to the terminals via transceivers located in the port circuits ePort Circuits Each port circuit is identical A port circuit consists of an analog port one half of a transceiver and an electronic power feed device The analog port circuit consists of a codec a hybrid circuit an isolation transformer and associated power filtering circuitry The codec and hybrid circuit perform the same function as the codec and hybrid circuit in the Analog Line Circuit Pack TN742 The output of the hybrid circuit is connected to the primary of the isolation transformer The secondary of the transformer is connected to the analog voice pair The transceiver interfaces the voice terminal pair to the protocol handler The electronic power feed device provides 24 volts dc on the power pair to the voice terminal The device is polled by the on board microprocessor periodically and on demand to test for an overcurrent or no current condition Each Electronic Power Feed EPF circuit supports two ports If one of the associated lines becomes overloaded the associated pair of lines will also be out of service One EPF supports Ports 0 and 1
287. e Data Call Setup e Data Terminal Dialing e Expert Mode e Modem Pooling e Third Party Call Setup e Transfer To Data 2 123 FEATURES AND SERVICES Data Terminal Dialing Description This feature allows users to originate place data calls from a data terminal Voice terminal dialing and call progress tones are replaced by keyboard dialing and call progress messages The message DIAL prompts the user to enter the called number from the keyboard and RINGING or DIALING COMPLETED informs the user that the dialed number is being called Table 2 1 provides a list of the call progress messages Note The following dialing procedures assume that Command Mode is active Refer to the feature description on Expert Mode for an alternative method of dialing Dialed Characters In addition to digits and the and characters on the touch tone pad the dialed number may contain the following special characters e The characters and SPACE may be used to improve legibility These characters are ignored e The or characters may be used to cause a 1 5 second pause in dialing Multiple pause characters can be used to produce longer pauses mark character indicates that the remaining digits are for end to end signaling eUNDERSCORE or BACKSPACE characters may be used to correct previously typed characters on the same line eThe character ma
288. e Multiple Cabinet System 2 15 AMP Wire Dedicated Branch Service 2 4 Box RACO 230 or Equiv 2 4 Cover RACO 807 or Equiv 1 Ground Bar Square D or Equiv 4 Recpt Hubbell 526215 AMP or Equiv Typically multiple cabinet systems can be powered from a single phase 120V ac 60 Hertz service two 15 amp circuits required There are no phase restrictions between cabinets Therefore the two 15 amp circuits required may be derived from single or three phase service The receptacles should be located at least 1 foot above the floor Receptacles should not be located further than 4 feet from the cabinets DANGER Under no circumstances should this equipment be connected to 220V ac doing so poses a serious fire hazard ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS TWO SEPARATELY FUSED ITE QP1 B015 TWO 15 AMP CKT BREAKERS OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT NEUTRAL INSULATED FROM LOAD ENTER 15 AMP CIRCUITS GROUND GREEN LOAD CENTER BOX RACO 230 SUA on EQUIVALENT HUBBELL RECPTS 5262 15 AMP OR EQUIVALENT 4 COVER RACO 807 OR EQUIVALENT GROUND APPROVED GROUND BAR MOUNTED BUILDING ON 4 BOX SQUARE D GROUND PK9GTA OR APPROVED 6 AWG 5 EQUIVALENT MET Blo TEASE 2 S8 5 lg ef 0 240 30 SINGLE PHASE MAIN Figure 6 3 AC Power Distribution Multiple Cabinet System 6 7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUI
289. e System Administration Terminal The data in the log is useful in diagnosing and analyzing troubles particularly when the problem has not yet caused an alarm or when alarms cannot be retired by replacement of maintenance objects The error log is historical in nature It lists faults that have not been resolved as well as past alarms and provides a profile of system maintenance Automatic Maintenance Tests There are two kinds of maintenance testing initiated only by the system e Periodic eDemand Periodic tests are run by the system at fixed intervals The tests do not affect service Demand tests are run by the system when it detects a condition requiring a need for testing Demand tests are only performed when errors are detected Maintenance personnel cannot initiate these tests For additional information see AT amp T System 25 Installation and Maintenance Manual 2 318 Tandem Trunking Tandem Trunking Description Tandem trunking provides an enhanced networking capability for System 25 With this feature tie trunks can be used to call through System 25 to reach another switching system CO or PBX Calls may be completed over on network or off network facilities To be treated as tandem trunks tie trunks must be assigned trunk numbers beginning with the digit 9 Incoming calls on these trunks may route out of System 25 over ground start loop start or tie trunks Tandem trunks can gain access to outgoing facilities either
290. e Tie Trunks for linking PBXs with dedicated private circuits for high volume calling Dial access to stations other trunks answering groups Direct Group Calling and an Electronic Tandem Network endpoint capability are provided e Off Premises Stations OPS allow single line voice terminal to be located remotely and connected to System 25 via arrangements with the local telephone company This service is used to provide users at secondary sites or their residences many of the same features as an on premises single line station To enhance the usage and control of the above set of network facilities System 25 provides the rich set of access features outlined in the Outgoing Business Communications section In addition System 25 can support networking between systems by eServing as an endpoint on an electronic tandem network ETN using its tie trunks and flexible dialing plan eServing as an off network or on network access point with its dial access transfer between tie trunks and telephone company trunks LS GS DID This allows usage of tie trunks to reach a distant System 25 and then connect through that System 25 to local telephone company facilities to complete the call To support efficient utilization of trunks they can be grouped together up to 16 groups if all trunks in the group perform the same function This resource pooling provides better service with a given number of trunks and simplifies administration and calling
291. e Transfer H Local Flex DSS L J U J Flex DSS Flex DSS ee H Flex DSS Flex DSS Flex DSS Flex DSS Flex DSS Message Waiting Q Cancel j Ed Start Release g Recall Message HFAI Microphone Speakerphone Volume Ere rs E Hoe E T HET Figure 2 4 Buttons and Display of BIS 34D Drop Hold Ringing The SLAC receives normal ringing on incoming calls Abbreviated alerting one short burst of ringing accompanied by a change in the LOOP button wink rate indicates to the attendant that a held call has exceeded the preset hold time interval Calls on hold can be administered to continue on hold after the second timeout or to return to console queue Abbreviated alerting can also be administered as a reminder for new calls entering the queue 2 30 Attendant Console Switched Loop Considerations One System 25 configuration can support either one or two SLACs or one or two DTACs but not a combination of a SLAC and a DTAC The optional Direct Extension Selector Console can be connected to a SLAC to provide busy idle status of inside stations and quick calling of their extension numbers In a system with two consoles either or both can have a Selector Console as an adjunct The Selector Console is covered in the Attendant Direct Extension Selector Console feature description For information on related Attendant Features Table 2 E refer to the
292. e associated item on the flow chart Certain readers may find this reference useful when reading the following description in association with the System 25 Administration Manual Administrable System Station Toll Allowed and Trunk action numbers are also noted where applicable The ARS feature is accessed when a user dials the ARS access code As shown on the number dialed is first checked against the Emergency Numbers List This list consists of special service code 911 and up to three customer defined seven digit numbers If the number dialed matches one of the numbers on the list the call is immediately routed via the local CO facility All user call restrictions are disregarded If the number dialed is not on this list a check is made to determine if the terminal is allowed to originate outside calls If the terminal is outward restricted the caller receives Reorder Tone otherwise the dialed number is checked against any toll restrictions that apply Terminals may be assigned a Toll Restriction Class 1 4 or be unrestricted Class 0 Terminals assigned Toll Restriction Class 1 have the most privileges those assigned Class 4 have the least privileges There are four associated Toll Call Allowed Lists 1 4 in the system Up to 64 3 digit CO codes and 6 digit NPA plus CO codes may be divided among the four lists Numbers dialed from voice terminals assigned Toll Restriction Class 1 are checked against all four Toll Call Allowed TCA L
293. e call route e Station Message Detail Recording SMDR generates detailed call information on all incoming and outgoing calls and sends this information to an output device PC or printer eCall Accounting Systems provide multiple types of customer reports on communication costs and usage e Account Code Entry allows a user to associate calls with an account code for charge back purposes This feature can be administrated on a per station basis to force the entry of the required codes before outgoing calls can be made Ease of access to multiple types of network facilities provided for minimum cost is managed by the following features 1 8 e Automatic Route Selection ARS allows the customer to dial a standard DDD number ARS selects the preferred route and does any number conversions required for the facilities selected eSystem 25 s Virtual Facility feature provides convenient and inexpensive access to Other Common Carriers OCCs This feature provides access to OCC facilities over a user specified physical facility dedicated OCC trunks are not needed Local OCC access numbers and account codes are automatically added by System 25 System 25 s Virtual Facility feature is fully integrated with its ARS Toll Restriction and SMDR CAS features e Callback Queuing provides a simple way to complete calls to busy trunk pools without having to manually repeat the calling procedures Such calls are put into a queue when the busy faci
294. e called party has been reached has these results called party the destination is put on hold attendant is reconnected to the calling party the source eThe green status lamp of the DEST button starts winking to indicate that the destination is on hold e The green status lamp of the SOURCE button goes from winking to dark Pressing the DEST button after the source has been reconnected has these results e The source is put on hold again eThe attendant is reconnected to the destination eThe green status lamp of the SOURCE button starts winking to indicate that the source is on hold e The green status lamp of the DEST button goes from winking to dark Considerations The Source Destination feature is useful when the attendant needs to talk to each party privately before connecting them Interactions The Source Destination feature can only be activated before the two parties are connected together When the attendant presses JOIN the other parties and the attendant are joined in a 3 way connection When the attendant presses RELEASE the other parties are connected the call is separated from the console and the attendant is free to handle other calls After the source and destination parties are connected together the SOURCE and DEST status lamps go dark 2 52 Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic Description This feature allows the attendant to conver
295. e on expansion boards A wide carriage parallel printer such as the 471 or 479 is strongly recommended a single Centronics 36 pin parallel port is standard on the UNIX PC For Office Automation applications there are no absolute requirements but the customer s needs should be understood For example most customers who need word processing also would like a letter quality printer A serial interfaced printer should be recommended due to the ease with which serial ports may be added to the UNIX PC Most serial printers will 2 193 FEATURES AND SERVICES require a null modem cable such as our PEC 2724 91 G or 2724 92G Any VMS application will require at least one VOICE POWER expansion board Message Drop Service requires a dedicated VOICE POWER expansion board Announcement Service requires a dedicated VOICE POWER expansion board Automated Attendant Voice Mail System and Call Coverage may share the same expansion board but traffic considerations must determine the number of boards required to provide an acceptable level of service The UNIX PC provides three slots for expansion boards These slots may be used to expand system memory the number of serial ports or to add VOICE POWER expansion boards If more than three boards will be required a frequent occurrence an Expansion Unit is available The Expansion Unit permits a total of seven expansion boards to be used with a single UNIX PC Interactions Both Administration and Call Ac
296. e terminals have programmable buttons that can be assigned for handling calls and for controlling features Many of these buttons are supported by red l Use and green status indicators LEDs that provide users with information about calls and features Fixed non programmable feature buttons allow users to control standard features such as Hold Conference and Transfer Multiline terminals can have several calls active at the same time depending on the number of buttons programmed for placing and receiving calls For example the user can be talking on one call have one or more calls on hold and still receive ringing on incoming calls Transmission to and from the terminals is hybrid an analog pair for voice and two digital pairs for control signals Port circuits ZTN79 ATL Line CP for MERLIN System sets and TN735 MET Line CP for MET sets provide interface between the terminals and the digital switch The pushbutton dials on MERLIN System terminals are not touch tone they send digital signals to the system switch and are referred to in terminal descriptions as a touch dial pads MET sets have touch tone DTMF dials The following subsections provide descriptions and illustrations of the multiline voice terminals supported by System 25 4 23 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 7302H01D Voice Terminal 5 Button PEC 3160 111 The 7302H01D voice terminal can be desk or wall mounted and is about 5 3 4 inches wide 5 1 4 inches high and 8 1 2 inches
297. e the microphone status lamps and a volume control for incoming voice only Ail voice terminal features operate normally with the speakerphone adjunct Lifting the handset during speakerphone operation automatically turns off the speakerphone The speakerphone may be turned on during a call by pressing the On Off switch and hanging up the handset Considerations Speakerphone operation allows users to perform other activities while carrying on a conversation Speakerphones also facilitate conference calls Interactions The following feature interacts with Speakerphone Adjunct Headset Adapter Adjunct A voice terminal cannot have both a speakerphone adjunct and a headset adapter adjunct Hardware Requirements 4A Speakerphone System The 2500SM single line voice terminal and 2991 type 10 Button MET set require a 4A Speakerphone System 4A Figure 2 34 provides a speaker and associated microphone indicator lamp and operating controls The controls include a two position ON OR QUIET OFF rocker switch and a volume control The 4A Speakerphone requires an 85B1 power unit S101A S102A Speakerphone 3163 HFU The S101A Speakerphone Figure 2 34 is used with the 12 Button MET Set 7203 M The 5102 Speakerphone is used with 7300 H series voice terminals except the 5 Button and sets The S101A S102A speakerphones are equipped with a 4 foot connecting cord that plugs into the voice terminal Connecti
298. eNumber of seconds before camped on call returns to the Attendant Console 1 120 or 0 for no Attendant Camp On default 30 2 17 FEATURES AND SERVICES Attendant Cancel Description This feature allows the attendant to terminate an attempt to extend any incoming call if the called station does not answer or if the station answers but declines to accept the call The attendant presses CANCEL and is automatically reconnected to the calling party The call can then be ended by hanging up or by pressing RELEASE Pressing CANCEL when the Start facility is not active will be ignored Considerations Attendant Cancel allows the attendant to terminate a call transfer attempt and return to the incoming held party via a one button operation This enhances the attendant s ability to handle calls quickly and efficiently 2 18 Attendant Console Direct Trunk Attendant Console Direct Trunk Description In System 25 the Attendant Console is used to answer incoming trunk calls that are not directed to specific user stations to answer calls from inside users to extend calls to inside stations and outside numbers and to assist system users in placing outgoing calls and setting up conferences The attendant can also manage and monitor some areas of system operation System 25 supports either the Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTAC or the Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC which is covered in the next feature description in this manual
299. ector Console will light steadily When a DID call arrives at the attendant position for coverage the LED associated with the coverage sender will flash and will then go dark when the call is answered However if the call is placed directly to the attendant position or is forwarded to the position and thereby arrives on a System Access button or a Loop button e g if a DID PDC is signed in at the attendant position then no LED indications on the Selector Console will be provided If a DID call is directed to the answering position and is subsequently extended to a station then the LED on the Selector Console associated with the station will flash if the call returns to the answering position The LED will light steadily if the call is answered by the station Call Waiting Incoming DID trunk calls do not wait at busy stations they receive busy tone Conference For conference purposes DID calls count as one of two allowable outside parties Coverage DID calls receive standard coverage treatment Dictation System Access A DID number may be associated with the dictation system access code This allows an outside caller to access the dictation equipment Direct Group Calling A DID call will be directed to a DGC group if the DID number matches the DGC group access code Night Service DID calls do not receive Night Service treatment A DID call will ring at the appropriate station whether Night Service is activated or not Off Premises
300. ed If the paging equipment requires a contact closure equivalent to a push to talk switch a paging system adapter must be installed between the port and the paging system e Assign as Paging Port Action 16 1 Yes or 0 No Default No eAssign Trunk Access Code e Dial restrict zone yes or no eAssign other appropriate CO trunk parameters Auxiliary Trunk Port eA port on a TN763 Auxiliary Trunk CP an Auxiliary Trunk Interface and a Paging Dial Dictation Interface are required for each interface eAssign Paging access code for each paging system maximum 3 to be provided e Dial restrict each paging system yes or no eAssign an All Zones access code Multiline Voice Terminal Port Assign DSS button with paging zone access code as required Hardware Requirements Requires a paging system that is compatible with telephone systems Each paging system requires at least one suitable System 25 port Selection of the type of System 25 port loop start ground start Auxiliary trunk or tip ring station line port is dependent on the paging system or its adapter lf a choice is available the recommended method of interfacing is via CO trunk ports either loop or ground start Some customer provided equipment typically older systems may require contact closure to control the paging equipment in this case either a paging adapter or a port on a TN763 Auxiliary Trunk CP must be used If an Auxiliary Trunk CP is used to suppor
301. ed Personal Line buttons where outside calls are answered and originated The console can have several incoming calls ringing simultaneously Each console can also have an optional Attendant Direct Extension Selector Console to enhance internal calling The Selector Console is covered in the Attendant Direct Extension Selection feature description For information on related Attendant Features Table 2 E refer to the individual feature descriptions Interactions The following features interact with Direct Trunk Attendant Console Attendant Console Switched Loop A DTAC cannot operate in the same system with a Switched Loop Attendant Console Bridging of System Access Buttons A DTAC cannot serve as a principal station Callback Queuing The attendant can queue calls that are extended using the normal START RELEASE button operation However calls originated using only the START button no other call put on hold cannot be queued Call Waiting Calls cannot wait at a DTAC Display The DTAC does not support Display FEATURES AND SERVICES Administration Requirements System e Display attendant position number first or second eAssign number of rings before unanswered calls return to the Attendant Position 1 31 default 5 eForce DID calls to unassigned numbers to ring at the Attendant Position yes or no default yes eForce calls to FPDCs that are not signed in anywhere to ring at the Attendant Pos
302. ed by the terminal s volume control located on the left side of the set The speaker and associated LED are turned off by pressing SPEAKER again or by lifting the handset The latter operation connects the handset to the associated voice channel When using the handset pressing SPEAKER will turn on the speaker to support the Group Listen feature pressing SPEAKER again will turn off the speaker and associated LED Note that once the user has lifted the handset it is possible to return to hands free operation only by putting the call on hold hanging up the handset then reconnecting the call by pressing SPEAKER Hanging up the handset will terminate the call whether the speaker is on or off Note The built in speaker provides one way communication listen only The user must pick up the handset to converse Considerations The built in speaker supports group listening monitoring of calls e g while waiting on hold and on hook dialing Hardware Requirements Only 7300H series MERLIN voice terminals with a SPEAKER button support this feature Sets with a SPEAKERPHONE button have full speakerphone service which provides two way on hook calling 2 273 FEATURES AND SERVICES Speakerphone Adjunct Description The speakerphone adjunct permits users of voice terminals not equipped with built in speakerphones to place and receive calls without lifting their handsets The adjunct has an On Off switch a switch to temporarily mut
303. ed for facility becomes available e Calls ringing on Bridged Access BA buttons e Coverage calls e Directed Night Service calls e DGC Group calls e Manual Signaling e Message Waiting indications e Outward Toll Restriction Personal Line calls e Returning calls An attendant s PDC can serve as a forward to point for other stations Calls placed to the attendants PDC can be forwarded by the attendant 2 176 Forwarding A given station can receive forwarded calls from any number of other stations Note When incoming trunk calls are forwarded to outside locations severe attenuation of the voice signal may occur Interactions The following features interact with Forwarding Account Code Entry Forced Stations with this feature administered for all calls cannot forward calls to any outside numbers Stations with this feature administered for dial O or 1 calls can forward calls to any outside number except for dial 0 or 1 numbers Attendant Call Extending Calls extended by an attendant to a forwarding station will be given normal Forwarding treatment Bridging of System Access Buttons Since forwarding is a station oriented feature it can be activated and deactivated for a forwarding principal station only at a System Access button on that station If forwarding is activated at a Bridged Access button on a bridging station it affects calls to that station only Callback Queuing Calls that forward are queued for the
304. ed to route to the attendant e Calls to Floating Personal Dial Codes FPDCs not signed in anywhere if administered to route to the attendant If the first attendant has activated the Position Busy feature or is busy on all System Access buttons these calls will be routed to the second console If that console is also busy on all System Access buttons busy tone is provided to the calling party System users and DID callers can reach a particular attendant by dialing the Personal Dial Code PDC assigned to the desired attendant 2 20 Attendant Console Direct Trunk Position Busy A POS BUSY button can be assigned to each console this permits selection of one of two modes of operation 1 simultaneous operation 2 only one Attendant Console active Note that only one console is allowed to be inactive at any given time An associated POS BUSY status LED is lighted when the console is inactive Ringing is disabled on all trunk terminations on the rightmost two columns of buttons of the inactive console Ringing disabled on an inactive console will be enabled on the active console for those trunks with dual appearances appearances on both consoles All other features on all buttons including those on the associated Attendant Direct Extension Selector Console will continue to function normally even though the console is inactive Considerations Direct trunk operation means that trunks are terminated on individual buttons call
305. ement if available Administration Requirements The DGC announcement device requires a port assignment on a ZTN78 Tip Ring Line or TN742 Analog Line CP Only one DGC Delay Announcement may be assigned in the system Callers to all DGC groups receive the same message Hardware Requirements The announcement device must automatically hang up at the end of each call so that the incoming call can be returned to the DGC queue The equipment requires a port on a ZTN78 Tip Ring Line or TN742 Analog Line CP The system supports one DGC delay announcement 2 139 FEATURES AND SERVICES For Music On Hold hardware information refer to the feature description Detailed connection information is provided in Figure 2 18 Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading in Section 4 SYSTEM 25 CABI NET PART OF OCTOPUS PART OF DELAY gt ANNOUNCE MENT EQUI PMENT LEGEND TN742 ANALOG LINE CP ZTN78 TIP RING CP Bl TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05 C5 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE _ FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 18 Delay Announcement Equipment Connections FCC Registered 2 140 Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Dialing DID Description Direct Inward Dialing DID allow
306. en disconnects Useful for answering calls during nonbusiness hours and for providing information to employees Coverage Service Answers incoming calls and allows the caller to record message or be transferred to an attendant eMessage Drop Service Allows certain users to record messages to solicit information from callers After dialing an assigned number and hearing the message callers can record their responses Useful for product and marketing surveys For complete information on VMS refer to its own set of documentation Interactions The following features interact with VMS Leave Word Calling VMS also supports the System 25 feature Leave Word Calling LWC which is covered in a separate feature description in this section Night Service Directed VMS ports may be assigned Directed Night Service responsibilities 2 349 FEATURES AND SERVICES Hardware Requirements A Voice Message System must be connected to the System 25 by way of a port on a ZTN78 Tip Ring Line circuit pack Use of a TN742 Analog Line circuit pack for VMS interface is not recommended 2 350 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Digital Switch 3 1 9 Circuitry Common to All Port CPs 3 Analog Line TN742 3 14 ATL Line ZTN79 3 16 Auxiliary Trunk TN763 3 18 Data Line TN726 3 19 DID Trunk 753 3 21 Tie Trunk TN760B 3 27 Tip Ring Line ZTN78 3 30 Real Time Constraints 3 39 Software Partitioning 3 39 Memory 3 41
307. endant the associated LED on the Selector Console will flash while the call is ringing and will light steadily when the attendant answers the call The LED will light steadily whenever the terminal is off hook Station busy indication is not provided for buttons pointing to FPDCs If a call to a PDC is directed to a COVER or LOOP button on the Attendant Console the covered status LED of the voice terminal on the Selector Console will flash and then go dark when the call is answered by the attendant If the covered call was intended for a FPDC that was signed in at a terminal with attendant coverage the Selector Console status LED associated with the FPDC if assigned will flash In this case the Cover button status LED will also flash DTAC only A call can arrive at an Attendant Console SYSTEM ACCESS or LOOP button because the PDC or FPDC is signed in at the Console or because the FPDC is not signed in anywhere For these calls the status LED on the Selector Console will not light If the attendant extends a call to a station or DGC group and that call returns to the attendant the status LED of the called station or group on the Selector Console will flash and then go dark when the call is answered by the attendant This is true regardless of the sign in status of the PDC Interactions The following features interact with Attendant Direct Extension Selection Attendant Position Busy The Selector Console functions normally when the asso
308. endpoint is idle eWinking Data endpoint is reserved e Flashing Data endpoint is being alerted to an incoming call e Steadily Lighted Data endpoint off hook busy The DATA button status LED will wink only when a voice terminal reserves a data endpoint by Data Call Preindication Data Call Origination Using Transfer to Data A voice terminal user after calling a DDC or a PDC to reach an analog data endpoint receives either answer tone or called party answer respectively The user then transfers the call to the associated data terminal by pressing DATA and hanging up The called party may also use Transfer To Data to transfer the call to a data terminal or may press the Data button on an associated modem An inside call cannot be transferred via Transfer To Data until the far end answers If a handshake failure occurs after Transfer To Data the data call will be disconnected and the data terminal left in the idle on hook state Note Even if the associated data port is optioned for autobaud the call will be set up at the highest common speed that the calling and called data terminals are administered for independent of the current data terminal settings 2 332 Transfer To Data Data Call Preindication A multiline voice terminal user by going off hook and pressing an idle DATA button may indicate that a data call will be attempted This reserves the associated data port and a modem pool conversion resource This proce
309. ented on the terminal by DSS FLEX DSS AUTO ICOM and FACILITY buttons Before making a call to a station the multiline voice terminal user can check the green status LED of the station button If it is lit the station party is off hook To be alerted when the party hangs up and is available again the user while on hook presses the button of the station The red l use LED lights indicating that Busy to ldle Reminder is in effect When the other party hangs up the user s terminal rings once The user simply goes off hook and the station is called the user does not have to press the button again If the user calls a station by pressing a FLEX DSS or DSS button and receives busy tone the user must hang up before activating Busy to Idle Reminder When all the trunks in a pool represented by a FACILITY button are busy the green status LED is lighted The user can activate Busy to Idle Reminder in the same way as for a station call by pressing the FACILITY button while on hook When a trunk becomes idle the terminal rings once The user goes off hook and if the trunk is still available is automatically connected to the trunk To complete the call the user dials the desired outside number Considerations Busy to ldle Reminder gives the multiline voice terminal user a way to get quick access to a station or trunk group that has just become available after being busy Access to the station or trunk is not reserved for the user who activates
310. er 2 329 Transfer To Data 2 332 Trunk Groups 2 334 Third Party Call Setup 2 322 Trunk To Trunk Transfer 2 337 User Changeable Options 2 338 Virtual Facilities 2 344 Voice Message System 2 349 Figures Figure 2 8 Automatic Route Selection Flow Chart 2 64 Figure 2 9 Automatic Route Selection Routing Pattern 2 66 Figure 2 10 Typical Bridging Arrangement 2 67 Figure 2 11 Call Accounting System On Premises Direct Connections Sharing Same AC Outlet 2 79 Figure 2 12 Call Accounting System On Premises Direct Connections Greater Than 50 Feet From System Cabinet or Not Sharing Same AC Outlet Figure 2 13 Communications Access Manager Architecture 2 102 Figure 2 14 Asynchronous Data Unit Interface Signals Figure 2 15 Dictation System Connections FCC Registered 2 133 Figure 2 16 Digital Tape Unit 2 134 Figure 2 17 Digital Tape Unit On Premises Direct Connections Sharing Same AC Outlet 2 135 Figure 2 18 Delay Announcement Equipment Connections FCC Registered 2 140 Figure 2 19 External Alert Connections 2 169 Figure 2 20 Supplemental Alert Adapter Connections 2 170 Figure 2 21 Stages of Call Forwarding 2 174 Figure 2 22 500A 502A 502B Headset Adapter 2 184 Figure 2 23 Typical Headset Adapter to 7300H Series Voice Terminal Connections Not Requiring Auxiliary Power 2 185 Figure 2 24 Typical Headset Adapter to 7300H Series Voice Terminal Connections Requiring Auxiliary Power 2 186 Figure 2 25 Typical Headset A
311. er device to output Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Account Code entries FEATURES AND SERVICES Attendant Call Extending Description This feature allows the attendant to put a call in a special hold condition call another station then connect the two calls together The attendant can withdraw from the connection and separate the call from the console or remain connected to the other parties Attendant Call Extending is a feature used at either a Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTAC or a Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC Note In general the attendant should not use the TRANSFER button which invokes the standard multiline voice terminal Transfer feature to extend calls If Transfer is used busy or unanswered calls cannot return to the attendant console for further handling The attendant after placing or answering a call can use Procedure 1 or 2 to extend this call to an inside extension or Procedure 1 to extend it to an outside number 1 Press START to place the incoming call on hold via the Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic feature After receiving Dial Tone the attendant then dials the requested inside or outside number or 2 Press the Selector Console Group Select and Direct Extension Selection DXS buttons associated with the requested inside station This operation is equivalent to pressing START and dialing the extension If ringing tone is heard the attendant presses RELEASE Manual Release to co
312. erminal users can press MESSAGE to turn Off their Message LED Message indicators on single line voice terminals can be controlled by the user the covering party or the attendant by using the Dial Access feature 2 216 Messaging Services If a user tries to turn on the Message LED at a voice terminal for which the user does not provide Individual Coverage Reorder Tone is received Refer to the Coverage Individual feature description for additional information Dial Access to Message Waiting Indicators This service allows users to turn on or off the built in Message LED or Z34A Message Waiting Indicator adjunct of any voice terminal in the system including their own Access is by way of dial codes The service does not apply to the feature buttons LEDs administered for Station to Station Message Waiting Refer to the Dial Access to Message Waiting feature description for additional information Station To Station Message Waiting Multiline voice terminals can be assigned paired Message Waiting MSG WAIT buttons with associated status LEDs When this indicator is lighted the user calls the other user for messages The MSG WAIT LED can be controlled by the two associated terminals only either user can toggle the state of both LEDs e g both LEDs go On or Off together at any time whether on hook or off hook Refer to the Station To Station Message Waiting feature description for additio
313. erminal that has SA buttons bridged by one or more other multiline stations ePrincipal the user of a principal station eBA button a special call appearance button on a multiline station administered to correspond to a specific SA button on another user s station the principal station collectively referred to as bridged appearances e Bridging station a multiline voice terminal with one or more BA buttons A BA button can be assigned to any programmable feature button on a bridging station but it does not take the place of an SA button The SA buttons on the bridging station can be bridged by other stations Q SYS ACC 3021 SYS ACC SYS ACC Bs SYS ACC ooze Q BRIDGE Q BRIDGE a Leges l Figure 2 10 Typical Bridging Arrangement A bridging station user is able to originate calls from BA buttons and can answer calls for the principal The bridging user can also enter existing calls on bridged appearances by simply going off hook on the BA button unless Exclusion has been activated or the maximum of five active parties on a call has been reached 2 67 FEATURES AND SERVICES The user active on a BA button can use many features with the bridged call operation is no different from calls on other buttons For example Hold Conference and Transfer can be used from a BA button just as they would be used from an SA button Calling
314. ermits calls to any other terminal in the pickup group to be answered by dialing the group call pickup code With Pickup users do not have to leave their phone to answer other s calls This feature is especially useful for local coverage in group offices not supported by secretarial service and equipped with economical single line phones When alternate resources are not available to handle an incoming call System 25 provides for attendant handling of the call utilizing camp on redirection and or message service e Camp On allows the attendant to extend an outside call to a busy station A burst of tone is heard at the called station to notify the user of the camped on call The caller is placed on hold and hears music on hold if available When the user hangs up the camped on call begins ringing immediately The Return Coverage on Busy feature returns unanswered camped on calls to the attendant for service after a specified interval e Return Coverage on Don t Answer returns unanswered attendant extended calls for additional service redirection messaging e Messaging Service supports activation of a light emitting diode LED at the called station to indicate that the attendant message desk or another station has a message for the user Special arrangements are needed to handle incoming calls during periods when the normal staff is not available for example at night and on weekends System 25 s Night Service feature allows on duty
315. ers such as the HOLADAY HI 3001 meter or Model EFS 1 meter manufactured by Instruments for Industry Inc The field strength produced by radio transmitters can be estimated by dividing the square root of the emitted power in kilowatts by the distance from the antenna in kilometers This yields the approximate field strength in volts per meter and is relatively accurate for distances greater than about half a wavelength 150 meters for a frequency of 1000 KHz Trademark of Holaday Industries 6 5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS AC Power Requirements Each System 25 cabinet requires 500 Watts at 115V ac maximum The System 25 power service must be a dedicated branch circuit with no other equipment served see The customer should provide a load center of appropriate current rating ITE EQ4 typical equipped with 120V ac 15 ampere AMP single pole magnetic circuit breaker s ITE QP1 BO15 typical Each breaker is to protect 2 associated wall mounted 115 V ac 15 AMP receptacles HUBBELL 5262 typical Grounding of this load center is to be provided by a Green Wire ground extended from the grounding electrode conductor at the AC service entrance to the load center The following materials are required e Sing e Cabinet System 1 15 AMP 3 Wire Dedicated Branch Service 1 4 RACO 230 or Equiv 1 4 Cover RACO 807 or Equiv 1 Ground Bar Square D PK9GTA or Equiv 2 Recpt Hubbell 526215 or Equiv
316. es 1 Set by switches on Tie Trunk CP Figure 3 1 6 2 Set by System Administration of Port Options Action 37 3 Requires a protection unit 3 29 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Tip Ring Line ZTN78 The Tip Ring Line Circuit Pack interfaces eight analog tip and ring voice terminal lines single line voice terminals and the TDM bus Figure 3 17 shows the Tip and Ring Line unique circuitry TN742 be used instead of the ZTN78 Tip Ring CP The TN742 supports up to five bridged single line voice terminals however only two can be off hook at one time The ZTN78 does not support bridged terminals In addition the TN742 supports out of building extended and off premises stations while the ZTN78 does not ZTN78 supports only a 1 2 Ringer Equivalency Number REN PORT CIRCUIT 0 ELECTRONIC HYBRID BATTERY FEED NPE 0 NPE 1 PORT ON BOARD CIRCUIT MICRO PROCESSOR TO ANALOG RINGING TIP RING APPLICATION TERMINALS CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY CONDITIONER Figure 3 17 Tip Ring Line ZTN78 Unique Circuitry eRinging Application Circuit This circuit receives ringing voltage from the power supply It monitors ringing voltage and current and generates signals to the on board microprocessor indicating zero ringing voltage and current It also detects when a terminal user has lifted the receiver during ringing preventing the application of ringing to the terminal s handset recei
317. es Park the call is parked on the Personal Dial Code PDC number of the principal station not of the bridging station If the parked call is not answered it will return on the principal s SA button 2 239 FEATURES AND SERVICES Callback Queuing Queued calls cannot be parked unless they are part of a conference Reorder tone is returned whenever illegal park is attempted but the queued call is not disconnected If parked conference members drop out leaving only a queued call it will be disconnected to prevent the illegal condition of a single queued call being parked Calling Restrictions lf the parking station is outward restricted or toll restricted the recall dial tone following a successful park cannot be used to avoid the restriction Conference Parked conference calls do not return to the parking voice terminal They remain parked Park may be used to place a conference on hold if it contains fewer than five parties Display When a parked call returns to a display station screen 1 contains redirection symbol P PARK RTN screen 2 contains calling party identification Exclusion A call cannot be parked and a parked call cannot be answered if the Exclusion feature is invoked on that call Intercept Treatment With Reorder Tone An unsuccessful attempt to park a call due to misdialing or attempting to park more than one call at a voice terminal results in Reorder Tone Music On Hold Parked calls except confe
318. es in subpattern are busy a CO overflow flag when set allows the call to be routed via the local CO facility otherwise the call will queue on the first route in the subpattern Administrable Start and Stop times Hour and Minute for Routing Subpattern A specify when Subpattern A should be used to route calls Subpattern B is used to route calls at all other times Each route is specified by its trunk group facility access code or Virtual Facility code and an associated FRL An FRL is typically lower for the first route in a subpattern and increases with each additional route in the pattern A terminal s FRL must be equal to or greater than the route FRL for the route to be selected The system first checks the Route 1 for an available trunk on which to route the call If the route is busy Route 2 is checked then Route 3 if required if all routes in the subpattern are busy and the CO overflow flag is set the voice terminal FRL is checked against an associated Overflow FRL before routing the call 2 59 FEATURES AND SERVICES If all routes in a subpattern are busy and the CO Overflow flag is not set or all CO trunks are busy the call returns to the first route in the subpattern and may be queued if the station permits access to the first route via the Callback Queuing feature A route 1 must be specified in the subpattern for a call to queue If it is not callers receive Reorder Tone and will not be able to queue
319. es interact with Pooled Facility Direct Access Automatic Route Selection ARS Multiline voice terminal users who have pressed FACILITY to activate busy to idle reminder must wait until all queued ARS users have been serviced Facility Access Restriction see Calling Restrictions A trunk group may be reserved for a group of users by dial access restricting the trunks In this way only users who have a FACILITY button a Personal Line appearance or who use ARS can use the trunks Line Selection Prime Line Preference Pressing a FACILITY button to invoke the busy to idle reminder overrides Prime Line Preference Toll Restriction see Calling Restrictions Toll restricted voice terminals receive standard toll restriction treatment on all FACILITY buttons 2 249 FEATURES AND SERVICES Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port e Assign Direct Facility Access FACILITY buttons Trunks e Assign Facility Access Codes 2 250 Power Failure Transfer PFT Power Failure Transfer PFT Description This feature provides service to and from the CO for a limited number of prearranged single line voice terminals during a commercial power failure or when voltage drops below 90 volts for longer than 250 milliseconds and during other service interruptions Any loop start or ground start trunk may be arranged to terminate at a specific station on a one to one basis When a failure occurs these prearranged connections
320. es or no default no 2 90 Call Management System CMS Call Management System CMS Description The Call Management System CMS is an automatic call distributor that directs specified incoming calls to assigned agents for handling It also provides reports of CMS call traffic and agent performance The CMS has options and parameters that allow the system to be tailored to the individual needs of specific businesses The CMS consists of software a personal computer PC with a CMS interface card voice announcement units VAUs and a printer In a System 25 with CMS some incoming trunks are assigned as CMS trunks lines The CMS lines are organized into line groups according to the types of calls that are expected to be received One line group for example might carry calls made to a service department number while another group might be assigned to a sales department CMS agents are organized into teams called splits Members of a particular split generally answer one type of call Each agent split is assigned to answer calls for one or more line groups Each line group must be assigned a main split and may also be assigned a secondary split for high traffic period backup Routing of calls to the secondary split is called intraflow System 25 provides a new button feature Agent Status for CMS that is composed of four button sub types One sub type will be used for the CMS PC The remaining three are used on CMS
321. esmen on the road and people at small branch offices Stations receiving Remote Access calls can treat them like any other kind of incoming call and use features such as Pickup and Forwarding Features requiring recall dial tone for example Park and Transfer cannot be used by Remote Access callers Interactions The following features interact with Remote Access Account Code Entry This feature cannot be used by Remote Access callers Call Accountability This feature cannot be used by Remote Access callers Calling Restrictions A barrier code class of restriction COR has the same parameters as the class of service permissions associated with stations A system wide default COR must be administered for use if barrier codes are disabled Barrier code CORs override the default COR Conference This feature cannot be used by Remote Access callers Display Since remote access calls are all incoming trunk calls the display at the receiving station has the standard reception of outside calls format The receiving station has no special indication that this is a remote access call A display set user who bridges onto a Personal Line appearance where a remote access call is active will have the display updated for conference status Direct Group Calling DGC Remote Access callers cannot attempt to log in or out of a DGC group Following This feature cannot be used by Remote Access callers Forwarding Remote Access calls t
322. ess 2 247 Direct Access 2 249 Pooled Modem TN758 Pooling Modem 2 219 INDEX Port Position Busy Attendant 2 43 _ DTAC SLAC Power Equipment Optional Failure Transfer PET Requirements Supply 4 58 Supply KS 22911 Supply Uninterruptible Unit 85B1 Preference Prime Line Ringing Line 2 204 Preindication Data Call Price Element Codes PECs Prime Line Preference 2 204 Priority Ringing Protection Requirements Lightning Preelection Principal Station Program Programmable Feature Buttons Q R Real Time Constraints Recall2 261 References Ea HERO Manual Installation and Maintenance vao New Capabilities Manual 8 2 ei J Reference Manual Terminal Operations Manua User Guides 700 8 3 1 Release Attendant Forced Reminder Busy to idle 10 7 INDEX Reminder Single ring 2 160 Remote Access 2 262 Administration InterfaceL2 266 F Initialization and Maintenance Servicel 2 267 Remotely Powered Voice Terminal Connections 4 71 Reorder Tone 2 94 0 Reorder Tone Intercept Treatment With 2 796 Repertory Dialing 2 268 Numbers Special Characters 2 256 Required Circuit Packs Requirements ir Lightning Protection 6 8 J Out et Building Wiring 6 9 Table top Space 6 Temperature and Humidit Tone
323. ess one of the following actions occur The display terminal user presses another call appearance button The user presses another button that causes a system action and or has display support The call disconnects user leaves Normal Mode The user changes switchhook status from off hook to on hook or vice versa A call arrives while Automatic Incoming Call Identification is active 2 151 FEATURES AND SERVICES Special Descriptors The descriptors summarized in Table 2 J appear on displays to provide special information about calls These symbols consist of typographical characters contents of Screen 1 Table 2 J Special upper case and lower case letters and other Descriptors on Screen 2 must be interpreted with respect to the Descriptors Location Description Meaning Screen 1 Position 1 Screen 1 Positions 15 and 16 If position 15 is blank check for one of the descriptors in next block Screen 1 Position 16 0 9 or for 10 or more 1 9 or for 10 or more Screen 2 Position 1 Screen 2 Position 16 9 2 152 Covered Redirected Call more Information on Screen 2 Returning or Third Party Call more information on Screen 2 Call is forwarding from this terminal to an outside location Screen 2 blank Busy to Idle Reminder Screen 2 Blank Queued call Screen 2 blank unless more than 13 digits Transfer of a call to t
324. essing MESSAGE by the attendant or by another station with the Dial Access to Message Waiting Indicators feature The Message LED on single line terminals can be turned on or off by the attendant or by the user with the Dial Access feature Refer to the l Attendant Message Waiting feature description for additional information Coverage Message Waiting Allows a user providing Individual Coverage to control the Message LED on a covered or bridged voice terminal This feature also allows a bridging station user in Principal Bridging arrangement to control the principal s Message LED using the procedures described here A Coverage Message button COVER MSG at the covering station is used to display and control the status of the covered users Message LED The state of the COVER MSG LED reflects the state of the covered stations Message LED The covering user can turn on or off toggle the covered party s Message LED at any time during coverage or bridged call by pressing COVER MSG To turn on the covered user s Message LED when not on a coverage or bridged call the covering user may go off hook on a System Access button press COVER MSG and then dial the covered user The covered station s Message LED turns on if off and stays on if already on If the covering station then presses COVER MSG a second time before hanging up the Message LED will turn Off A covered party must dial the covering party to retrieve messages Multiline voice t
325. ession will begin in Expert Mode However calls from an AT amp T STARLAN NETWORK to System 25 will always begin a new session in Command Mode An alternative command gt can be used to guarantee entry into Expert Mode Conversely guaranteed entry into Command Mode can be accomplished with the command gt followed by RETURN These commands are especially useful for computer driven DLC endpoints that might otherwise have difficulty detecting whether a new session had been started in Expert Mode or Command Mode Making a Data Call To make a data call from the entry level see Figure 2 55 the user enters D following the System prompt and then the data endpoint number For example Command D9 5553822 Command on the above line is the default system prompt while in Expert Mode The user enters all data following the prompt 2 164 Expert Mode If the user enters D and then a RETURN the system will prompt for the data endpoint number as follows Command D DIAL The user must then enter the digits required to complete the call Activating the Third Party Call Setup Feature The following provides an abbreviated method of using the Third Party Call Setup feature while in the Expert Mode A complete description of this feature is provided later in this manual To activate the Third Party Call Setup feature and place a call the user enters numbers using the following format Command V Destination
326. et Adapters Note The 5026 unit provides HFAI service on the headset eS102A Speakerphone PEC 3163 HFU PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS 34 HANDSET WITH I USE AND STATUS LEDs TEST PROGRAM SWITCH ON SIDE SPEAKER RING VOLUME CONTROL ON SIDE MESSAGE SPEAKER CONFERENCE TRANSFER RECANE DROP 3 HOLD Figure 4 11 7305H02D Voice Terminal 34 Button Deluxe 4 31 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 7305H03B Voice Terminal BIS PEC 3162 BIS The 7305H03B voice terminal Figure 4 12 is available for general use and as a Direct Trunk Attendant Console It can be desk or wall mounted and is about 9 1 2 inches wide 5 1 4 inches high and 9 1 4 inches deep The set comes equipped with the following 4 32 Handset Touch Dial Pad not DTMF l Use and Status LEDs Test Program Switch two positions T for testing operation of LEDs and ringer P for programming feature buttons Built In Speakerphone BIS with Volume Control Built In HFAI Microphone Ringer Volume Control Nine Fixed Feature Buttons with status LED Conference Recall Drop Message Transfer Microphone Hold HFAI Speakerphone 34 Programmable Feature Buttons Only 12 have associated LEDs programmable buttons without LEDs should be used only for features that do not require 1 and Status indications For General Use All programmable default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 27 Send All
327. etup 2 322 Tie Trunk TN760B Preferred Signaling Tone Detector TN7488 Tones Toll Restriction 10 9 INDEX ir Connections Trunk Groups 2 334 Trunks gg 7 2 326 Trunk To Trunk Transfer 2 337 U Uninterruptible Power Supply 4 58 Unit Loads 5 6 S User Changeable Options 2 338 V Virtual Facilities 2 344 VMS Announcement Service Automated Attendant Service Call Coverage Service 2 349 Message Drop Service 2 349 Voice Service 2349 Voice Terminal 2500 Series Adjuncts Adjunct Connection information 4 52 Adjunct Power Supplies 4 53 o Adjuncts 2 349 Voice Mail Service Voice Message System Multiline Cable Distance Limitations 5 8 Multiline Connections 4 51 10 10 Voice Terminal Continued Single Line Cable Dista Single Line Connections 4 With Speakerphone or Headset Adjunct 10 Button MET Set 2991C D05 10 Button MET Set With BIS_ 2 4 12 Button MET M 2500 4 16 j 2526BMWG 420 5 500 Serie 7302H01D 5 Button 7303 H01D 10 Button 7305 H01D 34 Button 7305H02D 34 Button D 7305H03B 7305H04C BIS With Displ 7309H01B HFAI 7313H01A BIS 10 7314H01A BIS 22 7316H01A BIS 34 Waiting Calll2 95 Wal Space Requirements 6 4 1 Weatherproof Voice Terminall4 79 Wiring Options 459 7 7 7
328. forwarding station after the administered number of rings if the forwarding station has Coverage the call redirects A call forwarded to a busy inside station rings the forwarding station immediately the call returns ringback to the caller unless the caller has automatic Callback Queuing or Call Waiting is administered at the forwarded to station 2 174 Forwarding Forwarding Calls to Locations Outside System 25 The user activates Forwarding to an outside station in one of the following ways dialing feature access code 70 the single digit ARS access code and the forward to number then hanging up after hearing confirmation tone eBy dialing feature access code 70 a pooled facility trunk access code and the forward to number then hanging up after hearing confirmation tone The forward to numbers for outside calls must be dialed in one of the following ways e7 digits 1 plus 7 digits 10 digits or 1 plus 10 digits eA Speed Dialing code such as 20 adding at the end of a code of more than 4 digits and less than 10 digits e By letting the system time out after entering a code of more than 4 digits and less than 10 digits If the forwarding activation attempt is unsuccessful the user hears reorder tone Forwarding to an outside station is deactivated by signing in at the user s own the forwarding station inside System 25 The procedure consists of dialing and then the user s PDC t
329. g button and then dialing the station Confirmation tone is returned and the user s Message LED will turn on To turn it off press the button again Considerations This feature allows the attendant to notify stations that a message is available for them This feature is not the same as the Station To Station Message Waiting or the Coverage Message Waiting features Refer to the feature description for a summary of all system Messaging Services Interactions The following features interact with Attendant Message Waiting Callback Queuing An attendant active on a queued inside call can toggle the Message LED of the queued for station by pressing the Attendant Message Waiting button Conference Pressing ATT MSG while on a conference call will be ignored 2 41 FEATURES AND SERVICES Coverage Calls The attendant can light the Message LED of the covered station when receiving a coverage call for the station Hands Free Answer On Intercom lf the attendant lights the Message LED on a voice terminal with AUTO ANS button active the auto answer function will turn off allowing subsequent calls to receive coverage as assigned Administration Requirements Attendant Console Voice Terminal Port ATT MSG button is defaulted and fixed on SLACs it is defaulted on DTACs but can be assigned to any programmable button Hardware Requirements Stations must have a Message indicator not assignable 2 42 Attendant Posi
330. g call will not be answered if user goes off hook Off Facility that will be accessed upon going off hook Broken Flutter Facility is being transferred or conference Considerations Line Status and l Use indications provide the user with visible indications of the status of the lines and features 2 207 FEATURES AND SERVICES Interactions The following features interact with Line Status and l Use Indications Attendant Console Direct Trunk When a line that appears at both the attendant position and a multiline voice terminal is placed on hold by the terminal user the green status LED winks at the terminal but lights steadily on the Attendant Console When the line is placed on hold by the attendant the green status LED winks on the console and on voice terminals on which it appears Bridging of System Access Buttons The meanings of green line status red indications on Bridged Access button are the same as for System Access buttons Personal Lines Trunk to trunk transfers will cause the affected PERS LINE buttons on the DTAC to wink 2 208 Local Display Local Display Description This feature allows the user of a display equipped voice terminal to operate the Time Timer circuit built into the display module The voice terminal must be in the Local Mode for use of Local Display The Timer has Set Start Fwd Forward Stop Rev Reverse Time Timer and Exit buttons to control the visi
331. g line can be added to a conference and counts as one of the conferees A queued or Call Waiting call can be added to a conference and counts as two conferees until it is completed when completed it counts as one conferee 2 103 FEATURES AND SERVICES Interactions The following features interact with Conference Account Code Entry Forced FACE Calls can be conference in both directions between a FACE restricted station and a non FACE station Account Code Entry Optional more than one user attempts to associate an account code with a Conference Call the first to activate the feature will prevail Attendant Message Waiting Pressing the Attendant Message Waiting ATT MSG button while on a conference call will be ignored Bridging of System Access Buttons A station user can make conference calls on Bridged Access BA buttons using the normal conference feature operations When a call is held for conference by pressing the CONFERENCE button an idle System Access SA button or an idle SA Originate Only button if available is automatically selected by the system for placing the new call If neither of these button types is idle the user can manually select a BA button or any other call appearance button on which to place the new call While a bridging station or principal is in the process of setting up a conference call the green status LED of the held call s BA button or SA button has a broken flutter indication Other
332. g of Product Element Codes PECs Apparatus Codes and Comcodes is provided in Section 7 Parts Information System Cabinets J58901A1 L4 The system can consist of one two or three cabinets Each cabinet contains its own power supply and cooling system A CP carrier frame is integrated into each cabinet Depending on the circuit pack complement the cabinet circuit pack configuration is as follows eCabinet 1 always required Contains the CPU MEM CP and the Service Circuit of the system and can also contain up to ten port CPs eCabinet 2 or 3 optional Provides mounting for up to 12 port CPs each The CPs receive power control signals and data via the backplane bus of the carrier and associated 25 pair connector interfaces In multiple cabinet systems the backplane buses are linked with a bus extender cable J58901A4 L3 4 1 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION The cabinets have a brown front cover with beige top and sides The front cover has a system identification stripe across the top The top has four indentations to facilitate the stacking of cabinets Each cabinet is constructed of sheet metal and is 13 inches high 17 inches wide and 21 inches deep and weighs about 75 pounds fully loaded 3 cabinet system occupies a vertical space of about 40 inches It is recommended that the cabinets be placed on a desk or table top They must not be placed on a floor where cleaning solutions and dirt can get into them Refer to Secti
333. g touch tone signals to the far end switch Programming Procedures Program mode may be entered either of the following methods eAt any voice terminal by dialing the programming access code 4 eAt terminals equipped with a Test Program switch by moving the switch to position P this method cannot be used at Switched Loop Attendant Consoles SLACs If the code is used to enter program mode the terminal remains in program mode until the user goes on hook or a timeout occurs If the switch is used to enter program mode the terminal remains in program mode until the switch is returned to the midpoint between P and T the system will send a single ring reminder every 60 seconds until the switch is repositioned Voice terminals equipped with a display enhance theprogramming procedure by displaying a prompt on the screen and then the digits as theyare dialed Refer to Interactions for additional information Programming a number always removes the number that was previously stored in the same location If a user wants to remove an old number and not replace it with a new one Step 3 in both of the following procedures should be skipped 2 257 FEATURES AND SERVICES To Program a Number by Using the Code 1 2 To P 1 2 3 4 2 258 Lift the handset and listen for dial tone Dial 4 to enter the Program mode Dial the number you want to program Either Press the FLEX DSS or REP DIAL button or
334. ge Transfer When a covering station transfers a covered call to another station the call will no longer appear at the covering station s Cover button or at the covered multiline station 2 115 FEATURES AND SERVICES Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port e Individual Coverage button button function 12 Individual Coverage PDC 1 9999 Allow Ring yes or no 2 116 Data Call Setup Data Call Setup This feature allows a user to originate calls from a data terminal or a voice terminal System 25 provides three methods of data calling e Dialing from a data terminal which is described in the Data Terminal Dialing feature description e Setting up data calls from a voice terminal which is described in the Transfer to Data feature description eSetting up data calls or voice calls for another terminal from a data terminal which is described in the Third Party Call Setup feature description 2 117 FEATURES AND SERVICES Data Services Overview System 25 s data features provide switched data transmission at up to 19 200 bps RS 232 interface and 212A modem compatible conversion resource capable of handling data at 300 and 1200 bps The system provides switched connections between data endpoints These endpoints include data terminals personal computers multiport computers and modems Data endpoints are either digital data endpoints or analog data endpoints Analog endpoin
335. gital tape unit the dial plan system administration and system maintenance A general discussion of data topics is also provided The feature descriptions are arranged in alphabetical order regardless of the feature group to which they belong Information for each feature is presented under one or more of the following five subheadings Description Considerations Interactions Administration Requirements and Hardware Requirements Headings that are not applicable are omitted e Description Defines the feature describes what it does for the user and how it is used e Considerations Discusses the applications and benefits of the feature followed by feature parameters and factors to be considered when the feature is used e Interactions Lists and briefly describes other features that can affect the feature being described Interacting features are those that Depend on each other One of the features must be provided if the other one is Cannot coexist One of the features cannot be provided if the other one is Affect each other The operation of one feature modifies or is modified by the operation of the other Enhance each other The features in combination provide improved service to the user e Administration Requirements States whether or not administration is required and lists items requiring administration Hardware Requirements Lists any additional hardware needed to use the featur
336. group assignment When incoming call is ringing at a DGC group the status LED on the voice terminal button appearance lights steadily indicating that the line is busy If the call goes unanswered for a pre determined number of rings and no delay announcement is provided ringing will be transferred to all button appearances of the line and the status LED will flash Pickup A DGC group member can also be a member of a Pickup group Remote Access Remote Access callers cannot log into or out of a DGC group Station Message Detail Recording SMDR For an incoming call to a DGC group that was connected to an announcement but was never answered 0 will be reported in the STN field of the call record If the call was answered by a station after receiving the announcement that station will be listed in the STN field Tie Trunks Calls to a busy DGC group via tie trunks will be queued and will receive a delay announcement if available Transfer Internal stations can transfer outside trunk calls to a busy DGC group The transferred call will be treated as any other trunk call to a busy DGC group The transferring party will hear Busy tone but the transfer will complete The call will queue and the calling party will receive delay announcement if available Administration Requirements Trunk Ports eAssign trunks to DGC Group eAssign trunks to ring in SLAC queue System eAssign number of rings before DGC calls are t
337. group do not receive coverage Instead after a predefine number of rings a trunk call will be transferred to a delay announcement if provided or ringing will be transferred to all button appearances of the line and the SLAC queue if trunk has ringing enabled Display A logged in Direct Group Calling DGC group member can view the number of calls waiting to be serviced by the group The display is continuously updated for all members A digit 0 through 9 or for 10 or more appears in position 16 DGC queue values are not displayed at a SLAC assigned to a DGC group the attendant s display always contains the number of calls waiting in the attendant queue Direct Group Calling Delay Announcement Provides a recorded announcement to an outside trunk caller who has been placed in queue for a DGC group Direct Inward Dialing An incoming DID call may match a DGC group access code Direct Station Selection DSS A DSS button can be assigned to a DGC group The associated LED lights steadily when all stations in the group are busy Modem Pooling Modem Pooling supports calls to data endpoints that are part of a DGC group While an incoming data call is in a DGC group queue the caller receives ringing The conversion resource is inserted if the call is completed to a digital endpoint 2 137 FEATURES AND SERVICES Personal Lines An outside line directed to a DGC group can be assigned button appearances in addition to the DGC
338. gure 4 35 Typical MADU Connections 4 74 Figure 4 36 Z3A1 2 4 ADU Local Power Connections 4 75 Tables Table 4 A Total Port Circuit Packs Per System Table 4 System Circuit Packs Table 4 Tone Detector Requirements Table 4 D Summary of Voice Terminals Table 4 E 2500 Series Voice Terminal Adjuncts Table 4 F Supplemental Voice Terminal Power Supplies Table 4 Asynchronous Data Units HARDWARE DESCRIPTION HARDWARE DESCRIPTION This Section provides descriptions of System 25 hardware components and their functions The hardware is covered under the following major headings System Cabinets Includes circuit pack CP carriers power supplies wiring and cooling equipment e Circuit Packs Includes detailed information on CPs Terminal Equipment Equipment that can be connected to voice or data station ports Peripheral Equipment Equipment that can be connected to the CPU MEM CP Auxiliary Equipment Service and feature related supporting equipment Connectivity Equipment and arrangements for interconnecting the various elements of System 25 hardware Note Equipment that is directly associated with a specific feature or service covered in is also described there such equipment is noted in this Hardware Description section with a reference to the appropriate heading in All system hardware except Cabinet 1 equipped with a CPU MEM Service Circuit and associated cables is optional A listin
339. h Data Terminal Equipment DTE DTE refers to a specific RS 232C connector termination designed to connect directly to a DCE type connection Typically associated with video display terminals printers and computers which either originate or terminate a data transmission path Data Terminals Refers to RS 232C compatible Data Terminal Equipment GLOSSARY Delay Dial Tie Trunk After a request for service called a seizure is detected on an incoming trunk the system sends a momentary signal followed by a steady tone over the trunk This informs the calling party that dialing can start This type of trunk allows dialing directly into the system That is the digits are received as they are dialed Digital Data Endpoints In System 25 digital data endpoints include any digital device providing a RS 232G connection interface to the switch The connection is via Asynchronous Data Units ADUs to the switch Direct Extension Selector DXS Console An option at the attendant console that allows an attendant direct access to voice terminals by pressing a Group Select button and a DXS button EIA Electronics Industries Association Emergency Transfer Unit Provides direct connection of designated Power Failure Transfer PFT registered voice terminals to the CO during a power failure or other service interruption Erlang A traffic measuring unit that expresses the load of one or more traffic handling devices 36 CCS equals 1 erla
340. hannel This channel allows the on board microprocessor to send messages to the port circuit microprocessor specifying call startup information option settings information requests various test modes and call termination FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION information It also allows the port circuit microprocessor to inform the on board microprocessor of various port circuit status information The DUCK and TRIC interface l channel information between the port circuit and the remote data module The microprocessor controls the operation of the DUCK and the TRIC by programming their internal registers The DUCK and TRIC together recreate the clock and serial data stream from the remote data module and process an on board clock and serial data stream for delivery to the remote data module Control information handshaking and RS 232 control leads is passed between the port circuit microprocessor and the remote data module by the TRIC The USART interfaces the serial data stream of the DUCK to the conversion microprocessor The USART can be programmed by the microprocessor to operate synchronously or asynchronously The USART also does the following tasks for the port circuit microprocessor Appends start and stop bits to parallel data received from the microprocessor in the asynchronous mode Converts serial data received from the DUCK to parallel data Buffers data in both directions Detects and generates break characters The DSP pr
341. he Special Hold status at the transferring voice terminal until answered and may be reentered if the call is not answered Reentering the call will automatically terminate the transfer attempt Single line voice terminal users may transfer calls by flashing the switchhook which puts the caller on hold listening for Recall Dial tone dialing the second party and going on hook either immediately or after announcing the call to the second pariy A call may also be transferred by setting up a conference and then hanging up Considerations Transfer provides a convenient way to redirect a call to another voice terminal Attendant assistance is not required and the caller does not have to redial While it is possible to transfer a call without announcement it is recommended that call transfers be announced Interactions The following features interact with Transfer Account Code Entry Forced FACE Calls can be transferred in both directions between a FACE restricted station and a non FACE station Account Code Entry Optional A user may transfer a call to another user then instead of hanging up enter an account code Subsequent account code entries will be ignored Attendant Console In most cases the attendant should not use this feature to extend incoming calls but should use the Start button or Selector Console instead The exception to this rule occurs if a trunk to trunk transfer is desired see below 2 329 FEATURES AND S
342. he above menu to terminate the data call and return to idle mode If a data call is not answered the caller must disconnect by sending a Break 2 97 FEATURES AND SERVICES lt Voice call gt The data terminal user can originate a call for an on premises source voice or data terminal to a remote terminal by selecting lt Voice call gt and dialing the required digits Refer to the Third Party Call Setup feature description for a complete description of this feature lt Options gt If the Command Mode menu item lt Options gt is chosen the terminal displays the data port s administered options System default values for each option are also shown The displa shown below is similar to what is actually presented on the screen See Tables 2 and H for additional information on options OPTIONS CURRENT DEFAULT Speed highest 9600 19200 Auto Parity Even Even Mismatch Yes No Local Echo Yes Yes Answer Text Yes Yes Connect Indication Yes Yes Recall Sequence Br Br Br Br lt exit gt Change options lt View options gt The System Administrator can change options or can authorize data terminal users to change their own options Selection of lt Change options gt from the sub menu shown above allows the data terminal user to change the values the CURRENT column Refer to the feature description for complete information on this feature lt Hangup gt The lt Hangup gt option can be used to terminate a co
343. he call has gone to coverage Night Service Directed Night Service calls do not receive coverage Personal Line Access All outside lines directed to a DGC group can be assigned to button appearances in addition to the DGC assignment If the outside lines appear at stations that also have DGC coverage by the same group then the operation is as follows When an incoming call is ringing in the DGC group the status LEDs on the appearance buttons light steadily indicating that the line is busy If the call goes unanswered after a system specified number of rings then a delay announcement is provided The caller is subsequently put on hold and receives music if available If the system is not equipped with a delay announcement the call begins to ring at all line appearances after the system specified number of rings If the outside lines are not directed to a DGC group but are provided DGC Group Coverage the feature operation is the same as for incoming calls on SA keys except that the call appearance remains accessible at the covered station after being directed to a DGC Coverage Group member Pickup A DGC Coverage Group member can also be in a Pickup group Station Hunting Calls directed to a DGC Coverage Group will not hunt Trunk Groups Trunks can be directly assigned to DGC groups that also act as coverage group receivers Among tie trunks only automatic incoming tie trunks can be translated as directed to a DGC Group 2 112 Co
344. he calls In noisy environment for example NS via external alerting devices may not be practical Directed NS provides a solution to the noise problem Also Personal Line calls to executives can receive special handling by providing Directed NS Calls continue to ring at the attendant position or Personal Line appearances when NS is activated They also ring the external alert TAAS or Directed NS station Trunk Answer from Any Station provides the capability for any user to answer NS calls Interactions The following features interact with Night Service DID Trunks DID trunks are not assignable to NS A DID call will ring at the appropriate station whether NS is activated or not Following Forwarding Directed night service calls will not be given following orforwarding treatment if the PDC is signed in at another station Remote Access Remote Access trunks dedicated or shared cannot be given Directed or TAAS Night Service treatment 2 227 FEATURES AND SERVICES Tie Trunks Dial in Tie Trunks cannot be given night service treatment Administration Requirements Trunk Ports eAssign trunk Class of Service with Night Service 8 15 Note Remote Access trunk must not be administered for either form of Night Service treatment eAssign Directed Night Service trunk yes or no default yes Voice Terminal Port e Directed NS Add Night Service trunk number to station list eAssign External Alert for TAAS NS Attend
345. he deluxe SLAC each of the programmable buttons is equipped with an l use LED and status LED On the basic SLAC the buttons do not have LEDs Account Code Entry Exclusion Agent Status for CMS Flex DSS Auto Answer Leave Word Calling Auto Intercom Manual Signaling Call Next Direct Facility Access Repertory Dialing Direct Station Selection DSS Station to Station Message Waiting Directory Transfer to Data Flex DSS and Repertory Dialing can be programmed with dialable numbers by the attendant When a call is placed using a Flex DSS button or a Repertory Dial button one of the five switched loops is automatically selected for routing the call to the switch 2 26 Attendant Console Switched Loop Display Figure 2 4 The SLAC contains an alphanumeric call information display This module is built into the top of the console It contains a 16 character 5x7 dot matrix liquid crystal display timer controls and a thumbwheel Contrast adjustment Timer functions are available only when the attendant presses the Local button The Time Timer Exit button allows the user to select ordinary clock calendar display or a timer In the Time mode Set Fwd and Rev used to set the clock In Timer mode Start and Stop are used to time events The primary purpose of the console display is to provide the attendant with descriptive information about incoming and outgoing calls This information includes extension numbers and associated names tr
346. he same SA button where the call to the queued for station was originally placed the winking status LED of the button changes to flashing The on hook station continues to get priority ringing until the callback is answered or until the administered number of callback rings has been reached When the original calling station answers the callback dequeuing tone is heard this indicates that the queued for station will now be rung The calling user hears ringback until the queued for station answers An off hook single line set cannot receive callback until it is on hook again If a multiline set is off hook and active on another call when callback arrives it receives one cycle of priority ringing Administration sets the maximum number of callback attempts and the number of rings per attempt Each time a callback attempt for a given call is not answered it is counted against the assigned number If the last allowed callback goes unanswered the system cancels the queued call If a queued for station becomes busy during callback and the calling station answers queuing tone is heard not dequeuing this callback attempt does not count against the administered number Another special situation exists when a multiline station fails to answer a callback before ringing stops and the queued for station remains idle during the interval before another attempt The multiline station can go off hook between callback attempts press the queued button and ri
347. he sanity status of the DSPs of the port circuit Tone Detector TN748B The Tone Detector Circuit Pack provides four touch tone receivers and two general purpose tone receivers that detect appropriate system and network tones on the TDM bus The Tone Detector CP consists of the same common circuitry as the intelligent port circuits plus the unique circuits shown in Figure 3 19 The system can have a maximum of two Tone Detector CPs PORT CIRCUIT 0 TDM as LEADS E PORT CIRCUIT 1 2 TOUCH TONE s lt PORTS PORI CIRCUIT lt 4 a PORT CIRCUIT c 5 a ra S ON BOARD FACK lt nICRO 1 0 E PROCESSOR CIRCUIT PORT CIRCUIT GENERAL 2 PURPOSE SANITY TONE LEDS CHECK PORT CIRCUIT DETECTOR YELLOW CIRCUIT 6 PORTS Figure 3 19 Tone Detector TN748B ePort and Sanity Check Circuit This circuit interfaces the on board microprocessor to the port circuits and checks the sanity status of the port circuits Digital Signal Processors DSPs 3 34 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ePort Circuits There are eight port circuits Six port circuits are connected to Network Processing Elements NPEs Port circuits 0 1 4 and 5 are DTMF tone detector ports Each of the six port circuits has an associated Digital Signal Processor DSP NPE to DSP interface circuitry a DSP restart circuit and an interrupt filter Port circuits 2 and 6 are general pur
348. hese devices include a 80186 microprocessor 82586 coprocessor four Octal Asynchronous Terminal Mode 2 to EIA Asynchronous LSI OATMEAL devices and a logic sequencer The 80186 the 82586 and the logic sequencer PLS105N work together to add and delete the protocol used by the Local Area Network LAN while the 80186 and the OATMEALS work together to add and delete the protocol used by the PBX The ZTN84 can support up to four circuit switch connections between the Private Branch Exchange PBX and the Local Area Network LAN this capability is provided by the four OATMEALS and the NPE the latter being a four channel device In providing a connection between the PBX and the LAN capabilities such as file sharing printer services connections to hosts and modem pooling may be accessible across systems The OATMEAL devices on the ZTN84 are used in such a way as to support asynchronous data communication at any of the standard rates ranging from 300 bps to 19 2 Kbps The asynchronous protocol that is used is a subset of Digital Communications Protocol DCP Mode 2 as only 4 channel information is transmitted where the data is formatted in High Level Data Link Control HDLC frames The ZTN84 has been designed with a hardware interface that allows the CP to be connected to a STARLAN NETWORK as an OUT connection This can be connected to a STARLAN NETWORK Extension Unit NEU IN connection in a star configuration The design of the ZTN8
349. hese tones in 24 different addresses The counter under control of the tone clock causes the DSP to transmit one sample of each tone every 8 kHz The counter is synchronized to the TDM bus and is offset to provide delay needed for access time e Time Slot Table and Counter The time slot table consists of a dual port time slot table RAM and a counter The dual port RAM DPRAM contains 256 different addresses These addresses correspond to the time slots on the TDM bus The counter sequences through the time slot table addresses in the dual port RAM and causes the proper tone s to be output by the dual port tone RAM on TDM bus time slots e Tone Detector Ports The Service Circuit CP provides four Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF detector port circuit interfaces via the TDM bus Each port circuit is connected to an NPE serial input and output Ports 0 1 2 and 3 are DTMF tone detectors with NPE loop around paths The four port circuits contain a DSP NPE to DSP interface circuitry a DSP restart circuit and an interrupt generator One DSP implements two tone receivers The TDM bus signals are connected to the DSP in serial form from the NPEs by the DSP interface circuit The DSP controls the output clocking of the NPE The system framing signal is synchronized and connects to the DSP 3 33 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ePort and Sanity Check Circuit This circuit interfaces the on board microprocessor to the port circuits and checks t
350. his terminal is in progress Screen 2 blank Conference or bridging in progress with n active parties non SLAC stations only Call has gone from this terminal to coverage displayed only while the call appearance remains on set Number of calls in DGC queue displayed only to logged in DGC members Number of calls in SLAC queue displayed only to SLAC attendants Continuation of digit string from Screen 1 Third party call setup Covered or called party is busy Covered or called party does not answer Following forwarded calls DGC call Night service call Picked up call or returning parked call Covered party activated Send AH Calls Call not signed in FPDC SLAC only Display Standard Call Displays The following basic displays illustrate the arrangement of information on the screen s for some of the most common types of calls e Origination or Reception of Inside Calls When a display set user places or receives an inside call the other party s extension number appears in positions 1 4 and name if administered in positions 6 14 Queue information appears in position 16 this field applies only to SLAC operations and DGC queues but is reserved on all displays Screen 1 307 Martin H e Origination of Outside Calls When a display set user places a call to an outside station the dialed digits appear in positions 1 14 on Screen 1 If the outside number has more than 14 digits the continuation descriptor
351. hree of the eight trunk port appearances are wired straight through the ETU to the CO and are not switched Trunk ports connected by legs 2 and 3 of the splitter cable are wired directly to the TAE Block 2 252 Power Failure Transfer PFT AT amp T 108 EMERGENCY TRANSFER UNIT LINE SWITCH TRUNK surrcu CADDITIONAL CPU ETU F R PROPER OPERATION THIS UNIT MUST BE GROUNDED Figure 2 31 10B Emergency Transfer Unit ETU 2 253 FEATURES AND SERVICES SYSTEM 25 CABINET ETU ETU TO SWITCH ETU TO TRUNK co CENTRAL OFFICE CALL 25 PAIR PROCESSOR CPU TO ADDITIONAL ETUs ADDITIONAL OCTOPUS NUTS 2 CABLE 25 PAIR STATION PORT PART OF SIP UP TO FIVE FAILURE TRANSFER PFT STATIONS REGISTERED SINGLE LINE a ETU CONNECTIONS DASHED LINES NORMAL OPERATION NO PFT TRUNK SUPPORTS STANDARD CO CALLS ETU CENTRAL OFFICE 48V REMOVED TO PFT STATION b ETU CONNECTIONS DASHED LINES ON PFT Figure 2 32 Emergency Transfer Unit Connections 2 254 Power Failure Transfer PFT 700 NETWORK INTERFACE BLOCK l DIGITAL SHITCH 88 OR 110 TYPE 66 TRUNK CP co TRUNK CP TRUNK CO TRUNK CP co TRUNK CP CO TRUNK CP ANALOG STATION CP NETWORK ACCESS C TRUNKS CE
352. ial tone and feeds the DTMF signal back to the user until the user releases the button The port circuit sends an up link message with each digit dialed to the OS that routes them to the Dial Plan Manager DPM The DPM collects the dialed digits and determines that the call is a station to station call When the DPM collects enough digits to identify an extension number it stops collecting digits Note If the extension number dialed is invalid the DPM sends a down link message to the port circuit instructing it to listen to time slot 07 Reorder Tone that is then heard by the user Go to Step 18 A down link message is sent to the originating port instructing it to listen to time slot 06 busy or 08 ringing aS appropriate Go to Step 18 for Busy Tone or an unanswered call Station Call Processing sends a down link message to the station port circuit pack associated with the called extension to turn on the ringer of the terminal and to flash the call appearance LED When the called party lifts the receiver the associated port circuit pack controller sends a off hook message to the OS as before The Station Call Processing task when it receives the message interprets the off hook message as an answer The task sends a down link message to the called port circuit to turn off the ringer and to change the flashing LED to steadily lighted Down link messages are sent to the port circuits assigning talk and listen time slots fo
353. iations that occur in an employee s work schedule The Individual Coverage feature is not administrable on the Switched Loop Attendant Console 2 114 Coverage Individual Interactions The following features interact with Individual Coverage Attendant Console Direct Trunk When a coverage call rings at a busy Attendant Console the attendant receives a single burst of ringing If the call is still unanswered when the attendant hangs up the other call the Attendant Console will resume ringing Bridging of System Access Buttons An incoming call is given individual coverage according to the coverage specified for the principal Calls appearing on Bridged Access buttons are not extended to the coverage specified for those bridging stations Callback Queuing Callback calls to the originator do not send ring signals to its coverage station If a call is queued for a station then the coverage station becomes available the call remains queued for the originally dialed station Coverage Group Unanswered calls to a station provided both Individual and Group Coverage will first ring at the Individual Coverage station and then after a second delay cycle and still unanswered will ring at the Group Coverage station Direct Station Selection DSS Calls placed via a DSS button to a user with Individual Coverage will receive coverage When a DSS button is used to activate the busy to idle reminder for the user the reminder is returned
354. ice Circuit ZTN85 the Tone Detector TN748B and the Pooled Modem TN758 Service Circuit ZTN85 The Service Circuit CP Figure 3 18 provides the clock signals of the system and generates and receives tones It provides four touch tone receivers generates all tones for the system and supplies the system clocks The ZTN85 can support up to 75 Dual Tone Muitifrequency DTMF dialers depending on call traffic the TN748Bs might be required in heavy traffic situations even with less than 75 DTMF dialers Each System 25 must contain one Service Circuit CP Power for the circuit pack 5 volts dc is provided on the backplane The Service Circuit has the following unique circuitry FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION e Bus Buffers There are four bus buffers on the circuit pack The clock driver and receive buffers interface three system clock signals 2 048 MHz 8 kHz and 160 kHz to the TDM bus Two buffers interface the system tones see between the TDM bus and the Service Circuit CP Music is not provided by the Service Circuit but can be provided via a port interface on a Tip Ring Line CP ZTN78 SAKI This circuit functions the same as in the SAKI in the common circuitry for the intelligent port circuits TONE GENERATOR DSP TIME SLOT TABLE DPRAM TONE TABLE DPRAM TOM BUS LEADS BUS BUFFER CIRCUIT PACK ADDRESS LEADS LEDs U CONTROL ADDRESS amp DATA BUS E TO
355. ictions of the bridging station not of the associated principal station Call Accountability The account code entry may be made before or after the Call Accountability entry Dial tone is returned to the user after either entry Callback Queuing An account code entered before queuing is saved for SMDR Conference Calls can be conference in both directions between a FACE restricted station and a non FACE station Display When a user activates the Forced Account Code Entry feature by dialing 0 the system displays the prompt ACCT As the user enters the account code the digits are displayed to the right of the prompt If the number of digits exceeds 9 the system automatically scrolls to Screen 2 the continuation character and the remaining digits appear on Screen 2 The prompt and digits remain displayed until one of the following occurs The user enters either or the administered number of code digits The user restarts the Account Code Entry feature by dialing O to correct an erroneous entry The system time out for Account Code Entry is reached The user selects another button that overwrites the display Forwarding Stations with FACE administered for all calls cannot forward calls to any outside numbers Stations with FACE administered for dial O or 1 calls can forward calls to any outside number except for dial O or 1 numbers Intercept Treatment with Reorder Tone The user receives reor
356. ide numbers this field contains the number of the outgoing trunk or trunk pool For incoming calls Personal Line calls and Remote Access calls to inside numbers the trunk number is identified If a virtual facility was used to complete the call the applicable Virtual Facility Code 190 199 is identified in this field eBlank Column 52 eSTN Column 53 56 Identifies the voice or data terminal responsible for the call If an account code is entered the voice terminal where the code is entered is reported If no account code is entered the terminal originating an outgoing call is identified or the last terminal connected to an incoming call is identified For an incoming call to a DGC group that is connected to an announcement but is never answered O will be recorded in the STN field If the call is answered by a station after receiving announcement the station answering the call will be recorded If an outgoing call is originated by a tandem tie trunk the tandem trunk s Facility Access Code FAC is recorded in this field If no FAC exists for this trunk then the 4 digit trunk number 9xxx will appear If an outgoing call is originated by a DID trunk the DID s 4 digit number is recorded in this field For a Remote Access call to an inside number the called party s number is shown if the call timed out to the attendant the attendant s number is shown If the remote caller calls an outside number the number of the incom
357. ies Table 4 F provides a summary of the supplemental power supplies and their applications Table 4 F Supplemental Voice Terminal Power Supplies POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT FOR USE WITH 2012D Transformer 18V ac ADUs ADUs except Za amp 5 Z3A5 MET sets that require local power 500A Headset Adapter 5101 Speakerphone KS 22911 L1 Power Selector Console supply Z3A5 ADU 7300 H Series sets that require local power 502A B Headset Adapter see note 5102 Speakerphone see note 9987 Power Unt Power Unit 18V ac 4A Speakerphone System Note This power supply is required whenever an adjunct Headset Adapter or Speakerphone is connected to a 22 or 34 button voice terminal Attendant Consoles System 25 can have one of the following attendant console configurations eOne or two Direct Trunk Attendant Consoles DTACs 34 Button Voice Terminals PEC 3162 417 3162 BIS or 3167 34B administered for attendant service Either or both positions can have a Direct Extension Selector Console associated with it or two Switched Loop Attendant Consoles SLACs 34 Button BIS Display Voice Terminals PEC 3162 DIS or 3167 DSB administered for attendant service Either or both positions can have a Direct Extension Selector Console associated with it Complete information on the Attendant Console features can be found in 4 53 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Asynchronous Data Units ADUs Asynchronous Data Unit
358. ified by using coverage group numbers 101 132 where coverage group 101 has group 1 as its receiver group coverage group 102 has DGC group 2 as its receiver group etc No button assignments are required Send ringing options on busy on no answer system wide for internal calls have no effect for DGC group coverage ringing is sent for all calls that go to coverage The system search of group coverage sender stations has been expanded to allow the System administrator to enter a DGC Coverage Group and list all its sender stations by PDC 2 113 FEATURES AND SERVICES Coverage Individual Description This feature is very similar to Group Coverage covered in the preceding feature description The primary difference is that Individual Coverage is a one on one type coverage between pairs of stations An Individual Coverage COVER IND button can be assigned on multiline voice terminals to cover calls to a specific single voice terminal The covering station can answer covered calls by selecting COVER I ND Each COVER IND button can be programmed to ring or not ring If ringing is selected the covering station will begin ringing after a specified number of rings at the covered station When the specified number of rings has occurred covered multiline voice terminals will stop ringing Covered single line voice terminals continue to ring until the call is answered at a covering terminal When the call is answered at the covering sta
359. igure 2 14 can send Data Terminal Ready DTR from the data terminal to the Data Line circuit and the Data Line circuit can send a control signal to the data terminal The signals Data Set Ready DSR Clear To Send CTS and Received Line Signal Detector DCD all connected to the control signal from the DLC in the ADU and available if required by the data terminal Refer to 5 Port Specifications for additional information TD lt RD TO FROM TO FROM ADU TN 726 011 DATA RS 232C 4 DCD IE DATA LINE DTE lt DSR CIRCUIT PACK 4 WERE CONNECTION CD CONTROL SIGNAL CONNECTED IN ADU TO PROVIDE DSR AND DCD TO RS 232C DEVI Figure 2 14 Asynchronous Data Unit Interface Signals The following categories are part of the DTE data endpoint group a Data Terminal Without ASCII Keyboard This category includes such devices as Fax machines EBCDIC or Baudot terminals and receive only devices such as printers Once connected to an ADU and turned on these data endpoints appear on line available and ready to enter the Setup mode on auto answered calls modes are described below These endpoints will display or print information received after a valid connection has been established without additional RS 232 control from that endpoint Note that since these endpoints cannot establish calls for themselves they must either be called by other endpoints orhave calls established f
360. iline voice terminals 2 192 Integrated Solution Integrated Solution Description This feature is the enhancement of System 25 with a UNIX PC acting as a Master Controller The UNIX PC is a multi tasking computer which provides the following options eBasic Administration vt100 terminal emulation is a standard feature of the UNIX PC System Software e Advanced Administration Software UNIX available as user friendly alternative to Basic Administration Accounting System e Office Automation Available packages include word processing spreadsheet analysis and database management e VOICE POWER Voice Message System VMS functions include Automated Attendant Voice Mail System Call Coverage Announcement Service Message Drop Service The UNIX PC Master Controller may provide any combination of these features simultaneously Considerations For Basic or Advanced Administration the Master Controller is connected to System 25 exactly as an ordinary SAT A serial port is required on the UNIX PC one is standard additional serial ports are available on expansion boards Advanced Administration is optional and requires the appropriate software For Call Accounting System the Master Controller is connected to System 25 just as an SMDR printer The final connection to the UNIX PC is made with a 355A adapter A serial port is required on the UNIX PC one is standard additional serial ports are availabl
361. ill appear No other SMDR fields are affected Administration Requirements System eSend SMDR records To SMDR Port yes or no default yes eMinimum length seconds of calls that are reported by SMDR 10 255 default 40 Hardware Requirements An AT amp T Model 475 printer or any standard RS 232 serial 80 column ASCII printer is required for printing the SMDR output The printer must be dedicated to SMDR to ensure that all calls are recorded An AT amp T Call Accounting System may also be used as the SMDR output device see below The printer can be directly connected to Port 2 of the ZTN129 CPU MEM Call Processing Unit Memory circuit pack or switched access either on or off premises can be provided Connection is the same as described for the SAT SMDR port parameters are as follows eNo parity bit is set to zero e1 start bit 1 stop bit and 7 data bits eBaud rate defaults to 1200 can be set to 300 eDTR data terminal ready required from printer eRTS ready to send and CTS clear to send not required flow control Detailed connection information is provided in Figures 2 44 through 2 48 Maximum cabling distances are provided in Section 5 2 297 FEATURES AND SERVICES DATE 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 0 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 10 08 85 0 08 85 0 08 85
362. in SLAC Only Attendant Message Waiting Attendant Position Busy Attendant Release Attendant Return Coverage On Busy Attendant Return Coverage On Don t Answer Attendant Source and Destination SLAC Only Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic Attendant System Alarm Indication Automatic Intercom Automatic Route Selection ARS Bridging of System Access Buttons Busy To Idle Reminder Call Accountability Call Accounting System CAS Callback Queuing Calling Restrictions Call Management System CMS Call Progress Tones Call Waiting Command Mode Communications Access Manager CAM Conference Conference Drop Coverage Group Coverage Individual Data Call Setup Data Services Overview Data Terminal Dialing Dial Access to Message Waiting Indicators Dial Plan Dictation System Access Digital Tape Unit DTU Direct Group Calling DGC Direct Group Calling Delay Announcement Direct Inward Dialing DID Directory Interdigit Timeouts 2 197 Manual Signaling 2 212 Headset Adapter Adjunct 2 183 Message Center Like Operation SLAC Only 2 214 Off Premises Stations OPS 2 231 Remote Initialization and Maintenance Service RIMS Speakerphone Adjunct 2 274 Speed Dialing 2 280 STARLAN NETWORK Access 2 283 Station Hunting 2 291 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 2 293 Station to Station Message Waiting 2 306 Tie Trunks 2 326 Touch Tone and Dial Pulse Services 2 328 Transf
363. indirectly by the ARS feature or directly by dial access System 25 s Tandem Trunking feature does not support traveling class marks or centralized attendant service Users cannot activate most System 25 features or services at either the tandem or far end terminating switch Considerations The use of tandem trunking with tie trunks provides a cost effective alternative to toll calling between branches Interactions The following features interact with Tandem Trunking Automatic Route Selection Tandem trunk calls that route outbound via ARS receive the same treatment as calls originated by a System 25 station with one exception If all facilities in a routing pattern are busy call queuing is not provided In this case busy tone is returned to the calling party The second digit of the trunk number is used to specify the trunk s station Facility Restriction Level FRL for use with ARS FRLs may be specified as follows Trunk Number Range 9000 9199 9200 9399 9400 9599 9600 9999 6 7 8 or 9 2 319 FEATURES AND SERVICES To gain access to an ARS routing facility the tandem trunk s station FRL must be equal to or greater than the route s FRL Thus a tandem trunk with an FRL of 0 has the least ARS privileges while an FRL of 3 provides the most privileges If the restriction level of the tandem trunk is less than all route FRLs reorder tone is returned to the calling party Dial Access No toll re
364. ing L2 Accounting S i Extending Movement Origination g Progress Tones Setup Third Part Typesl 2 Waiting Waiting Attendant Circuit Pack Address Lead ATL Line ZTN79 Auxiliary Trunk TN76 CPUMEM ZINI2 Z2 4 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Data Line TN726 DID Trunk TN753 Ground Start Trunk ZIN76 21 77 4 Pooled Modem TN758 Required 4 8 Service Circuit ZTN85 3 31 4 8 G O OD j STARLAN Interface ZTN84 Station Port 4 8 Summary System System Resource 4 17 Tie Trunk TN760B az UE Circuit Packs Continued Tip Ring Line ZTN78 Tone Detector TN748B 334 431 Trunk Port Circuitry Common to All Port CPs 3 9 Clock 2 209 CMS Code Personal Dial 2 339 Command Mode Menu Tree Common Circuitry Port Circuit Pack Control L32 Communications Access Manager Access Man ram Outgoing Business Component Codes COMCODES 279 Conference Conference Drop Confirmation 9 646 Connection A Attendant Console Attendant DXS Console Auxiliary Equipment 4 65 Call Accounting System 2 80 Delay Announcement_Equipment Dictation System 2 133 Digital Tape Unit 2 134 2 Direct Trunk Trunk Attendant Console Emergency Transfer Unit External Alert 2 769 Headset 2 187 Headset Adapter 2 185 2
365. ing Table N11 code and associated routing pattern number 1 8 or 0 if this code is a valid CO exchange requiring four additional digits to complete no default eHNPA Exception List List Number 1 4 Pattern Number 1 8 Exception Numbers NXX or NXX YYYY Last three digits may be eFNPA Exception Telephone List Pattern Number 1 8 Telephone Number 8 digits in the form NPA NXX YY last two digits may be n eDigit Translations Table Trunk Group Facility Access Codes 1 9999 or Virtual Facility Codes 190 199 Associated NPA NPA Number of digits to remove for calls within associated NPA 1 10 digits none Digit pattern to add for calls within associated NPA maximum of 5 digits default none Number of digits to remove for calls not in associated NPA 1 10 none default none Digit pattern to add for calls not in associated NPA maximum of 5 digits default none eARS Routing Pattern Pattern Number 1 8 Automatic Route Selection ARS Subpattern A Start and End Time Hour Minute Subpattern A and B Route 1 2 and 3 Facility Access Codes 1 9999 or Virtual Facility Codes 190 199 Subpattern A and B Route 1 2 and 3 FRLs 0 3 Subpattern A and B Overflows to CO facility yes or no Subpattern A and B Overflow FRL 0 3 Terminal Port ARS FRL Level 0 3 FEATURES AND SERVICES
366. ing protocol Call progress text messages are sent to the terminal in place of call progress tones Upon completion of digit entry Data Call Setup mode is entered f Data Call Setup Mode Data Call Setup Mode is a transitional state entered after Transfer To Data Data Terminal Dialing or during auto answer it exists during the handshake between data ports If the endpoints are compatible and handshaking is successful a data connection is established If handshake failure occurs the user is notified and the data endpoint returns to the Idle mode Successful handshake must occur within 15 seconds of answer at the called data endpoint This implies that the voice terminal user must invoke Transfer To Data within 15 seconds after far end answer Similarly if an originating voice user calls a voice terminal and both users transfer to data both ends must transfer within the 15 second time limit If the data endpoint is optioned for Command Mode permission the data endpoint will receive call progress text messages while in the Data Call Setup mode g Data Mode Data Mode is first entered after successful completion of Data Call Setup Transparent communication between connected endpoints is provided in Data Mode Connecting Configurations Refer to in Section 4 for data equipment connections Controlling Features It is possible to originate data calls from either a voice terminal with a Transfer to Data button or from data endpoint
367. ing trunk is presented in this field eBlank Columns 57 58 eACCOUNT Columns 59 73 Lists the Account Code associated with the call if one was entered On conference and transferred calls the first account code entered is recorded and subsequent account code entries are ignored For Remote Access calls to outside numbers the barrier code is shown 2 295 FEATURES AND SERVICES eBlank Column 74 Columns 75 78 Identifies the user responsible for outgoing calls The user is identified by the call accountability login PDC entered at the originating voice terminal If no call accountability is entered the PDC field is blank Figure 2 42 and Figure 2 43 summarize the Call Record and Call Record Header formats Considerations SMDR provides detailed call information on incoming and outgoing calls This information can be used to facilitate cost allocation traffic analysis and detection of unauthorized calls Interactions The following features interact with Station Message Detail Recording Account Code Entry Allows users to have an account code or project number associated with each call record Bridging of System Access Button When an outside call is answered or originated at a Bridged Access BA button the SMDR record for this call will report the bridging station s PDC number under the STN column and the principal stations PDC number under the PDC column If the Call Accountability feature is use
368. ing user receives intercept treatment i e INCOMPATIBLE FAR END and call setup is abandoned 3 At data connection time the conversion resource is seized and placed in the connection 4 The call is disconnected within 15 seconds if the conversion resource does not successfully handshake with both endpoints 2 219 FEATURES AND SERVICES Conversion resources are required for eData Terminal Dialing To establish a data connection for calls originated via Terminal Dialing to intrapremises analog data endpoints elncoming Trunk Calls To establish a data connection between an incoming trunk call and a digital endpoint Incoming trunk calls that are answered at a voice terminal can be transferred to a data endpoint using the Transfer To Data feature eOn Premises Data Calls To establish a data connection between an on premises analog data endpoint and an on premises digital endpoint e Outgoing Trunk Calls To establish a data connection between an off premises analog endpoint modem and an on premises digital endpoint Considerations Modem Pooling provides a pool of conversion resources that increases data call flexibility Conversion resources allow analog data endpoints using modems to communicate with digital data endpoints using data modules Also modem pooling reduces costs by sharing resources Interactions The following features interact with Modem Pooling Automatic Route Selection Data calls may be queued
369. inistered calling restrictions A system user may gain access to a VF by eDialing the VF code 190 199 e Storing the VF code as the first digits on a REP DIAL button Other digits for example the destination telephone number may be stored following the VF code e Dialing a System Speed Dialing code 100 189 that contains a VF as part of the stored number The VF code must be the first digits stored in the Speed Dialing number e Dialing a Personal Speed Dialing code 20 39 that contains a VF as part of the stored number The VF code must be the first digits stored in the Speed Dialing number eUsing Automatic Route Selection ARS and having a VF as the route selected by ARS Note The system can be administered to allow or restrict dial access for each VF code If dial access is restricted system default a VF may be accessed only when used in an ARS routing pattern When virtual facilities are used in ARS patterns they assume the same capabilities and restrictions as physical facilities For example eEach VF may have a digit deletion and insertion scheme associated with it e Selective restriction of VF may be accomplished by assignment of Facility Restriction Levels FRLs 2 344 Virtual Facilities If the VF is used in the first position of a routing pattern calls may queue on it if all of the routes are busy Whenever a VF is used to complete a call either by dial access or through ARS call proce
370. ires dial pulse signals the dialed digits are converted to dial pulses until an end of dialing signal is detected Cut through is then provided and all subsequent digits are converted to touch tone signals See the End to End Signaling feature description for more information Administration Requirements Trunk Port e Assign trunk Class of Service COS COS includes touch tone dial pulse specification 2 328 Transfer Transfer Description This feature allows a user to move any call from the user s terminal to another voice terminal then disconnect from the call A user can transfer calls either with or without announcement multiline terminal user presses TRANSFER the party is automatically placed on Special Hold indicated by a broken flutter on the status LED of the call appearance button The system will automatically select an idle System Access button The user may dial the desired number or select another facility button and dial the call The user then do one of two things 1 hang up or 2 wait until the called party answers announce the call and then hang up The held call receives Music on Hold if provided and administered until the transferring station hangs up after which it receives ringback until the transferred to station answers Unanswered transfers will receive the coverage treatment of the transferred to station A Personal Line transferred by a multiline voice terminal user will indicate t
371. is entered or when the user hangs up The procedures for associating an account code with call are as follows e Single Line Voice Terminal User Get dial tone by going off hook at the beginning of a call or by flashing the switchhook before hanging up and dial 0 then dial the account code directly or dial a System or Personal Speed Dialing Number that contains the account code If the code is dialed incorrectly before the last digit redial 0 and the correct number e Multiline Voice Terminal User At the beginning of an outgoing call get dial tone and dial 0 then dial the account code directly or dial a System or Personal Speed Dialing Number that contains the account code If the code is dialed incorrectly before the last digit redial 0 and the correct number At the end of a call press ACCT ENTRY and enter the code before hanging up A Repertory Dialing REP DIAL button can also be used to enter an account code If the code is dialed incorrectly before the last digit press ACCT ENTRY again and dial the correct number When the correct number of account code digits has been entered or is entered to signal end of dialing confirmation tone is returned to the user and the account code is appended to the SMDR call record Considerations Optional Account Code Entry provides an easy method of allocating the costs of specific calls and associated staff time to the correct project department or user The account code
372. is pressed 300 or 1200 eDTR data terminal ready required from terminal eRTS ready to send and CTS clear to send not required eNo flow control The Model 703 requires 115V ac 60 hertz commercial power from a 3 wire grounded outlet The terminal should be located on a flat surface such as a desk or table top lt is approximately 12 inches wide 9 inches long and 3 inches high 2 308 System Administration The Model 703 keyboard generates ASCII codes The terminal produces two audible tones to indicate the completion of activities eShort Tone A tone of less than one half second indicates the normal termination of an operation eLong Tone A one second tone indicates that an error or an abnormal operating condition has been detected The Model 703 SAT Supplement contains a complete set of operating instructions for the Model 703 Data Terminal This document may be of use to customers who want to use the terminal for other purposes in addition to system administration All the information needed to use the terminal as SAT is included in the R2V1 Administration Manual The SAT can be connected to the system cabinets in several different ways direct connection within 50 feet when sharing the same AC outlet as the system cabinets eA direct on premises connection at a distance greater than 50 feet from the system cabinets eA direct off premises connection via the Central Office OPS or CO trunk eAn on premises swit
373. isplay e Send All Calls When Send All Calls is invoked the sending station still receives incoming call information If the calls are being sent to coverage the proceeding to coverage descriptor c appears in position 16 Screen 1 146 Pearson M e Transfer At a station receiving a transferred call the transfer descriptor T is displayed in position 1 before the transfer is completed The transferring party s number name are also shown Screen T785 Jones B 1 After the transfer is completed is removed and the display at the transferred to station reverts to a standard incoming call format information about the transferred party is displayed Note If the transferring station does not have a display and the transferred party is on an outside trunk the name of the trunk not the originally dialed digits is displayed Automatic Incoming Call Identification This subfeature allows a display set user to automatically receive the identification display for a new incoming call while busy on another call Any existing display is temporarily removed and the new information is flashed on Screen 1 The display presented by this feature has the same format as the display for an incoming call at an idle station The automatic display flashes only once for a given incoming call and appears when the call first rings If the System Access or Bridged Access button has delayed ringing the display is delayed a
374. ists numbers dialed from Class 2 terminals are checked against TCA Lists 2 4 numbers dialed from Class 3 terminals are checked against TCA Lists 3 4 and numbers dialed from Class 4 terminals are checked against List 4 only If the number dialed does not appear on a list the user receives Reorder Tone Calls originated at unrestricted Class 0 terminals are not screened Calls are checked to determine if they are international calls or operator calls Dialed numbers 01 or 011 signify international calls 0 plus a number other than 1 signify operator calls 00 calls signify Intra Lata operator calls If the call is an international call the international routing pattern is selected and the call routed accordingly Operator calls are 2 58 Automatic Route Selection ARS routed via the local CO facility Calls within the HNPA are checked to determine if a special N11 service code N 2 8 has been dialed Dialed N11 codes assigned a routing pattern are routed via the routing pattern All other call types are checked against the HNPA Exception Lists There may be up to four of these lists each with an associated ARS Routing Pattern Up to 800 3 digit office codes may be divided among the four lists eight entries may be 7 digit numbers If a match is found the call is routed via the associated ARS Routing Pattern If no match is found the dialed number is routed via the HNPA pattern specified in the NPA Routing Table
375. ition yes or no default yes eAssign number of seconds before an unanswered Camped On Call returns to the Attendant Console 1 120 or 0 for no Attendant Camp On default 30 Attendant Console Voice Terminal Port eAssign voice terminal type 309 eAssign buttons for Night Service and Position Busy if required Attendant Message Waiting is defaulted to button 14 but can be assigned to any programmable button e following buttons predefine on the Attendant Console and not administrable ALARM RTN DA RTN BUSY START CANCEL and RELEASE e Trunk terminations the following is required for each trunk terminated on the console administered as Personal Line appearances DID trunks cannot be terminated on a DTAC Trunk Number this the Principal Station owner of the trunk yes or Enable Ring yes or no Hardware Requirements Each console requires a port on a ZTN79 ATL Line circuit pack provides a connection diagram for the DTAC 2 22 Attendant Console Direct Trunk SYSTEM 25 CABI NET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE 111179 HYBRID REN LINE CP PART OF SIP DIRECT TRUNK ATTENDANT CONSOLE 1 LEGEND TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK 1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P T1 34 BUTTON VOICE TERMINAL 7305H02D PEC 3162 417 7305H03B PEC 3162 BIS OR 7316H01A PEC 3167 348 W1
376. ivate Local Display Any change in queue count or new call handling activity returns the terminal to Normal Mode When active on a call the user can go to Local Mode by pressing Time Timer and return to Normal Mode by pressing the active call appearance button If the terminal has a LOCAL button it can be used exit and enter Local Mode e Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC fixed LOCAL button At a SLAC Local Mode is normally off During idle periods when no calls are being handled and the display screen is blank except for the SLAC queue count the attendant can press the LOCAL button to override the queue display and enter Local Mode If the queue count changes or a call comes in Local Mode is overridden and the queue count or incoming call information plus queue count appears on the screen Initiating a call or pressing LOCAL again will also cause the console to exit Local Mode 2 209 FEATURES AND SERVICES The terminal user can set any of the Local Display functions by performing the following procedure while not active on a call 1 If the clock calendar screen is not already being displayed press LOCAL or Time Timer if the terminal has no LOCAL button The clock calendar screen appears on the display 2 Press Set repeatedly until the item to be changed flashes 3 Press Fwd or Rev to change the item s setting 4 To change the setting of another item return to step 2 5 Press Exit The clock calendar screen ap
377. k eSystem 25 supports several voice terminals that are no longer orderable These include MET sets and the 34 button basic MERLIN System set system supports equivalent industry standard touch tone single line sets Voice terminals connected via the ZTN78 Tip Ring Line CP must have a REN less than or equal to 1 20 A B t The 2991C04 set with Busy Lamp Field BLF will not operate with System 25 unless specially modified The BLF itself will always be inoperable HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Single Line Voice Terminals Single line terminals can have only one incoming call ringing when the terminal is idle The user at any busy single line terminal can put an active call on hold and either originate a call or answer waiting camped on call Single line terminals have access to most system features that do not require operation of programmable buttons All voice and control information between single line terminals and the system digital switch is transmitted in analog form on tip and ring pairs of wire one pair per terminal Port circuits ZTN78 Tip Ring Line CP or TN742 Analog Line CP in the switch provide analog digital conversion Power for terminals is also sent from the switch on the tip and ring pairs pushbutton dials on single line sets except for the 500 Series touch tone pads which generate Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF signals The rotary 500 sets generate dial pulses The following subsections pr
378. l receiving coverage 2 160 End To End Signaling End To End Signaling Description This feature allows multiline voice terminals to send touch tone DTMF signals over the DDD network and allows single line and multiline users to send touch tones over dial pulse trunks The 7300H series voice terminals do not generate touch tones when a dial pad button is pressed The End to End Signaling feature provides for the conversion of signals generated by these terminals to touch tones Dialed numbers from multiline voice terminals are toned out for a default duration of 60 ms followed by 60 ms of silence administrable Dialed numbers to single line voice ports are toned out for a default duration of 60 ms followed by 60 ms of silence administrable When using dial pulse trunks End to End signaling is invoked by dialing after the last digit of the called number or waiting for about 10 seconds after dialing the last digit see the Interdigit Timeouts feature description All subsequent dial pad button presses generate touch tones on the outside line Considerations End to End Signaling permits stations to access network services that require touch tone signals Interactions The following features interact with End To End Signaling Command Mode And Data Terminal Dialing Occasionally it is necessary to send additional tones to the remote endpoint after a data connection has been established A mark character is
379. l source terminal is NOT associated with the third party data terminal After the user has selected lt Voice call gt from the Command Mode menu a DIAL prompt is displayed on the third party data terminal The user has 15 seconds to begin entering the digits to be dialed before being disconnected The format of the digits following the DIAL prompt is shown below DIAL Destination F Source The Destination number must include all digits required to call the destination terminal and may contain facility access codes Speed Dialing codes and pauses An F may be entered immediately following the Destination digits this character is used to separate the Destination number from the Source number The Source number must be a Personal Dial Code when the source is a voice terminal or a Data Dial Code when the source is a data terminal Floating PDCs are not allowed If the user enters the Destination number but not the Source number the system prompts as indicated below FROM Source The user must then enter the Source number Calling a Destination Terminal source terminal is associated with the third party data terminal Following the DIAL prompt the user enters the Destination number only System 25 will automatically select the associated PDC or DDC as the Source number If the third party data terminal is permitted to establish calls for any source terminal the format Destination F Source must be used to set
380. l the user can hear the caller but cannot converse Lifting the handset connects the user to the caller Considerations The user of a HFAI equipped station should always deactivate the HFAI feature when leaving the work area If this is not done incoming calls will be unintentionally answered Interactions The following features interact with Hands Free Answer on Intercom Bridging of System Access Buttons f a station has HFAI activated internal calls arriving at this station on a System Access button will auto answer However calls arriving at this station on a Bridged Access button will ring according to the administered ring option and will not auto answer Coverage When the HFAI feature is enabled at a set calls eligible for HFAI service will not receive coverage because the set will answer them whether the user is present or not However if the attendant uses the Attendant Message Waiting feature to turn on the Message indicator at the set the HFAI feature will be disabled the AUTO ANS LED turns off allowing subsequent calls to receive coverage Send All Calls Activating Send All Calls will disable the HFAI feature the AUTO ANS LED turns off Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port eAssign AUTO ANS button A 22 or 34 button built in speakerphone BIS voice terminal with or without display should be translated as Type 308 only if a headset adapter will be used with it Otherwise such a terminal sho
381. l Signaling will not activate external alerting devices associated with the signaled station 2 212 Manual Signaling Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port eAssign Manual Signaling SIGNAL button 2 213 FEATURES AND SERVICES Message Center Like Operation SLAC Only Description A System 25 Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC be made to function like message center through administration of call type translations Certain specific types of calls in the common queue will then be directed only to a console administered as a message center This arrangement involves no changes in equipment or in operating procedures The message center attendant answers incoming calls of the preselected types in the normal way No provision is made for storing messages a capability often associated with full service message centers Message Center Call Types The Message Center receives calls of the following types e Returning parked calls that were originally parked from a Selector Console eReturning camped on calls e Returning calls that were extended transferred from an Attendant Position to a busy station or a station that does not answer e Coverage calls incoming inside and outside calls including DID calls covered by the common queue when the called party does not answer is busy or does not want to be disturbed Send All Calls eFloating PDCs FPDCs not signed in at a station and unassigned DID cal
382. l Tone Multifrequency DTMF or Dial Pulse eREN 1 2 eDC Current max 35 mA eLoop Range 24 AWG 2 000 feet eln building service only Tip and Ring Analog Line Single Line TN742 e 1 Interface Tip and Ring Sets Analog eAnalog signals modulated over DC loop eLoop Voltage 48 V dc eSignaling Dual Tone Multifrequency DTMF or Dial Pulse eREN max 5 0 eDC Current max 40 mA eLoop Range 24 AWG 17 500 feet e Supports Out of Building Extended greater than 2000 feet Off Premises and Bridged Station services maximum of five bridged stations and two off hook simultaneously 5 14 Port Specifications Contd TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VOICE TERMINAL PORTS Contd STATION TYPE CIRCUIT PACK SPECIFICATIONS MET Sets MET Line Hybrid TN735 MERLIN ATL Line System Sets ZTN79 7300H Series Hybrid e3 Pair Interface 1 Voice pair 2 Control pairs eAnalog Voice Digital Control Signaling ePower Phantom Power Over Data Pairs e Bipolar Signaling With 0 V dc Offset e1 MHz Nominal Signaling Rate eLoop Range 1000 feet in Building service only e3 Pair Interface 1 Voice pair 1 Control pair 1 Power pair eAnalog Voice Digital Control Signaling eBipolar non return to zero line coding 40 kHz Nominal signaling rate Range 1000 feet eln Building and In Range Out of Building IROB services only 5 15 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Port Specific
383. ld be capable of sending the following ASCII Characters 2 309 FEATURES AND SERVICES A Z or a z 0 9 d 2 BACKSPACE RETURN The data transfer rate is set when a carriage return character is received by the administration port There are two supported transfer rates 1200 bps and 300 bps Refer to the R2V1 Administration Manual for administration procedures and additional information SAT Connection Information Detailed connection information is provided in the following figures Figure 2 50 SAT On Premises Direct Connections Sharing Same AC Outlet 2 51 SAT On Premises Direct Connections Greater Than 50 Feet from System Cabinet or Not Sharing Same AC Outlet Figure 2 52 BAT On Premises Switched Connections Figure 2 53 BAT Off Premises Direct Connections Figure 2 54 BAT Off Premises Switched Connections Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading in Section 4 Maximum cabling distances from the system cabinets to the SAT are provided in Section 5 Technical Specifications 2 310 System Administration MEME EAE 5920005 FEET Figure 2 49 Model 703 System Administration Terminal 2 311 FEATURES AND SERVICES 2 312 SYSTEM 25 PART CABINET OCTOPUS
384. led party can retrieve the message at his her convenience Multiline voice terminals cannot use dial code 92 to activate LWC The VMS system itself must be administered to register the PDCs and FPDCs of all calling and called stations Interactions The following features interact with Leave Word Calling Callback Queuing A user who is queued for access to a busy station can invoke LWC The callback request is canceled when LWC is activated Coverage A multiline voice terminal user can activate LWC for the called party PDC or FPDC even if the call has gone to coverage Display f a user successfully activates LWC the display shows the called extension number and MSG SENT Screen1 879 MSG SENT If an LWC attempt is not successful the display shows the called extension and MSG DENIED Screen 1 879 MSG DENIED Voice Message System LWC can be used only in conjunction with a VOICE POWER Voice Message System Administration Requirements Multiline Voice Terminal Port eAssign a LEAVE WORD feature button System e Establish interface with associated Voice Message System 2 202 Leave Word Calling LWC Hardware Requirements A Voice Message System must be connected to the System 25 by way of a port on a ZTN78 Tip Ring Line circuit pack Use of a TN742 Analog Line circuit pack for VMS interface is not recommended 2 203 FEATURES AND SERVICES Line Selection Description Multiline voice terminals ma
385. ling button to place a call the numbers dialed are saved by Last Number Dialed When the call is redialed using Last Number Dialed the same type of button where dial tone was originally accessed should be used again to ensure that the call is directed to the correct destination Speed Dialing When using a Personal or System Speed Dialing code to place a call the code is saved by Last Number Dialed When the call is redialed using Last Number Dialed the same type of button where dial tone was originally accessed should be used again to ensure that the call is completed properly System Access System Access Originate Only Buttons f a user originates a call from one of these buttons the same type of button should be selected for getting dial tone to place a second call with the Last Number Dialed feature Using another type of button such as Personal Line or Direct Facility Access to get dial tone may prevent the call from completing properly Transfer When a station user Transfers a call the dialed number of the party to whom the call is transferred is saved as the Last Number Dialed 2 199 FEATURES AND SERVICES Administration Requirements Last Number Dialed is a default feature on all multiline voice terminals One button is assigned to the feature at each set The feature can be moved or removed by administration 2 200 Leave Word Calling LWC Leave Word Calling Description Leave Word Calling LWC is available o
386. lity is available the originator is alerted and the call is completed eLast Number Dialed automatically saves the last number dialed and allows the user to retry the number without redialing multiline voice terminals only e Callback Queuing puts call made to a busy facility into a queue notifies the calling user when the facility becomes available to receive the call and completes the call e Repertory Dialing allows multiline voice terminal users to store a telephone number or account and associate that number with a button on their voice terminal Pressing a Repertory Dialing button is equivalent to dialing the stored number one touch dialing eSystem Speed Dialing allows all users to dial 90 selected numbers using 3 digit codes Users can also program up to 20 Personal Speed Dialing Numbers which are accessible only from their terminals System Speed Dialing can be used by the System administrator to hide business account codes from users OVERVIEW ePooled Facility Dial Direct Access allows both multiline and single line voice terminal users to access common pool of trunks for outgoing calls by dialing a facility access code or on multiline voice terminals by pressing a button This grouping provides resource pooling which results in better service with a given number of trunks ePersonal Lines provide dedicated outside lines for multiline voice terminal users Personal lines are accessed via a dedicated feature button
387. ll be truncated For Repertory Dialing and Speed Dialing numbers the facility will be extracted from the stored number and reported under the FAC heading the number remaining after the facility is extracted will be reported as the called number For a Remote Access call through the System 25 to an outside number this field contains the outside number dialed by the remote caller An incoming call is identified by the word IN Error Character Question Mark or Blank Column 36 Indicates number dialed exceeded 15 digits Blank Column 37 DUR Columns 38 45 Duration For incoming calls this provides the time between trunk seizure and disconnect rounded to the nearest second For outgoing calls it provides the time between the last digit dialed until the last station on the call hangs up less an estimated time for call setup 15 seconds rounded to the nearest second A call transferred between a number of voice terminals will reflect the total call duration The maximum time that can be reported is 95 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds Station Message Detail Recording SMDR eBlank Column 46 eFAC Columns 47 51 Facility Indicates the facility used to place the call For outgoing calls including Speed Dialing numbers the pooled facility selected by ARS or the facility access code that was dialed or that corresponds to the facility button that was pressed is identified For Remote Access calls through the System 25 to outs
388. ll is redirected to coverage Reorder Tone A fast busy tone repeated 120 times a minute indicates that a call attempt cannot be completed because for example all trunks are busy a dialing error has occured the terminal is restricted from making the call or a required account code was not entered SAT System Administration Terminal SIP Station Interconnect Panel SLAC Switched Loop Attendant Console SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Selector Console Direct Extension Selector Console Single Line Voice Terminal Voice terminal served by single line tip and ring circuit 2500 series and 7101 voice terminals or industry standard Dual Tone Multifrequency equivalent Software A set of computer programs that accomplish one or more tasks 9 12 GLOSSARY Split A condition whereby a caller is temporarily separated from a connection with the attendant This split condition automatically occurs when the attendant active on a call either presses the Start button or uses the Direct Extension Selector Console Status LED A green LED that shows the status of a call appearance or a feature button by the state of the lamp lighted flashing fluttering broken flutter or dark Station A place where terminal equipment is located or sometimes the terminal equipment itself Each voice terminal station is assigned a station extension number Users of the terminal are sometimes referred to as station use
389. llows an abbreviated form of dialing when activating the Third Party Call Setup feature Through further administration the third party data terminal may be given permission to set up calls for any source terminal for only the associated source terminal or for no source terminal feature disabled When the user successfully activates Third Party Call Setup and has dialed all digits correctly the following occurs depending on the source terminal type eVoice Terminal source The source voice terminal if not busy receives priority ringing A priority ringing cycle consists of two short bursts followed by one long burst The source terminal s handset must be picked up within three ringing cycles the destination terminal will then be called Regardless of the call outcome the third party data terminal displays the message CONFIRMED and DISCONNECTED immediately after calling the destination terminal If the source terminal s handset is not picked up within three priority ringing cycles the third party data terminal displays the messages NO ANSWER and DISCONNECTED If the source phone is busy the third party data terminal displays BUSY and DISCONNECTED call to a source terminal that has the Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature activated results in the automatic answering of the source end and the destination terminal will be called The third party data terminal displays CONFIRMED and DISCONNECTED eData Terminal sourc
390. ls The type of each incoming Message Center call will be identified by a call type descriptor on the console s 16 character display screen Refer to the earlier Switched Loop Attendant Console feature description for a list of descriptors Console Configurations Message Center like operation applies only when the System 25 has two SLACs In a one console system all calls are handled at the same position In the default condition a SLAC is a combined Attendant Position Message Center It can receive any type of call In a one console system there is no division between attendant and message center functions A dedicated Message Center is a console that is administered to receive only the specified incoming call types Dial O calls attendant seeking calls from inside the system are not directed to a Message Center but the console has a unique PDC number that callers can use to reach the attendant A dedicated Attendant Position is a console that is administered to answer all of the calls not handled by the Message Center 2 214 Message Center Like Operation SLAC Only Message Center capability can be supported in any of the following two console configurations dedicated Attendant Position and one dedicated Message Center call extended by the Attendant Position to a station that does not answer or is busy returns to the Message Center eOne dedicated Attendant Position and one combined Attendant Position Mess
391. ls arriving at this station on a BA button will ring according to the administered ring option and will not auto answer Hold A principal or bridging station user who is active on a bridged call can hold the call by pressing the HOLD button If there is still a bridging or principal station active on the call the green status LEDs of all associated SA BA buttons remain lighted steadily If no other bridging or principal station is active on the call the green status LEDs of all associated SA BA buttons wink Any of the principal or bridging stations can enter the held call unless Exclusion has been activated or the maximum number of parties are already connected to the conversation Last Number Dialed The Last Number Dialed feature saves numbers called from either SA or BA buttons Line Status and l Use Indication The meanings of green line status and red l use indications on BA buttons are consistent with all other System 25 operation Message Waiting Stations with bridged appearances can have Coverage Message Waiting COVER MSG buttons By using the COVER MSG button the bridging user can check and or change the status of the principal s Message LED If the bridging station also serves as an Individual Coverage receiver the same COVER MSG button can be used for bridging and coverage messaging needs Use of the COVER MSG button is identical to current System 25 operation Night Service Directed Night Service calls ring immediately
392. lso if the appearance button is administered not to ring automatic display is suppressed The automatic display is replaced by another simultaneously incoming call display or by reinstatement of the original active display If the user wishes to examine the call information again the Inspection Mode must be entered When administered for a station Automatic Incoming Call Identification operates only in Normal Mode but does not operate while the user is off hook and dialing digits Automatic Incoming Call Identification does not involve use of the Inspection Mode It is administrable on an individual display set basis but is not supported on the SLAC 2 157 FEATURES AND SERVICES Considerations The Display feature provides valuable call information with a minimum of effort on the part of the voice terminal user Interactions The following features interact with Display Capabilities Attendant Console Direct Trunk Display capabilities are not supported for this type of console Bridging of System Access Buttons All stations sharing a bridged appearance that is the principal station and the bridging station s and having ringing enabled for the appearance will receive standard call information display on incoming calls After one station answers the call the bridging station continues to display the call information until the user receives or places another call the original call ends or the other station invokes Exclusion A
393. ltiline voice terminals may always be used as receivers Standard Group Coverage When a call arrives at a voice terminal that has group coverage the COVER GRP or LOOP button status LED at the covering voice terminals will flash Covering voice terminals will begin to ring after a specified number of rings at idle covered voice terminals If there is no idle system access button at the covered station sender the call receives coverage treatment and the call immediately rings at the covering terminal s If no idle cover button is available at the covering terminal s the calling party receives a busy signal Ringing may be turned off at standard receiver stations for each covering button as desired not recommended If this option is selected a flashing status LED will be the only indication received at the covering station In addition Coverage ringing may be turned off on internal calls if desired on a system wide basis A member of a standard receiver group can use the Line Selection Preelection feature to answer covered calls even before any audible alerting has begun at the covering user s terminal This is useful if the user knows that the covered party is unavailable A covered voice terminal may elect to have calls covered while it is busy on another call Calls directed to an idle button on a busy covered multiline voice terminal will start ringing at the covering terminal after a single burst of ringing at the busy covered voi
394. ly similar to but separate from the Coverage Message Waiting and Attendant Message Waiting features A station can be a member of more than one Station to Station Message Waiting pair but must have a separate button for each pair This feature is not associated with the built in MESSAGE or MSG indicators of many System 25 voice terminals It lights only the LEDs of the feature buttons assigned to Station to Station Message Waiting Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port eFor each pair of stations that are to share this feature assign a MSG WAIT button with associated status LED at each station Note MSG WAIT buttons always assigned to pairs of stations for use only between the two stations If station A needs to signal stations B and C station A must have a separate MSG WAIT button for each 2 306 System Administration System Administration Description The software that controls System 25 operation consists of tables located in system memory These tables contain data associated with e Trunk Station and Auxiliary Equipment Ports eSystem Parameters eDirect Group Calling Groups e Toll Calls Allowed Lists ePeripheral Equipment Data Communications Parameters eAutomatic Route Selection Collectively these software tables are referred to as translations The system comes equipped with default translations data when full default cold started the default translations are copied into translation memory
395. may match the last 2 3 or 4 digits of DID numbers For example the code matching DID number 555 2345 may be 45 345 or 2345 depending on the system dial plan 2 241 FEATURES AND SERVICES Direct Station Selection If an attempt is made to program an rather than a PDC on a Flex DSS button Reorder Tone is received Display Calls to an FPDC signed in at a station covered by an attendant console receive coverage However the attendant display will show the PDC and name of the covered station not the FPDC Administration Requirements System eRoute calls for unassigned DID numbers to the Attendant yes or no default yes eRoute calls for not signed in FPDCs to the attendant yes or no default yes e Add Delete FPDCs 2 242 Personal Lines Personal Lines Description This feature provides a dedicated outside line for multiline voice terminal users Unlike pooled facilities which can be accessed via dial codes Personal Lines can be accessed only via a dedicated feature button and provide both incoming and outgoing service Up to 16 terminals may share a Personal Line Up to four parties may be off hook on the line at the same time the line itself is the fifth conferee When the line is busy its status LED lights at all terminals on which the line appears Ringing may be provided optionally to one or more of the terminals sharing the line For each Personal Line one station is administered as the principal
396. ment is required Zone paging is provided by the ZoneMate PagePac 20 without ZoneMate The PagePac 20 PowerMate may be used alone as a single zone paging amplifier If the PowerMate is used without a ZoneMate each PowerMate requires either a port on an Auxiliary Trunk CP with an Auxiliary Trunk Interface and a Paging Dial Dictation interface or a Paging System Adapter Zone paging is provided by the Auxiliary Trunk CP if used Each of the three ports available for paging system access may connect to a paging system providing up to three paging zones PagePac VS PagePac VS may be interfaced with System 25 by means of a loop start trunk port or a tip ring station line port PagePac VS provides a built in interface card which cannot be removed or changed No other interface options are supported for PagePac VS PagePac Voice Paging Systems The larger complete paging systems in our product line are collectively known as PagePac Voice Paging Systems They are currently available in sizes ranging from 50 Watts to 200 Watts and when ordered as complete systems are shipped with a Type C Applique This Type C Applique may be optioned during installation to interface with a ground start trunk port loop start trunk port or a tip ring station line port PagePac Voice Paging Amplicenter The Amplicenter is the amplifier component of the complete PagePac Voice Paging System If the Amplicenter is used alone as a single zone paging amplifier it requi
397. mple 2 VF Code 193 VFN 2219 5554343 5 1 2345 The first three digits 221 represent the FAC for a tie trunk to a remote PBX 2 345 FEATURES AND SERVICES The 9 is used to access the remote PBX s ARS The represents a pause of 1 5 seconds allows time for dial tone to occur The 555 4343 defines the local address of a private network and its internal routing table The represents a 1 5 second pause The 5 indicates that the destination number should be inserted here rather than at the end of the VF translation indicates that the system should transmit a symbol as the first character of an identification code 12345 represents the remaining characters in the identification code Example 3 VF Code 195 VFN 1045554567 1 23479 This example demonstrates how a VF might be used in place of a tie trunk group connecting two local PBXs when you have permission to access the other PBX s facilities to complete calls first three digits 104 represent the FAC for a CO trunk group The 5554567 represents the number for the other PBX The represents 6 second pause allows time for the other PBX to answer and return new dial tone The 1234 represents a barrier security code required to access the other PBX s facilities The represents a 1 5 second pa
398. ms that require either an industry standard station line port or an Auxiliary Trunk port with contact closure equivalent to a push to talk switch The dictation system is accessed by dialing the designated access code or by pressing a DSS button on which this access code is stored Considerations This feature allows users to access and control a shared dictation system A dial dictation system is essentially a sophisticated tape recorder that can respond to touch tone signals for physical control For instance pressing the digit six might cause the dictation system to rewind its tape pressing the digit three might cause the dictation system to play back its tape Most modern dial dictation systems interface to System 25 through an industry standard station line port However some dictation systems require contact closure for recording control and must interface to System 25 through a port on an Auxiliary Trunk CP 763 by means of an Auxiliary Trunk Interface and a Paging Dial Dictation Interface If a dictation system may be optioned for either of these interfaces the preferred interface is the station line port Interactions The following feature interacts with Dictation System Access Direct Inward Dialing DID A DID number may match the dictation system access code This allows an outside caller to access the dictation equipment Administration Requirements System e Dial dictation equipment requires a suitable port
399. n This feature allows users who are away from their own voice terminals to receive their calls at other inside voice terminals Following is functionally equivalent to internal Forwarding In order to have their calls follow them users sign in their PDCs at the terminals where they will be located temporarily A call coming into the home terminal is redirected to the terminal where the PDC is signed in the away terminal Signing in a PDC at a terminal automatically signs the PDC out at any other terminal PDCs always have an associated home terminal If PDC is not signed in anywhere calls to the PDC will ring at the home terminal Signing in a FPDC automatically signs the FPDC out at any other voice terminal However signing out a FPDC does not sign in the FPDC at another terminal Calls to FPDCs not signed in at any terminal may be directed to the attendant administrable and strongly recommended To sign PDC the user goes off hook at the away terminal enters and then the home PDC twice The PDC sign out procedure is similar after going off hook and receiving dial tone the user enters followed by the home PDC and then by a 0 A O entered at a voice terminal will sign out all PDCs and FPDOs signed in at that voice terminal except for the PDC normally assigned to it Confirmation Tone is returned to a user who correctly completes one of these procedures The call types or features listed
400. n This feature provides users of the 7300H series voice terminals the ability to test their terminals Placing the Test Program T P switch in the T position causes all red and green LEDs to light alternately and the tone ringer to sound If the terminal has a display module the following responses also occur eThe display shows 16 darkened squares eAfter the Test switch is returned to its normal position the Local Display alarm clock produces 3 short beeps Considerations The Test feature assures users that all visible indicators LEDs and display screen and audible signaling devices tone ringer built in speaker and timer alarm of their terminals are working properly The Test switch on some voice terminals is spring loaded upon release the switch returns to a normal on line position On other terminals the switch must be manually returned to the center normal on line position 2 321 FEATURES AND SERVICES Third Party Call Setup Description The Third Party Call Setup feature allows data terminal the third party to set up via Command Mode a call between an on premises voice or data terminal the source and another voice or data terminal the destination can be on or off premises Once the call has been set up the third party drops off and is not included in the call Each third party data terminal may be administered to have a particular source terminal associated with it This association a
401. n Hold will be heard by these callers while they wait e As soon as an agent in the main split becomes available CMS will transfer the call at the front of the queue to the agent e f no agent in the main split becomes available and the call at the front of the queue has waited for a predetermined period the call will be sent to an available agent in the secondary split if intraflow has been turned on and the secondary split has been administered CMS provides a variety of reports that are available on a daily or cumulative up to 3 months basis The Events Log records up to 200 system events and exception conditions In addition call traffic reports can be generated for the following e Individual Agents by day or days e Splits by hour or day eLine Groups by hour or day eLine Sub Groups by hour or day CMS Support Features Three additional features enhance the capability of CMS operations e Transfer Into Queue Allows anyone on System 25 particularly an attendant to transfer calls into a line group It also allows an agent to transfer a call to another line group It is useful in handling calls made to the wrong line group Calls transferred in this way receive priority treatment in the new line group e Service Monitoring Enables a CMS supervisor to monitor an agent s calls without the knowledge of agent or caller or to join a call when an agent requests help Service monitoring is useful in the training of
402. n Coverage On Don t Answer Attendant Source and Destination 2 52 Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic 2 Attendant System Alarm Indication 2 52 f 2 55 Automatic intercom e to Idle Reminde Call Call Accounting System CAS 2 76 Call Management Sy Communications ees Manager ProgramL2 107_ Features Continued Conference Coverage Group Coverage individual Data Call Setup Data Services 2 718 Data Terminal DialingL2 124 j Dial Access to Message Waiting indicators Dial Plan Dictation System Acce Digital Tape Unit 2 134 Direct Group Calling Delay Announcemen Direct Group Calling DGC I 2 136 Direct inward Dialing DID L2 141 Direct tation Selection D 2 147 Directory 2 144 Display 2 149 Distinctive Ringing End To End Signaling Exclusion 2 162 Expert Mode Extended Stations External Alerts Following 2 171 Forced Account Code Entr Forwarding Hands Free Answer On Intercom HFAI Headset Adapter Adjunct Hold Inspection Integrated Solution Intercept Treatment With Reorder Tonel 2 196 Interdigit Timeouts Last Number Dialed 2 798 Leave Word Gallingl2 201 GG G Line Selection 2 204 Line Status And l Local DisplayL 2 209 Manual Signaling Message Center Like Operation Messaging Service Modem Pooling Music On Hold Night Service Night Service Delay Announcements 2 229 Off Premises Stations OPS 2 231 Optional Account
403. n access the LAN utilizing all the network features cost control mechanisms and incoming call management facilities of System 25 The data transfer rate is governed by the modem Setting up data communications with PCs host computers and or remote access can be a source of confusion for occasional users The following special data features are provided by System 25 to assist the user in utilizing its rich set of data communications capabilities OVERVIEW integrated voice data dialing plan recognizes the different types of data endpoints digital analog and remote local in a connection and automatically inserts the required data communication equipment In addition autobauding supports the alignment of equipment with the capacity to transmit at different data rates e Station Hunting supports the use of a single dial code to access a group of host computer ports e Terminal Dialing provides the user with fast access to data communications via keyboard dialing at a terminal or PC eCommand Mode provides a menu of data services supporting terminal dialing and display and control of user data port options A user friendly Change Options menu is provided for user administration of data options e Expert Mode is an enhancement that provides an alternative method of accessing Command Mode functions It eliminates the display of menus and allows multiple commands to be entered on a single line Expert mode is suitable for use with c
404. n alternative to use of the SAT input terminal The other runs on the Master Controller UNIX PC as part of the Integrated Solution 2 307 FEATURES AND SERVICES A main menu gives the user ready access for these tasks Adding changing removing voice station assignments Adding removing users to and from coverage groups Saving translations A significant advantage of the AAS package is that it can be used either at the same location or can be used remotely via a dial up connection Considerations The default system administration password systemx5 can be changed through an administration item Note however that a system warm start or cold start will reset the password to this default Hardware Requirements The System Administration Terminal SAT is a Model 703 Data Terminal see Figure 2 49 It is a general purpose asynchronous full duplex printing data terminal with an RS 232 interface for data entry and retrieval It provides a paper record of all transactions When located within 50 feet of the system cabinets it can be directly connected to channel 1 on the ZTN129 CPU MEM Call Processing Unit Memory CP Either on premises or off premises access to the administration port is supported The terminal operates at a speed of 1200 bps 1200 baud Administration port parameters are as follows eNo parity bit is set to zero e1 start bit 1 stop bit and 7 data bits eAutobaud is invoked when carriage return
405. n cross connect wiring and the CPs immediately behind each connector Two slots are provided in the rear cover just above the 25 pair connectors for the Time Division Multiplex TDM bus extender cable The TDM cable is used to connect 2 or 3 cabinet systems in a daisy chain configuration and provides control and data signals between cabinets The Cabinet 1 ground block is connected to the single point ground of the system using 6 AWG wire Separate 6 AWG wires are then connected from the Cabinet 1 ground block to Cabinets 2 and 3 ground blocks The Cabinet 1 ground block is also connected to the Coupled Bonding Conductor An information label is provided across the top portion of the rear panel on each cabinet The label provides cabinet identification input electrical requirements caution and warning notes and FCC CSA and UL labels HARDWARE DESCRIPTION CABINET 3 12 PORT CIRCUIT PACKS CABINET 2 12 PORT CIRCUIT PACKS CABINET 1 CONTROL AND SERVICE CIRCUITS 10 PORT CIRCUIT PACKS Figure 4 1 System 25 Cabinets J58901A 3 Cabinet System 4 3 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION CAUTION amp WARNING GROUNDING LABELS FCC LABEL BLOCK SYSTEM 25 VOLTS AC J58901A AMPS HZ o o o oj 122222222227 2g 25 2 INPUT ON OFF CONNECTORS AC POWER SWITCH RECEPTACLE Figure 4 2 System Cabinet J58901A Rear View Cabinet 1 Control and Port Circuits Cabinet 1 is always required It provides mounting space for 1
406. n of LEDs and ringer P for programming feature buttons Built In Speakerphone With Volume Control Ringer Volume Control Eight Fixed Feature Buttons with status LED Conference Speakerphone Drop Recall Transfer Message Hold HFA1 Mic 10 Programmable Feature Buttons each equipped with l Use and status LEDS default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 3 Send All Calls l Account Code Entry 1 and Last Number Dialed I Adjunct e502A B Headset Adapters Note The 502B unit provides HFAI service on the headset 4 38 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION HANDSET TEST PROGRAM SWITCH ON SIDE PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS 10 WITH I USE AND STATUS LEDS TOUCH DIAL PAD RINGER VOLUME CONTROL ON SIDE CONFERENCE C HOLD SPEAKER VOLUME CONTROL messace _ RECALL C head E Figure 4 15 7313H01A Voice Terminal BIS 10 4 39 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 7314H01A Voice Terminal BIS 22 PEC 3166 228 The 7314 01 22 button voice terminal can be desk or wall mounted It is about 8 1 4 inches wide 9 1 4 inches deep and not including the handset 1 1 2 inches thick when desk mounted it is about 5 1 4 inches high in the back The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch Dial Pad not DTMF e ji Use and Status LEDS e Test Program Switch two positions T for testing operation of LEDs
407. n on either a System Access SA button or a Bridged Access BA button However since Following calls always arrive on SA buttons the destination station must have at least one SA button Following calls arriving at a principal SA button are accessible at BA buttons on the bridging station Callback Queuing Calls that follow are queued on the busy away station not the home station Callback attempts to the originator do not follow Coverage Calls to a signed in FPDC receive the coverage of that terminal Unanswered calls to a PDC at an away terminal return to the home terminal and receive the home terminal s coverage treatment they do not receive the away terminal s coverage Forwarding Either Following or Forwarding but not both can be active at a given time for a particular PDC Activation of one feature while the other is in effect overrides the other feature Remote Access Remote Access callers cannot use Following However Remote Access callers can activate Forwarding see the feature description for information on this capability 2 173 FEATURES AND SERVICES Forwarding Description This feature allows users to direct their incoming calls to another forwarded to voice terminal where they will be located temporarily Calls can be forwarded to inside stations or to locations outside System 25 Figure 2 21 is a simplified block diagram of this feature 1 1 FL CALLING FORWARDING FORWARDED TO STA
408. n the STN field Considerations Accountability if used consistently helps to ensure that calling costs are attributed accurately to the personnel who incur the costs Users do not use this feature when calling from their own stations or when making inside calls from any station Interactions All of the following conditions apply only when a user is calling from another user s station Account Code Entry Forced The account code entry can be made before or after the Call Accountability entry Dial tone is returned to the user after either entry Account Code Entry Optional This feature can be used on the same call with Call Accountability Call Accounting System The callers PDC that is entered by the Call Accountability procedure is integrated into the reports generated by Call Accounting systems Callback Queuing Any call accountability information entered before activation of queuing is saved for SMDR Display The characters and digits dialed to charge a call are displayed followed by the called number Pooled Facility Direct Access When a call is made using a FACILITY button PDC must be dialed before pressing the button Remote Access Remote Access callers cannot use Call Accountability Repertory Dialing When a call is made using a REP DIAL button PDC must be dialed before pressing the button Speed Dialing When a call is made using Speed Dialing PDC must be dialed before dialing the Speed
409. nal information Considerations The Attendant and Coverage Message Waiting features light the same basic Message indicator on each set The Station To Station feature may be assigned to programmable MSG WAIT buttons between two sets it lights the LED next to the button Administration Requirements Attendant Position Voice Terminal Port eAssign ATT MSG button defaulted Voice Terminal Port e Individual Coverage Message Waiting assign Coverage Message COVER MSG button eAssign Individual Coverage COVER I ND between sets e Station To Station Message Waiting assign paired Station Message Waiting MSG WAIT buttons Two multiline terminals must share this feature 2 217 FEATURES AND SERVICES Hardware Requirements Z34A Message Waiting Indicator MD if available can be used single line voice terminals not equipped with built in Message LEDs 2 218 Modem Pooling Modem Pooling Description Allows switched data connections between digital data endpoints and analog data endpoints Refer also to the discussion of the system s data features provided in the feature description Data transmission between digital and analog endpoints requires a conversion resource since the digital format used by the data module is not compatible with the modulated signals of an analog modem The conversion resource translates the digital signals from the digital endpoint into analog signals and vice versa
410. nal Dialing System Speed Dialing codes can be entered during Data Terminal Dialing Personal Speed Dialing is not supported Display When a call is placed by dialing a Personal Speed Dialing code the characters stored are displayed If was programmed to store a pause P is displayed in the position of the If was stored by programming only is displayed When a call is placed using a System Speed Dialing code only the dialed code 100 189 is displayed Last Number Dialed A number called with a Speed Dialing code is saved by the Last Number Dialed feature Personal Lines The Speed Dialing feature is not accessible from Personal Lines Remote Access Remote Access callers cannot use the Speed Dialing feature Repertory Dialing Storing a System Speed Dialing code 100 189 on a REP DIAL button saves memory space compared to storing the whole number again on the REP DIAL button Speed Dialing A Personal Speed Dialing number can include a System Speed Dialing code only as the first four characters but nowhere else Personal Speed Dialing numbers cannot include Personal Speed Dialing codes System Speed Dialing numbers cannot include any Speed Dialing codes Virtual Facilities A Virtual Facility code may be used within Personal or System Speed Dialing numbers When used it must appear at the beginning of the stored number first four characters Administration Requirements System eAssign System Speed Dialing Num
411. nd Pooled Facility Dial Access feature descriptions for additional information Trunks may be reserved for incoming calls e g sales or service department calls by specifying this in the administered Class of Service code Interactions The following features interact with Trunk Groups Direct Group Calling Most trunks may be administered so that incoming calls are directed to a specified DGC group For tie trunks only the automatic in type may be so administered 2 335 FEATURES AND SERVICES Facility Access Restriction see Calling Restrictions Stations be restricted from dialing the CO trunk pool and or all fifteen other trunk groups as a whole Stations so restricted may still dial out if they are transferred to a trunk by another station not so restricted Tie Trunks Refer to the feature description Toll Restriction see Calling Restrictions When toll restricted stations access FX WATS or Tie trunks they are not toll restricted i e toll restriction applies to CO trunks only Administration Requirements Trunk Port eAssign Trunk Type And Number eAssign Class Of Service Code DID 1 4 Other 0 15 eAssign Facility Access Code default codes are based on the CPS in a system They are assigned as follows Loop Start Trunks 100 Ground Start Trunks 101 Tie Trunks 102 eAllow Dial Access yes or no default yes eAssign To DGC Group Group Number 1 32 or 0 for none default
412. nd Maintenance Service RIMS Remote Initialization and Maintenance Service RIMS Description Remote Initialization and Maintenance Service RIMS provides AT amp T technician remote access to System 25 Using the RIMS feature the technician can do System 25 initialization ongoing administration and maintenance The remote administrator can initialize translations after the system is installed Unless a hardware change is required the remote administrator can do ongoing administration without having to visit the customer s site Similarly to troubleshoot a problem a technician can call the RIMS port and check the Error Log to determine the probable cause of the trouble The technician can clear alarms remotely and decide whether a service dispatch is necessary Considerations RIMS may not be available in some areas of the country Interactions A call to the RIMS port is logged by SMDR Administration Requirements For a RIMS call to be made during initialization at least one voice station and one trunk must be translated A full default cold start provides these translations 2 267 FEATURES AND SERVICES Repertory Dialing Description This feature allows multiline voice terminal users to store a telephone number account code or feature access code in the system s memory and associate that number with a REP DIAL button Pressing REP DIAL is equivalent to dialing the stored number Individual numbers can be up
413. nd some feature button operations no action is required of the station user to access this display Screen 2 is available for secondary and overflow information about calls 2 149 FEATURES AND SERVICES Display Operation Modes Most normal call handling activity such as placing and answering calls and using features takes place in Normal Mode Call displays in this mode require no manual action by the user except for operation of the SCROLL button to display Screen 2 in certain types of calls Some terminals SLACs and logged in DGC stations remain in Normal Mode unless their users deliberately enter another mode while others revert to a clock calendar display Local Mode when there is no call handling activity The Display feature has four other modes of operation that the user must enter to operate the Directory Inspect Local Display or Program features Directory Mode for searching for names numbers in the system s integrated directory entered by pressing DIRECTORY Inspection Mode for displaying information about call appearances assigned features stored numbers etc entered by pressing INSPECT Local Mode for accessing the built in clock and timer functions of the display unit entered by pressing LOCAL at some terminals default mode at some idle terminals Program Mode for supporting the Program feature and storing Repertory Dialing Flex DSS and Personal Speed Dialing numbers entered by moving the
414. nd transistors are under control of the port control comparators and provide a loop around path for the signal for testing purposes The relay driver buffers and inverts the relay drive signals from the port I O circuit so that a logic high input operates the appropriate relay The relays and electronic power feed device control the M lead circuitry to provide the proper signaling handshake for call progress tones and dial pulse dialing The electronic feed device provides a 48 volt dc current to the M lead circuits It also tests the M lead circuits for opens or shorts and prevents uncontrolled operation during power up The E lead test circuit provides a ground to the ground detector circuit for testing purposes The surge protection circuitry provides lightning surge and power cross protection for the circuit pack For each port circuit E amp M Simplex and surge protection are selected by switch settings as shown on 3 27 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 3 28 The signaling type is administrable for each port Table 3 B summarizes the conditions present as the transmit and receive control signals for each signaling type Table 3 C lists the preferred TN760B tie trunk signaling format to be used in the likely to be encountered installation situations PORT CIRCUIT 0 we ON BOARD PORT MICRO 1 0 PROCESSOR CIRCUIT TO GROUND TIE DETECTOR TRUNKS CIRCUIT 3 Figure 3 15 Tie Trunk TN760B Unique Circuitry UN
415. ndle calls from this trunk eAssign unique trunk identifiers System eAssign DID number for attendant 0 treatment e Assign Coverage Group number for which the console queue is to serve as a receiver eAssign Automatic Hold or Automatic Release eEnable ring reminder when calls enter queue eAssign Hold timer interval eAssign destination of held calls that time out eAssign call types and attendant specification for Message Center Like operation in a two console configuration if applicable eAssign call type priorities and attendant specification eAssign Position Busy backup station if applicable 2 32 Attendant Console Switched Loop Hardware Requirements Each console requires a port on a ZTN79 ATL Station circuit pack Figure 2 5 provides a connection diagram for the SLAC SYSTEM 25 CABINET ZTNT9 HYBRID LINE CP LEGEND PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP SWITCHED LOOP gt ATTENDANT CONSOLE 1 B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P 7305H04C BUILT IN SPEAKERPHONE BIS DISPLAY VOICE TERMINAL 3162 DI S OR 7317H01A DELUXE BIS WITH DISPLAY VOICE TERMINAL 3167 DSB Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE W RING CABLE FURNI SHED BY INSTALLER RANGE WITHIN 2000 FEET OF SYSTEM CABINET LOCAL POWER REQUIRED gt 1000 FEET Figure 2 5 Switched Loop Attend
416. ndle more than one call on that same extension number at the same time Multiplexed The simultaneous transmission of two or more signals over a common transmission medium NPA Number Plan Area Network An arrangement of inter and or intra location circuits designed to perform specific functions Network Interface Provided by the CO telephone company in two forms 1 RJ21X for trunk facilities other than tie trunks 2 RJ2GX for tie trunk facilities Off Premises Station OPS An arrangement provided by the local telephone company which permits remote Terminal Equipment to operate as though it was directly connected to the System 25 This tariffed service can only be provided for FCC registered single line voice terminals GLOSSARY Out Of Building Station The Terminal Equipment is directly connected to the System 25 but is not located in the same building as the common equipment Special arrangements are made to protect the system and its users from lightning power line crosses etc Only the single line and 7300H series of voice terminal may be so connected MET Sets can not be connected as Out Of Building stations Outside Call A connection between a system user and a party on the public telephone network or on a tie trunk PDC Personal Dial Code PFT Power Failure Transfer Paging Trunk A telecommunications channel used to access an amplifier for loudspeaker paging Parameter Any set of physical
417. ne ARS pattern and more than once within a pattern Call routing can be specified by as many as eight routing patterns Each pattern contains a sequential list of routes for example trunk groups the system can use to complete a call Number translations deletion and addition of dialed digits necessary to route the call is determined on a trunk group basis Overflow to the local CO when all trunks in a pattern are busy or the route FRL is too high is optional If all trunks in a pattern are busy including CO trunks if overflow is allowed the call may be queued via the Callback Queuing feature on the first route in the pattern All calls placed using the ARS access code default 9 are routed via the feature The dialed numbers that follow the ARS access code are generally seven or ten digit DDD numbers preceded by a 1 if required by the serving Central Office Numbers preceded by a 0 are routed over the local CO pooled facility Typically a dialed 7 digit number consists of a CO code and exchange number in the form NXX YYYY where N 2 9 X 0 9 and Y 0 9 A 10 digit number consists of an area code CO code and exchange number in the form NPA NXX YYYY where N 2 9 P 0 1 A 1 9 X 0 9 and Y 0 9 Each route in a pattern has an associated FRL 0 3 This FRL may differ each time the facility is specified as a route A facility with a FRL of 0 is least restricted to callers a FRL of 3 is the most res
418. nections 4 65 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF EXPOSED CABLE SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINAL NOTE LEGEND 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 C5 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 FURNISHED WITH SET D STANDARD GAS TUBE FUSE PROTECTION PER BSP 460 100 400 G APPROVED BUILDING GROUND Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE NOTE MAXI MUM LOOP RESISTANCE FROM SYSTEM CABINET 1300 OHMS FIVE SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINALS CAN BE BRIDGED ONLY TWO MAY BE OFF HOOK AT ONE TIME FURNISHED BY INSTALLER t INCLUDES VOICE TERMI NAL Figure 4 27 Out of Building Single Line Voice Terminal Connections 4 66 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION PART OF TAE SYSTEM 25 PART OF 700 NETWORK CABINET OCTOPUS INTERFACE BLOCK CABLE 110 OR 6 PART OF NETWORK INTERFACE SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINAL LEGEND A SINGLE ENDED 25 PAIR CABLE A25D C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05 1 4 PAIR INSIDE W RING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 4 28 Off Premises Station Single Line Voice Terminal Connections 4 67 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 4 68 SYSTEM 25 PART OF CABINET OCTOPUS Figure 4 29 ZTN79 ATL LINE CP CABLE PART OF SIP c2 gt TERMINAL LEGEND 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK 1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH SET C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780
419. nesses have found a need to access the data bases sales inventory personnel in these PCs from more than one location both on and off premises System 25 data features are specially engineered to enhance a user s ability to access data from multiple locations System 25 has been designed to help these businesses use their personal computers data terminals and host computers more effectively by providing the 1 10 OVERVIEW following features e Circuit switched data communications up to 19 200 bps RS 232 interface provide circuit switched connections from asynchronous data terminals PCs or host computers to host computers or network facilities Users can be located and or moved to any on premises office equipped with the standard AT amp T 4 pair wiring plan Thus an asynchronous terminal or PC can have access to multiple host computers remote data bases via a modem pool and a local area network STARLAN via System 25 s STARLAN NETWORK gateway ePacket switched data connections at 1 million bps over AT amp T s STARLAN NETWORK local area network provide data transfer between client PCs and servers PCs host computers printers etc on the local area network LAN LAN users can be located and or moved to any on premises office equipped with standard AT amp T 4 pair wiring The LAN allows PCs to share facilities printers disk systems modem pools etc eSystem 25 s STARLAN NETWORK ACCESS software and STARLAN NETWORK gateway
420. nference Speaker Drop Message Transfer Recall Hold 34 Programmable Feature Buttons only ten with I Use and Status LEDs default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 27 Send All Calls 1 Account Code Entry 1 and Last Number Dialed 1 Note Programmable buttons without LEDs should be used only for features that do not require l Use and or status indications Adjuncts e502A B Headset Adapters Note The 502B unit provides HFAI service on the headset eS102A Speakerphone PEC3163 HFU 4 28 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION I USE STATUS LEDs PROGRAMMABLE HANDSET BUTTONS 34 TEST PROGRAM SWITCH ON SIDE TOUCH DIAL PAD SPEAKER RING VOLUME CONTROL ON SIDE CONFERENCE TRANSFER E DROP HOLD RECALL Figure 4 10 7305H01D Voice Terminal 34 Button MD 4 29 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 7305H02D Voice Terminal 34 Button Deluxe PEC 3162 417 The 7305H02D voice terminal Figure 4 11 is available for general use and as a Direct Trunk Attendant Console The voice terminal is about 10 1 4 inches wide 5 1 2 inches high and 8 1 2 inches deep It comes equipped with the following eHandset e Touch Dial Pad not DTIMF el Use and Status LEDs e Test Program Switch two positions T for testing operation of LEDs and ringer P for programming feature buttons e Built in Speaker e Speaker Ringer Volume Control eSeven Fixed Feature Buttons with sta
421. ng see CCS Hundred Call Seconds Extension Number One through four digit number assigned to each voice terminal and data end point in the system Also see Dial Code Extended Station A single line voice terminal located more than 2000 feet from the system cabinets External Call A connection between a system user and a party on the public telephone network or on a tie trunk usually referred to as an outside or trunk call FRL Facility Restriction Level GLOSSARY Facility physical A transmission channel to another switching system to a Central Office for example By application examples are eCO Trunks eFX Trunks eWATS Trunks eTie Trunks By technical type these include loop start ground start DID automatic ringdown etc These facilities may be accessed by their facility access codes FACs Feature A specifically defined function or service provided by the system Feature Button A labeled button on a voice terminal or attendant console designating a specific feature Foreign Exchange FX A central office other than the one providing local access to the public telephone network Foreign Exchange Trunk A telecommunications channel that directly connects the system to a central office other than its local central office Foreign Numbering Plan Area Code FNPA An area code other than the local area code also known as the other area code The foreign area code must
422. ng If the user is off hook on the queued call button pressing the DROP button and then the queued call button cancels the queued call 2 107 FEATURES AND SERVICES Coverage Group Description This feature allows calls to covered stations to be redirected to a group of covering stations A total of 32 standard Coverage Groups be assigned an additional 32 DGC Coverage Groups may be assigned Each standard group may be covered by up to eight coverage receivers buttons There is no limit on the number of covered users senders that each Coverage Group can include but a covered user can be assigned to only one Coverage Group Each coverage receiver must have a multiline set equipped with a Cover COVER GRP button except as noted below A covering set may be assigned more than one COVER GRP button for the same or different groups In systems equipped with a Switched Loop Attendant Consoles SLAC the console queue can serve as a standard coverage group receiver The consoles cannot have COVER GRP buttons so the queue directs coverage calls to LOOP buttons Direct Group Calling DGC Groups may be designated as Coverage Group receivers This provides the capability for System 25 to support non integrated voice mail systems as well as allow the formation of coverage pools Senders may be either single line or multiline voice terminals Receivers may be single line voice terminals only if part of a DGC Coverage Group Mu
423. ng CANCEL terminates the destination call and reconnects the attendant to the calling party If the attendant goes on hook without first releasing a call the call extending operation will be terminated the calling party will be disconnected Automatic Release This feature simplifies the attendant procedures by eliminating the need for the attendant to press RELEASE when releasing from one call to handle another Selection of any new line facility while active on the Start button will automatically release the first call At release the status LED of the first calling facility will change from hold to busy for direct trunk terminations and from hold to idle for other call facilities e g Loop Return On Busy Return On Don t Answer Cover Automatic Intercom DSS and System Access The Automatic Hold feature can be administered for the SLAC as an alternative to Automatic Release if the attendant active on a loop call presses another loop button to place a call or pick up a held call the active call is put on hold not released Considerations Attendant Manual Release improves attendant efficiency in handling calls by allowing the attendant to release an extended call without having to wait for the called station to answer Attendant Automatic Release enhances the attendant s ability to handle many calls by eliminating the Release operation when answering a second call The Release function is inhibited whenever the Start facility
424. ng Delay Announcement End to End Signaling Extended Stations External Alerts Integrated Solution Intercept Treatment With Reorder Tone Interdigit Timeouts Music On Hold Night Service Directed and TAAS Night Service Delay Announcements Out Of Building Stations Paging System Access Personal Dial Codes Pooled Facility Dial Access Power Failure Transfer Remote Administration Interface Remote Initialization and Maintenance Services RIMS Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Administration System Maintenance Touch Tone and Dial Pulse Service deice Message System 5 0 0 5 5 0 0 0 5 5 0 0 5 0 S O Standard for Directed Optional for TAAS Night Service FEATURES AND SERVICES Station Features The many Station Features Table 2 B available allow individual user needs to be met As these needs change assigned features can also be changed Station Features provide many important services that help save time and make calling more convenient Table 2 B Station Features FEATURE NAME SINGLE LINE MULTILINE TERMINAL FEATURE TERMINAL BUTTON LABEL TYPE Account Code Entry Forced FACE Account Code Entry Optional Automatic Intercom Bridging of System Access Buttons Busy to Idle Reminder Callback Queuing Calling Restrictions Accountabilit Call Progress Tones Call Waiting Conference Conference Drop Coverage Group Coverage Individual Dial Access to Message Waiti
425. ng Indications Direct Station Selection DSS Directory Display Distinctive Ringing Exclusion Following Forwarding Hands Free Answer On Intercom HFAI Headset Adapter Adjunct Hold Inspection Last Number Dialed Leave Word Calling LWC Line Selection Line Status And l Use Indications Local Display Manual Signaling Messaging Services Park Personal Lines Pickup Pooled Facility Button Access FACILITY ACCT ENTRY AUTO ICOM CONFERENCE DROP COVER GRP COVER IND x DSS FLEX 055 DIRECTORY SCROLL x EXCLUSION AUTO ANS HOLD INSPECT LAST DIALED LEAVE WORD X LOCAL PERS LINE FEATURES AND SERVICES Table 2 Station Features Contd FEATURE NAME SINGLE LINE MULTILINE TERMINAL FEATURE TERMINAL BUTTON LABEL TYPE Program x 5 Recall 5 Repertory Dialing REP DIAL 5 Send All Calls S Speaker Spokesman Service SPEAKER 5 Speakerphone Adjunct x 0 Speed Dialing x 5 Station Hunting S Station To Station Message Waiting MSG WAIT 5 Test 5 Transfer X TRANSFER S Trunk To Trunk Transfer x x 5 Network Features This group of features Table 2 C supports communications with the public network and with other locations in the private network of which System 25 can be Table 2 C Network Features FEATURE NAME FEATURE TYPE Automatic Route Selection Direct Inward Dialing Off Premises Stations Remote
426. ng PDC FPDC is returned to the attendant the FPDC s status LED on the Selector Console will flash during ringing and go dark when the call is answered Direct Group Calling External calls that are camped onto a DGC group that does not have a delay announcement will return to the attendant console after the specified number of rings Send All Calls DTAC only If Send All Calls is activated returning calls will ring at the DTAC Administration Requirements System eAssign number of seconds before unanswered camped on calls return to the Attendant Position 1 120 or 0 for no Camp On default 30 2 49 FEATURES AND SERVICES Attendant Return Coverage On Don t Answer Description This feature allows unanswered calls extended by the attendant to be returned to the attendant for additional service Calls that are not answered after a administered number of rings will transfer ringing to the Return On Don t Answer RTN DA button on a Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTAC or to a LOOP button on a Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC If the called voice terminal has Coverage the counting of rings for return begins only after the coverage station begins ringing If the terminal does not have Coverage but does have delayed ringing on System Access or Bridged Access buttons the delay interval administered as an equivalent number of rings must expire before counting begins When the RTN DA button is busy calls will continue to ring
427. ng codes can be dialed from data terminals Personal Speed Dialing is not supported Administration Requirements Data Port See the table of Permissible Data Port Options in the Command Mode feature description Hardware Requirements TN726 Data Line CP to support each digital endpoint TN758 Pooled Modem CP to support data calls between digital and analog endpoints 2 127 FEATURES AND SERVICES Dial Access to Message Waiting Indicators Description This feature allows users to turn on or turn off the message waiting indicator on any voice terminal in the system by dialing a code To turn on a Message LED at some station the user first goes off hook or flashes the switchhook to get dial tone The user then dials activation code 90 followed by the extension number of the target station If the attempt to turn on the LED is allowed the caller receives confirmation tone and the connection is dropped If the dialed station has no Message LED or if the extension number is invalid the attempt is denied and the caller gets reorder tone In conjunction with Dial Access service each Direct Group Calling DGC group in the system may have one station assigned as receiver of message waiting indications If a caller dials the number of a DGC group the system routes the message waiting request to the extension of the designated message waiting indication receiver The procedure for turning off a Message LED parallels the turn on
428. ng cords are available in optional lengths of 18 inches and 14 feet 2 274 Speakerphone Adjunct The unit has a SPEAKERPHONE pushbutton switch and ON OFF pushbutton switch The former controls the entire unit the latter turns the microphone on and off for privacy Each button has an associated green status LED The S101A Speakerphone must be powered locally with a 2012D Transformer that plugs into a 115V ac receptacle Adjunct power supplies are described in Section 4 The S102A Speakerphone does not require supplemental power except when used with a 34 Button Deluxe voice terminal Detailed speakerphone adjunct connection information is provided in the following figures e Figure 2 35 Bpeakerphone Connections for 7300H Series Multiline Voice Terminals Except 34 Button Sets Figure 2 36 Connections for 34 Button Voice Terminals elFigure 2 37 Speakerphone Connections for 12 Button MET Sets 2 275 FEATURES AND SERVICES 2 276 ON LAMP VOLUME CONTROL SPEAKERPHONE TRANSMITTER 4A SPEAKERPHONE SYSTEM 5101 5102 SPEAKERPHONE Figure 2 34 Speakerphone Adjuncts Speakerphone Adjunct SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE PART OF SIP ZTN79 HYBRID LINE CP VOICE TERMINAL 102A SPEAKERPHONE PEC 3163 HFU LEGEND 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED W
429. ng the idle queued for station Callback Queuing eCallback Cancellation The user can cancel a call that was queued manually or automatically At a multiline set if the call is queued off hook the user presses the DROP button then the queued call button If the call is queued on hook the user must go off hook press the queued call button to become active on the call press DROP and then press the queued call button again At a single line set the user must get dial tone then dial the callback cancel access code 61 The attendant at a Switched Loop Attendant Console cancels a queued call by becoming active on the queued call LOOP button and pressing DROP Outside Calls Only trunk pools can be queued for not individual trunks Queuing for trunk pools is similar to queuing for inside stations except for the tones received and the methods of placing calls To be eligible for queuing when not using ARS a trunk pool must have all of its members administered to be queuable by dial access users To make an outside call the user dials the access code of the pooled facility then after second dial tone the rest of the desired outside number The dialing must be terminated by pressing or by waiting for timeout If all trunks are busy and the calling station is administered for automatic queuing for outside calls queuing tone is returned to the caller Note that dialing the complete outside number is required even if all trunks are
430. ng users to temporarily remove their voice terminals from the coverage path This feature is activated by pressing the SEND ALL CALLS button It is deactivated by pressing the button a second time Considerations Send All Calls gives the user the option of having incoming calls sent directly to coverage or making the terminal busy to incoming calls without sending them to coverage The feature is intended for occasional or temporary use Send All Calls must be assigned to a button that has a status light The light turns on when the feature is in effect The following types of calls always ring at a station regardless of the status of Send All Calls e Automatic Intercom calls eDirected Night Service calls e Calls to a PDC that is signed in at the station Note Calls to an FPDC do not ring when Send AII Calls is in effect e Calls returning to DTAC RTN BUSY or RTN DA buttons Send All Calls cannot be assigned to a SLAC The Attendant Position Busy feature provides a similar capability When Send All Calls is in effect at a station and incoming calls are directed to coverage ringing at the sending station is not necessarily canceled completely A single ring reminder for incoming calls is optional assigned by the System Administrator for each Send All Calls button On calls to non busy stations where Send All Calls has been activated the callers hear ringing until a covering station answers or if the station is not cove
431. ng will be sent If a covering station activates Send All Calls the station is removed from the coverage path completely Coverage calls will not be directed to the station Coverage Group f a station with Send All Calls activated has group coverage and all the coverage receivers are busy a call waits at the station while the system periodically checks for an idle receiver When one becomes available the call is directed to the covering station Coverage Individual If a station with Send All Calls activated has only individual coverage and all coverage receivers are busy a call stays at the station it does not go to coverage Display When Send All Calls is invoked the sending station still receives incoming call information If the calls are being sent to coverage the proceeding to coverage descriptor An c appears in position 16 Screen 1 146 Pearson M c Distinctive Ringing Normal audible ringing is turned off for incoming calls when Send All Calls is activated unless single ring reminder is administered Forwarding Forwarding supersedes Send All Calls A call forwarded from a station with Send All Calls activated will not go to coverage or to bridging stations unless the call is not answered at the forwarded to station and returns After returning the call routes according to the Send All Calls feature 2 271 FEATURES AND SERVICES Hands Free Answer on Intercom Activating Send All Calls will cause an acti
432. ngement Figure 4 5 2526BMWG Voice Terminal 4 19 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 7101 Voice Terminal MD 3170 00M The Model 7101 A single line analog voice terminal Figure 4 6 is about 2 3 4 inches wide 3 1 2 inches high and 8 1 2 inches deep The set comes equipped with the following e Handset eTouch Tone Dial e Message Indicator e Tone Ringer with Volume Control e Two Fixed Feature Buttons Recall Used to place a call on hold and to obtain recall dial tone for Conference Transfer and other features accessible by feature access code Disconnect Used to disconnect one call and immediately obtain dial tone for another call Adjuncts None TOUCH TONE TELEPHONE DIAL RECALL DISCONNECT HANDSET VOLUME CONTROL Figure 4 6 710A Voice Terminal 4 20 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 420 Speakerphone Voice Terminal Not Orderable The 420 Speakerphone voice terminal Figure 4 7 is a single line analog set that can be desk or wall mounted The 420 Speakerphone set can no longer be ordered It has the following components and features e Handset e Touch Tone Dial e Built In Speakerphone e Twelve Memory Buttons where emergency numbers and frequently called numbers can be stored for quick calling e Six Fixed Feature Buttons Program For entering the memory button programming mode Redial For recalling the last number dialed Flash For generating a timed switchhook fla
433. ngle line voice terminals but only two can be off hook at one time The ZTN78 CP does not support bridged terminals In addition the TN742 supports out of building extended and off premises stations the ZTN78 does not The Analog Line has the following unique circuitry eRinging Application Circuit This circuit receives ringing voltage from the power supply It monitors ringing voltage and current generates signals to the on board microprocessor indicating zero ringing voltage and current and detects a terminal user lifting the receiver during ringing This prevents the application of ringing to the port circuit when a terminal user lifts the receiver during the ringing phase Maintenance circuitry is also included The maintenance circuitry detects when a terminal is connected to the port circuitry and checks for faults in the ringing application circuitry e Port I O Circuit This circuit consists of bus expanders connecting the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the on board microprocessor 3 14 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PORT CIRCUIT ELECTRONIC HYBRID BATTERY FEED OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION NPE 0 NPE 1 1 0 RCUIT PORT ON BOARD ee CIRCUIT MICRO PROCESSOR TO ANALOG RINGING TIP RING APPLICATION VOICE CIRC
434. nks For any trunk type not assigned in the system the associated button does not receive a default assignment On the second Console these buttons do not receive default assignments Adjunct 502A B Headset Adapters Note The 502B unit provides HFAI service on the headset PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS 34 WITH I USE AND STATUS LEDS HANDSET TEST PROGRAM SWITCH ON SIDE TOUCH DIAL PAD RINGER VOLUME CONTROL ON SIDE CONFERENCE 7 TRANSFER DROP wg SPEAKERPHONE VOLUME CONTROL amp MICROPHONE NS NESSAGE SPEAKERPHONE Figure 4 17 7316H01A Voice Terminal BIS 34 4 43 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 7317H01A Voice Terminal BIS 34D PEC 3167 DSB The 7317H01A 34 button voice terminal with display Figure 4 18 is available for general use and as a SLAC In general use it can be desk or wall mounted as a console it is normally desk mounted Display can be administered for SLACs and general use positions The set is about 9 1 4 inches wide 9 1 4 inches deep and not including the handset 1 1 2 inches thick when desk mounted it is about 5 1 4 inches high in the back The set comes equipped with the following eHandset e Touch Dial Pad not DTMF el Use and Status LEDS e Test Program Switch two positions T for testing operation of LEDs and ringer P for programming feature buttons e Built In Display Module Screen for call information and time displays Cl
435. nly outside calls only or all calls Manual activation is by dial access at single line sets and by operation of the RECALL button at multiline sets Automatic activation if administered occurs whenever a busy facility is called and requires no action by the caller it can be canceled manually Inside Calls An inside station is considered busy if all its System Access SA buttons are in use multiline sets if it is off hook single line sets and if all coverage points are busy A call to such a station will receive busy or special ringback tone if the calling station is not administered for automatic queuing the caller can then activate queuing manually If the calling station has automatic queuing the caller hears queuing tone five short beeps instead of busy or special ringback and the call goes into queue eManual Queuing A single line terminal user activates manual queuing by flashing the switchhook to get recall dial tone and then dialing the callback access code 60 A multiline user presses RECALL to manually queue for a busy station Queuing tone is returned if the call can be queued if not reorder tone is heard and the caller must try again later eAutomatic Queuing When the user of a single line or multiline terminal administered for this option calls a busy station queuing tone is returned immediately If maximum queue size has been reached the caller gets busy tone and must try again later e Off Hook Queuing
436. nly when a Voice Message System VMS is connected to the System 25 the VMS provides the message processing and voice synthesizing facilities used by LWC The interface between System 25 and VMS requires administration of special ports on analog tip ring circuit packs LWC enhances the messaging capabilities of System 25 by enabling users to generate call me voice messages for PDCs and FPDCs The messages have a format such as Call name on extension number and are assembled stored and delivered by VMS Called parties are alerted to their messages by lighted Message LEDs when available At a multiline voice terminal LWC can be used when the terminal is off hook under any of the following conditions e Receiving busy tone eReceiving ringback tone eQueued on the called station e Connected to a coverage point for the called station LWC is then activated by pressing the LEAVE WORD button which sends a request to VMS to leave a message for the called endpoint station or FPDC An LWC message can also be sent when the multiline terminal is not active on a call In this case the user goes off hook to get dial tone presses LEAVE WORD and dials the desired extension number The single line voice terminal user who wishes to leave a message at another station must first go from the on hook state to the off hook state to get dial tone Then the user dials LWC code 92 followed by the desired extension number in all these p
437. nnect the caller to the ringing line and separate the call from the console As an alternative a DTAC attendant or a SLAC attendant with Automatic Release administered can go straight to another call by pressing any facility button such as System Access Loop Automatic Intercom or an outside line this completes the call extending procedure if a SLAC attendant has Automatic Hold administered instead of Automatic Release pressing a facility button simply puts the incoming call on hold and does not extend it The attendant has the option of staying connected to the ringing line to announce the call before connecting the two parties The attendant can then release or SLAC only join the other parties in a 3 way connection by using the Attendant Join feature If busy tone is heard and Attendant Camp On see associated feature description is not desired the attendant presses CANCEL and is reconnected to the calling party If busy tone is heard on a call to an inside station and Attendant Camp On is desired the attendant presses RELEASE The called party hears a tone burst and the call waits at the called voice terminal When a busy single line station goes on hook or a busy multiline station System Access button becomes idle the call automatically begins ringing at the station Attendant Call Extending Calls extended to an idle voice terminal that are not answered within a specified time return to the Attendant Console
438. nnection to the data port This option is needed for AT amp T STAR LAN NETWORK endpoints to disconnect from a STARLAN Interface CP through Command Mode Accessing lt Hangup gt provides the user with these options lt eXit gt Do not hang up Return to the top level of Command Mode e lt All gt Hang up disconnected 2 98 Command Mode Table 2 G Partial List of Permissible Data Port TN726 Options OPTION DEFINITION Speed 61 68 T Autobaud Low 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Parity 69 Odd Even 0 1 0 and 1 choices not shown on the user s display Enable Command Mode 70 Yes or No Must be On for Command Mode i e Command Mode Menu display Not shown on user s options display Allow user to change data port options 71 Yes or No Used to enable disable User Changeable options feature Not shown on user s options display Permit Mismatch 72 Yes or No Allows two data endpoints to communicate at different rates Local Echo 73 Yes or No Determines whether characters from the data equipment will be echoed by System 25 during Command Mode Answer Text 75 Yes or No Enables call progress messages to be displayed at the called data endpoint Connected Indication 77 Yes or No Yes indicates that users who have Command Mode enabled will receive the CONNECTED message when a connection has been established If Command Mode is disabled the Data Line port control lea
439. normal disconnect procedures of each network If a failure in the established connection occurs call disconnections are initiated from both sides 2 286 STARLAN NETWORK Access Third Party Call Setup A data terminal on System 25 or workstation on the STARLAN NETWORK can set up a call between two other stations voice or data using the Third Party Call Setup feature Since voice port data port associations are not meaningful for STARLAN CP ports STARLAN NETWORK workstations must always specify the Personal Dial Code of the source voice terminal or the Data Dial Code of the source data terminal Note that this feature can only be administered for the STARLAN CP ports as a group and not for individual STARLAN NETWORK workstations When placing voice calls using CAM Third Party Call Setup is used automatically Wiring The STARLAN NETWORK wiring plan is based on standard 4 pair building wiring The STARLAN NETWORK uses two pairs of the 4 pair cable allowing the remaining two pairs to be used for voice service STARLAN NETWORK data is transmitted over pairs two and three Figures and provide typical connection information A Y adapter may be used to combine split the pairs at the System 25 cross connect field STARLAN NETWORK NAUS provide an RJ11 phone jack that terminates pair 1 Single line sets may be plugged directly into this jack MERLIN Communications System sets require an ATL adapter and local power ATL Adapters The ATL adap
440. not be placed on hold if any other stations that share the line are also off hook on the line 2 243 FEATURES AND SERVICES Line Selection Prime Line Preference Prime Line Preference may be assigned to a Personal Line Park A parked Personal Line is bridgeable by any user with a button appearance of that line Bridging on to the connection does not unpark the call in this case the parked call will not return to the parking user Pickup After a call is picked up from a Personal Line button the called terminal can still enter the call Pooled Facility Personal Line may also be a member of a pooled facility group Toll Restriction see Calling Restrictions A call over a Personal Line is subject to the toll restrictions of the station on which the call was placed Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port eAssign Personal Line trunk number eAssign Personal Line feature button this the Principal Station yes or no eEnable Personal Line Ringing yes or no Hardware Requirements Requires port assignments for each trunk interface to be provided and a button termination on multiline voice terminals 2 244 Pickup Pickup Description This feature allows a user to answer a call ringing at another voice terminal There are two forms of Pickup 1 Directed and 2 Group Directed Pickup Directed Pickup allows calls to other voice terminals including Automatic Intercom calls and call
441. ns e Call Appearance area provides call appearance for voice lines and data lines for each extension shown A call timer for each line is also displayed eFeature Selection area allows the user to select the voice or data line to be used initiate the call and start the timer by function keys Additional function keys may be assigned to Repertory Dialing numbers 2 101 FEATURES AND SERVICES RS 232 C EX R5232C COMMUNI CATI ONS DRI VER PORT ACCESS MANAGER NAUCOM STARLAN DRI VER NAU PORT PERSONAL COMPUTER Figure 2 13 Communications Access Manager Architecture e Personal Directory area holds a maximum of 200 entries displayed 10 entries at a time Each screen is arranged alphabetically eMessage and Status area contains prompts and messages for the user for the action being executed e Command Line area contains commands available to the user for the area being worked in Commands are executed when the user presses the ALT key and the first letter of the command The user may access the following commands Data mode provides the user with the terminal emulation screen Edit provides the user with the directory edit screen Allows the user to add modify and erase directory entries group names and feature functions Directory entries contain name number with auto login script comment group and voice data fields Data entries also have parameter setup a screen with fields
442. ns Analog Transmission Characteristics Cable Distance Limtations gt Z J Call Progress Tones 5 70 27 Central Office Trunks Hardware and Sofware 2 STARLAN Interface ZTN84 STARLAN N Access Connection to System 2512 2892 12 290 Station Extended Station Message Detail Recording Call Detail Report 2 298 Surge Suppressor AC Power Line Switch Digital Switched Loop Attendant Console Attendant Operation Switched Services Software Switching Network 3 6 System AC Power Requirements Access Buttons Administration Administration Terminal Air Purity Requirements 6 5 Block Diagram Cabinets J58901A1 10441 0 0 0 Call Handling C Description Environmental Requirements Equipment Configuration INDEX System Continued Errors And Functional Description Grounding Requirements 0 8 Lighting Requirements 6 5 Lightning Protection Requrements 6 8 Cd Maintenan e Technical Specifications Temperature and Humidity Hequiremen Wall Space Requirements System Speed Dialing 2 280 Special Characters 2 280 T Table Top Space 6 4 1 1 259 1 Tandem Trunking Tape Unit Digital 2 134 Technical Specifications Temperature and 64 lt 1 1 Terminal Dialing for Voice 2 322 1 Terminal Equipment 414___ ef Tes 2 327 1 Third Party S
443. nswered the EXCLUSION LED lights steadily to track all the conference buttons Conference When Exclusion is invoked all other inside parties will be dropped If a private conference including inside parties is desired the user should activate Exclusion first and then set up the conference 2 162 Exclusion Coverage f a coverage receiver invokes Exclusion after answering a coverage call all other terminals including the attendant and the covered station are excluded The covered user cannot enter the call until Exclusion is pressed a second time by the covering user Display When a display station attempts to enter a personal line or bridged appearance that has the Exclusion feature in effect EXCLUDED is displayed Hold A call can be placed on hold after Exclusion is invoked The l Use LED will go dark the status LED of the line appearance button and the Exclusion button will wink Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port eAssign EXCLUSION button 2 163 FEATURES AND SERVICES Expert Mode Description Expert Mode is an enhancement to the Command Mode feature that provides an alternative method of performing the full range of Command Mode functions By eliminating the display of menus and allowing multiple commands to be entered on a single line Expert Mode lends itself to computer driven instructions Individual users who are very familiar with Command Mode operations may also find it useful When Expert M
444. ntegrated Solution Hardware Requirements Requires appropriate cables and connectors for Administration and or Call Accounting Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters are provided under the heading in section 4 of this manual 2 195 FEATURES AND SERVICES Intercept Treatment With Reorder Tones Description Reorder tone fast busy is provided when a call cannot be completed for example when an unassigned or toll restricted number is dialed a dialing error occurs a requested trunk group is busy or an attempt to park a call fails Calls to FPDCs that are not signed in anywhere or to unassigned DID numbers will be routed to the attendant or will receive Reorder Tone at the System Administrators option Any attempt to dial a restricted call toll or access restricted will be intercepted and routed to Reorder Tone Considerations Intercept treatment provides a calling party with positive feedback of an error in dialing or use of an incorrect code Interactions The following feature interacts with Intercept Treatment With Reorder Tones Account Code Entry Forced The user receives reorder tone when an account code is required on a call but is not entered Callback Queuing f automatic Callback Queuing CBQ for outside calls is administered and all trunks are busy Queuing Tone is returned to the calling party If automatic CBQ is not administere
445. number that he or she is restricted from dialing 2 268 Repertory Dialing Display When a call is placed by pressing a REP DIAL button the characters stored are displayed If was programmed to store a pause P is displayed in the position of the If was stored by programming only is displayed If the button is not programmed REP DIAL is displayed Following Forwarding The associated activation and deactivation sequences or portions of them can be stored on REP DIAL buttons Last Number Dialed number called by pressing a DIAL button is saved by the Last Number Dialed feature Speed Dialing Numbers already stored as System Speed Dialing numbers can also be stored as Repertory Dialing numbers Storing a System Speed Dialing code 100 189 on a REP DIAL button saves memory space compared to storing the whole number again on a REP DIAL button Virtual Facilities Virtual Facility codes can be stored on REP DIAL buttons Voice Terminal Port eAssign Repertory Dialing REP DIAL buttons 2 269 FEATURES AND SERVICES Send All Calls Description This feature allows multiline voice terminal users to turn off their ringers and invoke a do not disturb condition toward incoming calls In addition users who have coverage or bridged appearances will have those calls directed immediately to their covering and or bridging stations without the normal system ringing delay Send All Calls also allows coveri
446. o dark when the call is answered 2 50 Attendant Return Coverage On Don t Answer Coverage eDTAC only Whenever DTAC attendant is a coverage receiver for a particular coverage group and call is placed from the attendant position via the Start button or the Selector Console to a voice terminal in that group the Coverage Group COVER GRP button on the Attendant Console will not track the call COVER GRP button status LED will not flash If the call remains unanswered it will return to the Attendant Console on the RTN DA button rather than the COVER GRP button e SLAC only Whenever the common queue is a receiver for a coverage group and call is placed from the attendant position via the START button or the Selector Console to a voice terminal in that group an unanswered call will return to the attendant queue as a Return On Don t Answer call instead of as a coverage call Send All Calls DTAC only If Send All Calls is activated returning calls will ring at the DTAC Administration Requirements System e Assign number of rings before call return to the Attendant Position 1 31 default 5 FEATURES AND SERVICES Attendant Source and Destination SLAC Only Description This feature allows the attendant while extending a call to switch back and forth between the calling party the source and the called party the destination before connecting them together Pressing the SOURCE button on the SLAC after th
447. o a System 25 station that has the Forwarding feature activated will forward like any other incoming calls to the station Remote Access callers can activate Forwarding to outside numbers at System 25 stations Forwarding to other inside stations is not allowed Hold This feature cannot be used by Remote Access callers Night Service Directed Remote Access trunks dedicated or shared cannot be given Directed Night Service treatment 2 263 FEATURES AND SERVICES Night Service Trunk Answer from Any Station TAAS Remote Access trunks dedicated or shared cannot be given TAAS Night Service treatment Remote Access callers cannot answer TAAS Night Service calls Park This feature cannot be used by Remote Access callers Pickup This feature cannot be used by Remote Access callers Program Mode This feature cannot be used by Remote Access callers Remote Initialization and Maintenance Service RIMS RIMS requires a unique barrier code and carries special non administrable restrictions Speed Dialing Personal This feature cannot be used by Remote Access callers Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Remote Access calls are included in the SMDR records The following unique data is presented for Remote Access calls in addition to type data time and duration Remote Access to Inside Number eCALLED NUMBER field IN eFAC field the number of the incoming trunk eSTN field the dial code of the called party if the
448. o a busy DGC group that provides a recorded delay announcement will receive music after the announcement 2 222 Music On Hold Park Parked calls except parked conferences receive music Transfer When a station user transfers a call to another station the transferred party is put on special hold until the process has been completed If Music On Hold has been administered for the special hold condition the transferred party hears music during the hold interval Administration Requirements Special Feature Port eAssign port on a TN742 Analog Line or ZTN78 Tip Ring Line CP as required for the music message source special feature port type 254 e Allow Music On Hold for special hold yes or no Hardware Requirements A music source is needed to support the Music On Hold feature The interface is a port on a ZTN78 Tip Ring Line CP or TN742 Analog Line CP Detailed connection information is provided in the following figures e Figure _ 2 26 Music On Hold Equipment Connections FCC Registered e Figure 2 27 Music On Hold Equipment Connections Non Registered Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading Connectivity in Section 4 2 223 FEATURES AND SERVICES SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS PART OF CABLE SIP SOURCE LEGEND TN742 ANALOG LINE CP ZTN78
449. ocal Echo Determines whether characters from the data equipment will be echoed by System 25 during Command Mode Answer Text Enables call progress messages to be displayed at the called data endpoint Connection Indication Determines whether users who have Command Mode enabled will receive the CONNECTED message when a connection has been made Recall Sequence Two short breaks or one long break the sequence disconnect used to disconnect a data call Note System Administrator may under data port administration deny permission for users of specific data ports to self administer these options The user selects the Options menu from the Command Mode entry level menu Figure 2 55 illustrates all available Command Mode menus The user now has the choice of viewing options changing options or exiting the Options menu 2 338 User Changeable Options Cu pa xne4gy mm EEE VI w at n cem cop lt 2 lt bes p294 pur 891J nua y spo 66 2 ma cen gt gt 1 I seBueyo 2 lt S A gt lt 1 gt TT 4 4 4 40 lt suorido RR
450. ock Timer controls Contrast control for screen display e Built In Speakerphone With Volume Control e Ringer Button Click Volume Control e Built In HFAI Microphone eNine Fixed Feature Buttons with status LED Conference Hold Message Drop Recall HFAI Transfer Speakerphone Microphone e34 Feature Buttons each equipped with I Use and status LEDS For General Use All programmable default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 27 Send All Calls 1 Account Code Entry 1 and Last Number Dialed 1 For Use as a Switched Loop Attendant Console Five predefined as loop buttons 4 44 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Twelve others predefined as Alarm Source Destination Inspect Local Cancel Start Scroll Forced Release Attendant Message Waiting Join and Release Other seventeen programmable default assignments are Flex DSS 15 Position Busy 1 and Last Number Dialed 1 Adjunct e502A B Headset Adapters The 502B unit provides HFAI service on the headset Note LOCAL DISPLAY BUTTONS Waneer CONTRAST CONTROL DISPLAY SCREEN TEST PROGRAM SWITCH ON SIDE PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS 34 TOUCH DIAL WITH I USE PAD AND STATUS LEDS RINGER TE 4 CONFERENCE TRANSFER 7 VOLUME CONTROL ON SIDE DROP 1 HOLD 7 SPEAKERPHONE VOLUME CONTROL SPEAKERPHONE Figure 4 18 7317H01A Voice Terminal BIS 34D 4 45 HARDWARE
451. ode is activated a system administrable prompt is displayed that can consist of up to nine characters the quote character and RETURN are not allowed Command is the system default prompt As with dialing in Command Mode the ASCII characters backspace BS or CTRL H or underscore may be used to cancel a previously entered character When in Expert Mode each line must be terminated with a keyboard RETURN Users of Expert Mode must follow the exact tree structure of Command Mode both up and down the menu tree as shown in However instead of moving one level at a time Expert Mode allows the user to move up or down several menu levels at once This can be accomplished by entering on a single command line the capitalized letters that define the sequence of menu selections desired For example to change data port parity from the tree s entry level the user types OCPE and presses RETURN This requests that parity be set to even but does NOT enable the change To enable this change see Figure 55 the user must now type XE and press RETURN Activating Expert Mode A user can move back and forth between Command Mode and Expert Mode by typing exclamation mark For ports on a Data Line circuit pack Data Line Card DLC either Command Mode or Expert Mode is presented at the start of a new session depending upon the port s setting at the termination of the previous session Thus if a data session ends in Expert Mode the next s
452. odes DDCs Direct Group Calling DGC groups and trunks Call information is presented on the 16 character screen located in the upper right area of the following sets Refer to Section 4 Hardware Description for complete information and pictures 7305H04C 34 Button Multiline Voice Terminal 7317H01A 34 Button Multiline Voice Terminal BIS 34D Both of these terminals can be assigned as general user positions or as Switched Loop Attendant Consoles SLACs Display operation is basically the same in both applications differences will be pointed out in the following descriptions The following types of data are presented for calls handled at display terminals The extension number and name of an inside party called from the console The extension number and name of an inside party calling the console e Trunk identification on incoming trunk calls e Digits dialed on outgoing trunk calls e Called and calling party information on coverage redirected calls Called and calling party information on returning and third party calls e Call type and reason for return or redirection e Number of calls waiting in attendant callback and DGC queues e Special information resulting from feature button operation Display Screen The Display feature can generate up to two screens of call information each of which contains 16 character positions Screen 1 is automatically activated on incoming and outgoing calls a
453. of System 25 provide control and switching Digital Switch shows a block diagram of the System 25 digital switch The basic switch hardware consists of the following Control e Switching Network Time Division Multiplex TDM Bus Port Circuits System Resource Circuits COMMON CONTROL CPU MEM TDM BUS SWITCHING NETWORK SERVICE TONE POOLED CIRCUIT DETECTOR MODEM SYSTEM RESOURCES PORT CIRCUITS TRUNKS VOICE AND DATA TERMINALS Figure 3 1 System 25 Digital Switch 3 1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Common Control The Common Control circuitry consists of a single ZTN129 CPU MEM Call Processing Unit Memory circuit pack CP CPU MEM CP The CPU MEM runs the system feature code for the system and provides for the storage of software associated with system operation This CP is powered from the backplane by 5 and 5 volts It also draws 48 volts from the backplane to drive the Emergency Transfer Unit The CP shown in includes the following circuits e Microprocessor A 68010 16 bit microprocessor that executes call processing and data processing features This includes all maintenance administration testing and reporting software eMemory Management Memory management separates the on board Random Access Memory RAM into 1024 memory pages of 256 bytes each Each page is read and write protected and generates bus errors when violated eOn Board Memory On board
454. of telephone company network options over its installed life even when only a subset is initially used Trunks link two switching systems such as System 25 and the local Central Office or System 25 and another PBX System 25 supports five different telephone company trunk interfaces to provide desired connectivity at minimum expense Thus the opportunity exists to select the best trunk types depending on tariffs and customer needs For example eLoop Start LS trunks for public network access at minimum tariff These trunks handle outgoing and incoming attendant calls incoming DGC calls outgoing pooled facility calls and personal line calls eGround Start GS trunks for public network access These trunks handle the same type of calls as LS trunks They provide protection against call reorigination without toll restriction more reliable automatic route selection virtual facilities SMDR and CAS Simultaneous incoming and outgoing call seizure of the same trunk under heavy traffic conditions is essentially eliminated with ground start trunks GS trunks should usually be selected in preference to LS trunks unless tariff considerations are overriding Note however that Centrex Service requires LS trunks e Direct Inward Dialing DID trunks for dialing a station directly from outside attendant assistance not required Outside dial access to stations trunks optional and answering groups Direct Group calling is provided OVERVIEW
455. om the system after the announcement has been played Interactions The following feature interacts with Night Service Delay Announcements Night Service Incoming calls receiving TAAS NS treatment will not activate the delay announcements Only trunks that receive Directed NS will activate these announcements Administration Requirements Special Feature Ports e Assign first Night Service delay announcement code 251 e Assign second Night Service delay announcement code 252 e Assign number of rings before Night Service delay announcement 0 15 Station Ports eAssign port circuits ZTN78 or TN742 for each recorded announcement 2 229 FEATURES AND SERVICES Hardware Requirements A suitable announcement machine is required for each announcement and must be connected to a port on a ZTN78 Tip Ring Line or TN742 Analog Line CP The system supports two Directed Night Service delay announcements Detailed connection information is provided in Figure 2 28 Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel TAE Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading in Section 4 SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS PART OF CABLE SIP gt ANNOUNCEMENT EQUIPMENT LEGEND TN742 ANALOG LINE CP ZTN78 TIP RING CP 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C5 MODULAR CORD 048 87 Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE W RIN
456. omatic Answer AUTO ANS assigned to a flexible button eBIS 7305H03B 7305 04 7313H01A 7314H01A 7316H01A and 7317H01A HFAI 7309 HOI A these sets provide full service without requiring adjuncts e10 Button 7303H01B 34 Button 7305H01B and 34 Button Deluxe 7305H02B equipped with a Hands Free Unit HFU a 5102 Speakerphone these arrangements provide full HFAI service e5 Button 7302H01C and the 10 and 34 Button sets listed above not equipped with an HFU these arrangements allow callers to voice announce their calls but the terminal user must use the handset to reply Calls Eligible for Hands Free Service elnside calls that is calls from one System 25 set to another System 25 set using a System Access Loop DSS or Auto Intercom button e Calls transferred from another System 25 set using the Transfer feature The transferring station may pass both inside and outside calls in this way Note that calls transferred by the attendant are indistinguishable from calls transferred by any other station Calls Not Eligible for Hands Free Service elncoming trunk calls Personal Line DID DGC eCalls extended by an attendant BIS and HFAI Voice Terminals LEDs next to the AUTO ANS button and the HFAI Mic HFAI set or HFAI BIS set button indicate whether the HFAI feature is enabled The LEDs are turned on and off by pressing the adjacent buttons When both the AUTO ANS and HFAI LEDs are on the se
457. omputer driven scripts for call setup e Communication Access Manager CAM is MS DOS software application that provides a phone manager for placing voice and data calls for the user and VT100T terminal emulation CAM may be used on either STARLAN NETWORK client workstations or on PCs connected to System 25 CAM has a 200 entry directory with one touch dialing for both voice and data calls and auto login capability for data calls to host computers Remote Access feature provides password protected unattended access to PC files and electronic mail File transfer is supported with the popular XMODEM protocol eSTARLAN NETWORK ACCESS is an MS DOS software application that allows PCs not connected to the STARLAN NETWORK to call through the System 25 STARLAN NETWORK Interface and run STARLAN NETWORK client software to access file and printer servers on the STARLAN NETWORK ACCESS uses serial communications port to communicate with the STAR LAN NETWORK Interface ACCESS is compatible with NETBIOS permitting execution of most applications written for the IBMt PC Network IBM Token Ring Network Registered trademark of Microsoft Corp T Trademark of Digital Equipment Corp t Trademark of International Business Machines Corp OVERVIEW Growth amp Rearrangement Historical data indicates that clients in the System 25 station range have a need for communications systems capable of significant growth and rearrangement
458. on This feature allows a caller to dial into a System 25 from the public network using a predetermined 7 or 10 digit number and use some features and services The caller may be required to dial a barrier security code after reaching the system to access the features and services System administration can assign CO FX or INWATS trunks for Remote Access calls These trunks can be dedicated to Remote Access or shared with other kinds of calling On dedicated trunks incoming calls receive special Remote Access treatment On shared trunks Remote Access is allowed only during night service times at other times incoming calls receive standard trunk treatment If DID service is in use a valid DID number otherwise unassigned can be used for Remote Access The system will answer calls to this DID number and return special dial tone to the caller From this point operation is exactly like Remote Access via the trunk types listed above Note that since the DID Remote Access number does not become busy until all DID trunks are busy multiple Remote Access calls can be active at the same time When the system recognizes an incoming call as a Remote Access call it determines whether the trunk is shared If it is and if night service is not active the call can be routed to a personal line appearance or to a DGC group If neither of these answering points is administered the call goes to an attendant for handling If the trunk is dedica
459. on of an inside or outside call When callback queuing goes into effect for the call the display updates to CALL QUEUED If the user cancels queuing the display is QUEUE CANCELED If the queuing attempt is denied QUEUE DENIED appears When a station receives callback indicating that the called facility is now available the display shows the same information seen before queuing except that queue descriptor Q appears in position 1 displacing the number and name fields to the right Once the user answers the callback Q is removed eCalls to the Attendant The default name associated with PDC 0 is ATTENDANT A different name can be assigned if desired e Conference Bridging Call descriptor appears in position 15 of Screen 1 of non SLAC positions for calls containing more than two active parties position 16 contains the actual number of conferees or bridgers The number of conferees is displayed at each terminal in a conference or bridged call and is updated as the status changes Screen 1 324 Zimmer A 4 The A and the number of conferees overwrite whatever was in positions 15 and 16 of the current display eDGC Queue Field A logged in Direct Group Calling DGC group member can view the number of calls waiting to be serviced by the group The display is continuously updated for all members A digit O through 9 or 4 for 10 or more appears in position 16 DGC queue values are not displayed at a SLAC a
460. on resource that can only talk at 300 or 1200 baud the user receives INCOMPATIBLE FAR END DISCONNECTED and the data endpoint goes on hook If the far end does not answer the caller must press Break to terminate the call attempt If the disposition of the call is such that TRY AGAIN or BUSY indicating reorder or intercept and busy respectively is received the switch sends DISCONNECTED to the data terminal and returns the data endpoint to idle mode 2 125 FEATURES AND SERVICES Table 2 1 Call Progress Messages for Data Terminal Dialing amas un Message Application DIAL Placing a call Equivalent to dial tone Enter any required facility number followed by the dialed number and a RETURN RINGING Placing a call Equivalent to Ringback Tone Called number far end is being signaled Provided on internal calls only BUSY Placing a call Equivalent to busy tone Called number is in use or out of service Provided on internal calls only ANSWERED Placing or Notifies calling and called users that call receiving a call has been answered Provided on internal calls only TRY AGAIN Placing a call Equivalent to Reorder Tone System facilities are currently not available or invalid number INCOMING CALL PLEASE ANS Placing a call from Originating voice terminal user has a voice terminal transferred call to data terminal using Transfer to Data DISCONNECTED Call is terminated or call attempt
461. on 6 for equipment area considerations and associated floor plan recommendations The front cover of the cabinet is secured by four screws These screws must be loosened slightly before the cover can be removed When the cover is removed access is provided to the CPs a replaceable air filter mounted just under the CP carrier frame and two cooling fans The cooling fans are mounted on an assembly that when unscrewed provides access to the power supply Air intake is at the bottom of the cabinet and exhaust is vented at the left side of the front cover Each cabinet has its own power supply mounted to the left of the CP carrier The power supply is 3 inches wide and weighs about 9 pounds Voltage and current supplied to the carrier are 5 V dc at 35A 5 V dc at 3A 48 V dc at 3A and 90 V ac at 0 16A On the front of the supply is a green Light Emitting Diode LED that when lighted indicates that the 5 V dc is available and within limits The LED can be viewed through the slotted area on the front cover and is just behind the fan located at the top left edge of the cabinet Mounted on the back of the cabinet Figure 4 2 is the aluminum grounding block with four terminating positions an ac input power receptacle a power On Off switch 1 ON 0 OFF and twelve 25 pair connectors The ground block is connected to dc ground on the carrier backplane at a location near the power supply The 25 pair connectors provide an interface betwee
462. on the SIP by an 858A Adapter An octopus cable connects a maximum of eight voice terminals to a port CP SYSTEM CABINET STATION CIRCUIT PACK 1 8 PART OF SIP UNTERMINATED 4 PAIR BUILDING WIRE MODULAR JACKS VOICE TERMINALS ADJUNCTS LEGEND POWER UNITS C2 OCTOPUS CABLE PEC 2720 05P 858A ADAPTER FURNISHED BY INSTALLER SIX 4 PAIR MODULAR JACKS TO SIX 110 TYPE CUTDOWN BLOCKS Figure 4 25 Typical SIP Connections 4 63 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Connectivity Figures Figures 4 26 through 4 36 provide connection information for various equipment These figures have been included as an aid to understanding how equipment can be connected to System 25 and to indicate required connecting and supporting equipment Other arrangements are possible these figures can be useful in developing connecting arrangements for new or customer provided equipment The PEC codes have been noted on the figures as have indications of the source for obtaining non PEC equipment for example from installer or furnished with other equipment This information can be of use to Account Executives and Technical Consultants who are adding equipment to existing installations For new installations the DOSS Configurator must be used to select equipment requirements For existing installations you will need to determine what equipment is already installed You should not order equipment directly using the PECs in
463. one Ports 2 and 3 one Ports 4 and 5 and one Ports 6 and 7 The on off state of the device is controlled by the on board microprocessor NPE 0 ON BOARD MICROPROCESSOR ON BOARD MICROPROCESSOR NPE 1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PORT CIRCUIT 0 ANALOG PORT T 0 ISOLATION R O CODEC TRANSFORMER TR TXT TRANSCEIVERL 108 PROTOCOL TA HANDLER ELECTRONIC POWER FEED PXR 1 I PXR T 3 8 3 CIRCUIT TXR PXR T 4 R 4 CIRCUIT TXR PXR I 1 7 8 7 CIRCUIT TXR PXR Figure 3 8 ATL Line ZTN79 Unique Circuitry w gt TO MULTILINE VOICE TERMINALS 3 17 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Auxiliary Trunk TN763 The Auxiliary Trunk Circuit Pack interfaces four ports provided for client provided equipment CPE and the TDM bus It is connected to the CPE by up to three pairs of wires The transmission pair T and R carry voice signals touch tone control signals and R also provide a loop start seizure indication to the CPE The seizure pair SZ and SZ1 provide seizure indication to the CPE The signal pair S and S1 provide answer supervision and or make busy information from the CPE Depending on the application either the transmission pair only or all three pairs are connected to the CPE The Auxiliary Trunk has the following unique circuitry 3 18 eGround Detector Circuit This circuit determines if an answer supervision or
464. only when the user becomes idle not when an associated coverage user becomes idle Exclusion f a covering station answers a coverage call and then invokes Exclusion all other inside stations including the covered one are excluded from the call Forwarding When a station has both Coverage and Forwarding in effect calls are routed first to the forwarded to station If not answered there within an administered number of rings calls ring at the forwarding and coverage stations and stop ringing at the forwarded to station When forwarding to an outside number coverage may only occur in one case the forwarding had been activated using a trunk group s facility access code not ARS the forwarding cannot be completed because the trunk group is busy and the forwarding station is not busy In this case the call will ring at the forwarding station and its coverage stations Hold May be used by the covering user to place a coverage call on hold The COVER IND button s status LED winks at the covering station At the covered station if the call is on a Personal Line button the button s status LED winks if the call is on an SA button the status LED lights steadily The held call will automatically leave the coverage terminal if picked up by the covered user The covering station will be unable to reenter the call Leave Word Calling LWC A multiline voice terminal user can activate LWC for the called party even if the call has gone to covera
465. ons can park calls on its Bridged Access buttons because returning calls would ring at the principal station An attendant can park a call with the same procedure as a multiline voice terminal user In addition if the Attendant Position is equipped with a Selector Console up to eight trunk calls can be parked on DXS buttons dedicated to the Park function The attendant parks a call by 2 238 Park pressing an idle Park button The status LED of the parked line on the Attendant Console winks and the status LED of the Park button on the Selector Console lights steadily A call parked with the Selector Console is retrieved by dialing 8 and the access code assigned to the dedicated Park button A call parked by the attendant using the same procedure as a multiline voice terminal user will return to an SA button on a Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTAC or a LOOP button on a Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC if it is not picked up within the administered return interval A call parked on the Selector Console but not picked up within the interval will return to the RTN DA button DTAC or a LOOP button SLAC in the same manner as any other unanswered call Each voice terminal user except an attendant with a Selector Console can only park one call at a time a maximum of 24 calls can be parked in the system at one time A call is no longer parked when it is answered when it returns to the parking terminal or when it is abandoned by the
466. ons feature is not available for ports administered as STARLAN INTERFACE ports Refer to the STARLAN NETWORK Access feature description for additional information 2 343 FEATURES AND SERVICES Virtual Facilities Description A virtual facility VF is a call routing facility that is not defined by the physical facility trunk over which calls are routed but is instead defined by a combination of access codes authorization codes and coded characters that allow special handling of the destination telephone numbers VFs can be used to automatically route calls via other carrier networks private networks or tie trunks Up to ten virtual facility numbers VFNs may be administered Each stored number be up to 28 characters in length and is associated with a code in the range of 190 to 199 The first digits in a stored VFN must be the facility access code FAC for a physical trunk group over which the call is to be routed A series of digits and special characters are stored following the FAC to define additional routes Inter Exchange Carrier IXC codes identification codes or instructions concerning special handling of the destination telephone number When a VF has been defined using a particular trunk group it has full access to all trunks in that group It is considered busy only when the physical trunk group is busy When a VF is dial accessed by a system user calling restriction is based on the station s adm
467. or different locations For administration purposes the Message Center call types are divided into four groups 1 Calls to FPDCs that are not signed in anywhere 2 Unassigned DID calls 3 Coverage calls 4 Returning calls With the standard ie non message center defaults each of these groups is translated to be directed to all consoles When both positions are combined Attendant Message Center consoles administration can direct specific types to one or both consoles Message Center calls are held in the same common queue as any other attendant seeking calls before being directed to the console 2 215 FEATURES AND SERVICES Messaging Services Description These services include features that light a Message LED to indicate that another station or the attendant has a message for the user The Messaging Services provide light activation deactivation only Users must call the sender to receive their messages The system supports four types of Message Waiting services eAttendant Message Waiting eCoverage Message Waiting eDial Access to Message Waiting Indicators e Station to Station Message Waiting It also provides interface with the AT amp T VOICE POWER Voice Message System Attendant Message Waiting The Attendant can turn on and turn off the Message LED at other voice terminals When this indicator is lighted users call the attendant for messages The LED on multiline terminals may be turned off by the user by pr
468. or them via the Transfer to Data or Third Party Call Setup feature 2 119 FEATURES AND SERVICES 2 120 b ASCII Data Terminal With Keyboard This category can be subdivided into two classes 1 basic terminals and 2 intelligent programmable data equipment such as personal computers Basic terminals appear to the data port to be on line and available whenever they are turned on thus ready to enter either the Data Terminal Dialing mode or to enter the Setup mode on calls originating from a voice terminal or on auto answered calls In the case of most personal computers a communications program must be executed in order for it to communicate with its own RS 232 port or built in modem Once the communications software is running further operation will be similar to that of the basic terminal c Host Computer Endpoint A host computer endpoint is very similar to a data endpoint with keyboard except that the host has many ports and the interface is usually capable of supporting multiple speeds and more of the RS 232 control signals Front end communication software running in the host is typically supplied by the computer vendor and is not designed to support the Data Terminal Dialing feature Such software typically supports call origination through Automatic Calling Units ACUs which are not compatible with Data Terminal Dialing Thus the primary means of communicating with the host is by calling from data terminals or personal
469. orted on both incoming and outgoing calls and may be different for incoming and outgoing calls Considerations Tie Trunks provide for efficient communications between company employees at different locations This provides a private network whose control and utilization can be managed Tie trunks can be administered for tandem trunking This arrangement enables users to call through an intermediate System 25 to a remote System 25 or other PBX Refer to the Tandem Trunking feature description for more information Interactions The following features interact with Tie Trunks Automatic Route Selection ARS Immediate dial tie trunks should not be used in ARS routing patterns Callback Queuing Tie Trunk groups can be administered for Callback Queueing If a user dials a Tie Trunk number and all trunks in the group are busy the user must either wait for timeout or dial 4 to get queuing tone if automatic queuing is administered or reorder tone Manual queuing can be activated after reorder tone is heard Conference tie trunk that is part of a conference counts as one of two allowable outside parties Direct Group Calling Only automatic incoming tie trunks can be directed to a DGC group However dial in tie trunks can access DGC groups Night Service Dial in tie trunks cannot serve as Night Service trunks Personal Lines When a dial in tie trunk is assigned as a Personal Line and the line is used for outgoing service a
470. ost Recent System Errors FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION e Operating System OS Controls all message and data flow to from memory to the Arch Angel Driver Interface to the microprocessors on the port circuit packs and to the RS 232 driver interfaces Messages destined for a particular task are queued until the associated task can receive them When a task has completed a particular process the next message is obtained from the message queue of the tasks The OS provides an interval timer that is used to time tasks Processes that exceed the set interval about 60 seconds are terminated by the OS eArch Angel Driver Interface Provides an interface between the OS and Network Control eRS 232 Driver Interface Handles the flow of information between the CPU MEM CP and the peripheral equipment of the system i e System Administration Terminal or Advanced Administration PC Digital Tape Unit and SMDR Output Device TDM Bus Provides an electronic link between the system port circuits including System Resources and between the CPU MEM and port circuits Port Circuit Packs Each port circuit pack has on board software that provides for the sending receiving of Network Control messages and data Circuit pack status messages are also sent to the Network Control software Step By Step Call Description The following is a description of a call originated between two multiline voice terminals 1 A microprocessor on a station port circuit pa
471. overage stations and stop ringing at the forwarded to station 2 110 Coverage Group When forwarding to an outside number coverage may only occur in one case the forwarding had been activated using a trunk group s facility access code not ARS the forwarding cannot be completed because the trunk group is busy and the forwarding station is not busy In this case the call will ring at the forwarding station and its coverage stations Hands Free Answer On Intercom An incoming inside call will not receive coverage if auto answer is activated since the set will answer the call whether the user is present or not Leave Word Calling LWC A multiline voice terminal user can activate LWC for the called party even if the call has gone to coverage Night Service Directed Night Service calls do not receive coverage Personal Dial Codes Calls directed to a station because another non floating PDC is signed in there do not receive the coverage treatment of the signed in station Such calls return to their home station and receive that stations coverage immediately upon return Calls to signed in floating PDCs on the other hand receive the same coverage treatment as any other calls to the signed into station They of course have no home station to return to Personal Lines Personal line calls receive the coverage of the principal owner station for that line Other line appearances even if administered to ring will not receive co
472. ovide descriptions and illustrations of the single line voice terminals supported by System 25 500 Series The Model 500 Series consists of conventional rotary dial telephones They are recommended for use as a Power Failure Transfer PFT stations if the PFT trunk does not support touch tone dialing A 55A1 Ground Start button must be used with these sets if the PFT trunk is ground start Rotary set users cannot do any procedures that require pressing the or buttons The following 500 Series sets are supported by System 25 these sets are similar in appearance to the 2500 sets shown in Figure 4 4 except for their rotary dials e Model 500MM Basic desk set PEC 3100 0RD eModel 500SM Desk set with 4A Speakerphone compatibility PEC 3100 2RD Model 554BMPA Basic wall set PEC 3100 0RW 2500 Series The following 2500 Series voice terminals have the following components and features e Handset eTouch Tone Dial e Ringer Volume Control Several 2500 Series voice terminals are shown in System 25 supports the following 2500 Series sets e Model 2500 DMGC Desk Set with message waiting indicator and Recall button for timed switchhook flash PEC 3178 SYS 4 16 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION eModel 2500MMGB Basic desk set 3100 1TD eModel 2500MMGT Basic desk set with Recall button PEC 3100 TRC e Model 2500SM Basic desk set that can be used with 4A Speakerphone PEC 3100 2TD eModel 2514BMW Basic desk set e
473. ovides modem emulation It interfaces the port circuit signal and the remote modem The microprocessor directs the DSP to execute one of many programs The DSP produces data carrier detection and timing information for the port circuit microprocessor 3 37 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION LL Software The System software consists of switched services administrative and maintenance software This software runs on top of the real time operating system software Switched Services Software The switched services software provides voice and data call processing This software resides in the Common Control circuitry and in the 8 bit on board microprocessors located in the port and service circuits The switched services software uses the operating system to provide a process based message passing execution environment The operating system scheduler provides scheduling for the software according to process priority Administrative Software The administrative software provides the control for system rearrangement and change via the System Administration Terminal SAT This software resides in the CPU MEM Circuit Pack and does the following functions e Organizes the translation data for administrable entities in the system in a form that can be viewed and changed at the System Administration Terminal eTests entered data for consistency with data previously entered in order to avoid such errors as the assignment of the same extension number
474. paging zone s is administered to be dial restricted users assigned DSS buttons with paging access codes can still access the paging equipment The status and busy to idle reminder indication described above also apply to DGC groups with the understanding that a DGC group is busy if all members in that group are busy Considerations Direct Station Selection differs from Automatic Intercom in that it provides one button access from one voice terminal to another one way only while Automatic Intercom provides similar access for each voice terminal two way and must be assigned between two multiline voice terminals A DSS button may point to a single line station an Automatic Intercom button may not DSS calls receive coverage Automatic Intercom calls do not Interactions The following features interact with Direct Station Selection Bridging of System Access Buttons Calls from DSS or FLEX DSS buttons on the principal station are not accessible from Bridged Access buttons on the bridging station 2 147 FEATURES AND SERVICES Coverage DSS calls placed to an individual with Coverage will receive standard coverage treatment Display Operation of a programmed FLEX DSS button generates a display of the information stored on the button if the button is not programmed NO INFORMATION is displayed Direct Group Calling DSS button can be assigned to a group The associated LED lights steadily when all stations in the group are bu
475. pears on the display If the alarm clock function is set the terminal will beep at the selected time This audible alarm should not be confused with the Attendant System Alarm Indication feature which causes the ALARM button LED to flash when system trouble is detected To time an event such as a call the user performs the following procedure while not active on a call 1 f the clock calendar screen is not already being displayed press LOCAL or Time Timer if the terminal has no LOCAL button The clock calendar screen appears on the display 2 Press Time Timer The timer screen appears on the display 3 To start the timer press Start The timer resets to 00 00 then begins timing 4 To stop the timer press Stop 5 To time another event return to step 3 6 Press Exit The clock calendar screen appears on the display 2 210 Local Display Considerations At SLACs and logged in DGC terminals preference is given to queue displays over the clock calendar display This condition can be overridden by pressing LOCAL if available Hardware Requirements The Local Display feature is available only on display equipped multiline voice terminals 2 211 FEATURES AND SERVICES Manual Signaling Description This feature allows a user to signal another voice terminal The user may do this at any time whether on hook or off hook In voice terminal user guides this feature is called Signaling Multiline voice
476. personnel to answer incoming attendant seeking calls when the attendant is not on duty Directed Night Service redirects incoming attendant seeking calls to designated voice terminals such as a guard desk or coverage position Trunk Answer From Any Station TAAS Night Service allows users to answer incoming calls from any station by dialing the Night Service access code Night personnel can be alerted by a night bell Outgoing Business Communications One of the key functions of a customer premises communications system is to provide easy access to the most cost effective network facilities for outgoing calls The system needs to be capable of steering calls based on cost and must also keep records of incoming and outgoing calls and associated costs Building on its ground start trunk capability System 25 features control costs and record usage as follows e Call Restrictions allow the manager to restrict users from making certain types of calls Restriction is administered through outward restriction toll call restriction and facility access restriction OVERVIEW e Automatic Route Selection provides manager defined routing of calls over the telecommunications network based on preferred routes normally the least expensive route available at the time the call is placed with capacity for multiple common carriers and routing through tandem switch points The user dials a standard Direct Distance Dialing DDD number and the system selects th
477. ported Unsupported 1400 2 Unsupported Unsupported eTN758 Pooled Modem Provides two integrated 212 modem compatible conversion resources for switched connections between analog endpoints modems or a digital endpoint and an analog endpoint A maximum of two TN758s four conversion resources is permitted in each cabinet HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Circuit Pack Compatibility The following System 75 CPs can be used in System 25 if required eThe TN742 Analog Line can be used instead of the ZTN78 Tip Ring CP The TN742 supports bridged stations and out of building or Off Premises Stations OPS the ZTN78 does not eThe TN762B Hybrid Line Version 4 or later can be used instead of the ZTN79 The TN747 Trunk be used instead of the ZTN76 Ground Start Trunk or the ZTN77 Loop Start Trunk Circuit Pack Features All system CPs have the following features e Solid state circuitry mounted on 7 7 by 14 1 inch printed wiring board TN type e Color coded faceplate labels identify the CP type and function White Control Purple Port or System Resource e Individual circuit functions all contained on one CP e Metal tab for grounding Locking tab type handle provides easy insertion or removal of a CP e Port CPs can be inserted or removed with power On and the system processing calls Only the calls utilizing circuits on a removed CP will be affected Note Power must be turned off when replacing the CPU MEM or
478. pose tone detector ports Port circuits 3 and 7 provide digital loop back testing of each NPE on the circuit pack The NPE serializes TDM bus signals that are connected to the DSP in serial form from the NPEs by the DSP interface circuit Serial clock and data signals connect directly from the NPE to the DSP The system framing signal is synchronized and connects to the DSP The DSP restart circuit controls the DSPs When the on board microprocessor is not functioning properly the DSP restart circuit takes all of the DSPs out of service It restarts each individual DSP under control of the port I O and sanity check circuit The touch tone DSPs under control of the on board microprocessor write data synchronously to the NPEs The interrupt filter detects valid touch tone signals and allows end to end transmission while blocking end to end touch tone signaling Pooled Modem TN758 The Pooled Modem Circuit Pack supports 0 300 and 1200 bits per second bps data speeds and provides the following eCircuitry to provide a signal compatible with the modulation formats of the 212 series modems eModem emulation see below Capability Data Module Mode 0 300 Asynchronous Low 300 Asynchronous 300 Asynchronous 1200 Asynchronous 1200 Asynchronous eModem control functions corresponding to 212A series modem operations A maximum of two Pooled Modem CPs are allowed in a single cabinet six in a 3 cabinet system The Pooled Modem CP consists
479. procedure The user gets dial tone then dials deactivation code 91 and the extension number of the target station Confirmation tone is returned if the attempt is successful reorder tone if it is not Considerations Dial Access to Message Waiting Indicators provides users with a way to notify any other terminal that a message is waiting This feature does not apply to the feature buttons LEDs administered for Station to Station Message Waiting Interactions Dial Access to Message Waiting Indicators can coexist with the other messaging services in System 25 Careful management is essential so that users know where to retrieve their messages The following feature interacts with Dial Access Display When a display set user dials 90 or 91 followed by an extension number to light or extinguish a Message LED at some station the dialed digits are displayed A confirmation of Message LED activation or deactivation is not displayed Hardware Requirements Only terminals with built in message waiting indicators designated MSG or MESSAGE or Z34A Message Waiting Indicator adjuncts can be signaled by this feature 2 128 Dial Plan Dial Plan The dialing plan for System 25 is based on the concept that whenever possible calls should be placed to individuals rather than to voice terminals To implement this concept individuals are assigned Personal Dial Codes PDCs and are allowed to sign in those PDCs at other voice terminals
480. process eReturn On Busy RTN BUSY Camped on calls are returned to the console on this button if not answered within a specified interval eReturn On Don t Answer RTN DA Extended calls not answered are returned to the console on this button if not answered within a specified interval e Attendant Message Waiting ATT MSG Used by the attendant to remotely control Message LEDs on voice terminals e Alarm ALARM The associated status LED flashes when a system trouble has been detected the LED can be changed from flashing to steadily lit by pressing the button Two other attendant only features are assigned to console feature buttons if required Position Busy POS BUSY and Night Service NIGHT In a dual attendant console system Position Busy removes an Attendant Console from service Only one of two consoles can be in the Position Busy mode at a time When Night Service is activated attendant seeking calls can ring a night bell can be directed to assigned voice terminals or can be sent to a night service announcement Dual Console Operation A System 25 can be equipped with up to two DTACs that operate simultaneously when both are in service If the system has two attendant consoles one is called the first attendant console the other is called the second attendant console The calls in the following list will be routed to the first attendant console e Dial 0 calls eDID calls to unassigned numbers when administer
481. properties whose values determine the characteristics or performance of a system Peripheral Equipment System Administration Terminal SAT SMDR Output device such as a SMDR Printer or a Call Accounting System Digital Tape Unit DTU Personal Dial Code Each system user is assigned a PDC and is allowed to sign in the PDC at any voice terminal in the system as he or she moves about the premises The PDC may be a 1 2 3 or 4 digit number There are two types of PDCs ePDCs assigned to voice terminals Associated with each voice terminal in the system eFloating PDCs FPDCs Assigned to visitors and those users who do not have exclusive use of a voice terminal An FPDC may be signed in by its owner at any system voice terminal Calls to the FPDC will ring at the terminal where it is signed in Calls to an FPDC that is not signed in anywhere will either receive reorder tone or be directed to the attendant administrable Pickup Group A group of individuals authorized to answer any call directed to an extension number within the group 9 10 GLOSSARY Port An interface circuit between System 25 and associated auxiliary and peripheral equipment Typical references include Terminal port station port Facility port trunk port e Auxiliary equipment port Private Branch Exchange PBX A switching system that provides switched communications access amongst its terminals and facilities e g System 25
482. provide access to the STARLAN NETWORK for off premises and occasional on premises users These users do not need to install a Network Access Unit NAU in their PCs to use the STARLAN NETWORK ACCESS software The data transfer rate is limited to 9600 bps or for off premises users by the modem Note System 25 is compatible only with Release 2 of the STARLAN NETWORK LAN users can access hosts connected to System 25 or if their System 25 is equipped with a modem pool remote hosts Finally terminals and PCs connected to System 25 data ports can access host computers on the LAN Frequently a user needs to access a LAN data base at or from a remote location home motel client office branch etc To support out of building access to computer data over network facilities or Off Premise Station OPS lines System 25 provides the following features eModem pooling allows data terminals to communicate over analog facilities utilizing the standard dialing plan and provides full access to all network facilities cost control mechanisms ARS and incoming call management tools DID attendant DGC etc e Transfer to data allows a data call to be set up on a voice terminal and then to be transferred to a data terminal or computer This feature can also be used to enter an account code for the data call eThe System 25 STARLAN NETWORK gateway allows the LAN environment to be extended to occasional users or remote locations Off premises users ca
483. put device The SMDR RS 232 port interface is provided by a DUART driver 68681 It is a one way port transmitting data to the output device No characters are read by the port interface and no flow control mechanisms are provided The standard data transmit rate is 1200 bps Also operates at 300 bps Call Records The call records provide detailed information concerning both incoming and outgoing calls Call detail records are generated during call processing and are sent to the SMDR output device in ASCII format SMDR records are provided for e Voice Records The system prints call records for incoming calls and for outgoing calls that exceed a specified duration For special types of calls such as conference or transferred calls one call record is reported for each trunk seized regardless of the number of parties connected to the call The call s duration is from the time the last digit was dialed until the last person hangs up No indication is provided that trunks have been bridged together e Data Records The system prints call records for incoming and outgoing external data calls Calls are considered data calls if they involve a data extension The following list describes the SMDR data collected for each call and the number of characters in each field All information is right justified in its field unless otherwise indicated The record is provided in a standard 80 column format The headings for each record item are note
484. quipped with built in headset jack 2554BM Basic wall mounted set PEC 3100 TWR Adjuncts Refer to Table 4 E HANDSET TOUCH TONE TELEPHONE DIAL 2554BM BASIC WALL SET RINGER VOLUME MESSAGE RECALL INDICATOR 2500DMGC DESK SET WITH EXTRA FEATURES Figure 4 4 2500 Series Analog Voice Terminals HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Table 4 E 2500 Series Voice Terminal Adjuncts 4 Speakerphone Speakerphone 55A1 Ground Start Z34A Message Waiting Indicator MD 4 18 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 2526BMWG Voice Terminal This analog terminal consists of a standard touch tone wall set equipped with a special faceplate and mounted in a weatherproof housing The door of the housing can be fitted with an optional lock This voice terminal is intended for outdoor use on buildings fences or poles 2526BMWG set be connected for one line or two lines It is approximately 13 inches high 7 inches wide and 6 1 2 inches deep The 2526BMWG set is not supplied fully assembled each of the following parts must be ordered separately e526A Housing e2526BMG Telephone Set Base equipped with handset and cord e253C Aluminum Faceplate e D180352 e D180849 e D180850 e D180805 Mechanical Door Lock optional Weathertight connecting arrangement for single line service Weathertight connecting arrangement for two line service Switch and arm bracket without weathertight arra
485. r facility to dial the party to be conferenced in Subsequently pressing the held line button completes the conference If the facility to be added is busy the conference will be denied Users can conference up to two outside facilities trunks and up to five parties in all Any attempt to add a sixth party will be denied and the sixth party will be dropped This limit is for the conference as a whole Other conference inside stations are also prohibited from adding a third outside party or sixth party Single Line Voice Terminals The single line voice terminal user can establish a conference by momentarily pressing the switchhook which puts the first party on hold receiving Recall Dial Tone and then dialing a second party After connection to the second party another press of the switchhook establishes the conference A third press of the switchhook will drop the second party restoring the original call The user cannot put a conference that he she has established on hold Other internal conferees multiline or single line may then add additional parties to the conference up to the five party two outside line maximum Considerations The Conference feature allows any voice terminal user to set up conference calls Non attendant users do not need the assistance of the attendant Waiting for an added party to answer and announcing the purpose of the call before adding the party to the conference is good operating practice A ringin
486. r metallic contaminants e Contaminants expelled by office copying machines eHighly corrosive atmosphere within an enclosed area or atmosphere containing vaporized chemical compounds that may condense on the equipment eExplosive or flammable atmosphere Lighting Lighting should be adequate to allow administration and maintenance personnel to perform their tasks The recommended light intensity level is 50 to 70 footcandles This level complies with the Occupational Safety and Health Act OSHA standards Electrical Noise Radio Frequency Interference RFI In most cases electrical noise is introduced to the system through trunk or voice terminal cables However electromagnetic fields near the system cabinets may also induce noise in the system Therefore the system cabinets and cable runs should not be placed in areas where a high electromagnetic field strength exists Radio transmitters AM or FM television stations induction heaters motors with commutators of 0 25 horsepower 200 watts or greater and similar equipment are leading causes of interference Small tools with universal motors are generally not a problem when they operate on separate power lines Motors without commutators generally do not cause interference Field strengths below 1 0 volt per meter are unlikely to cause interference Field strength can be measured by a tunable meter such as the Model R 70 meter manufactured by Electro Metrics Division or broadband met
487. r the connection 3 43 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 18 When either of the parties hangs up the associated port circuit controller sends an up link message to the Station Call Processing task 19 Station Call Processing interprets the on hook message as the end of the call 20 The task then sends a down link message to the port circuit pack controllers to disconnect the time slot connections and turn off the LEDs associated with the calls 3 44 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION System Cabinets J58901A1 L4 Cabinets 2 and 3 Port Circuits Required Circuit Packs Optional Circuit Packs 1 4 4 6 7 8 8 8 4 4 4 4 4 System Resource Circuit Packs 4 11 Circuit Pack Features 4 12 2526BMWG Voice Terminal 4 19 7305H02D Voice Terminal 34 Button Deluxe PEC 3162 417 4 30 7305H03B Voice Terminal BIS PEC 3162 BIS 4 32 7305 04 Voice Terminal BIS With Display 3162 DIS 4 34 7309H01B Voice Terminal HFAI PEC 3161 161 4 36 its 3 Trunk Port Circuit Packs 4 10 7101A Voice Terminal MD PEC 3170 00M 4 20 its 420 Speakerphone Voice Terminal Not Orderable 4 21 Single Line Voice Terminal Connection Information 4 22 10 Button Set With Built In Speakerphone 2993C04 4 48 12 Button MET Set 7203M 4 50 Asynchronous Data Units ADUs 4 54 ADU Connection Information 4 55 Peripheral Equipment 4 55 Auxiliary Equipment Connections 4 65 Figures Figure 4 1 System 25 Cabinets J58901A
488. rage allows calls that are not answered within a specified number of rings to be redirected to an individual covering station and or a group of covering stations This is especially useful for Boss Secretary arrangements staff backup and message service This feature is versatile enough to permit suitable alternate answering arrangements for virtually every level of employee Special features such as the Send All Calls feature which routes a user s calls directly to covering station s accommodate the day to day variations that occur in an employee s work schedule e Following and Forwarding allow users who are away from their normal locations to receive their calls at other phones inside the system or Forwarding only outside the system This feature supports roving personnel and shared office space for company staff e The Integrated Solution can provide call coverage service along with integrated voice mail and Leave Word Calling e The Bridging feature permits calls on a users System Access buttons to be answered at another station on Bridged Access buttons OVERVIEW e Station Hunting provides automatic redirection of incoming calls to an idle member of a hunt group when the called party is busy e Pickup allows a user to answer a call ringing at another terminal Directed Pickup allows a user to answer a call ringing at any terminal by dialing the pickup code and the Personal Dial Code PDC of the ringing station Group Pickup p
489. rall technical reference for System 25 This manual is released specifically to cover Release 2 Version 1 R2V1 of System 25 It does not contain information that applies only to the earlier releases of System 25 Organization This manual is divided into 10 sections The remaining sections are as follows eSECTION 2 FEATURES AND SERVICES SECTION 3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SECTION 4 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION elSECTION 5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS eSECTION 6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS eSECTION 7 PARTS INFORMATION eSECTION 8 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION ejSECTION 9 GLOSSARY ejSECTION 10 INDEX System 25 Description System 25 is an advanced digital switching system that integrates voice and data communications See block diagram in It not only provides the features of a state of the art Private Branch Exchange PBX but goes a step further by allowing data to be switched point to point without first being converted to analog format This capability can be used to set up connections between data terminals word processors personal computers and host computers System 25 uses intelligent port circuits equipped with distributed network processor elements to provide essentially nonblocking voice and data switching 14 OVERVIEW CONTROL COMPLEX CALL ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE OR RS232 _ SMDR PRINTER INTEGRATED SOLUTION RS232 eADVANCED ADMINISTRATION e CALL ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE e OFFICE AUTOMATION SOFTWARE e
490. ransferred to announcement or begin ringing at button appearances or SLAC queue Direct Group Calling eAssign DGC access code add delete DGC members enable disable queuing for data DGC groups 2 138 Direct Group Calling Delay Announcement Direct Group Calling Delay Announcement Description This feature provides a recorded announcement to an outside trunk caller who has been placed in queue for a DGC Group When all members in the group are busy off hook the call will be queued for DGC service and the calling party will receive ringback tone Note that no incoming call indication ringing is provided to the DGC group members at this point After a specified number of rings administrable a recorded announcement will be played to the calling party without disturbing his or her position in queue The caller is subsequently placed on hold will receive music if available Once a call begins to ring at a DGC station the call is no longer eligible for delay announcement service The call will then ring until answered covered picked up or abandoned Considerations DGC Delay Announcements provide the calling party with a message that acknowledges their call and assures them that their call will be handled in an orderly way Interactions The following feature interacts with Direct Group Calling Delay Announcement Tie Trunks Calls to busy DGC groups via tie trunks will be queued and will receive the delay announc
491. rder the Supplemental Alert Adapter PEC 2301 SAA for controlling a remote alerting device A Supplemental Alert Adapter is installed in the line between the port CP and the user s MERLIN System terminal The line requires ZTN79 ATL Line CP Figure 2 20 contains connection details Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters are provided under the heading in Section 4 SYSTEM 25 CABI NET PART OF OCTOPUS PART OF CABLE s 1 Bi ALERTING ADAPT P DEVICE 1 7 LEGEND TN742 ANALOG LINE CP ZTN78 TIP RING CP 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C5 MODULAR CORD 048 87 R1 E1CM 50 RINGER OR EQUI VALENT PEC 31019 Wl 4 INSIDE W RING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 19 External Alert Connections 2 169 FEATURES AND SERVICES SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF OCTOPUS CABLE ZTN79 ATL LINE CP ru ALERTER C U V T gt LEGEND Al SUPPLEMENTAL ALERT ADAPTER PEC 2301 SAA 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK 1 MODULAR CORD D8W 87 C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 C8 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 51 EXTERNAL ALERT HYBRID TYPE TERMI NAL WI 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER Figure 2 20 Supplemental Alert Adapter Connections 2 170 Following Following Descriptio
492. re both parties place and receive calls on the same extension numbers Bridging allows more complete coverage of all incoming calls It provides options that can enable several call answering patterns It is recommended that each SA button at a principal station have a corresponding BA button at the bridging station With this arrangement the bridging user can track all calls coming to the principal s SA buttons Except for their bridging functions bridging stations operate independently of their associated principal stations The bridging feature applies only to calls appearing on the SA buttons of a principal station Calls on Automatic Intercom Personal Line DSS and Flex DSS buttons are not accessible from a BA button Interactions The following features interact with Bridging Abbreviated Ringing When a call arrives on an SA button of the principal off hook stations principal and bridging that have bridged ringing enabled receive abbreviated ringing The green status LEDs of the SA button and the BA button associated with the incoming call continue to flash after the abbreviated ring Account Code Entry A station user can use the Optional Account Code Entry feature for incoming or outgoing calls on bridged appearances If a bridging station user has the Forced Account Code Entry FACE feature an account code must be entered for all applicable outgoing calls on both SA and BA buttons Attendant Positions Direct Trunk
493. receiving stations per Coverage Group does not apply when administering a DGC group as a Coverage Group A maximum of twenty stations per DGC Coverage Receiver Group is allowed 2 109 FEATURES AND SERVICES Considerations Coverage provides a way to redirect calls to alternate answering positions The feature is versatile enough to permit suitable alternate answering arrangements for virtually every level of employee Special functions such as the Send All Calls feature accommodate the day to day variations that occur in an employee s work schedule Interactions Standard Group Coverage The following features interact with Standard Group Coverage Attendant Console Direct Trunk If the Direct Trunk attendant is a receiver for a Coverage Group and extends a call using the Start button or Selector Console that is unanswered busy to a member of the group the call will return on the Return On Don Answer RTN DA or Return On Busy RTN BUSY button not on the attendant s COVER GRP button Automatic Intercom Auto Intercom calls do not receive coverage Bridging of System Access Buttons An incoming call is given group coverage according to the coverage specified for the principal Calls appearing on Bridged Access buttons are not extended to the coverage specified for those bridging stations Callback Queuing Callback calls to the originator do not send ring signals to its coverage stations If a call is queued for a station
494. red until the call is dropped 2 270 Send All Calls Interactions The following features interact with Send All Calls Bridging of System Access Buttons The principal station can be administered so that pressing the SEND ALL CALLS button will send ringing for incoming calls to its coverage stations only to its bridging stations only or to both If ringing is sent to a Bridged Access BA button via Send All Calls and if the BA button is administered to not receive ringing the call will flash but not ring at the BA button If ringing is sent to a BA button via Send All Calls and if the BA button is administered to receive ringing immediate or delayed then the call will ring immediately on the BA button Callback Queuing Callback attempts to the originator are not affected by Send All Calls Call Waiting A busy station with Send All Calls activated will receive call waiting tones the caller will hear special ringback If the busy station then goes on hook single ring reminder will not be given for that waiting call Coverage General Send All Calls works in conjunction with the Coverage features at covered and covering stations At stations not associated with Coverage Send All Calls simply serves to silence the ringer on incoming calls no redirection occurs If a station is translated to not send ringing to coverage when calls to this station are unanswered the Send All Calls feature overrides this instruction ringi
495. rences receive music Personal Line A parked Personal Line is bridgeable by any user with a button appearance of that line Bridging on to the connection does not answer the parked call The parked call will not return to the parking voice terminal user in this case Remote Access Remote Access callers cannot use the Park feature Transfer Single line voice terminals cannot transfer parked calls Administration Requirements Special Feature Port Attendant Selector Console eAssign selector console Park codes eNumber of seconds before Park return 0 240 default 120 2 240 Personal Dial Code PDC Personal Dial Code PDC Description A Personal Dial Code PDC consisting of one to four digits is assigned to each voice terminal in the system The PDC serves as the extension number of its terminal Each PDC can also be associated through system administration with the name of the terminal s user terminals that have no specific users such as lobby or conference room sets can be assigned appropriate place or function names A special quality of PDCs is their portability users can carry their PDCs with them when they temporarily go to another terminal A user can sign in his or her PDC at away terminals and receive calls originally directed to the home terminal Upon leaving the temporary location the user signs out the PDC so that calls will again ring at the home terminal For information
496. res either a port on an Auxiliary Trunk CP with an Auxiliary Trunk Interface and a Paging Dial Dictation Interface or a Paging System Adapter Zone paging is provided by the Auxiliary Trunk CP if used with multiple Amplicenter Each of the three ports available for paging system access may connect to a paging system providing up to three paging zones Paging is particularly useful when used in conjunction with the Park feature When a user is away from his or her location and receives a call the call can be answered and parked by another user The called party can then be paged and told what extension number to call to retrieve the parked call The called party can then retrieve the call from any voice terminal Interactions The following features interact with Paging System Access Direct Inward Dialing DID A DID call may access a paging code This allows an outside user to dial in and utilize the Paging System Dial restricting the paging code will block this interaction Trademark of Harris Corporation Dracon Division 2 234 Paging System Access Tie Trunks Incoming Tie Trunk calls can access paging ports connected to Auxiliary Trunk circuit packs If administered as Tandem Trunk an incoming Tie Trunk can also access other types of paging ports Administration Requirements Ground Start or Loop Start Trunk Port e Requires a port on ZTN76 Ground Start Trunk CP or ZTN77 Loop Start Trunk CP for each interface requir
497. rface CP The System Administrator may disable queuing for data DGC groups if desired Delay announcements and music on hold are not provided for data groups 2 136 Direct Group Calling DGC Considerations DGC groups are particularly useful when the answering group receives a high volume of calls Call completion time is minimized and attendant assistance is not required Any number of outside trunks may be administered to feed into a DGC group A trunk may feed only one DGC group Interactions The following features interact with Direct Group Calling Attendant Console Switched Loop When an incoming trunk call rings simultaneously at DGC queue and a Switched Loop Attendant Console queue it may be answered by either depending on who answers first Attendant Direct Extension Selection When all stations in a DGC group are busy the status LED on the Selector Console lights steadily Bridging of System Access Buttons DGC calls arriving on System Access buttons at a principal station can receive bridging treatment at a bridging station Callback Queuing Inside calls to busy DGC groups can be queued Queuing is not allowed if all members of the DGC group are logged out A multiline DGC member with a queued call and a single line member with an off hook queued call are considered busy Coverage When a call rings at DGC station that has Coverage the call will receive that station s coverage Calls directed to a busy DGC
498. rminal must be administered as an extended station before this feature is activated Extended stations will always receive standard that is single ring for calls System 25 will not send distinctive ringing Interactions The following feature interacts with Extended Stations Conference An Extended Station counts as one of the two outside parties allowed on conference calls Administration Requirements Single Line Voice Terminal Port eAssign port on Analog Line TN742 CP This An Extended Station yes or no default Hardware Requirements The Extended Station must be single line voice terminal It requires a port on a 742 Analog Line CP 2 167 FEATURES AND SERVICES External Alerts Description External Alerts provide standard station ringing at locations away from the called stations This feature can be used to activate an external alerting device such as a bell External Alerts supports the Trunk Answer from Any Station TAAS form of Night Service The feature can be used in conjunction with voice terminals located in noisy environments and large areas such as warehouses etc The alerting device is activated whenever the associated station is alerted A Supplemental Alert Adapter installed on a hybrid station allows the terminal user to transfer incoming ringing to an alerting device located in some remote area When the user goes to the area the alerting device rings for incoming calls
499. rmination for one end of the bus and a plug in TDM bus termination circuit card plugs into cabinet backplane is used to terminate the other end For this reason the CPU MEM CP must always be located in slot 1 of Cabinet 1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Switching Network System 25 uses distributed processing techniques to provide switched voice and data services The switch operates at 64 Kbps The switching network consists of the Time Division Multiplex TDM bus the Port Circuits and the System Resource Circuits The TDM bus connects the intelligent ports to the Common Control circuit pack and other ports through the network control circuit The system resource circuits provide tone sources receivers detectors and pooled modems The intelligent ports connect external communications facilities to the TDM bus TDM Bus The TDM bus consists of two groups of eight signal leads and five control leads each with matching grounds The port circuit packs place digitized voice pulse code modulated PCM signals on the bus The bus operates at 2 048 MHz The framing pulse rate is 8 kHz This provides 256 time slots 0 255 on the bus The time slots are 488 ns wide Time slots are generated as shown in Figure 3 3 The first five time slots are used for communications between the Common Control the intelligent port and resource circuit packs SYSTEM FRAME 8 KHZ 125 MICROSECONDS 1 488 NANOSECONDS I system ctok 1
500. rocedures confirmation tone is returned to the caller to indicate acceptance of the dialed code Reorder tone indicates that the process cannot be completed After leaving a message the caller can hang up or handle other calls System 25 attempts to deliver LWC requests to VMS as they are generated Requests are queued if the VMS ports are busy Up to 20 requests can be queued at one time and be waiting for a voice messaging port to become available While an LWC request is in queue the Message LED at the called station will not light and the message cannot be retrieved A PDC is administered for users to call to retrieve their messages from the VMS This PDC is the same one assigned to voice messaging ports and used by the system to interface with peripheral messaging equipment To retrieve a message indicated by a lighted Message LED the user dials the message station PDC All stored messages are presented to the user by voice synthesis The user can use touch tone signals to have messages repeated and to erase messages Password protection is provided 2 201 FEATURES AND SERVICES Considerations System 25 s Leave Word Calling feature provides an easy method to send call me messages by way of an attached VMS When the feature is activated caller and called party information is delivered to the VMS which lights the Message LED of the called party and then prepares a brief message containing the caller s name and extension The cal
501. roduces a 1 5 second pause Since System 25 does not have a Dial Tone detector judicious use of the pause character will help to ensure that intermediate Dial Tones are obtained before more digits are sent The pause character should not be programmed for internal calls Transmits an actual Transmits an actual Represents a System Speed Dialing code where xx 00 89 or a Virtual Facility code where xx 90 99 If using a Virtual Facility code it may appear only at the beginning of the stored number Represents a Personal Speed Dialing code where x 0 9 Represents additional Personal Speed Dialing codes where x 0 9 Marks the beginning of End to End Signaling System begins transmitting touch tone signals to the far end switch 2 256 Program CHAR USED IN PERSONAL SPEED DIALING NUMBERS Produces a 1 5 second pause Since System 25 does not have a Dial Tone detector judicious use of the pause character will help to ensure that intermediate Dial Tones are obtained before more digits are sent The pause character should not be programmed for internal calls Transmits an actual Transmits an actual Represents a System Speed Dialing code where xx 00 89 or a Virtual Facility code where xx 90 99 If using a Virtual Facility code it may appear only at the beginning of the stored number Marks the beginning of End to End Signaling System begins transmittin
502. rrier Detect are not allowed to turn on until carrier has been received and the Clear to Send timer has timed out e Disconnect On Received Space yes or no default yes When active the modem will disconnect after receiving a Space signal of approximately two seconds duration eSend Space On Disconnect yes or no default yes When active the modem upon receiving a negation of Data Terminal Ready sends approximately four seconds of Space signal and then disconnects Without this option active the modem upon receiving a negation of the Data Terminal Ready signal disconnects immediately Hardware Requirements One TN758 Pooled Modem CP provides two conversion resources Two TN758s are allowed per system cabinet for a total of 12 conversion resources in a 3 cabinet system 2 221 FEATURES AND SERVICES Music On Hold Description This feature provides music or other audible indication to a held party on an outside line On an outside call if the user places the call on Hold or after a call into a DGC group receives the delay announcement music is provided to the calling party If a caller receives music because all members of a DGC group are busy when a group member becomes available to answer the call music is removed and the calling party is connected to the DGC member When a multiline voice terminal user places a call on hold the status LED of the held line winks and music is provided to the held party
503. rs Reference to the extension number is usually in the form PDC Personal Dial Code rather than station number Though PDCs may be signed in at other stations in most discussions PDCs and station numbers are interchangeable Analogously data stations are assigned DDCs Data Dial Codes Switch The software controlled communications processor complex that interprets dialing pulses tones keyboard characters and makes the proper interconnections both within the system and external to the system The switch itself consists of a digital computer software storage device memory and associated circuit packs and special hardware necessary to perform the actual connections Switchhook The button s on a voice terminal located under the handset System Administrator A person responsible for specifying and administering features and services for the system System Restore A process that allows stored data to be written from a tape or PC file into the system memory TAE Trunk Access Equipment Terminal Equipment Equipment for changing information sound keystrokes into an electrical signal compatible with the system s port circuits voice and data terminals are two subdivisions 9 13 GLOSSARY Tie Trunk telecommunications channel that directly connects two private switching systems Time Division Multiplex Bus A special bus that is time shared by preallocating short time slots to each transmitter on a reg
504. rt The exact interface depends upon the paging system s requirements System 25 can also support single zone simple amplifier type paging systems that require contact closure the equivalent of a push to talk button by using a paging system adapter or by using a special Auxiliary Trunk TN763 with its supporting hardware A single line or multiline voice terminal user including the attendant can access paging equipment by dialing the appropriate paging system access code Depending upon the capabilities and options of the paging system it may be necessary to dial individual zones once the paging equipment has been accessed A zone is a number of paging loudspeakers that form a logical group A zone might include all of the loudspeakers in given room or all of the loudspeakers in all of the areas of a building that share a common function For example all of the loudspeakers on a factory floor might be grouped into one zone while all of the loudspeakers in all of the conference rooms might be grouped into another zone In most modern paging systems paging zones are provided by the paging equipment and selected by passing dial codes to the paging equipment If you want to retain one or more older paging systems a similar form of zone paging may be achieved by using an Auxiliary Trunk CP and up to three single zone paging systems The Auxiliary Trunk CP provides three ports which may be used to interface paging systemsEach of these por
505. rwarding station in a hunt group will first ring at the forwarded to station After an administered number of rings the call returns to the hunt group if all members of the hunt group are busy the call continues to ring at the forwarded to station until a hunt group member becomes available Station Message Detail Recording SMDR When a call is successfully forwarded to an outside number the call record will contain the forwarding station and forwarded to station numbers if Forwarding was activated by an inside station If Forwarding was activated remotely the SMDR call record will contain the incoming trunk number the PDC of the forwarding station and the barrier code number For more details see the Message Detail Recording feature description Transfer Calls transferred by TRANSFER button operation to a forwarding station will be given normal Forwarding treatment 2 178 Forwarding Trunk Groups Loop Start If the System 25 uses Loop Start trunks calls can be forwarded to remote locations on y if Trunk to Trunk Transfer has been administered for Loop Start trunks Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port eAllow this station to forward calls to outside Locations yes or no default no 2 179 FEATURES AND SERVICES Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI Description This feature allows the following voice terminals to provide hands free answer service on eligible incoming calls each terminal must have Aut
506. s Personal Lines are subject to the toll restriction options of the stations on which they appear Remote Access A barrier code class of restriction COR has the same parameters as the class of service permissions associated with stations A system wide default COR must be administered for use if barrier codes are disabled Barrier code CORs override the default COR Repertory Dialing A user cannot use Repertory Dialing to access a number that he she is restricted from dialing Speed Dialing A user cannot use Speed Dialing to access a number that he she is restricted from dialing Transfer A non restricted user typically the attendant can transfer a CO trunk to an outward restricted or toll restricted station giving the station outward service The toll restriction class of the transferring station will apply for calls placed over a transferred trunk Administration Requirements Terminal Port e Restrict access to CO trunk pool yes or no default no e Restrict access to all other trunk pools yes or no default no e Restrict outward calls yes or no default no e ARS Facility Restriction Level Level Number 0 3 default 3 e Specify Toll Restriction Class Class Number 1 4 none default none restricted Automatic Route Selection e Route Facility Restriction Levels Trunk Port e Allow dial access to this trunk yes or no default yes System e Allow dial access to this virtual facility y
507. s lt Enable options gt the system incorporates the changes requested and displays the message DISCONNECTED If Autobaud is off the user must now press BREAK to return to Command Mode If Autobaud is on the user must press BREAK and RETURN to return to Command Mode Note If a user attempts to enable options during a SAVE operation by the system administrator the message options changed FAILED will be displayed The user will be returned to the top level of the Command Mode menu and all change requests discarded After waiting a few minutes the user may try again to change his her data port parameters Considerations For those cases where a data terminal user accesses various data endpoints each requiring option changes the User Changeable Options feature simplifies the process of administering the data port to allow data call setup A system administrator is not required to enter each change Interactions The following feature interacts with User Changeable Options Expert Mode See the Expert Mode feature description for an abbreviated method of accessing Command Mode menus 2 342 User Changeable Options Administration Requirements e Data Port A data port must be administered to allow the terminal user to change options from the Command Mode menu permission is denied the user may view the current option settings but not change them eAT amp T STARLAN NETWORK Access The User Changeable Opti
508. s an MS DOS application program that provides an enhanced calling interface and terminal emulation for PCs CAM combined with System 25 s Third Party Call Setup feature provides the capabilities of an integrated voice data workstation specifically eA 200 entry directory for automatic dialing of voice and data calls eVT100 terminal emulation with file transfer with error checking unattended remote access operation with mail eOn line HELP that is accessible from almost anywhere within the program CAM runs on the AT amp T PC6300 or compatible PC with at least 384K bytes of memory running MS DOS Version 2 0 or later when connected to System 25 or MS DOS Version 3 1 or later when connected to the STARLAN NETWORK The PC running CAM can be connected to System 25 in one of two ways Figure 2 13 1 By the PC s RS 232 COM port to the System 25 via an ADU DLC connection 2 As a STARLAN NETWORK workstation to the System 25 via the STARLAN Interface CP CAM interfaces with System 25 s Command Mode to provide call control The Third Party Call Setup feature provides voice call origination The STARLAN NETWORK communication driver NAUCOM is used before CAM is run on a STARLAN NETWORK workstation The Extended Device driver CAM232 is used when CAM is run on a PC connected to a System 25 DLC port The default screen presented when the user accesses CAM is the phone directory screen The phone screen is divided into five partitio
509. s and Multiple Asynchronous Data Units MADUS provide interface between ports on the TN726 Data Line CP and RS 232 Data Terminal Equipment DTE or Data Communications Equipment DCE The DTE is equipment that provides a data source termination or both a host computer printer or a data terminal are examples of DTE The DCE is equipment that provides the functions required to establish maintain and terminate data communications modems are the most common DCE The 23 series of ADUs Figure 4 22 and are DCE that allow a direct connection between DTE and port circuits on the Data Line CP TN726 To connect an ADU to DCE a cross over cable null modem is required PEC 2724 30 C The modular jack labeled Wall connects the ADU to the building wiring with a standard 4 pair modular cord The 400B2 Adapter can be used to provide supplemental ac power for the ADU and is bridged at the wall jack if required Z3A1 2 and 4 units only The modular jack labeled Telephone allows a voice terminal to be attached to the ADU Separate wire pairs from the telephone to the system cabinets are provided in a single 4 pair cable run back to the SIP The pairs separate at the SIP for connection to voice and data ports The Z3A series of ADUs measure about 4 5 inches in length 2 inches wide and 1 inch high The ADUs available are shown in Table 4 The Z3A ADUS should be installed only on inside facilities they are not designed to
510. s as follows 1 PC user loads ACCESS and is automatically connected to the STARLAN NETWORK The STARLAN CP phone number may be entered when ACCESS is installed 2 The PC user may now access the STARLAN NETWORK just as if he she were a client connected to the STAR LAN NETWORK through an NAU Note Applications that are to be run frequently or are large gt 10K bytes should be copied to the user s disk before they are run B A Data terminal user accesses a UNIX system host on the STARLAN NETWORK When the user dials the STARLAN CP the CP answers in Gateway Mode and presents the user with a STARLAN Address prompt A typical call is as follows 1 The user dials the STARLAN CP 2 The STARLAN CP provides the address prompt The user enters the logical name of the STARLAN NETWORK host for example 3B2 3 The user is connected to the UNIX system host and receives the host login prompt Flow Control Software flow control XON XOFF may be enabled or disabled by System 25 data endpoints After the STARLAN Address prompt is returned to the user a CONTROL X may be entered instead of a logical name The user will be prompted further to enable or disable flow control After that the user is again prompted for a STARLAN address This option also works for calls from the STARLAN NETWORK to System 25 Data Call Disconnect Data calls may be disconnected at either endpoint Connections are dropped through the
511. s as two conferees until it is completed Coverage Callback calls to the originator do not send ring signals to its coverage stations If a call is queued for a station then one of the coverage stations becomes available the call remains queued for the originally dialed station Data Pooled Modem Calls to busy data ports can be queued Data ports cannot queue calls or receive call waiting treatment A call requiring a pooled modem cannot queue Direct Group Calling DGC Inside calls to busy DGC groups can be queued Queuing is not allowed if all members of the DGC group are logged out A multiline DGC member with a queued call and a single line member with an off hook queued call are considered busy Display Before Callback Queuing is invoked the display shows the standard format for origination of an inside or outside call When Callback Queuing goes into effect for the call the display updates to CALL QUEUED If the user cancels queuing the display is QUEUE CANCELED If the queuing attempt is denied QUEUE DENIED appears When a station receives callback indicating that the called facility is now available the display shows the same information seen before queuing except that queue descriptor Q appears in position 1 displacing the number and name fields to the right Once the user answers the callback the display updates to standard origination format Q is removed If a user with Automatic Incoming Call ID is off hook when a call
512. s found a seizure signal service request is sent to the distant switch If the distant switch requires dialed digits as all but some tie trunks do a signal Dial Tone is returned to System 25 indicating readiness to accept dialed digits Trunk type refers to the physical design of a trunk circuit The trunk types supported and a brief description of each are given below Refer to Section 3 Functional Description and Section 9 for additional information eLoop Start A closure signal is sent through the loop formed by the trunk leads e Ground Start Similar to loop start but enhanced with ground signals elmmediate Start No start dial signals are used On outgoing calls the system waits at least 80 ms after sending the seizure signal before sending the digits required by the distant switch This allows the distant switch enough time to attach a digit receiver to the trunk Tie and DID trunks 2 334 Trunk Groups eWink Start A momentary signal wink is sent to the distant switch Tie and DID trunks eDelay Dial A steady signal is sent to the distant switch and is removed when ready to receive digits Tie trunks only e Automatic No start dial signals are used The seizure signal sent or received is sufficient to route the call Tie trunks only Trunk groups connecting with a local CO WATS office or FX office can be ground or loop start DID trunk groups can be immediate or wink start Tie trunks groups
513. s incoming dial pulse type calls to reach specific individuals or facilities in the system without attendant assistance System 25 customers reserve blocks of DID numbers from the CO The DID numbers may correspond to a PDC FPDC DGC access code DDC or any facility with an access code such as a pooled facility or a paging zone The system is capable of receiving either 1 2 3 or 4 digits over its DID trunks The number of digits received on a specific DID trunk will be constant for that trunk however different DID trunks may receive different numbers of digits The system is capable of receiving up to four digits and then ignoring leading digits as specified to match against system dial codes For example the dial code matching DID number NXX 2157 can be 57 157 or 2157 If the System 25 is administered to match on more digits than are received from the Central Office CO the additional leading digits are taken from the 4 digit trunk number For example if a call comes in on DID trunk number 1234 the CO sends two digits 77 over this trunk to identify the recipient and System 25 is administered to match on three digits then the call will be routed to dial code 277 incoming DID numbers that don t match any valid dial code may optionally be directed to the Attendant Console or to Reorder Tone If the DID number received is a valid dial code the caller is provided either Ringback Tone Busy Tone or the tone from a pooled facility e
514. s originated from a voice terminal Transfer To Data or other data terminal Third Party Call Setup Autoanswer a data call and go into Setup mode The data endpoint remains in the Idle mode while the user is establishing a data call from a voice terminal until Transfer To Data is activated Command Mode Command Mode enables the Data Terminal Dialing feature allows the user to view and change associated data port options and provides access to the Third party Call Setup feature Command Mode may be entered by going on line and pressing Break or Break Return Expert Mode Expert Mode is an enhancement to the Command Mode feature that provides an alternative method of performing the full range of Command Mode functions By eliminating the display of menus and allowing multiple commands to be entered on a single line Expert Mode lends itself to computer driven instructions Individual users who are very familiar with Command Mode operations may also find it useful 2 121 FEATURES AND SERVICES Data Terminal Dialing Mode Data Terminal Dialing is a data feature accessed via Command Mode It provides a procedure to establish data calls without the use of a voice terminal Data Terminal Dialing supports both on premises off premises data calls with the support of the System 25 Modem Pooling feature Dialed digits are entered from the data terminal keyboard or host computer using a program compatible with Data Terminal Dial
515. s per covered station or standard group 8 Dial Codes 600 Personal Dial Codes PDCs 200 Floating Personal Dial Codes FPDCs 300 Data Dial Codes DDCs 104 Direct Group Calling DGC Groups 32 Members per group 20 5 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Hardware and Software Parameters Contd ITEM TOTAL Emergency Transfer Units ETUs Voice Terminals per ETU Modem Pool Circuit Packs per cabinet Conversion Resources per circuit pack Paging Zones AB Parked Calls System Per Voice Terminal Attendant Selector Console Pickup Groups Members per group Trunk Groups System Delay Announcements Direct Group Calling Delay Announcement Directed Night Service Delay Announcement Account Code Digits SMDR or Call Accounting System Models 100 200 300 or 500 k k Speed Dialing Numbers System Speed Dialing Numbers 100 189 90 Personal Speed Dialing Numbers 20 39 per station 20 Repertory Dialing digits plus Speed Dialing digits 34100 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Hardware and Software Parameters Contd 5 4 ITEM TOTAL System Administration Terminal Toll Call Allowed Lists Total Entries all lists Virtual Facilities Traffic Data eSimultaneous 2 Party Conversations e Call Capacity CCS Hour Busy Hour Call Capacity Reliability eMean Time Between Outages MTBO Power Consumption ePer Cabinet Maximum e Thermal Dissipation Total Ports also include
516. s ringing at coverage buttons to be picked by dialing the Pickup code 7 and the ringing terminals PDC Picked up calls remain accessible at the call appearance button of multiline terminals but are no longer available at single line terminals A ringing call can be answered at a busy single line voice terminal by pressing the switchhook which will place the current call on hold dialing 7 and the ringing voice terminal s PDC This is a standard feature available at every voice terminal No administration is required Also this feature cannot be turned off or restricted Group Pickup Group Pickup permits calls to another terminal in the Pickup group to be answered Any ringing call including Automatic Intercom and coverage calls is eligible for Pickup A member of a Pickup Group can answer any call to any other member of the group by dialing the Group Pickup code 70 Up to 16 groups with up to 16 voice terminals in each group can be set up Each Pickup group can have a maximum of two simultaneous ringing calls eligible for Pickup treatment at a time and the calls are picked up in order of arrival A user can be assigned to only one Pickup Group Considerations With Pickup users do not have to leave their own voice terminal to answer a call at a nearby voice terminal Instead a user simply lifts the handset and dials an access code This allows calls that may go unanswered to be handled quickly and efficiently
517. s that support Command Mode i e ASCII data terminals with keyboards and host computers Several controlling features are provided to allow data endpoints and voice terminals to set up data calls The following briefly describes the Data Service features used in controlling data calls a 2 122 Command Mode Expert Mode Command Mode and Expert Mode provide an interface to the Data Terminal Dialing feature the Third Party Call Setup feature and permits users to display and change data port options Data Services Overview b Data Terminal Dialing Data Terminal Dialing provides call setup from terminals and host computers Transfer To Data Transfer To Data is the preferred method of data call origination from multiline voice terminals equipped with Transfer to Data DATA buttons and associated digital data endpoints The DATA button is associated by DDC with a near end data endpoint unique DATA button must be provided for each DDC that the voice terminal is capable of controlling Associated with each DATA button is an LED that reflects the status of data endpoints as follows e Dark Data endpoint is idle e Winking Data endpoint is reserved preindicated e Flashing Data endpoint is being alerted of an incoming call eOn Steady Data endpoint is either in the on line off hook state or is reserved for another user and busy Refer to the following feature descriptions for additional information e Command Mode
518. s trunk and stati Software Limits hardware maximum System Resources eOne Service Circuit CP includes 4 TT Receivers 8 ports allocated CP e Two Touch Tone Receiver CPs 4 TT Receivers CP 8 ports allocated CP ePooled Modem Max 6 CPs 4 ports allocated CP two modems per CP on ports 36 CPs 4140 2500 4 Years 500 Watts 1700BTU Hour Hardware and Software Parameters Contd Trunks e Trunk Ports Tie Trunks e Auxiliary Trunk Ports Paging Access Dictation Access Station Ports eData Ports e Voice Ports Single Line Voice Terminals Multiline Voice Terminals Attendant Consoles Selector Consoles 22 or 34 Button Sets nonattendant Non 22 or 34 Button Sets TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Unit Loads A cabinet can supply no more than 80 unit loads of 48 volt power a unit load is defined as 44 mA Unit loading is determined by the terminal connected to the port circuits The following table lists unit loads for various terminals UNIT LOADS Note EQUIPMENT CIRCUIT UNIT LOAD PACK PER PORT 2500 Voice Terminals ZTN78 7100 Voice Terminals MET Sets 10 Btn TN735 10 MET Set 12 Btn TN735 2 0 10 5 Btn 7302H01D 10 Btn 7303H01D 1 0 34 Bin 7305H01D 1 0 HFAI 7309 01 1 0 BIS 7305H03B ZIN79 1 50 BIS w display 7305 04 2 79 2 00 34 Btn Deluxe 7305H02D ZTN79 10 7313 1 ZTN79 12 BIS 22 7314H01A 2 0 BIS 34
519. s with INVALID OPTION and the entry is ignored Once all changes have been entered the user enters XE to enable the options Considerations Expert Mode is primarily for use by computer driven endpoints that can store command sequences for automated use However a user experienced in accessing Command Mode menus may find Expert Mode to be a faster alternative when operating at slower speeds since the time required to display each menu and to input separate commands is essentially deleted Interactions The following feature interacts with Expert Mode Command Mode Refer to the Command Mode feature description for a detailed description of Command Mode and of the various menu items Administration Requirements The data port associated with a data terminal can be administered to allow the user to change options when in Command or Expert Mode Otherwise the user may view the current options but not change them The default prompt for Expert Mode Command may be changed via system administration 2 166 Extended Stations Extended Stations Description Allows single line voice terminals to be located at distances from 2000 to 17500 feet from the system cabinets Extended stations have the same feature capability as other voice terminals These stations count as an outside party on conference calls Transmit and receive levels are increased at extended stations for conferencing Considerations A single line voice te
520. se privately with a called partly while the calling party is split away on hold When the attendant presses START or a DXS button to extend an incoming call to a called party the calling party is automatically split away from the connection and placed on hold This allows the attendant to talk privately with the called party before extending the call The attendant can then press RELEASE to complete the transfer or CANCEL to drop the called station and return to the incoming call If the console is a SLAC the attendant can also use the Join and Source Destination features while in the Start mode Refer to the descriptions of these features for details Considerations Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic allows the attendant to 1 announce a call 2 determine privately whether the called party is available to receive the call and 3 obtain information if necessary to redirect the call or take a message Interactions The following features interact with Attendant Splitting One Way Automatic Attendant Source Destination SLAC only This feature can be used after reaching the called party It allows the attendant to speak privately to both the calling party and the called party before connecting them together Music on Hold Music on hold is not provided to the calling party while the call is split from the console FEATURES AND SERVICES Attendant System Alarm Indication Description This feature provides a visible alarm on
521. sers to access a common pool of trunks via a Direct Facility Access FACILITY button Upon pressing a FACILITY button and going off hook a multiline voice terminal user is connected to a common pool of outside trunks CO FX WATS tie If the Status l Use LEDs associated with the button light steadily the user may complete the call If no idle trunk is available facility busy indication an attempt by the user to originate a call will be denied and the l Use indicator will be Off A user requiring access to several different trunk pools must have a separate FACILITY button for each pool If all trunks in a pool are busy the Status LED will be lighted The user may press FACILITY and remain on hook to receive the busy to idle reminder when a trunk becomes available The busy to idle reminder is a short burst of tone that will be heard when a trunk in the pool becomes available When Prime Line Preference is assigned to a FACILITY button the button must be pressed to invoke the busy to idle reminder even though the I Use LED is lighted Refer to the feature description for additional information Considerations Pooled Facility Direct Access provides easy access to the exchange network for users who make many outside calls The feature eliminates the need to dial a facility access code In addition the associated status LED provides pool busy idle status and the busy to idle reminder Interactions The following featur
522. sh Mute For turning off the speakerphone microphone temporarily for privacy Hold with status LED For putting calls on hold Speaker with status LED For making speakerphone calls and for turning on the speaker during handset calls e Tone Ringer e Three Volume Controls tone ringer speaker handset receiver Adjuncts None HARDWARE DESCRIPTION MEMORY BUTTONS PROGRAM BUTTON REDIAL BUTTON FLASH BUTTON HOLD BUTTON AND LAMP SPEAKERPHONE BUTTON AND LAMP MUTE BUTTON RECEIVER NE VOLUME VOLUME CONTROL CONTROL Figure 4 7 420 Speakerphone Voice Terminal Single Line Voice Terminal Connection Information Single line voice terminal connection information is provided under the heading later in this Section Maximum cabling distances from the system cabinets to single line voice terminals is provided in Section 5 Specifications Single Line Voice Terminal Feature Operations Refer to Single Line Terminal User Guide 555 530 702 for information about single line voice terminal feature operation HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Multiline Voice Terminals The recommended multiline terminals for System 25 are the 7300H Series hybrid sets that are also used with the MERLIN Communications System Multibutton Electronic Telephone MET sets already available to the customer can be reused in a System 25 installation but are not orderable Multiline voic
523. splay presents information about the pooled facility in the following form Screen 1 XXX OF YYY BUSY The user can return from Inspection Mode to Normal Mode Local Mode of the following actions ePress INSPECT again e Allow timeout to occur after 15 seconds of no station activity e Change switchhook state if the user goes on hook the terminal returns to Normal or Local Mode if the user goes off hook the terminal returns to Normal Mode Considerations Activation of the Inspection feature has the following impact on terminal operation eHands Free Answer on Intercom is disabled elf the user is on hook but has a call on hold there is no effect on the call elf the user is off hook and in the midst of dialing the system disconnects the call e Automatic Incoming Call Identification see feature description is suppressed user cannot operate feature buttons user cannot perform call handling procedures such as holding transferring or answering a call 2 191 FEATURES AND SERVICES The user of a non attendant display set can exit from Inspection directly to Program Mode by activating the Program switch However to reenter Inspection the user must first go from Program to Normal then enter Inspection Mode Administration Requirements Administration of the Display feature enables Inspection Hardware Requirements The Inspection feature can be used only at display equipped mut
524. splays for redirected coverage returning third party calls have the following formats Screen 1 contains either information about the called party usually a station or DGC group or a feature descriptor that explains why the call has come to this station for example PARK RTN or NIGHT SERVICE Screen 2 always contains information about the calling party the person who initiated the call and usually the person on the line when the display station user answers the call e Generally if the System 25 acts on a call without the display terminal user having caused the action the result is not displayed For example if a call is forwarded there is no indication of forwarding on the caller s display this also applies to calls that are picked up sent to coverage parked unparked etc Exceptions Conference bridging indication of the number of parties on a call exclusion indication when excluded from a call e Generally if the System 25 redirects a call away from a display terminal the display does not present this information For example when a call is picked up by another terminal the called terminal does not display this action Exceptions If a call to a terminal goes to coverage that terminal s display has a in position 16 of Screen 1 if a call is forwarded to an outside number the display flashes F and the forwarded to number eA call information display will remain on the screen unl
525. ssigned to FACILITY buttons and may not be embedded in other virtual facility numbers VFs may be used in ARS routing patterns just as if they were physical facilities Considerations VFs enhance the Automatic Route Selection feature by increasing the number of facility types available for use in routing patterns Using ARS ensures that the least cost facility is used to complete each call User intervention is minimized and associated user dialing errors are essentially eliminated In addition in those systems where users are permitted dial access to VFs user dialing of long digit strings is minimized as are the associated dialing errors 2 347 FEATURES AND SERVICES Interactions When using a VF through dial access calling restrictions will be based on the station s class of service Dial access VF calls will be completed only if VF code is valid and not dial restricted station is not outward restricted station has dial access permission for the physical facility embedded within the VFN e The destination telephone number is valid and allowed for the station s toll restriction class VFs cannot be assigned to Facility buttons Button access is provided by programming REP DIAL buttons only Administration Requirements A VF must be programmed via System 25 administration The following items are administrable e Specify a Virtual Facility code 190 199 eAssign a Virtual Facility n
526. ssigned to a DGC group the attendant s display always contains the number of calls waiting in the attendant queue 2 155 FEATURES AND SERVICES eFLEX DSS Button Operation Operation of a FLEX DSS button that is not programmed with an extension number generates the display NO INFORMATION e Forwarding Reception of a forwarded call follows the standard format for a redirected call with the call type descriptor f in position 16 of Screen 2 A forwarding display station receives abbreviated alert when a call is forwarded to an outside number the display is flashed on Screen 1 only The new forwarding descriptor F appears in position 1 followed by the digits of the outside number Screen 1 F912325552365 eLeave Word Calling LWC If a user successfully activates LWC the display shows the called extension number and MSG SENT Screen 1 879 MSG SENT If an LWC attempt is not successful the display shows the called extension and MSG DENIED Screen 1 879 MSG DENIED eManual Signaling A display set receiving manual signaling from another station has SIG in positions 1 3 The name of the signaling party if available or the extension number of the station from which the signal was sent appears in positions 6 14 Screen 1 SIG Borden L The message is displayed for 5 seconds or until the user selects another button or receives a call The signaling party has no display for this feature 2 156 D
527. ssing treats the number as a physical facility for Station Message Detail Recording SMDR purposes Thus if VF code 190 is used to complete a call the SMDR call record will show 190 as the facility used A VFN may contain up to 28 characters The pound sign is used as an escape character within the digit string and indicates that the character following the pound sign requires special interpretation The following table defines the special characters that may be included in a VFN CHARACTER FUNCTION 1 5 second pause Transmit Transmit 5 Insert dialed digits destination telephone number here The destination telephone number may be up to 16 digits in length 21 if ARS digit translations have occurred If 5 is used it must be placed within the last nine digits of the VFN If 5 is not used within a VFN the dialed digits are appended to the end of the VFN 8 Begin transmission of End to End Signaling system begins transmitting touch tone signals to the far end switch Examples of Virtual Facility Numbers The use of VFs can be demonstrated with the following examples eExample 1 VF Code 191 VFN 10010288 The first three digits 100 represent the FAC for a CO trunk group 10288 represents an access code for a non primary IXC The destination telephone number dialed by the user will be transmitted after this IXC access code since 5 was not used within the VF number Exa
528. station will not be covered unless the covered station has additional coverage This is an important consideration when the attendant provides coverage DGC Group Coverage Calls proceeding to the DGC Coverage Receiver Group hunt in a circular fashion for the first idle station starting from the last station to receive a call if all DGC members are busy both internal and external calls continue to ring and or flash at the covered station and any individual coverage receiver s station s until a DGC station becomes idle If a DGC group is used for both DGC calls and group coverage trunk calls into a DGC group have priority over coverage calls Calls sent by coverage to a DGC Coverage Group member station do not receive additional coverage DGC groups cannot be coverage senders to another DGC Coverage Group However calls made directly to a DGC member can be covered by another DGC Coverage Group Once a call has been redirected to a DGC Coverage Group member the call is transferred to the covering station The call continues ringing until answered or dropped The call is not accessible at the covered station nor any individual coverage receiver once it is redirected to an idle DGC station If al DGC members are busy the call remains accessible at the covered station until a member is available DGC Coverage Groups count against the system specified maximum number of DGC groups but not against the number of Coverage Groups The limit of eight
529. stration Requirements e Data Port The user s data terminal may be administered to have a particular source terminal associated with it This allows the abbreviated form of dialing when activating the Third Party Call Setup feature A source terminal may be associated via administration with several third party data terminals A third party data terminal however may be associated with only one source terminal voice or data In addition the third party data terminal can be administered so that calls may be established for Any voice or data source terminal One associated source terminal only 2 324 Third Party Call Setup No source terminals feature disabled default eAT amp T STARLAN NETWORK Access Ports administered on the STARLAN INTERFACE circuit pack may not have a particular source terminal associated with them Depending on the administration parameters enabled third party data terminals on the STARLAN INTERFACE circuit pack may establish calls for Any voice or data source terminal No source terminals feature disabled default 2 325 FEATURES AND SERVICES Tie Trunks Description Tie trunks provide private communications links between System 25 and other PBXs Incoming tie trunk calls may be directed to the attendant to a voice terminal or to a data endpoint Service may be either automatic immediate dial delay dial or wink start Dial pulse or touch tone signaling is supp
530. striction is provided for tandem trunk calls However access to outgoing facilities can be controlled via the allow dial access option in the outgoing trunk s administration Tandem Trunk calls receive the following treatment when attempting dial access of System 25 facilities elf the requested trunk pool is dial accessible an outgoing trunk is selected and the call proceeds normally elf the requested trunk pool s not dial accessible reorder tone is returned to the calling party Any attempt to dial an outgoing trunk pool by non tandem tie trunks that is tie trunks whose trunk number does not begin with 9 results in reorder tone being returned to the calling party Paging System Access Tandem trunks can access paging ports auxiliary or CO trunk interface as long as the paging ports are dial accessible Station Message Detail Recording SMDR After accessing an outgoing facility the tandem trunks Facility Access Code FAC will be recorded in the STN field on the calls SMDR record If the tandem trunk has no FAC then the 4 digit trunk number 9xxx will be recorded in the STN field All other SMDR fields are unaffected Administration Requirements Except for the need to specify the trunk number as described above administration of tandem trunks is the same as for any other tie trunk Hardware Requirements Only dial in tie trunks types 1003 1008 may be used for tandem trunking 2 320 Test Test Descriptio
531. surges are isolated from the hybrid and codec by the line transformer FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PORT CIRCUIT 0 PORT ON BOARD 1 0 MICROPROCESSOR CIRCUIT AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT GROUND DETECTOR CIRCUIT 3 Figure 3 9 Auxiliary Trunk TN763 Unique Circuitry Data Line TN726 The Data Line Circuit Pack Figure 3 10 interfaces eight Asynchronous Data Units ADUs data devices and the TDM bus The ADUs are typically in turn connected to RS 232 type devices The Data Line has the following unique circuitry e Bit Clock The bit clock circuitry is used to provide the Octal Asynchronous Terminal Mode Two EIA Asynchronous LSIs OATMEALs with a clock frequency that is a multiple of each baud rate In addition the clock rate is divided down to 160 kHz The 160 kHz is then compared to the 160 kHz system data clock and is phase locked to it The phase locked circuit is required for low speed operation eBus Isolation This portion of the circuit pack is used to isolate the microprocessor bus Isolation is required because the realized bus load exceeds the maximum limit specified for this device due to the large number of devices controlled by the NPE The OATMEALs are isolated from the common bus structure FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION PORT CIRCUIT ASYNCHRONOUS DATA NPE PORT a CIRCUIT 1 ON BOARD MICROPROCESSOR PORT CIRCUIT 2 NPE 1 BUS ISOLATION PORT CIRCUI
532. sy Following Forwarding DSS calls do receive Following or Forwarding treatment Last Number Dialed Numbers called by pressing FLEX DSS or DSS buttons are not saved by Last Number Dialed and cannot be redialed with that feature Line Selection Prime Line Preference When Prime Line Preference is assigned to a DSS button the button must be pressed to invoke the busy to idle reminder even though its red l Use LED is lighted Personal Dial Code PDC An attempt to program a FPDC on a FLEX DSS button rather than a PDC results in Reorder Tone Pooled Facilities A pooled facility access code may be stored on a FLEX DSS button but not on a DSS button If so the button will function very much like a Direct Facility Access button with the capability of receiving a busy to idle reminder for the pooled facility However this button will not allow access to a dial restricted facility Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port eAssign DSS and or FLEX DSS buttons 2 148 Display Display Description This feature provides visual alphanumeric call information at multiline voice terminals equipped with display modules The Display feature also provides support for the Directory Inspection Local Display and Program features which are all covered in separate feature descriptions Display capability is based on the system s integrated directory which allows names to be associated with Personal Dial Codes PDCs Data Dial C
533. t reorder tone will be returned Note Personal Speed Dialing is voice terminal oriented not PDC oriented A user who logs in at another terminal cannot use his her Personal Speed Dialing numbers Considerations System Speed Dialing allows users to dial a number by simply dialing 100 189 The stored number associated with each code is typically a common use phone number and is programmed via System Administration Personal Speed Dialing allows users to program up to twenty numbers for their personal use these numbers can only be accessed from the terminal where originally programmed The system will compare the restrictions applicable for the voice terminal against the number associated with the Speed Dialing code then allow or deny the call just as if the number had been dialed directly from the terminal Interactions The following features interact with Speed Dialing Account Code Entry Speed Dialing codes may be used to store account codes Bridging of System Access Buttons Personal Speed Dialing is a station oriented feature If a station dials a Personal Speed Dialing code 20 39 while off hook on a Bridged Access button the system will handle this call exactly as if the code was dialed from this station s System Access button Calling Restrictions A terminal that is restricted from placing a particular call cannot avoid restriction by using the Speed Dialing feature 2 281 FEATURES AND SERVICES Data Termi
534. t Connections Diagrams for peripheral equipment connections are included with the specific feature descriptions in 4 64 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION ADU Connections Figures 4 33 and provide connection information for data terminals and associated single line or multiline voice terminals The voice terminal and data terminal leads are separated at the SIP with a Y adapter and are connected to their respective station ports Figure 4 35 presents a typical Multiple Asynchronous Data Unit MADU connection Figure 4 36 shows local power connections for Z3A1 Z3A2 and Z3A4 ADUs Auxiliary Equipment Connections Diagrams for auxiliary equipment connections are included with the specific feature descriptions in SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART oF OCTOPUS PART OF CABLE SIP SINGLE LINE VOICE TERMINAL NOTE LEGEND ZTN78 TIP RING CP TN742 ANALOG LINE CP 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 PEC 2720 05P C5 MODULAR CORD 0480 87 FURNISHED WITH SET Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE NOTE RANGE LESS THAN 2000 FEET FROM SYSTEM CABI NET USE ZTN 78 CP RANGE MORE THAN 2000 FEET BUT LESS THAN 1300 OHMSt LOOP RESISTANCE FROM SYSTEM CABINET USE TN742 CP FIVE SINGLE LINE VOI CE TERMINALS CAN BE BRIDGED WHEN USING A TN742 CP HOWEVER ONLY TWO MAY BE OFF HOOK AT ONE TIME FURNISHED BY INSTALLER t INCLUDES TELEPHONE TERMI NAL Figure 4 26 On Premises Single Line Voice Terminal Con
535. t Packs The following CPs are optional and can be mounted in any slot not occupied by the required CPs Station Port Circuit Packs e TN726 Data Line Provides eight ports for Asynchronous Data Units ADUs Used for in building service within 2000 feet of the system cabinets Data speeds from 300 bps to 19 2 Kbps are supported Service beyond 2000 feet at less than 19 2 Kbps is supported see Section 5 Technical Specifications Extends serial communications link from the system to data equipment over standard station wiring HARDWARE DESCRIPTION eTN735 MET Line Provides four ports for Multibutton Electronic Telephone MET sets Used for in building service within 1000 feet of the system cabinets eTN742 Analog Line Provides eight ports for single line voice terminals with or without non neon message waiting lamps Also supports Off Premises Stations OPS and out of building service Auxiliary equipment interfaces are also supported Used for service within 24 000 feet of the system cabinets Five voice terminals can be bridged onto each port Only two terminals can be off hook simultaneously on each port otherwise transmission can be degraded Note Off Premises Stations must be FCC registered eZIN78 Tip Ring Line Provides eight ports for single line sets with or without non neon message waiting lamps Used for in building nonbridged voice terminal service within 2000 feet of the system cabinets No
536. t is not malfunctioning RIGHTS OF THE TELEPHONE COMPANY If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice isn t practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY The voice terminals described in this manual are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC FCC REGISTRATION INFORMATION Registration Number AS593M 71565 MF E Ringer Equivalence 0 5A Network Interface RJ21X or RJ2GX PRIVATE LINE SERVICE Service Order Code 9 0F Facility Interface Code e Tie Lines TL31M e Off Premises Stations OL13C FCC WARNING STATEMENT Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules require that you be notified of the following e This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to radio communications elt has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
537. t multiple paging systems up to three each paging system constitutes a single zone and an additional dial code may be administered to access all zones simultaneously 2 235 FEATURES AND SERVICES Detailed connection information is provided in Figures 2 29 and Descriptions of the SIP Station Interconnect Panel Trunk Access Equipment and associated cables and adapters are provided under the heading Connectivity in of this manual PART OF TAE q 1700A NETWORK SYSTEM 25 INTERFACE BLOCK yy 1 110 OR B6 TYPE ICONNECTING BLOCK 1 PAGING i SYSTEM LEGEND ZTN76 CO GROUND START TRUNK CP ZTN77 CO LOOP START TRUNK CP B 3 TO 1 SPLITTER CABLE CONNECTORI ZED OR6016 PEC 2720 06X 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C5 MODULAR CORD 048 87 W 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER 1 PAGING SYSTEM PAGE PAC 20 E W ZONE MATE 9 PROVIDES 9 PAGING ZONES PLUS ALL ZONE PAGI NG Figure 2 29 Paging Equipment Connections Using CO Trunk Ports FCC Registered 2 236 Paging System Access SYSTEM 25 CABINET PART OF 25 PAIR CABLE l PART OF PAGING OR DICTATION SYSTEM TN763 AUXILIARY TRUNK SINGLE ENDED 25 PAIR CONNECTOR CABLE A25D NOTE 1 B1 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK C5 MODULAR CORD D4BU 87 C6 SINGLE ENDED MODULAR CORD DYB4 NOTE 2 P1 KS 22911 11 POWER SUPPLY 48 VOLT DC NOTE 2 Wl 4
538. t the same time that a call is coming in on the line the terminal may be connected to the incoming call even though the call is intended for another terminal that shares the line For this reason it is recommended that tie trunks not be assigned as Personal Lines 2 326 Tie Trunks Administration Requirements Trunk Port Assign Trunk Type And Number Assign Class of Service Code 0 15 Assign Facility Access Code default 102 Allow Dial Access yes or no default yes For Auto in Type Only Assign To DGC Group Group Number 1 32 or 0 for none default 0 Make This a Directed Night Service Trunk yes or no default yes Assign Night Service Delay Announcement 1 2 or 0 for none default 0 Dial Inward Capability Tone or Pulse default Pulse Port Options Set E amp M signaling type Type Compatible Type V Type System Administration must ensure that the port type wink delay or immediate Service and the signaling type Compatible V or 1 is compatible with the distant PBX Port Type Wink to Wink Delay to Delay Immediate to Immediate Signaling Type V to V to or Compatible Compatible to or Compatible When tie trunks are used with ARS that is the tie trunk is accessing the distant PBX WATS lines wink or delay type trunks should be used With immediate type trunks the dialed digits may be spilled forward before the distant PBX is ready to receive them
539. t will auto answer eligible calls The HFAI LED will wink on HFAI sets or light steadily BIS sets during HFAI calls The set s response to HFA1 eligible calls depends on the status of the HFAI and AUTO ANS buttons and LEDs as follows elf both HFAl and AUTO ANS LEDs are on 2 180 Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI The set generates a tone burst over its speaker to indicate an incoming call The parties may converse The called party can speak in a normal voice toward the set No other action by the called party is required During the call the called party can press the HFAI Mic or MICROPHONE button to mute the microphone temporarily and prevent the caller from hearing Pressing the button again turns the microphone on again The HFAI BIS user may press the SPEAKER HFAI set or the SPEAKERPHONE BIS set button to end the call If the calling party hangs up first this is not necessary elf only the AUTO ANS LED is on The set generates a tone burst over its speaker to indicate an incoming call set s speaker turns on and the set answers the call Call setup is complete However the called party can hear but not respond to the calling party To respond the user must lift the handset or press the HFAI Mic button on an HFAI set or press the MICROPHONE button on a BIS set HFAI BIS user may press the SPEAKER HFAI set or the SPEAKERPHONE BIS set button to end the
540. tage The UPS must be connected to the common System 25 power outlet One UPS will support a 2 cabinet system AC Power Line Surge Suppressor The TII Model 428 Self Restoring Power Line Surge Suppressor PEC 8310 001 Comcode 402988950 protects against electrical surges spikes and transients that can cause damage to the System 25 power supply A pilot light indicates that full protection is present The unit plugs directly into a standard 120 volt 15 amp grounded outlet providing a dual outlet for protected equipment 346 Modular Bulk Power Supply The 346 Modular Bulk Power Supply 346 MBPS is a cost effective and flexible alternative to the KS 22911 power supply The 346 MBPS can be used where the wall outlet mounted KS 22911 cannot be used Canada or where multiple KS units are required The 346 MBPS consists of the 346A Power Unit 346A PU and the 346A1 Power Panel that is the sole method of mounting the power units Up to three 346A PUs can be mounted per power panel Each PU is capable of powering 4 terminals with adjuncts for a total of 12 terminals per full MBPS The 346 MBPS is intended to be installed in a closet and should be near the terminals within 260 feet All connections are modular and are made with cords and adapters at the 858A Adapter on the SIP Terminals and Selector Consoles can be powered by the 346 MBPS 4 58 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Connectivity System 25 requires 4 pair building wiring that conforms to
541. tal Data Recorder should also be located near the system cabinets It is 5 inches wide 2 inches high and 10 inches long SMDR Call Accounting System CAS The AT amp T Model 475 printer is approximately 16 inches wide 12 inches long and 6 inches high The CAS runs on the AT amp T PC 6300 The printer and the PC should also be located near the system cabinets Wall Space Requirements The customer provided backboard for the cross connect field should be approximately 3 4 inch thick 4 feet high and 8 feet wide Mount the board 30 inches above the floor The board must conform to national and local fire safety codes If existing cross connect hardware is reused the space requirements and hardware requirements must be shown on the floor plan Contact your AT amp T Technical Consultant for assistance in planning for reuse of existing equipment Temperature and Humidity The System 25 equipment should be installed in a well ventilated area The equipment must be located in an area with an ambient temperature between 40 degrees and 104 degrees Fahrenheit 5 and 40 degrees Celsius The relative humidity must be less than 95 noncondensing These parameters should be maintained 24 hours a day 7 days a week 6 4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Air Purity The cabinet should not be installed in an area where the air may be contaminated with any of the following eExcessive dust lint carbon particles paper fiber contaminants o
542. te Equipment connected to the ZTN78 Tip Ring Line CP must meet the following requirements AC impedance 600 ohms DC current Less than 30 ma at 48 volts Ringer Equivalence Number REN Less than 1 15 set plus adjuncts The ZTN78 CP ports can also be used for interface with the AT amp T VOICE POWER Voice Message System VMS eZIN79 ATL Line Provides eight ports for MERLIN Communications System voice terminals Used for service within 2000 feet of the system cabinets terminals more than 1000 feet from the system cabinet require local power Off premises extensions are not supported Out of Building stations require in Range Out of Building IROB units eZTN84 STARLAN Interface Provides four ports for interface with AT amp T STARLAN NETWORKs Release 2 of STARLAN only It supports four connections between data endpoints connected to the PBX and data endpoints connected to the STARLAN NETWORK The Network Extension Unit must be collocated with the System 25 cabinets 4 9 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Trunk Port Circuit Packs eTN753 DID Trunk Provides eight ports for immediate start or wink start Direct Inward Dialing DID trunks e TN760B Tie Trunk Provides four ports for Type 1 E amp M Type 1 E amp M Compatible Type 5 Simplex tie trunks Operating protocols include automatic immediate start wink start or delay dial The TN760B contains option switches for supporting the following signaling formats
543. ted to Remote Access or if night service is active the caller gets special dial tone If a barrier code is not required the caller can now dial the desired number or feature access code Calling privileges of the caller are determined by a system wide default Class of Restriction COR If a barrier code is required the caller dials five more predetermined digits on hearing the special dial tone and receives second dial tone After second dial tone the caller can call the desired number or feature access code The specific barrier code used determines the calling privileges of the user Up to 16 different barrier codes can be administered for the system When the Remote Access caller is using a rotary voice terminal dial pulses are not accepted by the system after the special dial tone is returned When dial tone times out the call routes to an attendant if night service is active the call routes to an administered backup multiline station If a Remote Access call reaches an inside station the station can transfer the call back out of the system subject to System 25 trunk to trunk restrictions and the transferring station s calling restrictions This is allowed even if the callers barrier code does not allow a direct call out 2 262 Remote Access Considerations Using Remote Access an employee of a company with a System 25 PBX can access system facilities from home or other remote locations This is a valuable feature for sal
544. tendant Camp On Description This feature allows the attendant to extend a trunk call to a busy voice terminal and leave it waiting or camped on there After hearing busy tone the attendant presses RELEASE to camp on this call at the busy terminal When this is done a burst of tone is heard in the handset of the called terminal and the caller is placed on hold hearing music on hold if available When a System Access button at a multiline set becomes idle or a single line terminal hangs up the camped on call is connected automatically and ringing begins Considerations camped on call can be answered by busy single line user without losing the current call by momentarily pressing the switchhook which places the current call on hold and then dialing 9 Multiline terminal users cannot do this However if they have a System Access Originate Only button they can place all other calls on hold go off hook on that button and dial 9 to pick up the camped on call If the camped on call is not answered within a specified time the call will be returned to the Attendant Console in one of the following ways e Switched Loop Attendant Console The call returns to the common queue where it remains until the console can receive it at a LOOP button e Direct Trunk Attendant Console The call returns to the Return On Busy RTN BUSY button If that button is busy the call remains camped on at the called terminal until the RTN BUSY but
545. ter KS23475 is a connection block that provides 48V dc power from T1 via modular cords C4 and C1 to the ATL phone data connections from the STARLAN workstation and phone connections from the ATL phone via modular cord Cl over a shared common cable C3 to System 25 The phone and data connections are on separate wire pairs that are split out at the SIP Y adapter Al Phone wiring is cabled to the ATL Line CP ZTN79 by octopus cable C2 and data wiring is cabled to the NEU by modular cord C1 Administration Requirements The STARLAN CP is administered as a type of data port Some items administered on one port are automatically administered for all four ports on the CP others are individually administrable Individually Administrable default eDDC of port eDDC to hunt to next none eDisplay ID 2 287 FEATURES AND SERVICES Common Administration default eCO trunk pool dial restriction no e Other trunk pool dial restriction no e Outward restriction e Toll Restriction Class none eARS 3 e Restrict Third Party Call Setup feature yes Hardware Requirements Requires a STARLAN INTERFACE CP Each CP provides four interface ports between the System 25 and the STARLAN NETWORK 2 288 STARLAN NETWORK Access PART OF SIP 2500 SINGLE LINE PHONE NEU STARLAN WORKSTATION C1 NAU NETWORK ACCESS UNIT PEC 2614 100 NEU NETWORK EXTE
546. terminals that have RECALL buttons can obtain System 25 recall dial tone by pressing the button Pressing RECALL is equivalent to briefly pressing and releasing the switchhook switchhook flash which is the required method of getting recall dial tone at a terminal not equipped with the RECALL button Multiline voice terminals are administered for either manual or automatic activation of the Callback Queuing feature Operation of the RECALL button is the manual method Refer to the feature description for complete information Use of the RECALL button for callback does not interfere with its Centrex functions described in the next paragraph The RECALL button on a multiline voice terminal can be used under specialized conditions to send a switchhook flash to the Central Office for example to access Centrex services However it can never be used to send a switchhook flash to the System 25 Interactions The following feature interacts with Recall Callback Queuing The RECALL button can be used to send switchhook flash to Centrex trunks If a conference exists with a queuable tone and a Centrex trunk the first push of RECALL queues the call A second push of RECALL is needed to send switchhook flash to the Central Office Administration Requirements For Centrex operation stations must not be assigned toll restriction and the Centrex trunks must be administered as Type 805 2 261 FEATURES AND SERVICES Remote Access Descripti
547. th status LED Conference Speaker Drop Message Transfer Recall Hold Programmable Feature Buttons each with l Use and Status LEDs default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 3 Send All Calls 1 Account Code Entry 1 and Last Number Dialed I Adjuncts e502A B Headset Adapters Note The 502B unit provides HFAI service on the headset eS102A Speakerphone PEC 3163 HFU 4 26 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS 10 WITH I USE AND TEST PROGRAM STATUS LEDs SWITCH ON SIDE HANDSET c CONFERENCE r3 TRANSFER C3 DROP HOLD TOUCH DIAL PAD SPEAKER RING VOLUME CONTROL ON SIDE SPEAKER RECALL Figure 4 9 7303H01D Voice Terminal 10 Button 4 27 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 7305H01D Voice Terminal 34 Button MD PEC 3162 412 The 7305 H01D voice terminal Figure 4 10 be desk or wall mounted and is about 10 1 4 inches wide 5 1 2 inches high and 8 1 2 inches deep This set is available only on a reuse basis is not orderable via the Delivery Operation Support System DOSS Configurator The set comes equipped with the following Handset Touch Dial Pad not DTMF e Use and Status LEDs Test Program Switch two positions T for testing operation of LEDs and ringer P for programming feature buttons Built in Speaker Speaker Ringer Volume Control Seven Fixed Feature Buttons with status LED Co
548. that stations that are toll restricted are only toll restricted on CO trunks type 701 and 801 or when they use the ARS feature They will not be toll restricted when they dial access or button access any other type of trunk e g FX WATS or Tie trunks 2 88 Calling Restrictions Facility Access Restriction Any station be denied dial access to the local CO and or to all other pooled facilities as a group A station so restricted may only dial access those facilities via the Automatic Route Selection ARS feature In addition each trunk and Virtual Facility can be administered to allow or restrict dial access If dial access is restricted the trunk or Virtual Facility may only be dial accessed via ARS ARS Restriction Special restrictions on each station may be imposed when the call is routed by the ARS feature Facility Restriction Levels FRLs are used to restrict access to trunk groups An FRL is a single digit 0 1 2 3 A terminal assigned an FRL of 0 has the least privileges a terminal assigned an FRL of 3 the most An FRL is also assigned to each route in each ARS routing pattern The terminal s FRL must be equal to or greater than the route s FRL in order to use that facility Considerations Restrictions are used whenever it is necessary to restrict certain users from accessing designated facilities A typical application is to deny most stations dial access to all trunk groups This forces callers
549. the Attendant Console to alert the attendant to problems detected by the system software The ALARM LED on the Attendant Console will flash whenever a detected fault persists longer than four minutes or if more than five transient faults per hour are detected The alarm indication should be reported immediately to your AT amp T Systems Technician The alarm type that causes an alarm indication is referred to as a Permanent System Alarm These alarms are faults that can cause degradation of service and require immediate attention If a flashing ALARM button is pressed the LED will change from flashing to steadily lit A new trouble situation will cause a steady ALARM LED to start flashing again Only when the trouble has been corrected will the LED turn off Considerations The ALARM LED on the Attendant Console provides a warning as soon as the fault is detected This permits a quick response to system detected faults In a two attendant system both consoles track problems 2 54 Automatic Intercom Automatic Intercom Description This feature allows a multiline voice terminal user or attendant to place and answer calls to and from another station by use of a dedicated button appearance Automatic Intercom provides a private path between two designated multiline voice terminals To place an Automatic Intercom call the calling party presses the Automatic Intercom AUTO ICOM button and goes off hook The calling party hears ringback
550. then one of the coverage stations becomes available the call remains queued for the originally dialed station Coverage Individual Unanswered calls to a station provided both Individual and Group Coverage will first ring at the Individual Coverage station and then after a second delay cycle and still unanswered will ring at the Group Coverage station Coverage Station Hunting A call to a busy single line voice terminal that is both a member of a Station Hunting group and a coverage sender will first hunt for an idle station to service the call If none is available the call will be sent to coverage Direct Group Calling DGC A call to a DGC group member will receive coverage if the member is also a Coverage sender Calls to a busy DGC group do not receive coverage Instead after a predefine number of rings the call will be transferred to delay announcement if provided or ringing will be transferred to all button appearances of the line Exclusion f a coverage receiver invokes Exclusion after answering a coverage call all other terminals including the attendant and the covered station are excluded from the call The covered user cannot enter the call until EXCLUSION is pressed a second time by the covering user Forwarding When a station has both Coverage and Forwarding in effect calls are routed first to the forwarded to station If not answered there within an administered number of rings calls ring at the forwarding and c
551. these figures The octopus cable PEC 2720 05P for example supports eight terminals you do not order one per terminal A list of related PECs Apparatus and Comcodes is provided in Be sure to check the Sales Manual and or DOSS before ordering since this information changes frequently Symbols Used in Figures Modular jacks are shown by the triangle symbol The 25 pair connectors are indicated by shaded blocks Generally only one leg of an octopus cable is shown Unterminated wiring requiring cut down or other termination do not have symbol designations The 103A Connecting Block is a typical modular wall jack that provides cut down connections for building station wiring Voice Terminal and Adjunct Connections Figures through Figure 4 32 provide connection information for single line and multiline voice terminals The single line terminals can be located on premises off premises or out of building The MERLIN System multiline voice terminals be used for out of building service but must be within 2000 feet of the system cabinets local power is required beyond 1000 feet for in building sets and for all out of building sets Off premises service is not available Diagrams for voice terminal adjunct connections are included with the specific feature descriptions in Attendant Console Connections Diagrams for attendant console connections are included in the Attendant Console descriptions in Peripheral Equipmen
552. this feature any other user has equal access to the idle facilities On some multiline voice terminals FLEX DSS DSS AUTO ICOM and FACILITY buttons do not have status and l use LEDs This makes Busy to Idle Reminder less convenient to use because the user must first call the facility to determine if it is available If it is not the user activates the feature by hanging up and pressing the button again When the reminder ring sounds the user must then remember which button was used to initiate the call Interactions Display When a user receives this signal the display format is the same as when the call was originally placed except that idle descriptor I appears in position 1 Number and name fields are displaced to the right Busy to idle Reminder cannot be used with the Last Number Dialed Personal Line or Repertory Dialing features 2 74 Call Accountability Call Accountability Description This feature allows calls made by system users from other users stations to be charged to the callers own home Personal Dial Code PDC To charge a call to the home PDC the user dials followed by the PDC immediately upon receiving first dial tone to place a call When second dial tone is returned the user dials the desired number in the normal way After completion of the call the SMDR record will reflect the accountable PDC that is the caller in the PDC field and the PDC of the voice terminal used i
553. through System 25 to the STARLAN NETWORK 2 283 FEATURES AND SERVICES ACCESS must be used in conjunction with the AT amp T STARLAN NETWORK Server software Version 2 0 or later Installation software furnished with ACCESS requires the STARLAN NETWORK client installation diskette in order to install ACCESS eCommunications Access Manager CAM CAM is an MS DOS applications program that provides an enhanced calling interface and terminal emulation for PCs connected to System 25 or a STARLAN NETWORK This connection must be through DLC or a STARLAN NETWORK that is turn connected to System 25 by a STARLAN CP Refer to the Program feature description for a more detailed description of the program STARLAN INTERFACE Circuit Pack The STARLAN INTERFACE CP ZTN84 requires a single modular connection to the STARLAN NETWORK see Figure 2 38 It provides an interface between System 25 s Time Division Multiplex TDM bus and STARLAN NETWORK s packet switched network The STARLAN CP provides four full duplex data connections at speeds up to 9 600 bits per Second The STARLAN CP operates in two modes Gateway Mode and Bridge Mode Gateway mode supports connections from System 25 data terminals to STAR LAN NETWORK UNIXG system hosts or from STARLAN NETWORK UNIX system hosts or client workstations to System 25 hosts or modem pools In Bridge Mode the STARLAN CP passes the STARLAN NETWORK s Universal Receiver Protocol URP through
554. tion the call remains accessible at the call appearance button of multiline voice terminals but is no longer accessible at single line voice terminals Each COVER IND button at a covering station represents one covered voice terminal If more than one voice terminal is to be covered multiple buttons are required one for each station covered A covering voice terminal may be assigned multiple COVER IND buttons for a particular station to cover multiple simultaneous calls to that station The first button will track the first call the second button the second call etc Up to eight COVER IND buttons can be assigned for each covered station There is no limitation on the number of stations that can receive Individual Coverage A voice terminal can receive both Individual Coverage and Group Coverage Refer to for a description of Coverage Message Waiting service which allows the covering station to control the status of the covered user s Message LED Calls from a covering station to a covered station will not be covered unless the covered station has additional coverage This is an important consideration when the attendant provides coverage Considerations Coverage provides a way to redirect calls to alternate answering positions The feature is versatile enough to permit suitable alternate answering arrangements for virtually every level of employee Special functions such as the Send All Calls feature accommodate the day to day var
555. tion Busy Attendant Position Busy Description This feature allows an Attendant Console to be placed in an inactive mode Systems with Direct Trunk Attendant Console s DTAC There must be two Attendant Consoles in the system before this feature can be activated A Position Busy POS BUSY button can be assigned on each of the consoles Pressing POS BUSY at one of two active consoles causes the POS BUSY status LED to light the console to be placed in the inactive mode Pressing POS BUSY a second time causes the LED to go dark and the console to be reactivated Pressing POS BUSY when only one Attendant Console is active is ignored i e only one console is allowed to be inactive at a time When a console is in the inactive mode ringing is disabled on facility appearances on the two rightmost button columns only The green status LEDs will continue to operate normally Calls to floating not signed in DID calls and dial 0 calls will be transferred to the active console Internal calls to the PDC of the inactive console will still be directed to that console Incoming calls on lines that normally ring at only the inactive console will now ring at the active console if they have an appearance there All buttons on the inactive console will continue to function normally including the Selector Console buttons Calls can be originated by the inactive console Call appearances in the leftmost two columns of buttons on the in
556. tion Busy mode all calls except Attendant PDC Attendant PDC via DID and DGC calls direct to the other console An incoming call from the queue to a console appears on one of the five LOOP buttons the attendant is alerted to the call by audible ringing a steadily lighted red lamp and a flashing green lamp While the call is ringing and while the attendant is handling the call the system will direct no more calls to the console After the attendant ends or releases the call or puts it on hold another call can come in on an idle button It should be emphasized that even when all LOOP buttons on a console are idle only one call can be directed from the queue to the console If the attendant puts a call on hold that LOOP button is no longer available but a new call can come in on another button that is idle Answering Call on a LOOP Button At an available SLAC an incoming call will ring at an idle LOOP button automatically selected by the system The attendant has only to lift the handset to answer the call pressing the button is not necessary 2 27 FEATURES AND SERVICES Placing a Call on a LOOP Button In general originating call at an idle SLAC involves going off hook and then dialing the desired number If the console is not idle the attendant can generally use one of these procedures e Split the active call that is put it on temporary hold by pressing the Start button and place another call on the same button
557. tion where it is signed in will be directed to the PDC s home terminal Calls Placed to an FPDC When a valid FPDC is dialed the call will be directed to the terminal where the FPDC is signed in and will be provided the coverage treatment administered for that terminal If the FPDC is not signed in anywhere and if the attendant position is administered to handle these calls then the call will be directed to the attendant position However if the FPDC call was placed from the attendant position then it will not be redirected to the attendant but will 2 172 Following instead be provided Reorder Tone Finally if the FPDC is not signed in and if the attendant position is not administered to handle these calls then the calling party will receive Reorder Tone For non DID calls if an invalid FPDC is dialed then the calling party will receive Reorder Tone If a DID call does not match any assigned number in the dialing plan it will be directed to the attendant or to Reorder Tone as administered Considerations Following provides maximum flexibility to system users who are away from their voice terminals In addition visitors can receive calls by signing in an assigned FPDC For more information see the Personal Dial Code PDC feature description Interactions The following features interact with Following Bridging of System Access Buttons Sign in and sign out procedures can be performed at the destination statio
558. tional information on ADUs see Z3A Asynchronous Data Unit User Manual 555 401 701 ADU Connection Information Detailed connection information is provided under the heading later in this Section RS 232C CONNECTOR INTERFACE TELEPHONE JACK OPTIONAL ORIGINATE DISCONNECT SWITCH Figure 4 22 Asynchronous Data Unit ADU 4 55 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Table 4 G Asynchronous Data Units UNIT FEATURE 23 1 2169 001 3 foot ended EIA connector mod jack for sss line set Z3A2 2169 002 EIA EIA plug and mod jack for single ine set and mod jack for single line set Z3A4 2169 004 3 foot receptacle ended EIA cord and mod jack for single line set Z3A5 62506 3 foot plug ended EIA connector and mod jack for hybrid set PEC includes 5 22911 11 power supply and D8W 87 cord MADU 2169 005 Self powered Used for host or protocol converter connections where voice terminals are not required No sets can be connected directly to the MADU 4 56 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Peripheral Equipment Peripheral Equipment includes the following devices that connect to the call processing portion of the CPU MEM ZTN129 CP e System Administration Terminal SAT refer to System Administration in Section 2 e Digital Tape Unit DTU refer to Digital Tape Unit in Section 2 e Station Message Detail Recording SMDR printer or Call Accounting System CAS refer to l Station Message
559. ton of the console becomes idle For information on related Attendant Features Table 2 E refer to the individual feature descriptions Interactions The following features interact with Attendant Camp On Call Waiting Trunk calls camped onto a station by an attendant are given priority over other waiting calls Callback Queuing Trunk calls camped onto a station by an attendant are given priority over queued calls Coverage lf the called party is a sender in a Coverage group and all receivers of the Coverage group are busy the call will camp onto the originally dialed station Once camped on calls will no longer receive coverage even if a coverage receiver becomes idle 2 16 Attendant Camp On Direct Group Calling The attendant can camp on more than one call per DGC group Voice terminals in the group do not receive a burst of tone when a call is camped on Trunk calls camped onto a busy group go into the queue and are eligible for delay announcement and music on hold Direct Inward Dialing DID DID calls can be covered by the attendant and then given Camp On treatment They do not automatically receive Call Waiting Station Hunting f the called party is a member of a hunt group and all members of the group are busy the call camps onto the originally dialed station Once camped on calls will no longer hunt even if another member of the hunt group becomes idle Administration Requirements System
560. trable for uses besides ARS eStation Toll Restriction Class 1 4 Classes Administrable for users besides ARS eHNPA Exception List 1 4 Lists each with an associated ARS Routing Pattern 800 3 digit CO codes entries maximum between all lists eight of the entries may be 7 digit numbers eNPA Routing Table Entries may include every North American NPA and Special Number NPAs each with an associated ARS Routing Pattern All NPAs are assigned Routing Pattern 1 by default 2 60 Automatic Route Selection ARS Exception List One List with up to 32 eight digit numbers Each entry has associated ARS Routing Pattern e Digit Translations Tables One per trunk group or Virtual Facility A system can have up to eight ARS Routing Patterns assigned Each pattern can contain up to six routes three per subpattern Interactions The following features interact with Automatic Route Selection Bridging of System Access Buttons When a station user originates a call on a Bridged Access button and dials the ARS code the call is completed according to the restrictions assigned to that station not the principal station Callback Queuing Implementation of Callback Queuing affects ARS in three respects eOn hook ARS queuing is allowed e Callback Queuing and ARS share a common queue which has a capacity of 64 calls eWhen a station without automatic queuing originates an ARS call the caller hears reorder tone if all ro
561. tral Office Trunk Facilities Analog Transmission Characteristics Figures Figure 5 1 Single Line Voice Terminal Allowable Cable Distances 5 7 Figure 5 2 Multiline Voice Terminal Allowable Cable Distances 5 8 Figure 5 3 Asynchronous Data Unit Allowable Cable Distances in Building Only 5 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS This section provides information on the technical characteristics and capacities of the system Some items covered here are discussed elsewhere in the manual but are repeated here for ease of reference Technical specifications are provided for Hardware and Software Parameters e Unit Loads e Cable Distance Limitations e Call Progress Tones e Indicator Lamp Signals e Port Specifications e Recommended Central Office Facilities Trunks Analog Transmission Characteristics TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Hardware and Software Parameters The following is a listing of maximums for hardware and software parameters Attendant Consoles Direct Trunk or Switched Loop Direct Extension Selector Automatic Route Selection ARS Patterns Subpatterns Per Pattern Routes Per Subpattern Facility Restriction Levels Cabinets Circuit Packs Common Control and Service Circuit Circuit Pack Slots Per Cabinet Conference Bridging Members Coverage Individual Covered Stations No limit Coverage Groups Standard Group Coverage 32 Coverage Groups DGC Group Coverage 32 Receiver
562. tricted Similarly each station in the system is assigned an FRL 0 3 A terminal assigned an FRL of 0 has the least ARS privileges i e routes with FRLs of 1 3 are restricted a FRL of 3 provides the most privileges To use a route a station s FRL must be equal to or greater than the route s FRL The ARS feature when accessed selects a pattern as follows eEmergency Number Calls routed via the local CO facility eService Code N11 Calls routed via an associated routing pattern e International Calls routed via the administered international pattern 2 57 FEATURES AND SERVICES eCalls made to specified COs or seven digit telephone numbers within the Home Number Plan Area HNPA These calls are routed as specified in the HNPA Exception Lists or else via the NPA Routing Table or by default if not otherwise specified the local CO facility eCalls made to NPAs outside the HNPA sometimes referred to as Foreign NPAs FNPAs The route selected depends on the type of call as follows FNPA special number calls includes all 800 900 and Telex 510 610 710 and 810 numbers Each FNPA of the form and N10 may be assigned to a routing pattern FNPA calls made to numbers specified in the FNPA Exception List other FNPA calls ARS Flow Chart provides a simplified ARS flow chart Bracketed numbers e g 401 601 provide a link between ARS administrable action numbers and th
563. ts are connected to System 25 voice terminal or trunk port circuits through a modem in the traditional manner Digital endpoints are connected to System 25 data port circuits on the TN726 Data Line CP An Asynchronous Data Unit ADU is required in place of the modem used with analog endpoints Section 4 of this manual shows the connections supported and required connecting equipment Data calls can be set up between data endpoints Analog to analog and digital to digital connections are straightforward calls between analog and digital endpoints are possible only if the system is equipped with a conversion resource TN758 Pooled Modem Circuit Pack or external modem pool System 25 data calls from analog endpoints including those to digital endpoints are set up in the traditional manner The calling party should follow the procedures supplied with his her modem However a Modem Request Code must be dialed when calling a digital endpoint Call setup from digital endpoints is facilitated by several data features Command Mode Expert Mode Data Terminal Dialing Modem Pooling Third Party Call Setup and Transfer To Data In the discussion that follows it is important to understand the difference between analog voice terminology and data terminology Refer to the Section 9 The following provides a definition of a data call in terms of its contextual components The components are 1 data endpoints 2 data endpoint states 3 data call pro
564. ts is identified by a unique access code A fourth code is used to access all three paging systems zones simultaneously A paging system that is interfaced to System 25 via a ground start trunk port a loop start trunk port or an auxiliary trunk port can be administered to be dial restricted This restricts users from accessing the equipment unless they are assigned DSS buttons with paging access codes A paging system that is interfaced to System 25 via an industry standard tip ring station line port may not be administered to be dial restricted Considerations System 25 can support virtually any new or in place third party paging system Most modern paging systems interface through a ground start trunk port a loop start trunk port or an industry standard tip ring station line port System 25 can also support paging systems that require a generic interface with contact closure by using a paging system adapter or by using an Auxiliary Trunk CP with its supporting hardware Selection of a particular port as an interface for a paging system will be governed by the requirements of the specific paging system involved 2 233 FEATURES AND SERVICES System 25 supports all AT amp T PagePac voice paging systems The following are the most common interface arrangements for System 25 and AT amp T voice paging systems PagePac 20 with ZoneMate This paging system interfaces with either a ground start or loop start trunk port No additional equip
565. tton Bridging of System Access Buttons The Last Number Dialed feature saves numbers called from either Bridged Access buttons or System Access buttons Call Accountability When a station user dials PDC to provide accountability for a call and then dials the desired digits the PDC is not saved by the Last Number Dialed feature Conference When a station user adds a party to a conference the number dialed is saved as the Last Number Dialed Direct Station Selection DSS Numbers called using a DSS or Flex DSS button are not saved by the Last Number Dialed feature The number currently stored by Last Number Dialed is not changed by operations of these buttons Personal Lines When a user originates a call from a Personal Line only the digits dialed after the line is accessed are saved by the Last Number Dialed feature The same type of line must be selected to get dial tone for placing another call using Last Number Dialed If a different type of line is used the call may be directed to the wrong destination Pooled Facility Direct Access When a user originates a call from a Direct Facility Access button only the digits dialed after the line is accessed are saved by the Last Number Dialed feature The same type of button should be selected to get dial tone for placing another call using Last Number Dialed If a different type of button is used the call may not be completed properly Repertory Dialing When using a Repertory Dia
566. tton MET sets and MERLIN System voice terminals respectively refer to Speakerphone Adjunct in Section 2 e55A1 Key Ground Start Button A 55A1 Ground Start Button is required for each Power Failure Transfer PFT station that is connected to a ground start trunk during power failures e Acoustic Coupler An Acoustic Coupler 349A Adapter can be used with the 7300H series voice terminals and MET sets The coupler provides acoustic coupling between the handset and acoustic modems e Answering Announcement Machine A suitable answering announcement machine can be used as an adjunct to single line voice terminals Note that when such a machine is bridged on to a 7 78 Ring Line CP port the combined adjunct terminal REN must not exceed 1 20 A B eZ34A Message Waiting Indicator MD The Z34A Message Waiting Indicator provides a message waiting light at 2500 Series single line voice terminals that do not have a built in lamp Existing sets with this adjunct can be reused Voice Terminal Adjunct Connection Information Detailed adjunct connection information is provided in with the detailed feature descriptions of the headset adapter and speakerphone adjuncts Descriptions of the Station Interconnect Panel SIP Trunk Access Equipment TAE and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under the heading later in this Section 4 52 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Voice Terminal Adjunct Power Suppl
567. tton dial However the feature can also be used to redial numbers originally called by the following means e Repertory Dial buttons eGroup Select and DXS buttons on a Selector Console This feature saves numbers with up to 16 digits The user must hear dial tone before pressing the Last Number Dialed button The Last Number Dialed feature cannot be activated by dialing an access code It is not available to users of single line voice terminals If a dialed number does not complete a call Last Number Dialed still stores the digits dialed If the user presses the Last Number Dialed button then dials additional digits to complete the call both the currently stored digits and the dialed digits will be stored Interactions The following features interact with Last Number Dialed Account Code Entry Forced or Optional Last Number Dialed does not save the access code 0 or the account code Attendant Display When a call is placed at a Switched Loop Attendant Console using the Last Number Dialed button the call information display has the normal format of an outgoing call In the Inspect mode pressing the Last Number Dialed button displays the number 2 198 Last Number Dialed currently stored on the button Automatic Intercom Numbers called using an Automatic Intercom button are not saved by the Last Number Dialed feature The number currently stored by Last Number Dialed is not changed by operations of the Automatic Intercom bu
568. turning parked call Screen 1 I PARK RTN Screen 2 512 Smith B p Example of Third Party Setup call at source station Screen 1 3912155551212 Screen 2 153 Dataterm a Special Call Displays Display enhancements provided by R2V1 apply to the following System 25 features e Account Code Entry When user activates the Account Code Entry feature by dialing O or pressing ACCT ENTRY the system displays the prompt ACCT As the user enters the account code the digits are displayed to the right of the prompt If the number of digits exceeds 9 the system automatically scrolls to Screen 2 the continuation character dad the remaining digits appear on Screen 2 The prompt and digits remain displayed until one of the following occurs The user enters either or the administered number of code digits user restarts the Account Code Entry feature by dialing 0 or pressing ACCT ENTRY again to correct an erroneous entry 2 154 Display The system time out for Account Code Entry is reached The user selects another button that overwrites the display e Busy To ldle Reminder When a user receives this signal the display format is the same as when the call was originally placed except that idle descriptor 1 appears in position 1 Number and name fields are displaced to the right e Callback Queuing Before this feature is invoked the display shows the standard format for originati
569. tus LED Conference Speaker Drop Message Transfer Recall Hold e34 Feature Buttons each equipped with Use and Status LEDs For General Use All programmable default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 27 Send All Calls 1 Account Code Entry 1 and Last Number Dialed I For Use as a Direct Trunk Attendant Console Six predefine Start Cancel Release Return On Don t Answer Return On Busy and Alarm Other 28 programmable default assignments are System Access 2 Repertory Dialing 2 Flex DSS 1 Account Code Entry 1 Attendant Message Waiting 1 Night Service 1 trunk appearances 15 as Personal Lines Group Call Coverage 1 Direct Facility Accesst 3 and Last Number Dialed I On the first Attendant Console the first 15 trunks in the system are assigned button appearances on the console If there are fewer than 15 trunks the remaining buttons are not assigned On the second Console these trunks do not receive default assignments 4 30 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION T On the first Attendant Console the first of the Direct Facility Pooled Access buttons defaults to loop start trunks the second to ground start trunks and the third to tie trunks For any trunk type not assigned in the system the associated button does not receive a default assignment On the second Console these buttons do not receive default assignments Adjuncts e502A B Heads
570. ty access restricted System Speed Dialing Operation To place a call using a System Speed Dialing number the user goes off hook and presses the button on the dial pad followed by the 3 digit code assigned to the desired number The system interprets the associated stored number as if it were dialed directly This includes analysis of the number for the various types of restriction This feature can also be used when entering account codes After pressing ACCT ENTRY or dialing 0 the user can enter a System Speed Dialing code The stored number associated with the code the account code will be listed in the SMDR report Multiline voice terminals users may assign System Speed Dialing codes to Repertory Dialing REP DIAL buttons 2 200 Speed Dialing Personal Speed Dialing Allows users to program up to twenty Personal Speed Dialing numbers maximum of 25 characters in length that are accessible only from their terminals The numbers are accessed by dialing associated access codes 20 39 Personal Speed Dialing is authorized on a per station basis through System Administration The System Administrator will inform users if they can use this feature Refer to the feature description for more information about programming Personal Speed Dialing numbers If enough storage space is available in memory to allow assignment of a Personal Speed Dialing number confirmation tone will be returned after each number is programmed If no
571. ude editing the table of departments cost centers and extensions setting up account codes defining preselected reports and keeping call rate information up to date System configuration may be changed This allows the user to inform the CAS of changes in System 25 e g dial access codes trunks or changes in charge rates System housekeeping may also be performed This includes establishing passwords deleting call records determining call processing options and performing various disk maintenance operations Directory Lookup and Message Center Allows the user to look up anyone by last name first name or extension Messages can be recorded for individuals and can be printed or displayed 2 77 FEATURES AND SERVICES The following table summarizes CAS station and account code capacities AT amp T CALL ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS CAS Model Stations Account Codes 2000 2000 Refer to the CAS documentation supplied with the software package for additional information Considerations The CAS provides customers with an efficient tool to control and manage their telephone usage and costs The information available can be used to facilitate cost allocation traffic analysis and abuse control Administration Requirements System eSend SMDR Records To SMDR Port yes or no default yes eMinimum length seconds of calls that are reported by SMDR 10 255 default 40 Hardware Requirements CAS Model 200 300 500 or
572. uested Interface A common boundary between two systems or pieces of equipment Internal Call A connection between two users within the system Same as an inside call l Use LED A red LED on a multiline voice terminal that lights to show which call appearance will be selected when the handset is lifted or which call appearance is active when a user is off hook LDN Listed Directory Number LED Light Emitting Diode Loop Start Trunk After establishing a connection with the distant switching system for an outgoing call System 25 waits for a short period of time before sending the digits of the called number On incoming calls the received request for service is sufficient to cause the call to route to a predetermined destination normally the system attendant group No digits are received GLOSSARY MET Multibutton Electronic Telephone Modem A device that modulates and demodulates signals transmitted over a communications path Used to connect Data Terminal Equipment to the system s analog ports The system provides a pooled modem conversion resource 12 resources maximum per system 212A compatible Modem Pooling Provides shared use conversion resources that eliminate the need for a dedicated modem when an analog data end point accesses or is accessed by an analog line or trunk Multiline Voice Terminal A terminal equipped with several call appearance buttons for the same extension number Allows the user to ha
573. uit converts the codec 4 wire analog signal to a 2 wire analog signal that is connected to the central office trunk by the line transformer The relay driver buffers and inverts the relay drive signals from the port I O circuit so that a logic high input operates the appropriate relay The relays control circuitry provides the proper signaling for ground start trunks The trunks support touch tone dialing The surge protection circuit provides overvoltage lightning surge protection 3 23 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Loop Start Trunk ZTN77 The Loop Start Trunk Circuit Pack interfaces eight central office loop start trunks and the TDM bus Figure 3 13 shows the Loop Start Trunk unique circuitry PORT CIRCUIT 0 NPE 0 NPE 1 ON BOARD 1 0 CENTRAL MICROPROCESSOR CIRCUIT OFFICE PORT CIRCUIT 7 Figure 3 13 Loop Start Trunk ZTN77 Unique Circuitry e I O Circuit This circuit consists of bus expanders for communication between the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the on board microprocessor ePort Circuits The eight port circuits are identical Each port circuit consists of a codec hybrid circuit line transformer relay driver and surge protection circuit The codec is a 4 wire cir
574. ular basis In a PBX all port circuits are connected to the time division multiplex bus permitting any port to send a signal to any other port Tone Ringer A device with a speaker used in electronic voice terminals to alert the user Translations Specific information assigned to a terminal or to the system and customized for the user Trunk A telecommunications channel between two switching systems Trunk Group Telecommunications channels assigned as a group for certain functions Trunk Port The hardware providing the access point to the system switching network for each circuit associated with a trunk Unit Load A measurement used to evaluate a System 25 cabinet s power load capacity Each System 25 cabinet can handle 80 unit loads of 48 volt power One unit load equals 44mA Voice Terminal A single line or multiline voice instrument a telephone Voice Terminal Adjuncts Devices that can be connected to voice terminals to provide additional services headset adapters speakerphones acoustic couplers etc Wide Area Telecommunications Service WATS A service that allows calls to a certain area or areas for a flat rate charge based on usage 9 14 GLOSSARY Wink Start Tie Trunk After establishing a connection with a distant switching system for an outgoing call the system waits for a momentary signal wink before sending the digits of the called number Similarly on an incoming call the system sends the
575. uld be translated as Type 305 Hardware Requirements This feature requires one of the voice terminals or combinations of terminal and adjuncts listed in the Description 2 182 Headset Adapter Adjunct Headset Adapter Adjunct Description The headset adapter adjunct is an interface device for connecting a headset to an associated voice terminal A headset plugged into the adapter is activated by switches on the adapter The terminal operator has the choice of using either the handset or the headset for handling calls Turning the headset on and off is equivalent to lifting and hanging up the handset Considerations Use of a headset allows a voice terminal operator to carry on conversations with both hands free for writing typing etc It is valuable adjunct for high traffic positions such as attendant consoles Use of a headset does not affect normal voice terminal operations in any way Interactions The following feature interacts with Headset Adapter Adjunct Speakerphone Adjunct A voice terminal cannot have both a headset and a speakerphone These adjuncts plug into the same jack on the voice terminal Administration Requirements A 22 or 34 button built in speakerphone BIS voice terminal with or without display should be translated as Type 308 only if a headset adapter will be used with it Otherwise such a terminal should be translated as Type 305 Hardware Requirements 500A 502A 502B Headset Adapters The 50
576. ult 30 eAssign the minimum time between callback attempts for outside calls 0 to 120 seconds default 30 Voice Terminal Ports Every station has independent control of the number of callback retries and the number of rings per attempt eAssign the number of callback retries for inside calls 0 to 15 default 2 e Assign the number of callback retries for outside calls 0 to 15 default 2 eAssign the number of rings per callback attempt for inside calls 2 to 15 default 3 eAssign the number of rings per callback attempt for outside calls 2 to 15 default 3 eAllow automatic queuing for inside calls yes or no default no eAllow automatic queuing for outside calls yes or no default yes Trunk Ports eAllow queuing of dial access calls yes or no default no 2 87 FEATURES AND SERVICES Calling Restrictions Description Designated voice and data terminals can be restricted from making certain types of calls Available restrictions are eOutward Restriction e Toll Restriction e Facility Access Restriction eARS Restrictions Note Each of these restrictions is voice terminal oriented not PDC oriented Outward Restriction When outward restricted a station will be unable to place any outside calls The station will be able to answer incoming calls and place and receive inside calls A station that is outward restricted will be unable to use Automatic Route Selection to place external c
577. ult no Other pools dial restricted yes or no default no Remote Access Night Service backup multiline station PDC or 0 default RIMS barrier code digits 5 digits 0 to 9 or O to remove default eSpecify Remote Access usage no shared or dedicated default no 2 265 FEATURES AND SERVICES Remote Administration Interface Description This feature provides dial up access to the system s administration port either for a standard system administration terminal or for a PC running Advanced Administration software Both read and write capability is provided with access to all system translation and fault tables A remote administration terminal can perform the same functions as the on premises SAT Remote Administration allows remote access to the system by maintenance personnel the System Administrator and others Interactions Only one System Administration Terminal can be connected at one time Administration Requirements Depends on the connecting arrangements selected see below Hardware Requirements Requires a remote SAT Requires that port 1 of the CPU MEM CP be connected to 1 a dedicated modem and dedicated facility private line or CO trunk or 2 a dedicated modem connected tip ring station port or 3 an ADU connected to a data line port See the feature description for additional information Connectivity information is also provided 2 266 Remote Initialization a
578. ultiline voice terminals without Direct Facility Access FACILITY buttons access to the system s pooled facilities Interactions The following features interact with Pooled Facility Dial Access Bridging of System Access Buttons A station originating a call on a Bridged Access button and using a facility access code is granted access to that pool according to the Calling Restrictions assigned to the bridging station not the principal station Direct Inward Dialing DID Access to pooled facilities via DID is permitted This includes access to WATS FX tie trunks private lines dictation equipment and paging systems This access is provided by selecting facility access codes so that they will match DID numbers Outward and Facility Access Restriction see Calling Restrictions A terminal can be denied dial access to some or all pooled facilities or may be totally restricted from making any outside calls Toll Restriction see Restrictions Denies the use of pooled facilities for certain toll calls but does not block access to the pooled facilities 2 247 FEATURES AND SERVICES Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port e Restrictions Refer to feature description Trunk Port eAssign facility access codes e Allow dial access for facility yes or no 2 248 Pooled Facility Direct Access Pooled Facility Direct Access Description This feature allows multiline voice terminal u
579. umber to this code eAllow dial access to this Virtual Facility yes or no 2 348 Voice Message System Voice Message System Description The AT amp T VOICE POWER Voice Message System VMS provides a group of communications services that expand System 25 operation in the area of collecting processing and delivering voice messages for inside users and outside callers It functions somewhat like a sophisticated system wide answering machine and or an automated attendant VMS is an adjunct to System 25 connected by way of special ports on analog tip ring circuit packs Administration procedures establish the proper System 25 to VMS interface and set up the desired VMS capabilities The VMS hardware and software are part of System 25 s Integrated Solution Five separate services are available with VMS The first listed is user oriented that is intended primarily for people inside the system The other four are caller oriented that is designed for managing incoming calls e Voice Mail Service The primary service of VMS It allows users to send voice messages to each other retrieve their own messages both inside and outside record personal greetings to callers and administer passwords eAutomated Attendant Service Answers incoming calls and gives the caller a choice of destinations including attendant or of recording a message for some inside station e Announcement Service Provides simple announcements to callers th
580. unk identifiers reasons for call return redirection and number of calls waiting in the queue for service Refer to the feature description for a detailed discussion of call information displays The console display also provides access to the system s integrated directory and allows the attendant to search for the extension numbers assigned to users Refer to the description for information on this feature Switched Loop Operation All calls that are intended for an attendant position are first routed by the system to a common queue where they wait to be sent to a console In a configuration having two consoles the same queue serves both consoles When attendant console becomes available to receive a call the system removes a call from the queue and directs it to an idle loop on the console Calls are selected from the queue on the basis of first in first out and in accordance with administered priorities An available attendant console is one that is not active on a call has no calls ringing has at least one LOOP button idle is not in Position Busy or Inspect mode and is not in a split condition In a two console arrangement each console can be administered to receive all types of calls or to receive only specific types A call that can be received by either position goes to the first available attendant when both are available the call goes to the attendant who has been idle the longest time If one console is in Posi
581. up calls for any terminal except the associated source terminal 2 323 FEATURES AND SERVICES Considerations With this feature computer based telemarketing or other calling applications can set up calls for the user Interactions The following features interact with Third Party Call Setup Account Code Entry Forced FACE If the source station is FACE restricted the third party data terminal must prefix the outside destination number with 0 and an account code Coverage Third Party Call Setup calls to the source terminal will not be directed to a coverage station Ifthe source terminal is not answered before coverage is invoked the call is dropped and the NO ANSWER DISCONNECTED messages are displayed at the third party data terminal Expert Mode Refer to the feature description for additional methods in dialing when using the Third Party Call Setup feature Following Forwarding If calls to source terminal have been redirected to another terminal via Following or Forwarding Third Party Call Setup calls will be redirected Note however that the maximum of three ringing cycles combined cycles at the home and away terminals still applies before the system drops the call and displays the NO ANSWER DISCONNECTED messages at the third party data terminal Station Message Detailed Recording SMDR SMDR records will be generated for Third Party Call Setup calls just as if they were placed by the source terminal Admini
582. upply Digital Tape Unit System Administration Terminal SAT Direct Extension Selector Console Mod Cord Mod Cord 14ft Power Supply Adapter MERLIN Sys Voice Terminal VT local power Adapter Mod Cord Power Supply Auxiliary Trunk Interface Connecting Block Cable 15 ft DE Paging Dictation Aux Trunk Interface Adapter Power Supply Mod Spd Tip Cord 14ft Zener Kit APPARATUS CODE D181521 includes D8W 87 Z3A5 KS 22911 L1 TS 555A TI 703 23A1 003 e w D6AP 87 D8W 87 KS 22911 L1 400B D181522 includes Z400F D6AP 87 KS 22911 L1 D181523 includes 66E3 25 B25A D181524 includes 278A KS 22911 L1 D4BY D181321 COMCODE 105105506 103786802 103975349 403242639 404079436 404079428 103969424 102937620 103786802 403242639 103848859 105105514 103942857 102937620 403242639 105105522 100009968 100017334 105105530 103871844 403242639 102999059 105031181 DESCRIPTION Music on Hold Interface Interface Transformer Voice Coupler Emergency Transfer Unit Cables 2 15 ft DE Mod Cord 7ft Peripheral Interface for On Premises Direct or Switched Connection Adapter Adapter Adapter Mod Cord ADU Crossover Cord Mod Cords 2 7 ft EIA Crossover Cord ADU Transformer STARLAN Interface CP STARLAN ATL Interface Y Adapter Adapter Power Supply R2 Upgrade CPU MEM CP Documentation amp Tapes for System 2
583. ups sometimes referred to as pooled facilities when all the trunks in the group perform the same function This grouping provides resource pooling that results in better service with a given number of trunks It also simplifies administration and calling Calls are routed to the appropriate trunk group an idle trunk if available is selected from the group Up to 16 trunk groups pooled facilities may be assigned in the system Several different kinds of trunk groups can be assigned in System 25 e Central Office CO Provides a link with the local CO for calls except Direct Inward Dial DID calls Trunks classed as CO have a number of special characteristics eForeign Exchange FX CO trunks that connect to a CO other than the local CO eWide Area Telecommunications Service WATS CO trunks that connect to an Outward WATS office or a dial 800 in WATS Service office e Direct Inward Dial DID Provides incoming only service from the local CO These calls go directly to voice terminals instead of through the attendant e Tie Provides a link with another private switching system or network Trunk groups can be one way incoming or two way Selection of the trunk group to be used for a given call is determined by the initial digits of a dialed number or by the ARS feature These digits are referred to as the facility access code Each trunk group is assigned a unique code Assuming an idle trunk in the selected group i
584. urce t System Resource Circuits Tone Detector Pooled Modem Service Circuit ports are internal to the system These ports are not connected to external equipment via 25 pair connectors HARDWARE DESCRIPTION Required Circuit Packs The following CPs are provided with all systems and must be mounted in Cabinet 1 eZTN129 CPU MEM Call Processing Unit Memory The ZTN129 one per system provides a central processing unit Random Access Memory RAM memory for call and feature processing interrupt controller programmable timers real time clock status display processor bus interface and four interface ports It also provides Read Only Memory ROM for translations and a 1200 baud answer only modem for Remote Initialization and Maintenance Service RIMS access The four interface ports provide the following interfaces Port I System Administration Terminal SAT Port 2 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR equipment Port 3 Digital Tape Unit Port 4 Reserved for future use The CPU MEM also provides 48 V dc control on ports 7 and 8 for Emergency Transfer Units The CPU MEM CP must be mounted in slot 1 of Cabinet 1 eZIN85 Service Circuit ZTN85 one per system provides four touch tone receivers generates all system tones and supplies the system clocks The ZTN85 can support up to 75 voice terminal stations The Service Circuit CP must be mounted in slot 2 of Cabinet 1 Optional Circui
585. urns busy tone press another LOOP button or RELEASE or FORCED RELEASE eA call to an inside or outside party is completed but the person cannot participate press another LOOP button or RELEASE or FORCED RELEASE It is good operating practice to wait for the called party to answer before adding the party to a conference All Multiline Terminals If all System 25 stations hang up on a conference with two outside lines the outside parties will remain conference until one of them hangs up if at least one is an inbound call on a ground start tie or DID trunk or an inbound call on a loop start trunk if loop start trunk to trunk transfer is allowed by System Administration If not the call will be terminated when the last inside user disconnects from the conference Single Line Voice Terminals A single line terminal user after having established a three party conference can drop the second party and retain the first party by pressing the switchhook 2 106 Conference Drop Considerations Conference Drop allows users to conference lines appearing on their terminals and then remove them from the conference when appropriate The only parties that a user should try to drop from a conference are those that the user actually added If a user tries to drop a party who previously added the user to a conference other parties may also be dropped Interactions The following feature interacts with Conference Drop Callback Queui
586. use The 9 represents an ARS access code for the other PBX Since 5 was not used within the VFN the destination telephone number dialed digits will be transmitted after this ARS access code 2 346 Virtual Facilities Accessing a Virtual Facility Dial access is provided by dialing the VF code 190 1 99 including the followed by the destination telephone number e Example The user dials the following VF code and associated destination telephone number 192 12125551643 The stored VFN associated with VF code 192 is defined as 2222 333 444 The first four digits 2222 represent the FAC for a tie trunk group to a remote PBX The represents a 1 5 second pause The next three digits 333 represent the security code required by the remote PBX indicating that you have permission to access their facilities The represents a 1 5 second pause as the remote PBX checks the validity of your security code The final three digits 444 represent the FAC required by the remote PBX to access their Band 5 WATS trunks Since 5 was not embedded within this VFN the destination telephone number 121 25551 643 will be transmitted after the WATS access code VF codes may be included in numbers stored in REP DIAL buttons System Speed Dialing codes and Personal Speed Dialing codes if the VF code is used at the beginning of these numbers VF codes may not be a
587. user of a multiline voice terminal that a new call is coming into another call appearance button This type of call rings just once but the associated status LED continues to flash after the abbreviated alerting stops The user may place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call if desired e single short beep at a voice terminal equipped with the Hands Free Answer feature indicates that an incoming inside call has been answered by the terminal Depending on the status of the terminal s HFAI controls the user can talk with the caller without lifting the handset e Priority ringing is a repeated pattern of two short rings followed by one long ring It indicates 1 that a data terminal has used the Third Party Call Setup feature to originate a voice call from the voice terminal where this ringing is heard or 2 that a queued for facility is now available and the user can go off hook for the call to be completed Considerations Distinctive Ringing enables a user to handle each call in an appropriate manner Abbreviated alerting notifies the busy called party of an incoming call without the annoying distraction of continued ringing Distinctive ringing is not available at Extended Stations all incoming calls are signaled by standard one burst ringing repeated Interactions The following feature interacts with Distinctive Ringing Coverage Covering stations receive distinctive ringing depending on the origin of the cal
588. utes are busy the call can then be queued manually Calling Restrictions Outward Restriction and Toll Restriction when administered prevent calls from routing via ARS Pooled facility access restrictions do not apply In fact the recommended arrangement to ensure that users make maximum use of ARS is to block dial access to most trunk groups so that users must dial the ARS access code to place calls Direct Facility Access Button Multiline voice terminal users who have pressed FACILITY to activate the busy to idle reminder must wait until all queued ARS users have been serviced Tie Trunks Immediate Dial tie trunks should not be used in ARS routing patterns Virtual Facilities Virtual Facilities may be used in place of trunk groups in ARS routing patterns When used with ARS a digit translation scheme may be associated with each virtual facility See the Virtual Facilities feature description for more information Administration Requirements System e Specify your area code e Specify whether Dial 1 is needed for calls outside of your area code e Specify whether Dial 1 is needed for toll calls within of your area code FEATURES AND SERVICES ARS 2 62 eARS Access Code 1 9999 default 9 e International ARS Routing Pattern Number 1 8 no default e Three Emergency Numbers Lists 7 digit numbers no default eNPA Routing Table NPA code and associated pattern number 1 8 default 1 eN11 Rout
589. uttons are busy with other calls When the user answers a waiting call the display updates to standard incoming call format Conference When a queued call is added to a conference the associated displays are modified in only one respect the Q symbol appears as the first character of the queued call display When the queued facility becomes available and the call is made Q is removed 2 158 Display When a nondisplay station originates a trunk call then conferences the call with an inside display station and drops off the display shows the trunk name only not the originally dialed digits Message Waiting Indications When a display set user dials 90 or 91 followed by an extension number to light or extinguish a Message LED at some station the dialed digits are displayed A confirmation of Message LED activation or deactivation is not displayed Remote Access Since remote access calls are all incoming trunk calls the display at the receiving station has the standard reception of outside calls format The receiving station has no special indication that this is a remote access call A display set user who bridges onto a Personal Line Appearance where a remote access call is active will have the display updated for conference status Administration Requirements To implement the Display feature the following administration items are required eAssign display voice terminals eAssign LOCAL SCROLL and INSPECT buttons
590. ve AUTO ANS button to turn off As long as the Send All Calls feature is in use AUTO ANS cannot be turned cm Line Status Indications The line status lights still flash for incoming calls when Send All Calls is in effect even though normal ringing is cut off The lights stop flashing when the calls are answered by a covering station or dropped by the caller Personal Line Ringing on Personal Lines is turned off by activation of Send AH Calls whether the station is the principal owner of the line or not Personal Line calls follow the coverage arrangements of the principal station If the principal station is not covered the call will simply stay at the principal station until dropped even if other stations with that Personal Line have coverage Administration Requirements Voice Terminal Port eAssign Send All Calls button e Assign single ring reminder if desired eSend ring to bridged stations only to coverage stations only or to both 2 272 Speaker Speaker Description Some 7300 voice terminals built in loudspeaker that allows on hook dialing group listening and monitoring of call progress signals The terminal user turns on the speaker by pressing the SPEAKER button Pressing the button at an idle terminal has the same effect as lifting the handset the user is connected to the selected line and hears Dial Tone An associated LED is lighted when the Speaker is on Speaker volume may be adjust
591. ver 3 30 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ePort IO Circuit This circuit includes bus expanders connecting the on board microprocessor and the port circuits It receives commands from the on board microprocessor and distributes them to the individual port circuits It also accesses the port circuit scan points and passes the information to the on board microprocessor 48 V To 24 V Power Conditioner This circuit converts 48 V power from the power supply into a conditioned source of 24 V power for the electronic battery feed circuits e Eight Port Circuits Each port circuit is identical A port circuit consists of a coder decoder codec hybrid circuit battery feed circuit and ring relay The codec is a 4 wire circuit that converts the NPEs output to an analog signal Likewise it converts the analog signal from a central office trunk to a PCM data signal to the NPE The hybrid circuit converts the codec 4 wire analog signal to a 2 wire analog signal that is connected to the central office trunk by the line transformer The battery feed circuit provides talking battery to the voice terminal It also detects when a receiver is lifted and provides the message waiting signal by periodically reducing the feed voltage to zero The ring relay provides the interface between the ringing application circuit and the port circuit It causes ringing to turn on and off System Resources The System Resource Circuit Packs CPs are the Serv
592. verage Pickup Pickup is independent of coverage When a call is answered via Pickup all Cover buttons associated with the called party go idle Tie Trunks Tie Trunk calls directed at a user with coverage receive normal coverage treatment Transfer When a covering station transfers a covered call to another station the call will no longer appear at the covering station s Cover button or at the covered multiline station Interactions DGC Group Coverage The following features interact with DGC Group Coverage Attendant Console Switched Loop l a SLAC is a member of a DGC Coverage Receiver Group any DGC Group Coverage call sent to this attendant will enter the common queue and be treated as a coverage call not as an Attendant DGC call Thus the call will be handled by whichever attendant is administered to receive coverage calls Attendant Direct Extension Selector Console The Selector Console can be used to transfer and place calls to a DGC Coverage Group provided the DGC group access code appears on the console The status LED of the DXS button lights steadily whenever all stations in the DGC Coverage Group are busy Automatic Intercom Auto Intercom calls do not receive coverage Bridging of System Access Buttons An incoming call is given group coverage according to the coverage specified for the principal Calls appearing on Bridged Access buttons are not extended to the coverage specified for those bridging stations 2
593. verage Group Administration Requirements Standard Group Coverage System e Provide Coverage ringing on internal calls yes or no default yes If no covered calls will flash but not ring at covering stations on internal calls eNumber of rings before Coverage ringing starts on no answer 0 31 default 2 The status LEDs on Group Coverage buttons at covering stations begin flashing immediately in ail cases Ringing in addition to flashing is always sent on external calls though it may not be accepted at the covering stations Voice Terminal Port eCoverage Sender group number 1 32 default 1 e Provide Coverage ringing on no answer yes or no default yes If flashing LED is the only indication received at the covering station the calling party always hears ringing e Provide Coverage ringing on busy yes or no default yes If no flashing LED is the only indication received at the covering station The calling party always hears ringing eCoverage Receiver button Group Number 1 32 Allow Ring yes or no default yes If no flashing LED is only indication received at this covering station Administration Requirements DGC Group Coverage The parameter to assign a coverage sender group has been expanded to include DGC groups as coverage group receivers receiver groups are first set up as regular groups numbered 1 32 coverage groups can then be spec
594. ving appearances in either of the two rightmost button columns will not ring If these trunks also have an appearance at the active console they will ring there even if they do not normally Program The Program feature remains active at the inactive console Programmable Buttons All DSS Flex DSS and REP DIAL buttons remain active on the inactive console Administration Requirements Attendant Console Voice Terminal Port eAssign Position Busy button on DTAC A Position Busy button is defaulted to the SLAC it can be assigned to another feature if desired eAssign COVER IND buttons between consoles DTAC only System eDesignate backup multiline voice terminal single SLAC systems only 2 45 FEATURES AND SERVICES Attendant Release Description This feature releases the attendant from an extended call There are two forms of Attendant Release Manual and Automatic This feature applies to the Direct Trunk Attendant Console DTAC and the Switched Loop Attendant Console SLAC Manual Release Pressing RELEASE releases the attendant from an extended call and completes the associated call transfer The status LED of the original calling facility will change from hold to busy for direct trunk terminations and from hold to idle for other call facilities e g Loop Return On Busy Return On Don t Answer Cover Automatic Intercom DSS and System Access Calls cannot be released to Reorder or Dial Tone Pressi
595. wed eCallback Queuing and ARS share a common queue which has a capacity of 64 calls e When station without automatic queuing originates an ARS call the caller hears reorder tone if all routes are busy the call can then be queued manually 2 84 Callback Queuing Bridging of System Access Buttons Calls originated on Bridged Access BA buttons can be queued On callback attempts only the originator will be rung all other appearances will only flash Any appearance in the bridging arrangement can be used to drop a queued call if no other station is off hook If both principal and bridging users are off hook on a call to a busy facility only the first one off hook queue the call Call Accountability Any call accountability information entered before activation of queuing is saved for SMDR Call Waiting f a station with automatic queuing calls a busy station with Call Waiting the calling station hears queuing tone not special ringback also the called party does not hear Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone is heard only when special ringback is returned to the caller A station without automatic queuing gets special ringback but can manually queue the call If the queued for station dials the Call Waiting pickup code 9 the first off hook queued or waiting call will be dequeued Conference A queued call can be part of a conference unless a Call Waiting call is already part of the conference A queued call count
596. wers first The order in which calls are serviced is established by system administration Each type of call is assigned a priority that determines its position in the common queue with respect to other types System administration also establishes where the calls go Obviously in a one attendant system all calls automatically go to that attendant If a system has two attendants however administration can direct calls of each type with the exceptions noted below to either position or to both positions Returning calls can be directed to either console or to the specific console that originated them Following and Attendant PDC calls can be assigned priorities but cannot be directed to a specific attendant in a two position system Any trunk except types 901 902 and 1003 1008 DID and Dial in Tie Trunks can be assigned a priority and be directed to a specific attendant position or to both Calls accessed by dialing a code Pickup at other extensions Trunk Answer from Any Station TAAS Night Service calls and calls parked by other stations are originated at a LOOP button and brought to the console on that same button These calls do not enter the common queue 2 29 FEATURES AND SERVICES Timer Start Stop Timer Ep E Set Fwd Rev Exit Contrast RED e USE Loop J Alarm Inspect Scroll GREEN STATUS Loop Forced e Release e e Dialed eL M e eSource Conferenc
597. wice No procedure exists for signing out at an outside forwarded to station No matter which ring option no ring immediate ring or delayed ring is administered for the forwarding station s SA buttons the station will receive an abbreviated alert single ring reminder when a call is forwarded outside Forwarding to an outside location is enabled or disabled on a per station basis through System administration In addition forwarding calls to outside stations is limited by any calling restrictions administered for the forwarding station An outward restricted station for example cannot forward calls out of the system Toll and facility access restrictions can also prevent call forwarding A call forwarded to an outside station that is busy or does not answer is treated like any network call the caller receives busy tone or ringback The call will not return to the forwarding station In certain circumstances incoming outside calls that are forwarded to outside locations may encounter an unusual sequence of tones For example the caller may hear ringing a pause then busy tone Remote Access Forwarding Forwarding to an outside number from a System 25 station can be activated by a Remote Access user calling into the system on a dedicated Remote Access trunk or on a shared trunk while Night Service is in effect the caller must use a barrier code Remote Access Forwarding to other inside stations is not allowed 2 175
598. wink signal when ready to receive digits Write Operation The process of putting information onto a storage medium such as magnetic tape 800 Service A service that allows incoming calls from a certain area or areas to an assigned number for a flat rate charge based on usage 9 15 INDEX INDEX Account Code En Forced Optional 10 Button MET Set 2991C D05 10 Button MET Set With BIS 2993 04 4 48 12 Button MET Set 7203 4 50 2500 Series Voice Terminals 4 76 346 Modular Bulk Power Supply 4 58 Accountability Call Acoustic Coupler Adapter 420 Speakerphone Voice Temna 421 4A Speakerphone E oi Address Plug Cabine 4 6 S 500 Series Voice Terminals Adjuncts 500A Headset Adapte 502A Headset Adapte 502B Headset Adapter 55A1 Key 4 52 7305 Voice Terminal BIS 7305H04C Voice Terminal BIS With Display 7309H01B Voice Terminal HFAI 7313H01A Voice Terminal BIS 10 Alerting Externall_2 168 7314H01A Voice Terminal BIS 22 7316H01A Voice Terminal BIS 34 7317H01A Voice Terminal BIS 34D 858A Adapter 4 61 85B1 Power Unit 4 53 Analog Line 742 3 14 4 9 Transmission Characteristics 2 19 Announcement Machine 4 52 Announcement Service 2 349 Announcements Direct Group Calling Delay 2 139 A Night Service Delay 2 229 Abbreviated Alerting 2 160 ARS 2 57 Restriction AC Power
599. with l use and status LEDs built in speakerphone and display Li SWITCHED LOOP OPTIONAL SELECTOR ATTENDANT CONSOLE CONSOLE Figure 2 3 Typical Switched Loop Attendant Console Position Associated with the SLAC are message center like capability and display support The message center feature provides for efficient handling of calls that should be sent to message takers These calls are directed to a message center console position through administration of call type translations Display service allows identifiers names to be assigned to extension numbers and trunks The system then displays the appropriate information to the attendant when calls are processed at the console 2 24 Attendant Console Switched Loop The Switched Loop Console derives its name from the ability of the system to hold incoming attendant bound calls in a queue and switch them on voice loops to an available console Calls are directed to a console in a preadministered prioritized sequence The SLAC differs from the DTAC in the following basic respects elt receives calls at a time regardless of the number of incoming calls to the system at the DTAC many incoming calls can be ringing simultaneously elt displays pertinent information about incoming and outgoing calls elt can serve as an attendant console a message center or a combination of both elt has speakerphone and Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI capabilities Fixed Buttons The
600. y be classified as a Permanent System Alarm or as an unverified failure that never becomes a Permanent System Alarm A Permanent System Alarm causes the Alarm LED on the Attendant Console to light This alarm indication is a signal to the attendant to contact maintenance personnel System alarms are classified as e Permanent System Alarms Failures that cause degradation of service and require immediate attention These alarms cause the Alarm LED on the Attendant Console to light and an alarm record to be stored in the Permanent System Alarm error log e Transient System Errors Potential failures that may cause degradation of service These do not light the Alarm LED on the Attendant Console These are errors that have not been verified by system self tests and are not yet serious enough to be classified as Permanent System Alarms 2 317 FEATURES AND SERVICES If an error that begins as a Transient System Error is verified or reaches a threshold level of severity it is reclassified as a Permanent System Alarm Transient system errors are stored in the Transient System Error log The system can store a combined total of 40 Permanent System Alarms and Transient System Errors in the error tables e Most Recent System Errors The ten Most Recent System Errors are recorded by the system regardless of their level of severity These are stored in the Most Recent System Errors log Error Logs The three error logs can be displayed via th
601. y be used to delete the entire line and start over with a new DIAL prompt Each line of dialing information may contain up to 27 characters Note that all of the dialing information including pauses and ignored characters must be typed on a single line following the DIAL prompt and terminated by Return Dialing Correction The backspace character BS key or Ctrl H keys or underscore _ may be used to cancel the previously entered character More than one entered character may be deleted by using multiple backspace or underscore characters The character may be used to delete the entire line of entered characters Pause To assist the completion of off premises calls the pause characters 96 or may be used A pause character may be used to help ensure the receipt of dial tone before continuing to dial Each 96 or causes a fixed delay of one and one half 1 5 seconds 2 124 Data Terminal Dialing Pause characters may be used consecutively if a longer pause is required Note that System 25 cannot detect tones such as a second dial tone for end to end signaling End to End Signaling Data connections to off premises destinations require that a conversion resource pooled modem be inserted into the connection Occasionally it is necessary to send additional tones to the remote endpoint after the connection is established to signal the remote equipment A mark character must be included on
602. y equipped multiline voice terminals 2 146 Direct Station Selection DSS Direct Station Selection DSS Description Direct Station Selection DSS allows one button access to another voice terminal a paging zone or a DGC Group DSS requires a button assignment on a multiline voice terminal There are two types of DSS buttons Numbers stored on DSS buttons maximum of four digits are programmed at the SAT numbers stored on Flexible DSS buttons maximum of four digits are programmed at the voice terminal The procedure for programming FLEX DSS buttons is provided in the Program feature description To use DSS the user presses DSS or FLEX DSS and goes off hook The caller hears Ringback Tone DSS calls to a multiline voice terminal are received on a System Access button The DSS status LED is lighted steadily at the calling station DSS status LED is lighted whenever the pointed to station is off hook The user press DSS and remain on hook to receive the busy to idle reminder The user s voice terminal will ring once when the other party hangs up lifting the handset will automatically place the call When Prime Line Preference is assigned to a DSS button the button must be pressed to invoke the busy to idle reminder even though the I Use LED is lighted Access to Paging Zones and DGC Groups DSS not FLEX DSS access is provided to an individual Paging Zone or to all paging zones or to a DGC group If the
603. y have many line facility appearances There are three methods by which a user may select a desired line 1 Prime Line Preference 2 Ringing Line Preference and 3 Preselection Prime Line Preference Automatically connects a multiline voice terminal to a specified line or facility designated as preferred when the terminal goes off hook This feature may be assigned to System Access Loop Bridged Access Automatic Intercom DSS Personal Line and Direct Facility Access buttons On the Switched Loop Attendant Console the topmost Loop button has Prime Line Preference by default However the feature can be assigned to any of the five Loop buttons The user may override this feature by preselecting another button see below If Prime Line Preference is assigned to an Automatic Intercom AUTO ICOM or DSS button the called voice terminal will ring as soon as the terminal goes off hook When the Prime Line Preference feature is assigned to an AUTO ICOM DSS or Direct Facility Access FACILITY button the button must be pressed to activate the busy to idle reminder even though the button s 1 LED is lighted steadily If Prime Line Preference is assigned to a Personal Line or Bridged Access button the user is connected to the button upon going off hook even if the line is busy The user is always connected to the button where Prime Line Preference is assigned unless the line has a call on hold Ringing Line Preference
604. ype Adapter The 40062 Adapter provides power to the console at the wall jack The Console connects to a port on the ZTN79 ATL Station CP Detailed connection information is provided in Descriptions of the Station Interconnect Panel SIP Trunk Access Equipment TAE and associated cables and adapters as shown on the figures are provided under Connectivity in 2 37 FEATURES AND SERVICES SYSTEM 25 CABINET 71119 PART OF HYBRID OCTOPUS CABLE uec PART OF SIP ATTENDANT gt SELECTOR CONSOLE Tl LEGEND 81 TYPICAL 103A CONNECTING BLOCK 82 40082 ADAPTER FURNISHED WITH CONSOLE C MODULAR CORD D8W 87 FURNISHED WITH CONSOLE C2 OCTOPUS CABLE WP90780 2720 05P C CORD D6AP 87 FURNISHED WITH CONSOLE KS 22911 POWER SUPPLY FURNISHED WITH CONSOLE 23A1 SELECTOR CONSOLE PEC 62509 Wl 4 PAIR INSIDE WIRING CABLE FURNISHED BY INSTALLER RANGE WITHIN 2000 FEET OF SYSTEM CABI NET LOCAL POWER REQUIRED gt 1000 FEET Figure 2 7 Attendant Direct Extension Selector Console Connections 2 38 Attendant Forced Release SLAC Only Attendant Forced Release SLAC Only Description This feature drops all active parties from a call in which the attendant and one or more other parties are connected together The attendant uses the feature by pressing the FORCED RELEASE button while connected to other callers in a conference type call The other parties will be dis
605. ystem 25 cabinet is 2000 feet There is no limit on how much of the 2000 feet can be out of building However out of building stations cannot be powered over the line they must be powered locally using PEC 62510 6 9 PARTS INFORMATION Parts Listed by PEC 7 1 Parts Listed by COMCODE 7 9 PARTS INFORMATION PARTS INFORMATION This section contains information that may assist you in cross referencing Apparatus Codes Comcodes and Price Element Codes PECs The first table is grouped by descriptive Price Element Codes PEC The second table is arranged by component codes COMCODE Parts Listed by PEC DESCRIPTION 6250 021 System 25 Control Unit R2V1 includes Carrier J58901A1 L4 e w Part of 6250 021 Power Supply WP90510 403954761 6250 021 Fans 2 WP90677 L1 845416379 6250 021 Air Filter 21985 1 403957129 6250 021 Address Plug 845416635 6250 021 ZHAF1 103810586 6250 021 CPU MEM CP ZTN129 105211031 6250 021 Service Circuit CP ZTN85 103965323 6250 021 SLAC Graphics Overlays 2 845875155 System 25 Expansion Unit includes Carrier J58901A1 L4 e w Power Supply WP90510 403954761 Fans 2 WP90677 L1 845416379 Air Filter 21985 1 403957129 Address Plug 845416635 TDM Bus Cable J58901A4 L3 403961519 GS Trunk CP 103965232 LS Trunk CP 103965240 TR Line CP 103965257 ATL Line CP 103965265 7 1 PARTS INFORMATION DESCRIPTION Asynchronous Data Unit Mod Cord 14 ft ATL ADU Power S

System 25 R2V1 Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents